Home

IPECS Release 5 Admin & Maintenance

1. Assistance calls 2 23 Issue 5 0 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 2 100 110 AUTO HOLD Enables Auto Hold for the station With Auto 0 OFF Atd ON 1 0N 0 0FF OFF Hold enabled the system will place an active 1 ON Others external call on hold if the user presses a CO IP OFF or DSS button 3 100 110 TIME RESTRICT The system can automatically disconnect 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 0FF OFF outgoing calls at expiration of the Call Restrict 1 ON timer PGM CODE 180 btn 14 4 100 110 IND CO ACCESS Permits stations to use dial codes to access 0 Disable ENABLE 1 EN 0 DIS ENABLE individual CO Lines 1 Enable 5 100 110 CO IP QUEUING Permits the station to queue for the next 0 Disable ENABLE 1 EN 0 DIS ENABLE available Line when an All Lines Busy signal is 1 Enable received 6 100 110 co PGM A station can be permitted to change the CO 0 Disable DISABLE 1 EN 0 DIS DISABLE Line numbers ports associated with a CO Line 1 Enable button 7 100 110 RING LINE PRE Enables Ringing Line Preference for the station 0 Disable ENABLE 1 EN 0 DIS ENABLE Calls that ring the telephone are answered by 1 Enable going off hook 8 100 110 SPD ACCESS Allows the station access to System Speed Dial 0 Disable ENABLE 1 EN 0 DIS
2. CSTMTAITATOTS ono TS a a aa lt Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Lid All Rights Reserved http 150 150 191 211 ANCHORZ023 m i Internet Figure 3 8 4 1 Station Speed Dial Each station can store commonly dialed numbers for easy access using Station Speed Dial bins With the iPECS Micro IPECS 50 and MFIM100 each station has access to 20 Speed Dial numbers and with the MFIM300 or MFIM600 or MFIM1200 each station has access to 100 Speed Dial numbers Each Speed Dial number can be up to 48 characters in length and may include special instruction codes for analog and ISDN lines The CO Line used with the Speed Dial number and a name can be entered 3 252 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Selecting Pre selected Message will display the input entry page Figure 3 8 5 1 A iPECS Station Program Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 stn_index htm Message Range MESSAGE DEACTIVATED STATION CUSTOM MESSAGE Max 24 Characters LUNCH RETURN AT TIME HH MM Must be 4 Digits ON VACATION RETURN AT DATE MM DD Must be 4 Digits
3. Issue 5 0 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 17 01 02 DL TN 00 10 One of eleven dial tones can be used by 0 dial tone 0 DIAL TONE 00 the CO line 01 Music 1 02 Music 2 03 VSF MOH 04 SLTMOH1 05 SLTMOhH2 06 SLTMOH3 07 SLTMOH4 08 SLTMOHS5 09 VSFMOh2 10 VSFMOH3 18 01 02 RB TN 00 10 One of eleven ring back tones can be 0 ring back 0 RING BACK TONE 00 used by the CO line tone 01 Music 1 02 Music 2 03 VSF MOH 04 SLTMOH1 05 SLTMOh2 06 SLTMOH3 07 SLTMOH4 08 SLTMOHS5 09 VSFMOh2 10 VSFMOH3 19 01 02 REJECT ANONYMOUS When REJECT ANONYMOUS ON 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 OFF OFF incoming call without Caller ID will be 1 ON rejected Table 2 3 5 2 3 CO IP ATTRIBUTES III PGM 143 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 01 02 COLP TABLE INDEX When an incoming call on an ISDN Line is iPECS None INDEX NOT ASSIGNED answered the system will send caller id using Micro the number from the CLIP COLP Table PGM iPECS 50 amp Code 201 entry defined by this parameter MEIM100 For entry 10 in MFIM amp MFIM100 amp iPECS 50 60 416 amp iPECS Micro or entry 50 for other in MFIMs the CLI STA NO entered in pem cope Other MFIM 114 btn 6 will be used in place of the station 00 50 number For other entries the station number is added as a suffix to the entry in PGM CODE 201 2 01
4. 10 FS VM 624 PILOT HUNT A FS VM group can be set so that only calls 0 OFF ON 1 ON 0 OFF ON to the pilot number station group number 1 ON will hunt 11 FS VM 524 ALTER DEST When a call comes into the group and there Station or STA HUNT are no group members available the call Group l will be routed to the assigned ALTERnate Number DESTination 12 lrS vM 624 HUNT TyPpE _ _ When a call is offered to the group the 0 TERM TERM 1 CIRC 0 TERM TERM Hunt process can be defined for Circular or 1 CIR Terminal hunt 13 FS VM 624 WRAP UP TMR After terminating any call the VM port will 002 999 002 002 999 002 be maintained in a busy state for the seconds duration of the WRAP UP TiMeR 14 FORCED FWD DEST USAGE Enables the system to redirect group calls 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 OFF OFF to the Forced destination defined under btn 1 ON 15 below 15 FS VM 621 FORCED DEST When a call is delivered to the group the 1 4 S H V SPD DIAL 1 4 system can redirect the call to the Forced destination if enabled under btn 14 above 16 GROUP NAME An hunt group name can be designated 12 character Table 2 3 7 2 8 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTES PGM 191 UCS SERVER GROUP Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 UCS SVR 620 ASSIGNED UCS Server number this value must be set to 00 16 1 UCS SERVER 01 16 1 2 106 im
5. Issue 5 0 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 24 15 cIQ 2 ANNC REPEAT TMR Interval for repeating the CIQ 2 000 180 025 000 180 025 Announcement 24 16 CIQ 3 THRESHOLD If the queued call count exceeds the 00 99 30 00 99 30 threshold the system plays the CIQ 3 Announcement btn 17 below to the CIQ 3 Page Zone btn 18 below after the CIQ 3 Announcement Delay Timer btn 19 below Announcements are repeated at intervals of the CIQ 3 Announcement Repeat Timer btn 20 below 24 17 CIQ 3 ANNC LOC VSF announcement number for the CIQ 00 70 VSF ANNC 00 70 3 Announcement 24 18 CIQ 3 PAGE ZONE Page Zone to receive CIQ 3 00 15 00 00 40 00 Announcement or 00 40 24 19 CIQ 3 ANNC DELAY TMR Delay timer for CIQ 3 Announcement 000 180 015 000 180 015 24 20 CIQ 3 ANNC REPEAT TMR Interval for repeating the CIQ 3 000 180 005 000 180 005 Announcement 24 21 CIQ MENT ON OFF If enabled queued callers receive the CIQ 1 ON OFF 1 0N 0 0FF OFF message You are in queue after the 4 0 OFF and 2 announcement 24 22 ACD NO ANS TMR Calls to an agent in the group are directed 000 180 000 000 180 000 to the station if unanswered in the NO ANSWER TIMER the call is routed to another agent 24 23 ACD 622 MBR FORWARD A member activating Call Forward may be 0 OFF ON 1 ON 0 OFF ON placed in an unavailable state for hunt 1
6. 7 001 015 00405A142C67 LCD shows WTIM Gateway Module WTI4 10 10 10 14 Line 1 Sequence Number 2 digits IP address set MAC Address 12 digits sequentially from the Line 2 WTI4 or WTI8 range in PGM 102 IP Address 7 12 digits 7 1 set Ip aDpREss Use Flex button 1 to set the device s IP address in 10 10 10 10 254 WTI4 10 10 10 14 IP v4 format 7 2 SET MAC ADDRESS Use Flex button 2 to enter the device s MAC None 001 015 00405A142C67 address into system memory 7 3 ARP Use Flex button 3 to enable disable ARP ARP OFF 0 ON 1 0FF OFF OFF enables Direct Send which employs layer 2 switching to local devices 7 4 REGISTRATION Use Flex button 4 to disable enable Local Device MCAST 0 UCAST 1 MCAST MCAST Mode which defines the device as on a common LAN with the MFIM MCAST enables Local Device Mode 7 5 CPU TYPE Flex button 5 displays the type of CPU employed MS828 in the device 7 6 DEVICE BOARD ID Flex button 6 displays the type designation GW WTIM4 WTIM4 or WTIM8 2 3 2 3 CO Gateway Sequence Number PGM Code 104 Each CO IP gateway Module is assigned a Sequence Number for each Ethernet MAC address The LGCM4 DID and BRIM each have two MAC addresses and thus are assigned two sequence numbers Other gateway Modules and the system VOIP channels all have single MAC addresses and thus a single
7. E g 3 2 E E Dieahia as Motl laon Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Lid All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 8 15 1 Mobile Extension Table A mobile phone can be used in conjunction with an iPECS Phone The Mobile phone can access system resources available to the user s wired phone and will receive ring for incoming iPECS calls The user may be allowed to enable the Mobile extension and define the mobile number The system can be defined to employ a specific CO IP Line Group to place calls to the Mobile phone In addition the mobile phone can be assigned to receive hunt group calls to the primary extension Also parameters for notification of new VSF VMIM voice mails can be defined Table 3 5 8 15 1 MOBILE EXTENSION TABLE ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT PGM Authority The user may be allowed to activate the mobile extension feature Disable Enable Disable 3 182 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Access The user can be allowed to register a Mobile phone number Disable Disable Authority Enable Hunt Enable When the paired station is a member of a hunt group ACD Disable Disable Circular Ring or Terminal group calls can be sent to the active Enable mobile extension VSF VMIM Enables outbound notification by the system when the VMIM VSF No
8. 2 83 im ecs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 5 CALL INFO 1 5 Defines the serial port or TCP channel used to 1 5 SERIAL1 SERIAL1 1 receive Call Information output 6 ON LINE SMDR 1 5 Defines the serial port or TCP channel used 1 5 SERIAL1 SERIAL1 1 for the On line SMDR 7 TRACE 1 5 Defines the serial port or TCP channel used 1 5 SERIAL1 SERIAL1 1 for the Trace output 8 DEBUG 1 5 Defines the serial port or TCP channel used 1 5 SERIAL1 SERIAL1 1 for the Debug output 9 ACD PACK 1 5 Defines the serial port or TCP channel used 1 5 SERIAL1 SERIAL 1 1 for the Unified Messages Table 2 3 6 15 2 OUTPUT FUNCTION TCP PORT PGM 175 Button DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 OFF LINE SMDR 1 9999 Defines the TCP port used for Off line SMDR 1 9999 NULL TCP PORT NULL Statistics output 2 ADMIN DATA 1 9999 Defines the TCP port used for the ADMIN 1 9999 NULL TCP PORT NULL Report output 3 TRAFFIC 1 9999 Defines the TCP port used for the TRAFFIC 1 9999 NULL TCP PORT NULL report output 4 SMDI 1 9999 Defines the TCP port used for the SMDI 1 9999 NULL TCP PORT NULL output 5 CALL INFO 1 9999 Defines the TCP port used to rec
9. Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Lid All Rights Reserved Figure 3 5 12 7 1 Zone Holiday Assignment Holidays and vacation day intervals for each zone can be established to define the Service mode Day Night and Timed Up to 40 holidays and 5 vacation intervals can be defined Table 3 5 12 7 1 ZONE HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT ATTRIBUTE REMARK RANGE DEFAULT Ring Mode Enter the desired Service mode for the Holiday or DAY TIMED Vacation NIGHT TIMED N A Vacation Assign a date range for the vacation entering the start 12 digits None and end dates as yymmdd yymmdd Holiday Assign a date for the holiday for the Zone as mmdd 4 digits None 3 216 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Selecting the Device Login Data program group returns the sub menu displayed in Figure 3 5 13 1 Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DER File Edit Yiew Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm Web Administration LIK300 Version iPECS VD96M E 0Ap APR 08 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 13 1 Device Login Data Main Page 3 217 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Selecting the Remote Phone CO G W Registration returns the Remote Registration table data input page Figure 3 5 13 1 1 F iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer BEE ay File
10. 2 CO CALL TO SEC If desired all incoming CO calls to the Exec 0 OFF OFF 1 O0N 0 OFF OFF station are routed to the Secretary s station 1 ON M regardless of the Executive s status 3 CALL EXEC IF SEC DND If the Secretary is in DND Executive calls can 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 OFF OFF be routed back to the Executive 1 ON 4 EXEC GRADE Higher grade Executives can override the 01 12 42 01 12 12 Executive Secretary Forward feature to calla lower grade Executive Korea only Highest grade 01 Lowest grade 12 5 ICM CALL TO SEC If this option is ON all internal calls to the 0 OFF 1 O0N 0 OFF OFF Exec Station except for calls from higher or 1 ON same grade executive are routed to the Secretary s station regardless of the Executive s status Default value Korea India Israel Turkey Thailnad ON Otherwise OFF 2 3 9 7 Flexible DID Conversion Table PGM Code 231 When the received DID digits are converted as in PGM CODE 230 the resulting three digit or four digit for MFIM1200 number may be used as an index to the Flexible DID Conversion Table The Flexible DID Table index is used when the DID Line is assigned a Conversion type 2 refer to PGM CODE 145 Flex button 2 Based on the index from PGM CODE 230 and the system mode Day Night or Timed a destination for the DID call is determined The destination can be a VSF AA Announcement with C
11. 3 01 02 VMID NUMBER Each CO IP line can be assigned a VMID 0000 9999 a Voice Mail Id that is sent to the VM group to identify the desired Mailbox for the CO IP line 2 54 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 To comply with the North American ISDN standards certain attributes must be defined for the system These include Directory telephone Number and Service Profile SPID for the device Note that this programming is required only for Country Code 1 USA installations COL NA ISDN ATT ENTER CO RANGE 01 02 COL NA ISDN ATT PRESS FLEX KEY 1 6 See Table 2 3 5 7 1 DISPLAY Table 2 3 5 7 1 NA ISDN ATTRIBUTES PGM 150 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 001 002 TYPE OF PX 1 4 NI1 1 The type of PSTN determines several specifics of the protocol and is required for proper operation 1 NI1 2 NI2 3 5 ESS 4 NORTEL 1 001 002 SPID NUMBER The Service Profile Identifier SPID is a number assigned to a fully initializing ISDN terminal and enables the Stored Program Control switching System SPCS to identify the ISDN terminal at layer 3 of the D channel signaling protocol The SPID is a free formatted numeric string composed of 9 to 20 numeric 0 9 International Alphabet IA5 characters The SPID uniquely identifies a particular set of subscription parameters assigned to a T
12. Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 LDT 000 LCR TYPE This entry defines the LCR modes that will 1 Internal 3 Both LCR MODE COL 2 apply to this Leading Digit Table bin To apply 2 CO Line the DMT index the LCR Type must be part of 3 Both the LCR Mode defined in PGM CODE 220 2 LDT 000 LCR CODE Up to 12 digits that if matched by the user 12 digits 1234567 dialed digits will access the DMT entry for the 0 9and index assigned for the Day and Time zone asa below wildcard 3 LDT 000 DAY ZONE 1 DMT This entry defines the Digit Modification Table 00 99 INDEX 6DGT index 00 99 for each Time Zone for Day 3 DMT Zone 1 The appropriate index will be indices selected for the current Day and Time Zone An entry of 6 digits 2 per Time Zone must be entered 4 LDT 000 DAY ZONE 2 DMT This entry defines the Digit Modification Table 00 99 INDEX 6DGT index 00 99 for each Time Zone for Day 3 DMT Zone 2 The appropriate index will be indices selected for the current Day and Time Zone An entry of 6 digits 2 per Time Zone must be entered 5 LDT 000 DAY ZONE 3 DMT This entry defines the Digit Modification Table 00 99 INDEX 6DGT index 00 99 for each Time Zone for Day 3 DMT Zone 3 The appropriate index will be indices selected for the current Day and Time Zone An entry of 6 digits 2 per Time Zone must be entered 6 LDT 000 CHK PASSWORD If enabled ON when the di
13. in Table 2 3 16 1 VIRTUAL TRACE DIP SW PRESS FLEX KEY 1 9 Refer to Table 2 3 16 1 DISPLAY Table 2 3 16 1 VIRTUAL TRACE DIP SWITCH PGM 452 Button DISPLAY REMARK RANGE DEFAULT 1 VIRTUAL TRACE DIP SW Call Trace is enabled for output 0 OFF OFF CALL TRACE OFF 1 ON 2 VIRTUAL TRACE DIP SW VolP Trace is enabled for output 0 OFF OFF VOIP TRACE OFF 1 ON 3 VIRTUAL TRACE DIP SW HTTP Trace is enabled for output 0 OFF OFF HTTP TRACE OFF 1 ON 4 VIRTUAL TRACE DIP SW Multicast Data normally registration data 0 OFF OFF MULTICAST TRACE OFF between MFIM and local mode device Trace 1 ON is enabled for output 5 VIRTUAL TRACE DIP SW CTI Device Trace is enabled for output 0 OFF OFF CTI TRACE OFF 1 ON 6 VIRTUAL TRACE DIP SW Detailed Data Trace is enabled 0 OFF OFF RAW DATA TRACE OFF 1 ON 7 VIRTUAL TRACE DIP SW MFIM to MFIM Data Trace is enabled for 0 OFF OFF MPMP TRACE OFF output 1 ON 8 VIRTUAL TRACE DIP SW CPU Redundancy Data Trace is enabled for 0 OFF OFF CPU RE TRACE OFF output 1 ON 9 VIRTUAL TRACE DIP SW MISC VSF Trace is enabled for output 0 OFF OFF MSC VSF TRACE OFF 1 ON 2 148 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 The Virtual Dip Switch is employed to change from in band to SMDI for External Voice Mail communications
14. 3 57 im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Use Outbound Proxy The SIP module will communicate only to SIP ON OFF ON Proxy Server In this case destination address of all communication will be the IP of SIP Proxy Server Use Outbound Proxy flag should be OFF when you use that SIP module for channels of 3rd party SIP Extensions Connection Mode This field establishes the SIP connection mode as ON OFF OFF TCP ON or UDP OFF for SIP signaling messages Caller Name Service Provide and Display of Name Field Data NOT USE USE USE 181 Being Forwarded SIP 181 message is sent when call is being redirected NOT USE USE NOT USE or forwarded if enabled 100rel support Provisional messages Ack for provisional messages ON OFF OFF Use single codec only During capabilities negotiation the system can send a ON OFF OFF single codec id or all codes supported Use rport method When employed behind a NAPT server device will ON OFF OFF add Rport header in SIP message to indicate port in use Domain Domain name associated with iPECS VOIM channels Max 32 Is used in SIP TO header message to SIP Server Characters Required when the Proxy uses a port other than 5060 Invite Acceptance Allow invite message from domain or anywhere Domain Only From All From All Contact Address Domain Contact Address Domain part option Address of S
15. System Password P162 Alam Attributes P163 Attendant Assignment P164 Multicast RTP RTCP P165 DISA COS P166 DID DISA Destination P167 External Control Contacts P163 LCD Display Mode P169 LED Flashing Rate P170 Music Sources P171 PBX Access Codes P172 RLP Priority P173 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 5 14 1 RS232 Port Settings The iPECS 50 and MFIM100 have a single RS 232 port while other MFIMs have two 2 RS 232 ports refer to the iPECS Description and Installation Manual Section 4 4 2 Certain characteristics of each port are programmable including baud rate RS 232 control and page settings Refer to Table 3 5 5 14 1 for a description of the settings and the data entries available Table 3 5 5 14 1 RS232 PORT SETTINGS ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Baud Rate This entry establishes the BAUD rate for the RS 232 NOT USED 115200 serial port 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 3 107 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance 3 108 Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT CTS RTS The system s RS232 port can support Clear to Send ON OFF CTS and Ready to Send RTS control leads OFF Page Break The system can send a page break command over ON OFF the serial port at the end of each page See Lines OFF per Page below for page length set up Line Per Page This entry sets
16. Internet Figure 3 5 5 266 1 NTP Attributes The system can employ the Network Time Protocol NTP to synchronize the system time with an NTP time server The system requests the time from the NTP server at 10 minute intervals and then determines the time differential If the system time is more 2 seconds off the NTP time the system time is adjusted to synchronize with the NTP server time 3 127 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Selecting SNMP Attribute will display the SNMP Attributes entry page Figure 3 5 5 277 1 Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help S amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm T RLP Priority P173 RS 232 Port Settings P174 Serial Port Selections P175 Break Make Ratio P176 SNMP Agent SMDR Attributes P177 SNMP Service OFF v System Date amp Time P178 SNMP Port System Multi Language P179 SNMP Security System Timers P180 132 186 Read Only Community public Web Access Authorization NTP Attributes P195 Read Write Community private Cabinet Attribute P197 E Accept SNMP Packet from Any NMS Server Hot Desk Attributes P250 Accept SNMP Packet from These NMS Servers Read Only Read Only v Read Only Read Only System Speed Dial orn Wessage SNMP Trap Trap Commwity public Trap Destinations Notificat
17. Issue 5 0 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 4 001 002 T203 05 15 If the terminal initiates the link monitoring 5 15 10 05 15 10 sec function it must provide one T203 timer for seconds each logical link supported T203 defines the maximum time between message exchanges 5 001 002 T204 05 15 The T204 timer defines the minimum time 5 15 10 05 15 10 sec between transmissions of XID messages seconds 6 001 002 T302 10 30 In the Overlap dial mode when the system 10 30 15 10 30 15 sec receives incomplete dialing information from seconds the ISDN the system will wait the T302 timer duration for the additional digits At time out of this timer the call will be disconnected 7 001 002 T303 01 10 T303 establishes the time Interval for a 1 10 4 01 10 04 sec response after sending a call setup seconds message 8 001 002 T305 10 60 T305 establishes the Interval for a 10 60 30 10 60 30 sec Released signal after receiving a seconds Disconnect message 9 001 002 T308 01 10 T308 establishes the Interval for a 1 10 4 01 10 04 sec Released Ack signal after sending a release seconds message 16 001 002 K_VALUE 1 5 1 each logical link supported 10 001 002 T309 001 100 Optional state timer 1 100 90 001 100 90 sec seconds 11 001 002 T310
18. CIRCULAR GROUP 620 a station group or for Net VM the Network number 2 95 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Each type of group has a different set of available attributes relating to announcements timers overflow etc Table 2 3 7 2 1 through Table 2 3 7 2 8 provide descriptions for the attributes LCD displays and data entries required The attributes for the Circular and Terminal Hunt groups are given in Table 2 3 7 2 1 and the UCD attributes include the ACD functions Table 2 3 7 2 2 In addition there are no attributes for a group assigned as a Net VM group in PGM CODE 190 STATION GRP ATT ENTER GRP NO 620 667 type GRP 621 PRESS FLEX_KEY 01 18 Refer to Table 2 3 7 2 1 to 7 DISPLAY Table 2 3 7 2 1 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTES PGM 191 CIRCULAR amp TERMINAL GROUPS Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 CIRC 621 ANNC 1 TMR 1s If all stations in the group are busy when a 000 999 015 000 999 015 call is offered the call may continue to wait seconds queue for an available station If the queue period exceeds 1st ANNounCement TiMeR the call may be sent to a VSF announcement If the timer is set to 000 the call will receive the first announcement in full prior to the hunt process guaranteed announcement 2 CIRC 621 ANNC 2 TMR 1s After the 1st announcement the 2nd 000 999 000 000 999 000 ANNC TMR is activ
19. 2 46 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Table 2 3 5 2 2 CO IP ATTRIBUTES Il PGM 142 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 01 02 CO NAME DISPLAY The IP Phone display can indicate the CO 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 OFF OFF Line IP channel number or a twelve 12 1 ON character name if assigned 2 01 02 CO NAME ASSIGN Each CO Line and the IP group can be 12 characters assigned a twelve 12 character name for display purposes see Table 2 1 2 1 for character entry sequence 3 01 02 METERING UNIT Selects the call metering signal from the 00 11 00 00 NONE 00 11 PSTN to indicate call cost refer to Table 2 3 5 2 5 4 01 02 LINE DROP CPT Each CO Line can be programmed to 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 OFF OFF disconnect if a second dial tone is 1 ON detected not supported 5 01 02 DISA ACCT CODE With DISA ACCT CODE ON users will 0 OFF ON 1 0N 0 0FF OFF be required to enter an Authorization 1 ON code Enter codes in Authorization Codes Table PGM Code 227 6 01 02 MOH 0 3 A held call can be connected to one 1 of 0 none 1 MUSIC 1 1 three 3 possible audio sources while on 1 Int Ext 1 Hold as Music on Hold MOH 2 Ext 2 3 VSF 7 01 02 CO DIAL TONE IS
20. a 7 x ya a a a a a a a ay a a a a a a x x 4 Internal Page Zone 17 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 2 7 1 Internal Page Zone Access Each iPECS Phone is assigned to receive announcements from each Internal Page Zone A station can be assigned to any all or no zones Note a remote station or a station not assigned to any Internal Zone will not receive any page announcements including Internal All Call For the iPECS Micro iPECS 50 and MFIM100 ten Internal Page Zones are available and for other MFIMs there are 35 zones As a default all stations except remote stations are assigned to zone 1 3 38 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 119 Selecting PTT Group Access will display the PTT Group Access data input page Figure 3 5 2 8 1 Enter a valid station range and click Load to enter the PTT Group Access data Check the appropriate boxes to allow or delete access to each PTT Group Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DAR File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm iPECS VD96N E 0Ap APRIOS Boot Version 1 0Ah JAN OT Enter Station Range JL Load Station Range From 100 to 100 Internal page PTT Group 1 PTT Group 2 PTT Group 3 PTT Group 4 PTT Group 5 PTT Group 6 PTT Group 7 PTT Group 3 PTT Group 9
21. Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Codec Type The default codec can be defined as G 711 G 729 or 2 G 729 G711 G 723 1 for decreased bandwidth needs The selected 1 G723 1 codec will be used on all internal communications as 0 G711 well as for remote iPECS devices G711 Packetization The G 711 voice frame packetization time determines 10 20 30 020 the interval at which voice samples are packetized and 1 msec sent when the G 711 codec is used G723 Packetization The G 723 1 voice frame packetization time determines 30 60 030 the interval at which voice samples are packetized and 1 msec sent when the G 723 1 codec is used Network Time Date The system can use ISDN Network time or NTP to 0 disable disable synchronize time with the ISDN or data network To 1 ISDN disable time sync use disable ISDN sync is not 2 NTP available in USA version Incoming Toll Check The system can invoke COS dialing restrictions when a ON ON user dials while connected to incoming call OFF Web Server Port This field determines the TCP port employed to access 00001 80 the system WEB server 65535 Web Admin Password When desired a Java VM installed in the user s PC can ON OFF Encryption be used to implement RC 6 block encryption of the Web OFF Admin password Auth Retry Count When an Authorization code is required the user may 1 9 3 attempt to enter a Valid code up to the maximum value defined in this field Old Auth Code Usage System Aut
22. xI x xI x Universal Answer x COMP Group Authorization Data Fax Station Number x x CO Tenancy Group xI COMP Name Display x CO Name Assign x SMDR Metering Unit Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Done Internet i Figure 3 5 4 1 1 CO IP Line Attributes CO IP Attributes define various characteristics of CO lines and IP facilities under control of the system Most characteristics require an On Off setting refer to Table 3 5 4 1 1 Specific descriptions for Class of Service and CO line Call Metering tones are provided in Table 3 5 4 1 2 and Table 3 5 4 1 3 respectively Table 3 5 4 1 1CO IP LINE ATTRIBUTES ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT CO Type Each CO Line is assigned a type Normal DID or TIE 1 Normal Normal Line 2 DID 3 TIE 3 62 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT CO Line GROUP Each CO IP Line is assigned to a group grouping should iPECS Micro 01 be based on the Line type and COS amp iPECS 50 amp MFIM100 0 21 Other MFIMs 0 73 CO Line COS Each CO Line is assigned a Class of Service which will 1 5 1 interact with the Station COS refer to Table 3 5 4 1 2 CO COS 1 Station COS app
23. Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT VM Table 2 Get Mail Code to send when the voice mail is to playback a Prefix P recorded message Suffix Get Mail Any digits VM Table 3 Busy Table Code to send when the voice mail is to receive a call Prefix P 3P when the user is busy Suffix Busy Mail Any digits VM Table 4 No Answer Code to send when the voice mail is to receive a call Prefix P 4P when the user did not answer Suffix No Answer Mail Any digits VM Table 5 Error Code to send when the voice mail is to receive a call Prefix P 5P when a user dialing error exists Suffix Error Mail Any digits VM Table 6 DND Code to send when the voice mail is to receive a call Prefix P 6P when the user is in DND Suffix DND Mail Any digits VM Table 7 Prefix Suffix Any digits VM Table 8 Prefix Suffix Any digits VM Table 9 Disconnect Code for disconnect call Prefix raas Table Disconnect Mail Suffix Any digits 3 180 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 235 Selecting Registration Table will display the Registration data entry page Figure 3 5 8 14 1 iPECS Web Services Windows Internet Explorer 6 E E http 192 168 150 113 a_index htm E x L jle TA BAE SIV SARIA SAD saan ag we de iPECS Web Services gt GB RHAD GEO Td m Log Out System ID 100 System amp Device IP 102 103 CO GW Sequence Number 104 Flexible Station Number 105 Fl
24. Group Number is 620 Group Type UCS Group Pick up Attribute OFF Attribute UCS Server Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 6 3 8 iPECS UCS Server Group Attributes Table 3 5 6 3 8 UCS GROUP ATTRIBUTES Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT UC Server UCS Server number this value must be set to 1 00 16 0 3 150 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Selecting the Pick Up Group Overview item will return the Station Pick Up Group Overview page Figure 3 5 6 4 1 This page displays the Station Group member stations for all the Station Pick Up Groups Note that data cannot be entered on this page Group Number Members 0 100 101 102 105 107 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Pick Up Group 192 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Figure 3 5 6 4 1 Pick Up Group Overview 3 151 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 192 Selecting Pick Up Group will display the Pick Up Group Assignment entry page Figure 3 5 6 5 1 Enter the desired Pick Up Group number and click Load to display the group member Assignment Log Out Group Number 0 99 al lI Load Group Overview Group Number is 0 Delete Group Member Check All Member Find Station Number F
25. Issue 5 0 Btn DISPLAY FEATURE DEFAULT iPECS iPECS 50 MFIM MFIM MFIM Micro MFIM100 300 600 1200 9 lacD REROUTE QCALL ANS Dial code to reroute call 578 578 578 578 578 ENTER NEW 578 after answer 10 ACD REROUTE QCALL No an Dial code to reroute call 579 579 579 579 579 ENTER NEW 579 prior to answer 11 camp on ANSWER Dial code to answer a 600 600 600 600 600 ENTER NEW 600 Camped On call 12 caLL PARK LOCATIONS Dial code to 601 610 601 610 601 619 601 699 601 69 STARTS amp END 601 610 place retrieve acallina 9 Park location 13 STA GRP PILOT NUMBER Station group pilot 620 631 620 659 620 667 620 667 401 50 START amp END 620 659 numbers 0 14 svta USER VSF FEATURES VSF feature access dial 66 66 66 66 66 ENTER NEW 66 code 15 CALL COVERAGE RING Code for Call Coverage 67 67 67 67 76 ENTER NEW 67 button 16 pIRECT CALL PICK UP Dial code to activate 7 7 7 7 77 ENTER NEW 7 Directed Call Pick up 17 laccESs CO GROUP FEAT Dial code to access a 801 820 801 820 801 872 801 872 n a START amp END 801 820 CO Line or IP channel from a CO IP group 18 ACCESS IND CO IP FEAT Dial code to access a 8801 8801 88001 88001 88001 START amp END 88 specific CO Line 8805 8842 88200 88400 88600 19 accESS HELD CO IP FEAT Dial code to access last 8 8 8 8 8 ENTER NEW 8 held CO Line or IP channel from Hold 20 accESS HELD IND CO IP Dial code to access a 8 8 8 8 8 ENTER NEW
26. 2 3 9 1 1 LCR Control Attributes PGM Code 220 The LCR Control Attributes among others items allows access to the LCR Access Mode assignments The LCR Access Modes define the user operations that will access the LCR feature The LCR Access Modes are Mode 00 LCR Disabled Mode 01 Loop user dials 9 or CO IP Group code 8xx or presses a Loop button Mode 02 Loop and Internal user dials digits without a CO IP Access Code prefix Mode 11 Loop and Direct CO Line user dialed CO Line Access Code 88xx for iPECS Micro amp iPECS 50 amp MFIM100 or 88xxx for other MFIM models or presses CO button Mode 12 Loop Direct CO Line and Internal Mode 13 Loop Direct CO Line Internal and Direct In addition days of the week are grouped into zones Day Zones and the time of day can be set into three groups Time Zones Table 2 3 9 1 1 1 provides general descriptive information and input ranges PROCEDURE LCR CONTROL ATTRIBUTES 1 Press the PGM button and dial 220 PRESS FLEX KEY 1 5 Refer to Table 2 3 9 1 1 1 Press Flex button 1 5 refer to Table 2 3 9 1 1 1 DISPLAY For LCR Access Mode and Time Zones use the dial pad to enter desired data and proceed to step 5 Refer to Table 2 3 9 1 1 1 for input ranges For Day Zones press the Flex button 1 7 to select the day of week Monday Flex button 1 to Sunday Flex button 7 For Day Zones after selecting the desired day of week Flex button use the dial
27. ATTRIBUTE REMARK RANGE DEFAULT Numbering Plan Station numbers associated with the remote system A Station number range can be indicated by using to indicate the range CO Group This field defines the CO Group of the local system that CO IP group will be used to place calls to the stations entered in the FO Numbering Plan should WAN failure occur Tel Number This field defines the telephone number the system 24 digits should dial to place a call to the stations entered in the FO Numbering Plan should Wan failure occur An may be entered as a wild card to indicate insertion of the dialed station number 3 203 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 334 Selecting Tnet Control Contact will display the TNet LM External Contact page Figure 3 5 11 5 1 iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit view Favorites Tools Help Addres http 7150 150 131 211 a_index htm Enter Range Load Range From 1 to 1 External Control Contact Value Not Use LBC Door Open OI External Control Deivce 1 External Control Deivce 2 Not Use Lec _ Door Open C C C C Ce External Control Deivce 1 External Control Deivce 2 Not Use wcl _ Door Open 979799 Tnet Music Alarm 33 External Control Deivce 1 cS Pe 3 oy External Control Deivce 2 gt
28. 18 FORCED FWD DEST USAGE 1 ON 0 OFF OFF Enables the system to redirect group calls to the Forced destination defined under btn 17 above 0 OFF 1 ON OFF 19 WAIT IF 1 ANNC BUSY 1 ON 0 OFF ON When a call assigned to receive an announcement arrives and all channels are busy the call may wait with Ringback until a channel is available ON or bypass the announcement 0 OFF 1 ON ON 20 GROUP NAME An hunt group name can be designated 12 character Table 2 3 7 2 2 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTES PGM 191 UCD ACD GROUPS Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 ACD 622 ANNC 1 TMR 1s 000 999 015 If all stations in the group are busy when a call is offered the call may continue to wait queue for an available station If the queue period exceeds this 1st ANNounCement TiMeR the call may be sent to a VSF announcement If the timer is set to 000 the call will receive the first announcement in full prior to the hunt process guaranteed announcement 000 999 seconds 015 2 ACD 622 ANNC 2 TMR 1s 000 999 000 After the 1st announcement a 2nd ANNC TMR is activated At expiration if the call remains queued to the group the call is sent to the assigned 2nd VSF announcement 000 999 seconds 000 3 ACD 622 ANNC1 LOC VSF ANNC 00
29. ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT PAUSE A timed pause may be included in a Speed Dial 1 9 2 number in which case the pause time is defined by seconds this entry Not currently implemented 3 77 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT RELEASE GUARD The Rls Grd Guard timer defines the length of 01 60 20 time the system will maintain a Line as busy after 100 ms the call has been terminated to assure the PSTN has sufficient time to clear down the circuit Not currently implemented DT DELAY The DT Dial tone Delay timer defines the duration 02 50 10 dial tone must be received for DT recognition 100 ms Not currently implemented INTER DIGIT The Inter Digit timer defines the duration between 15 30 15 digit transmissions 20 ms Not currently implemented WINK For TIE or DID Lines the Wink timer defines the 7 15 10 length of time the wink T1 TIE line circuit reversal 20 ms will last OP RATE For Pulse signaling defines the duration and 0 60 40 10pps 60 make break ratio of each pulse 1 66 33 10pps 40 10pps 2 60 40 20pps 3 66 33 20pps SEZ DTC This timer defines the length of a valid line seizure 0 127 3 signal 20 ms RELEASE For Ground Start Lines defines the minimum length 0 127 7 of time ground will not be applied to the TIP side 20 ms from the PSTN IASG TY Inc
30. VSF Announce 1 Location Each Station Hunt Group can be assigned an announcement which is played if the call remains queued beyond the VSF Announce 1 Timer duration The announcement location is a VSF announcement number An entry of 00 indicates no announcement 00 70 00 none VSF Announce 1 Auto Drop If this attribute is selected the call will drop after the 1st VSF announcement VSF Announce 2 Location The Station Hunt Group can be assigned a 2nd announcement which is played if the call remains queued beyond the VSF Announce 2 Timer duration The announcement location is a VSF announcement number An entry of 00 indicates no announcement 00 70 00 none VSF Announce 2 Auto Drop If this attribute is selected the call will drop after the 2nd VSF announcement VSF Announce 2 Repeat Timer The 2nd announcement can be repeated to calls that remain in queue at intervals of the VSF Announce 2 Repeat Timer Note repeating must be ON under VSF Announce 2 Repeat below 000 999 seconds 000 VSF Announce 2 Repeat After the 2nd announcement if the call remains queued to the group the 2nd VSF announcement can be repeated at the VSF Announce 2 Repeat Timer interval ON OFF OFF Overflow Destination A call to the group will continue to route through the group until answered or all group members have been tried The call will queue to the group or route to the assigned Over
31. 3 246 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 In Figure 3 2 3 1 Station Password page enter a station number and password Station Authorization code then click the Login button to access the Station Program Main Page refer to Figure 3 8 1 F iP ECS Station Program Microsoft Internet Explorer DER File Edit View Favorites Tools Help http 150 150 131 21 1 stn_index htm Station 100 Program LIK300 Version iPECS VD96M E 0Ap APR O8 Copyright C 2006 by LC Nortel Co Lid All Rights Reserved Done Internet Hi Figure 3 8 1 iPECS Station Program Main Page In the Station Program User Portal users can modify various station attributes set up call forwarding create Station ICR scenarios assign flexible buttons program Station Speed dial numbers send SMS and create conference groups The following sections provide details on each of the available Station Program User portal Web pages The Station Program User portal main page has three sections Station selected Upper frame Web site directory amp navigation section Left frame Info and Entry section Central frame 3 247 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Selecting Station Attributes will display the input entry page Figure 3 8 1 1 Selecting the blue colored text in the Table header will sort the table based on the selected column F iPECS Station Program Microsoft Internet Explorer File E
32. Each MFIM in a Central Control network environment must be enabled for TNET operation in order to function as part of the network PROCEDURE TNET BASIC ATTRIBUTES 1 Press the PGM button and dial 330 PRESS FLEX KEY 1 1 TNET ENABLE Press Flex button 1 1 ON 0 OFF OFF Use the dial pad to enable or disable TNET Central Control networking Press the SAVE button to store the new data 2 134 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Each LM Local MFIM which is part of a Central Control Network must be defined with the IP Address of the CM Central MFIM as well as the LM configuration data that will be sent to the CM at the time the LM registers with the CM The port counts define the ports which are allocated in the CM database for use by devices registered to the LM The number of ports defined in the database of each LM must be equal or less than the ports defined in the CM for the LM see PGM Code 332 in order to register properly TNET CM ATTRIBUTES PRESS FLEX KEY 1 6 Refer to Table 2 3 11 2 1 DISPLAY Table 2 3 11 2 1 TNET CM ATTRIBUTES PGM 331 Button DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 CM REGISTER REQ This field informs the LM to attempt 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 OFF ON registration with the CM This field must be 1 ON set to ON for proper registration 2 CM IP ADDRESS This field defines the IP address of the CM IPv4 XXX XXX XXX XXX that will be used by the LM addres
33. 3 226 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 491 Selecting the DECT Attributes returns the DECT ATTRIBUTES input page Figure 3 5 15 2 1 F iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm Feel nd Log Out Boot ersion 1_0Ah JAN OF aoa Attribute Value Auto Call Release OFF BASE Fault Alarm Disable v Chain Fault Alarm Disable v DECT Registration P0 Copyright C 2006 by LC Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 15 2 1 DECT ATTRIBUTES DECT Attributes define functions associated with the DECT equipment and operation as shown in Table 3 5 15 2 1 Table 3 5 15 2 1 DECT Attributes ATTRIBUTE REMARK RANGE DEFAULT Auto Call Release If enabled when the other party of an active internal call 0 OFF OFF disconnects the GDC 400H returns to idle 1 ON Base Fault Alarm If enabled DECT Base station GDC 400B alarms are 0 Disable Disable sent to the Attendant 1 Enable Chain Fault Alarm If enabled WTIM chain fault alarms are sent to the 0 Disable Disable Attendant 1 Enable 3 227 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 The iPECS systems employ a NAND based memory file system thus html MFIM upgrade and iPECS appliance image files can be uploaded All of the
34. 3 66 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 145 Selecting DID Service Attributes will display the DID Service Attributes data input page Figure 3 5 4 3 1 Enter a valid CO range and click Load to enter the DID Service Attributes data F iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DAR Lid File Edit View Favorites Tools Help 5 http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm i Log Out iPECS D96M E OAp APRIOS Enter CO R L J C ead Boot Version 1 04h JAN O7 CO Range From 1 to 1 Uncheck All Atiribuite Range DID Start Signal Immediate DID Conversion Type Number of Digits Expected from 3 COMP Attrbutes P140 142 DID Circuit COMP Ring Assignment P144 DID Digit Conversion DISA Service Attributes P 146 DID Digit Mask ae COMP Preset Fwd Attr P147 NA ISDN Line Attnbutes P150 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 4 3 1 DID Service Attributes DID lines can be assigned the type of Start signaling and treatment of received digits Digits can be used as is to route the call within the system digits can be converted and used to route the call section 3 5 8 10 or digits can be converted to a Table index to determine the call routing from a Table look up section 3 5 8 10 Refer to Table 3 5 4 3 1 for additional description of attributes and values Tabl
35. Cabinet Status Check Cabinet No 0 999 Status Check GW Slot Seq Remark 0 Cabinet Alarm Status Not Equip O Normal X Fail Cabinet Sts Cheke Sts No GW Check FANI Index OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved AAU pa w rmolelo ALA Ul pe wj n o Internet Figure 3 5 5 288 1 Cabinet Attributes This Web page displays system cabinet configurations and alarm status 3 130 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Selecting System Call Routing 251 will display the System Call Routing table page Figure 3 5 5 288 1 f f H Log out Enter Table No 00 15 Ca Table No 0 hix Attribute Valse Rango Dol Caller ID AIC m Max 23 Digits Start Date 2009037 _ Enc Date Rocasa Yevewino format Tiis b nalida MONI TUE WED THU FRIR SATI SUNT ALLI Holiday Start Time 0900 End Time 1600 eee Destination TERS esra i Destination te anvaiue Scenario Priority fo 0 8 highest g Senan acto Ton Bcenano EnablewDicanle p Scensrio VMID 1008 voris maio Scenano Cos o 0 11 COS Level Scenario OSAACTIVE OFF m DISA Enable Scenanoicm op G Tenancy Group No Scenario ZoneNo h Zone Number
36. Copyright C 2008 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved ALERE Figure 3 5 11 5 1 TNET LM EXT CONTACT Each LM incorporates relay contacts which can be employed as a Door Lock Release The contact activates a 3 party Door Lock Release mechanism activated by dialing the Door Unlock code at a local station Note assigning other functions to the contact may cause unexpected operation 3 204 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 335 336 Selecting Tnet Music Alarm will display the Tnet LM Alarm amp Music Attributes page F iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DAR a File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm BnterRange ____J _ toad Range From 1 to 1 TNET Music Assign Attribute Value Bem Type InternaVExternal Music 1 Moh Type InternaV External Music 1 Int Ext Music Int v TNET Alarm Attributes Attribute Value Alarm Enable OFF v Alarm Contact Type Close v Alarm Mode Alarm v Alarm Signal Mode Ret Copyright C 2006 by LC Nortel Co Lid All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 11 6 1 TNET LM MUSIC ALARM ATTRIBUTES To minimize WAN traffic the CM does not provide BGM MOH to an LM The LM employs local BGM and MOH facilities which reduces traffic load on the WAN and IP channel proces
37. DESCRIPTION If all stations in the group are busy when a call is offered the call may continue to wait queue for an available station If the queue period exceeds this 1st ANNounCement TiMeR the call may be sent to a VSF announcement If the timer is set to 000 the call will receive the first announcement in full prior to the hunt process guaranteed announcement RANGE 000 999 seconds DEFAULT 015 2 FS VM 624 ANNC 2 TMR 1s 000 999 000 After the 1st announcement the 2nd ANNC TMR is activated At expiration if the call remains queued to the group the call is sent to the assigned 2nd VSF announcement 000 999 seconds 000 3 FS VM 624 ANNC1 LOC VSF ANNC 00 70 The Station Group can be assigned an announcement which is played if the call remains queued beyond the ANNC 1 TMR duration The announcement location is the VSF ANNC1 number An entry of 00 indicates no announcement Including at the end of an entry instructs the system to disconnect after the announcement 00 70 00 none 2 105 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance in the NO ANSwer TiMeR the call can be Issue 5 0 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 4 FS VM 624 ANNC2 LOC The Station Hunt Group can be assigned a 00 70 00 none VSF ANNC 00 70
38. DISABLE 1 Enable 2 24 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance 15 100 110 VMID NUMBER 4000 100 110 AUTO ACD DND SPD 0 9 translate the Mailbox number from the user s station number to the assigned VMID The system sends the station number or VMID to the VM in band or SMDI in order to identify the If an Agent does not answer an ACD call in the ACD No Answer timer the Agent enters an Unavailable state with the Reason code entered here The reason code is sent in the ACD Event 0 None 1 9 Issue 5 0 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 9 100 110 DID CALL WAIT When a busy station receives a DID call the call 0 OFF ON 1 0N 0 0FF OFF may queue to the station instead of receiving 1 ON busy tone With DID Call Wait the caller will hear Ring back and the user sees the CO line LED flash 10 100 110 LEFT MSG EXEC When a call is forward to the Secretary of an 0 OFF ON 1 0N 0 0FF OFF Executive Secretary pair messages can be left 1 ON for the Executive ON or Secretary OFF 11 100 110 ESMIC HEADSET Select E amp Mic Headset mode for new IP Phone 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 12 100 110 ENBLOCK MODE When On the user dialed digits are stored at 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 0FF OFF the iPECS Phone until explicitly sent by the 1 ON user
39. File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm Serial Port Selections P175 Break Iviake Ratio P176 Attribute Save Enable OFF Print Enable ON Record Type All Call Long Distance Call Digit Counter Print Incoming Call OFF IP Attribute P196 Print Lost Call ON v net Attribute P1 Records In Detail ON Desk Attributes P250 Hidden Dialed Digit Dialed Digit Hide Option Right SMDR Currency Unit Max 3 characters SMDR Cost Per Metering Pulse Must be 6 digits SMDR Decimal Location 0 5 Start Timer 1sec 000 250 SMTP Mail Server IP Address SMDR User Mail Address ds MA3 40 characters SMDR System Domain Name MAX 18 characters SMDR Mail Send Weekly Set Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 5 17 1 SMDR Attributes Station Message Detail Recording SMDR which is output over an RS 232 port or TCP channel contains details on both incoming and outgoing calls Various SMDR attributes can be assigned including output records for all calls or LD only call cost per pulse when using call metering etc Refer to Table 3 5 5 17 1 for a description of each Attribute and the data entries required Table 3 5 5 17 1 SMDR ATTRIBUTES ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Save Enable T
40. PRESS FLEX KEY 1 2 Refer to Table 2 3 10 3 1 Press the Flex button 1 2 for the desired setting refer to Table 2 3 10 3 1 DISPLAY Use the dial pad to enter the required data refer to Table 2 3 10 3 1 Press the SAVE button to store the new data Table 2 3 10 5 1 NETWORK FEATURE CODE TABLE PGM 325 Button DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 01 NET FEATURE CODE Networking Feature Code programming for 16 digits a Midis Networking paging call 2 01 NET PAGE DEST Select network page type 1 3 and network 1 INT N A NONE 1 3 page zone PAGE INT PAGE ZONE 2 EXT MFIM100 1 10 PAGE MFIM300 MFIM600 MFIM1200 1 20 3 ALL EXT PAGE ZONE 1 2 CALL ALL CALL PAGE ZONE PAGE INT 1 EXT 2 ALL 3 2 3 11 TNET Centralized Networking PGM CODES 330 336 In a Centralized Control TNET Transparent Networking remote devices may be registered to a Central MFIM CM and to a Local MFIM LM In this way the CM maintains control of the remote device Should the WAN connection between an LM and CM fail 2 second polling error the LM will initiate operational control of the locally registered devices Calls between the systems CM amp LM can automatically shift to PSTN Modules registered with the LM for Fail over operation The configuration and characteristics of LMs and CM are configurable as is Fail over operation 2 3 11 1TNET Basic Attributes PGM Code 330
41. This timer establishes the duration of the 04 99 10 04 99 10 DTMF tone sent on an analog CO Line 10 msec 10 FLEX DID TMR 100ms The system will receive DID digits for this 01 99 30 01 99 30 timer After the timer expires the system will 100 msec use the last 2 to 4 digits received as the DID digits The Supervisor Station can set the In Room Indication for all members in the same Group up to 10 bins can be programmed and each bin has at most 20 members excluding the Supervisor IN ROOM INDICATION ENTER BIN NO 01 10 IN ROOM INDICATION F1 SUPERVISOR F2 MEM Refer to Table 2 3 9 6 1 DISPLAY 2 92 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Table 2 3 6 21 1 In Room Indication PGM 183 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 IN ROOM INDICATION Assigns Supervisor station SURERVISOR STA 100 2 STA 100 MEM This entry assigns stations as members OD geen ee A number of timers can be assigned to control and affect operation of E1 lines using R2 signaling Refer to Table 2 3 6 222 1 for the timer descriptions and inputs required DCOB SYS ATTRIBUTES PRESS FLEX KEY 1 6 Refer to Table 2 3 6 222 1 DISPLAY Table 2 3 6 222 1 DCOB SYSTEM TIMERS PGM 186 Button DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 R2 OUT MANAG TMR sec Reserved for future usage for R2 timers 01 50 14 01 50 14 se
42. is used to enter a dot Press the SAVE button to store the data entry 2 7 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Table 2 3 2 2 1 MODULE amp STATION ADDRESS PLAN PGM 103 Bin DISPLAY FEATURE DEFAULT 1 001 001 0090A00175A2 LCD shows CO amp VoIP Gateway VOIP 1 10 10 10 2 Line 1 Sequence Number 2 or 3 digits Module IP address MAC Address 12 digits set sequentially Line 2 Module Type 4 characters from the range in First Logical port number PGM 102 IP Address 7 12 digits 1 1 SET IP ADDRESS Use Flex button 1 to set the device s IP address in 10 10 10 10 254 VOIP 1 10 10 10 2 IP v4 format 1 2 SET MAC ADDRESS Use Flex button 2 to enter the device s MAC None 001 001 0090A00175A2 address in the system memory 1 3 DIRECT SEND MAC Use Flex button 3 to enable disable Direct Send ON 1 0N 0 0FF ON mode which employs layer 2 switching to local devices 1 4 LOCAL DEVICE Use Flex button 4 to enable disable Local Device ON 1 0N 0 OFF ON Mode which defines the device as on a common LAN with the MFIM 1 5 CPU TYPE Flex button 5 displays the type of CPU employed MS828 in the device 1 6 DEVICE BOARD ID Flex button 6 displays the GW type designation GW VOIP 2 001 004
43. wink T1 20 ms TIE line circuit reversal will last 6 001 002 OP RATE 0 3 For Pulse signaling defines the duration 0 60 40 1 Opps 60 60 40 10pps 0 and make break ratio of each pulse 1 66 33 10pps 40 10pps 2 60 40 20pps 3 66 33 20pps 7 001 002 SEZ DTC 20ms This timer defines the length of a valid 0 127 3 000 127 003 line seizure signal 20 ms 8 001 002 RELEASE For Ground Start Lines defines the 0 127 7 000 127 007 20ms minimum length of time ground will not 20 ms be applied to the TIP side from the PSTN 2 58 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 9 001 002 IASG TY Incoming Address Signaling Type O 1 DTMF 1 DTMF 0 PULSE DTMF defines the type of signaling DTMF or Pulse expected 10 001 002 RING DTC The Ring DTC detect timer defines the 2 9 2 2 9 2 100ms minimum acceptable length of the Ring 100 ms on time during a ring cycle 11 001 002 RING STOP The Ring Stop timer defines the 10 60 60 10 60 60 100ms maximum Ring off time during a ring 100 ms cycle 12 001 002 COLLECT DGT Collect DGT digits defines the number 1 6 3 1 6 3 of digits expected on a DID line 13 001 002 STORE TIME For DID lines this timer defines the 1 15 3 01 15 15 1sec maximum delay between incoming DID second digits Th
44. 00405A0175A3 LCD shows Station IP address KTU 100 10 10 10 11 Line 1 Sequence Number 3 digits set sequentially MAC Address 12 digits from the range in Line 2 Station Type 3 characters PGM 102 Station Number 2 4 digits IP Address 7 12 digits 2 1 SET IP ADDRESS Use Flex button 1 to set the device s IP address in 10 10 10 10 254 KTU 100 10 10 10 11 IP v4 format 2 2 SET MAC ADDRESS Use Flex 2 button to enter the device s MAC None 001 002 00405A0175A3 address into system memory 2 3 DIRECT SEND MAC Use Flex button 3 to enable disable Direct Send ON 1 0N 0 OFF ON mode which employs layer 2 switching to local devices 2 4 LOCAL DEVICE Use Flex button 4 to enable disable Local Device ON 1 0N 0 OFF ON Mode which defines the device as on a common LAN with the MFIM 2 5 CPU TYPE Flex button 5 displays the type of CPU employed T2 in the device 2 6 o Flex button 6 displays the terminal type LIP 24D designation 3 001 002 00405A017615 LCD shows IP address of Misc MISC 10 10 10 10 Line 1 Sequence Number 2 digits functions in the MAC Address 12 digits system s MFIM set Line 2 MISC automatically IP Address 7 12 digits im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance MAC Address 12 digits Line 2 VSF or VMIM IP Address 7 12 digits Issue 5 0 Btn DISPLAY FEATURE DEFAULT 3 1 SET IP ADDR
45. 8157 27 M CAST RTP SLT MOH 1 RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH 1 use 0000 9999 8158 8158 8159 8159 28 M cAST RTP SLT MOH 2 j RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH 2 use 0000 9999 8160 8160 8161 8161 29 M CAST RTP SLT MOH 3 RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH 3 use 0000 9999 8162 8162 8163 8163 E 30 M CAST RTP SLT MOH 4 RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH 4 use 0000 9999 8164 8164 8165 8165 31 M CAST RTP SLT MOH 5 RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH 5 use 0000 9999 8166 8166 8167 8167 32 M CAST RTP VSF MOH 2 RTP and RTCP ports for VSF VMIM MOH 0000 9999 8168 8168 8169 2 use 8169 33 M CAST RTP VSF MOH 3 RTP and RTCP ports for VSF VMIM MOH 0000 9999 8170 8170 8171 3 use 8171 Table 2 3 6 5 2 MULTI CAST RTP RTCP PORTS PGM 165 IPECS 50 amp MFIM100 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 M CAST RTP BGM INT RTP and RTOP ports for internal BGM 0000 9999 8100 8100 8101 8101 2 M CAST RTP BGM EXT1 RTP and RTOP ports for external BGM 1 0000 9999 8102 8102 8103 8103 3 M CAST CAST RTP BGM EXT2 RTP and RTCP ports for external BGM 2 0000 9999 8104 8104 8105 8105 4 M CAST RTPI PACE1 RTP and RTOP ports for Internal Page 1 0000 9999 8106 8106 8107 8107 5 M CAST RTP I PAGE 2 RTP and RTOP ports for Internal Page 2 0000 9999 8108 8108 8109 8109 6 M CAST CAST RTP I PAGE 3 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 3 0000 9999 8110 8110 8111 8111 7 MULTICAST RTP I PAGE 4 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page
46. 9999 Multicast2 e188 B189 0000 9999 RSGM device Table P430 RSGM Ext Contact P432 RSGM Alam Attn P433 435 Copyright C 2006 by LC Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 10 2 1 RSGM Music Multi cast Address The iPECS system does not provide BGM MOH to an RSGM The RSGM provides local BGM and MOH to reduce traffic on the WAN and IP channel processors The RSGM uses multicast for BGM and MOH transport There are two sources an internal tone source or an external source may be connected Separate UDP port numbers are defined for RTP and RTCP packets for each source Table 3 5 10 2 1 RSGM MULTICAST ADDRESS ATTRIBUTE REMARK RANGE DEFAULT Multicast RTP BGM1 Enter desired data 4 digits Port numbers cannot be duplicated 4 digits 8186 Multicast RTP BGM2 Enter desired data 4 digits Port numbers cannot be duplicated 4 digits 8188 Multicast RTCP BGM1 Enter desired data 4 digits Port numbers cannot be duplicated 4 digits 8187 Multicast RTCP BGM 2 Enter desired data 4 digits Port numbers cannot be duplicated 4 digits 8189 3 194 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 432 Selecting Remote Ext Contact will display the RSGM Ext Contact page Figure 3 5 10 3 1 Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DEAR Enter Range Load Range From 1 to 1 contact Attribute Not Use C
47. Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 ROUTE TABLE 001 Index to the ICLID Ring Assignment Table 001 250 None INDEX NOT_ASSIGNED PGM CODE 204 that determines the call routing 2 TABLE 001 ICLID NUMBER ICLID Incoming Caller Id to match for the 24 digits None index If the Caller Id matches the Table 0 9 amp entry the index is used to select the route and from PGM CODE 204 as a wild card 3 TABLE 001 ICLID NAME ICLID name that is sent by the system to the 12 None destination for the ICLID routed call Character 4 TABLE 001 ICLID TONE If the ICLID Number is matched with CID of 2 digits None caller the Ring tone is followd this ICLID 01 12 Tone 2 110 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 2 3 8 5 ICLID Ring Assignment PGM Code 204 If the Incoming Caller ID matches an entry in the ICLID Route Table the index from the Table is used to determine the call routing from the ICLID Ring Assignment Table Separate ring assignments are made for Day Night and Timed Ring mode for each index 001 to 250 in this table When assigned to ring to a VSF VMIM announcement the call can be automatically dropped after the announcement by entering after the announcement number When CO Lines are programmed to Ring an external AA VM VSF or Feature Server Group as an Automated Attendant the Ring signal can be on an immediate or delayed basis allowing other stations grou
48. COLP Table Index xI CLIP Table Index xI ENBLOC Sending ON PES EISEN Type of Number for Calling s P140 142 Party Info xI National x x ment P 144 DID Remove Number e xI TEI Type Automatic v x ISDN SS CD CR CFU No Service v xI One Digit Remove Disable v x Advice of Charge No Service x lt Incoming Prefix Code Insertion OFF x Outgoing Prefix Code Insertion ON xI ISDN Line Type ALaw w x Internal Access Code xI Calling Sub address Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Figure 3 5 4 7 1 ISDN CO Line Attributes ISDN standards require that the ISDN terminating device in this case the iPECS system include various adjustable timers and counters as described below 3 73 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Table 3 5 4 7 1 ISDN LINE ATTRIBUTES ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT COLP Table Index When an incoming call on an ISDN Line is answered N A N A the system will send caller id using the number from Using Station s the CLIP COLP Table section 3 5 7 2 entry defined COLP Attribute by this parameter For entries 00 to 09 IPECS Micro 00 09 amp iPECS 50 amp MFI
49. Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 11 3 1 TNET LM Attributes The CM Central MFIM must be programmed with the MAC and IP address of each LM Local MFIM in the Centralized Control network as well as the maximum configuration of each LM Up to 15 Local MFIMs LMs may be defined and configuration entered The port counts define the ports which are allocated in the CM database for use by devices registered to the LM The number of ports defined in the database of each LM see PGM CODE 331 must be equal to or less than the ports defined in the CM for the LM in order to register properly Table 3 5 11 3 1 TNET LM ATTRIBUTES ATTRIBUTE REMARK RANGE DEFAULT Mac Address This field defines the MAC address of the LM that will be MAC address part of the TNET environment and is used by the CM for authorization IP Address This field displays the IP address of the LM IPv4 address IPKTS Port In the TNET environment the IP KTS protocol signaling 0000 9999 5588 UDP port is defined At present this field is not used do not change this port number Total no of port This field defines the total number of ports the LM will 000 999 request from the CM for devices attached to the LM This value must be equal to or more than the port count defined in the LM 3 202 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 333 Selecting Tnet FoPSTN t
50. LOOP empty CO 4 5 CO 5 CO 5 CO 5 CO 5 empty empty CO 5 6 empty empty empty empty empty empty empty 7 empty empty empty empty empty empty empty 8 LOOP empty empty empty empty empty empty 9 empty empty LOOP empty empty 10 empty empty LOOP empty empty 11 LOOP LOOP empty LOOP 12 LOOP LOOP empty LOOP 13 empty empty empty 14 empty empty empty 15 empty empty empty 16 empty empty empty 17 empty empty 18 empty empty 19 empty empty 20 empty empty 21 empty empty 22 empty empty 23 empty empty 24 empty empty Note these button definitions cannot be changed Table 2 3 3 4 4 iPECS DSS CONSOLE DEFAULT CONFIGURATION PGM 115 iPECS Micro MAP DEFAULT CONSOLE BUTTON CONFIGURATION MAP 1 First 12 Buttons Button 1 ATD Override Button 3 Call Park 1 Button 5 Camp On Button 7 Call Park 2 Button 9 Release Button 11 Call Park 3 iPECS Micro Buttons 13 38 Station Ports 100 125 Buttons 39 48 unassigned 2 30 Button 2 All Call Page Button 4 Station Group 1 Button 6 Internal All Call Page Button 8 Station Group 2 Button 10 Ext All Call Page Button 12 Station Group 3 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Table 2 3 3 4 5 iPECS DSS CONSOLE DEFAULT CONFIGURATION PGM 115 MFIM100 iPECS 50 MAP DEFAULT CONSOLE BUTTON CONFIGURATION MAP 1 First 12 Buttons Button 1 ATD Override Button 3 Ca
51. SYS places the call on the preferred hold System 0 Excl or Exclusive 8 PRINT LCR CONV DIGIT SMDR will output the number dialed by either 1 LCR LCR 1 LCR 0 USER LCR the system s LCR or the user 0 User 2 60 im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 9 ATD CALL QUE AVAILABLE The system can be configured to queue 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 0FF ON incoming calls to a busy Attendant 1 ON 10 USE PGM_0 IN ALL ATTD This field allows Main attendants access to all 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 OFF OFF Attendant functions including System 1 ON Attendant features and programming 11 OFFNET PROMPT USAGE When a call is routed to a destination external 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 OFF OFF to the iPECS the Off Net routing prompt can 1 ON be played Not available in US version 12 CO TO CO UC TMR EXTEND When an Unsupervised Conference is 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 0FF OFF established with DISA Off Net Fwd etc the 1 ON Unsupervised Conference timer PGM CODE 182 btn 5 determines the allowed duration of the call If enabled here the user may dial to extend the allowed duration 13 DISCOVERY MANAGER PRINT When the optional ACD Message events are 1 ON OFF 1 0N 0 0FF OFF desired the system must be enabled to se
52. Table A 1 Database Index PROGRAM PGM CODE WEB SUB MENU GROUP SYSTEM ID amp NUMBERING PLAN Flexible Station Numbering Plan Flexible Numbering Plan STATION DATA Station Attributes Flexible button Assignment Flexible Buttons PTT Group Access Webonly Cd SIP User IDTable Webonly Station Name Assignment BOARD GATEWAY DATA CO LINE DATA CO Service Type 142 COP Attributes OE A 1 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 PROGRAM PGM CODE WEB SUB MENU GROUP CO IP Attributes III CO IP Attributes CO IP Ring Assignment CO IP Ring Assignment DID Service Attributes DID Service Attributes SYSTEM DATA 160 System Attributes System Attributes System Attributes II Music Sources System Timers Webonly SNMPAttribute i O Webony Cabinet Attribute Webony Web Access Authorization Webony Cd System Speed Dial Webony sd Preselected Message Webony SC Station Group Overview __ STATION GROUP ISDN LINE amp ICLID CLIP COLP Table COLP Table MSN Table MSN Table ICLID Route Table ICLID Route Table ICLID Ring Assignment Table ICLID Ring Assignment Table PPP Attributes PPP Attributes TABLES LCR Control Attributes LCR Assignment A 2 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 PROGRAM PGM CODE WEB SUB MENU GROUP NETWORKING LCR LDT Table LCR LDT Table LCR DMT Table LCR DMT Table 223 Initialize LCR DB Initialize LC
53. Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer BEE File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm ee To iPECS VD96M E 0Ap APRIOS Boot Version 1 04h JANIOF Attribute PBX Access Code 1 max 2 digits include and PBX Access Code 2 max 2 digits include and PBX Access Code 3 max 2 digits include and PBX Access Code 4 max 2 digits include and em Attrbutes P160 161 ystem Password P162 Alam Attnbutes P163 Attendant Assignment P164 Multicast RTP RTCP P165 DISA COS P166 DID DISA Destination P167 External Control Contacts P163 LCD Display Mode P169 ashing Rate P170 RLP Prionity P173 5 232 Port Settings P174 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 5 12 1 PBX Access Codes When the system is used behind a PBX CTX the system needs to recognize the PBX CTX Trunk access codes to implement proper dialing restriction tone detection sequences and Flash timing A maximum of four 4 Trunk Access Codes of one 1 or two 2 digits can be entered 3 105 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 173 Selecting Ring Line Preference Priority will display the Ringing Line Preference Priority data entry page Figure 3 5 5 13 1 iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer BEE File Edit Yiew Favorites Too
54. im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 115 Selecting Flex Buttons will display the Flex buttons data input page Figure 3 5 2 4 1 Enter a valid station range and click Load to enter Flex button data iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit Yiew Favorites Tools Help http 150 150 131 21 1 a_index htm Enter Station Range Station Range From 100 to 100 Uncheck All Bution Vv Flex Button 1 CO Line a Flex Button 2 CO Line x Flex Button 3 CO Line lt I Flex Button 4 CO Line x Flex Button 5 CO Line lt Flex Button 6 CO Line lt I Flex Button 7 CO Line lt Flex Button 8 CO Line lt I Flex Button 9 CO Line lt Flex Button 10 CO Line lt Flex Button 11 LOOP x Flex Button 12 LOOP xI Flex Button 13 Empty Flex Button 14 Empty Flex Button 15 Empty Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved lt I SSS SS SNES SHES lt Figure 3 5 2 4 1 Flex Buttons Assignment Each Flex button for each iPECS Phone DSS Console can be assigned a function TYPE as below After selecting the Type for a button enter the value if required The types available from the drop down menu are Empty Nu
55. 0 OFF OFF 16 Non index Auth Code Use 1 ON 0 OFF ON 17 COS 7 on Auth code entry failure 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 18 Unified Serial Message Output 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 19 Two way Record Warning Tone 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 20 CPU Redundancy 1 ON 0 OFF OFF PGM Code 162 System Password 1 User Password Max 12 digits 2 Admin Password Max 12 digits 3 Maint Password Max 12 digits PGM Code 163 Alarm Attributes 1 Alarm Enable 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 2 Alarm Contact Type 1 Close 0 Open Close 3 Alarm Door Bell Mode 1 Alarm Alarm 0 Door Bell 4 Alarm Signal Mode 1 Repeat Repeat 0 Once PGM Code 164 Attendant Assignment 1 40r5 Attendant Assignment Station 1 100 MFIM amp 100 buttons 1 4 Other MFIMs buttons 1 5 PGM Code 165 Multicast RTP RTCP 1 Multicast RTP MFIM Flex 1 28 8100 8156 Max 4 digit Other Flex 1 54 8100 8206 MFIMs 2 Multicast RTCP MFIM Flex 1 28 8101 8157 Max 4 digit Other Flex 1 54 8101 8207 MFIMs PGM Code 166 DISA COS 1 Day COS 1 9 1 2 Night Ring COS 1 9 1 3 Timed Ring COS 1 9 1 PGM Code 167 DID DISA Destination 1 Busy Destination Flex 1 3 Flex 1 Tone F1 Tone F2 Attendant F3 Hunt 2 Error Destination Flex 1 3 Flex 1 Tone F1 Tone F2 Attendant F3 Hunt 3 No Answer Destination Flex 1 3 Flex 1 Tone F1 Tone F2 Attendant F3 Hunt 4 DID VSF Prompts Flex 1 5 Flex 1 5 ON _ 1 ON 0 OFF D 13 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance D 14 Issue 5 0 Button SUB MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 5
56. 29 32 COIN O oO N 2 3 2 4 Flexible Station Numbering Plan PGM Code 105 As with gateway Modules each iPECS Phone and SLT is assigned a Sequence Number during the registration process The station Sequence Number is a 3 digit number starting at 001 which is incremented as each terminal device is registered At registration station numbers increment sequentially with the Sequence Number and are assigned starting at station 100 for Sequence Number 001 The Station Numbering Plan allows the station numbers to be two 2 to four 4 digits in length PROCEDURE 001 002 003 004 1 Press the PGM button and dial 105 100 101 102 103 001 002 003 004 Use either of the two methods below to change the station number associated with WO sick Sa ERE a Sequence Number Note pressing the SPEED button twice clears all station number assignments The VOL UP amp VOL DOWN buttons are used to view the next previous 4 station Sequence Numbers im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Range entry Using the dial pad enter a station number range first amp last station number The two station numbers must be of the same length 2 4 digits The range assignment begins with the first station number shown by the LCD and continues to the end of the entered range Single entry 4 1 Press Flex button 1 4 to select the desired Sequence Number from the four shown by the LCD 4 2 Dial new s
57. 4 0d6 13 Jun 07 Updated for iPECS S W Phase 4 General edits for errata Keyset Admin PGM 100 Insert warning when change country code im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Issue Dae Ciescriptionof Changes 5 0 Updated for iPECS S W Phase 5 0 Section 2 3 2 2 partially modified for WTIM Gateway Section 2 3 5 3 amp 2 3 5 5 amp 2 3 7 2 amp 2 3 9 5 partially modified for expanded VSF announcement was 20 now 70 Section 2 3 18 DECT ATTRIBUTES added Section 3 5 15 DECT Data added Keyset Admin PGM102 btn 18 added for DNS IP address PGM103 btn 7 added for WTIM Gateway PGM109 btn 12 13 added for Enter Into Conf Group Station ICR PGM111 btn 21 added for Serial DSS usage option PGM111 btn 22 amp 23 added for ICM Dial Ringback Tone PGM115 Serial DSS button program description is added PGM129 added for LESS Label Edit PGM132 Codec Type G 722 added for LIP 80XX Keyset PGM142 btn 15 amp 16 added for PSTN SMS outgoing amp received station PGM142 btn 17 amp 18 added for CO line Dial Ringback Tone PGM160 btn 24 added for SIP station connection mode PGM161btn 22 amp 23 added for PSTN SMS number amp protocol PGM161 btn 24 added for added menu PGM169 btn 4 added for weekday display mode PGM177 btn 26 29 added for SMDR Interface SMDR ICM disconnect cause PGM178 btn 3 amp 4 amp 5 added for DST Daylight Saving Time ability PGM195 added for NTP Attributes PGM231 destination type 12 added for Voice
58. 7 ACD 622 OVERFLOW DEST A call to the group will continue to route Station or S H V SPD Dial 1 4 through the group until answered or all Group Number group members have been tried The call VSF Announce will then queue to the group or route to System SPD the assigned OVerFLOW DESTination 8 ACD 622 OVERFLOW TMR A call to a group will remain queued to the 000 600 180 000 600 180 group or be sent to the assigned seconds OVerFLOW DESTination after expiration of the OVERFLOW TiMeR 9 ACD 622 WRAP UP TMR After terminating any call a Hunt Group 002 999 002 002 999 002 member will be maintained in a busy state seconds for the duration of the WRAP UP TiMeR 10 ACD 622 RPT NO MEMBER Ifa call is received and no members are 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 OFF OFF on duty an ICM call will return re order 1 ON tone while a CO IP call will be routed to Attendant 11 ACD 622 MUSIC SRC A Music source can be assigned so that 00 none 0 00 0 00 calls to the group will receive audio from 01 Music 1 the assigned source in place of ring back 02 Music 2 tone while in Queue Note Ext 2 is not 03 VSF MOH available in the iPECS Micro and iPECS 04 SLTMOH1 50 And VSF MOH is not available in the 05 SLTMOh2 iPECS Micro 06 SLTMOH3 07 SLTMOH4 08 SLTMOH5 09 VSFMOH2 10 VSFMOH3 12 ACD 622 ACD WARN TONE An ACD supervisor can monitor agent 0 OFF ON 1 ON 0 OFF ON conversations A warning tone can be 1 ON provided to th
59. ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Internal Page 13 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 13 0000 9999 8130 ports 8131 Internal Page 14 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 14 0000 9999 8132 ports 8133 Internal Page 15 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 15 0000 9999 8134 ports 8135 Internal Page 16 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 16 0000 9999 8136 ports 8137 Internal Page 17 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 17 0000 9999 8138 ports 8139 Internal Page 18 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 18 0000 9999 8140 ports 8141 Internal Page 19 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 19 0000 9999 8142 ports 8143 Internal Page 20 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 20 0000 9999 8144 ports 8145 Internal Page 21 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 21 0000 9999 8146 ports 8147 Internal Page 22 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 22 0000 9999 8148 ports 8149 Internal Page 23 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 23 0000 9999 8150 ports 8151 Internal Page 24 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 24 0000 9999 8152 ports 8153 Internal Page 25 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 25 0000 9999 8154 ports 8155 Internal Page 26 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 26 0000 9999 8156 ports 8157 Internal Page 27 RTP a
60. Call Park Recall Timer Determines the amount of time before a parked 000 600 120 call will recall the station that parked the call seconds Camp on Recall Timer When a call is transferred using Camp On this 000 600 030 entry determines the amount of time before the seconds station that transferred the call receives recall 3 117 im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Exclusive Hold Recall Timer Determines the amount of time before a call placed 000 600 060 on exclusive hold will recall the station seconds I Hold Recall Timer Determines the amount of time a call that is 000 600 030 recalling the station will recall before also recalling seconds also the attendant System Hold Recall Timer Determines the amount of time before a call placed 000 600 030 on system hold will recall the station seconds Transfer Recall Timer Determines the amount of time a transferred call 000 600 030 will ring at the receiving station before recalling the seconds station that transferred the call ACNR Delay Timer If the ACNR Pause Timer expires and no CO Line 000 300 030 is available for ACNR recall this timer sets the seconds delay before ACNR attempts to access a CO line again The ACNR retry counter is not decremented by this action ACNR Pause Timer This timer establishes the time between ACNR 030 300 030 recall attempts For CIS 5
61. CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Under Pick Up Group Assignments members are assigned to the Station Pick Up Group Refer to Table 2 3 7 3 1 for a description of the functions the LCD displays and data entries required The Station Pick up Group capacities for the iPECS system are shown in Table 2 3 7 3 as below Table 2 3 7 3 STATION PICK UP GROUP CAPACITY ITEM CAPACITY iPECS Micro iPECS 50 MFIM100 MFIM300 MFIM600 MFIM1200 Number of Pickup Groups 20 20 30 100 150 200 Stations in a Group 26 50 70 300 600 1200 PICKUP GRP ASSIGN ENTER GRP NUM 00 99 PICKUP GRP 00 Refer to Table 2 3 7 2 13 1 DISPLAY Table 2 3 7 33 1 PICKUP GROUP ASSIGNMENT PGM 192 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY RANGE 1 PICKUP GRP 00 DESCRIPTION This entry assigns stations as members of a station pickup group or for Net VM the Network number DEFAULT 2 107 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Each ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network Line provides digital services to the end user Basic Rate Lines have three 3 channels 2 B channels and a D channel The 2 B channels provide 64 Kbps each a total of 128 Kbps for Bearer or voice channels The D channel provides a 16 Kbps signaling channel Primary Rate Lines have 23 30 64 Kbps B channels and 1 2 64 Kbps signaling channels For proper operation entries are requ
62. Day Night and Timed Up to 40 holidays and 5 vacation intervals can be defined ZONE HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT ENTER BIN 01 32 ZONE 01 HOLIDAYATTR PRESS FLEX KEY 1 3 Refer to Table 2 3 13 1 1 DISPLAY Table 2 3 13 1 1 ZONE HOLIDAY ASSIGNMENT PGM 444 Button DISPLAY REMARK RANGE DEFAULT ZONE 01 RING MODE 0 3 Enter the desired Service mode for the Holiday 0 3 TIMED 1 TIMED R or Vacation O DAY 1 NIGHT 2 TIMED 3 N A ZONE 01 VACATION Assign a date range for the vacation entering 12 digits None 2 ENTER BIN NO 1 5 the start and end dates as yymmdd yymmdd ZONE 01 HOLIDAY Assign a date for the holiday for the Zone as 4 digits None 3 ENTER BIN NO 01 mmdd 2 145 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 The system has been pre programmed with certain features which are based on the default database The defaults are loaded into memory when the system is initialized The system should always be initialized when installed or the database is suspected of being corrupt The system can be initialized manually during installation refer to the iPECS Description amp Installation Manual section 4 4 2 This program allows all or any of several distinct portions or the database to be initialized returned to default INITIALIZATION es PRESS FLEX KEY 1 14 Refer to Table 2 3 14 1 DISPLAY Table 2 3 14 1 INITIALIZATION DATA
63. LD Only Local Call LD No Restriction COS 5 Code 1 or O Code 1 or O and Code 1 or 0 and code counter and OS and Table C Table C Table C Table C STA Only Local Call LD Only Local Call LD Only Local Call LD Only Local Call LD No Restriction COS 6 code counter and code counter and code counter and code counter and Table C Table C Table C Table C STA In house dialing In house dialing In house dialing In house dialing In house dialing COS7 only only only only only STA Exception Table D Exception Table D No Restriction Only Local Call LD No Restriction COS 8 governs the dialing governs the dialing code counter and Table C STA Exception Table E Exception Table E No Restriction Only Local Call LD No Restriction COS 9 governs the dialing governs the dialing code counter and Table C STA Exception Table D Exception Table D No Restriction Only Local Call LD No Restriction COS 10 amp E governs the amp E governs the code counter and dialing dialing Table C STA Exception Table A Exception Table A No Restriction Only Local Call LD No Restriction COS 11 amp BandD amp E amp B and D amp E code counter and governs the dialing governs the dialing Table C 3 36 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 117 Selecting CO IP Group Access will display the CO IP Group Access data input page Figure 3 5 2 6 1 Enter a
64. MFIM100 iPECS 50 TYPE DESCRIPTION IP KEYSET DSS MAP 1 DSS MAP 2 DSS MAP 3 SLT DTMF SLT with MSG Wait Lamp for DTMF a A jo N Table 2 3 3 1 3 STATION TYPE ASSIGNMENT PGM 110 MFIM300 MFIM600 amp MFIM1200 TYPE DESCRIPTION 1 IP KEYSET DSS MAP 1 DSS MAP 2 DSS MAP 3 DSS MAP 4 DSS MAP 5 DSS MAP 6 DSS MAP 7 9 DSS MAP 8 10 DSS MAP 9 11 SLT DTMF 12 SLT with MSG Wait Lamp DTMF N D A A V N im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Table 2 3 3 1 2 IP CONSOLE BUTTON CONFIGURATION PGM 110 iPECS Micro MAP DEFAULT CONSOLE BUTTON CONFIGURATION MAP 1 First 12 Buttons Button 1 ATD Override Button 2 All Call Page Button 3 Call Park 1 Button 4 Station Group 1 Button 5 Camp On Button 6 Internal All Call Page Button 7 Call Park 2 Button 8 Station Group 2 Button 9 Release Button 10 Ext All Call Page Button 11 Call Park 3 Button 12 Station Group 3 iPECS Micro Buttons 13 38 Station Ports 100 125 Buttons 39 48 unassigned Table 2 3 3 1 3 IP CONSOLE BUTTON CONFIGURATION PGM 110 MFIM100 iPECS 50 MAP DEFAULT CONSOLE BUTTON CONFIGURATION MAP 1 First 12 Buttons Button 1 ATD Override Button 2 All Call Page Button 3 Call Park 1 Button 4 Station Group 1 Button 5 Camp On Button 6 Internal All Call Page Button 7 Call Park 2 Button 8 Stati
65. PRESS FLEX KEY 1 6 Refer to Table 2 3 9 1 4 1 DISPLAY Table 2 3 9 1 4 1 LCR TABLE INITIALIZE PGM 223 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 ENTER DMT INIT VAL 6 This entry permits the global setting of the 00 99 DAY ZONE 1 Digit Modification Table Time Zone 1 to 3 3 DMT indices for Day Zone 1 indices 2 ENTER DMT INIT VAL 6 This entry permits the global setting of the 00 99 DAY ZONE 2 Digit Modification Table Time Zone 1 to 3 3 DMT indices for Day Zone 2 indices 3 ENTER DMT INIT VAL 6 This entry permits the global setting of the 00 99 DAY ZONE 3 Digit Modification Table Time Zone 1 to 3 3 DMT indices for Day Zone 3 indices 4 ENTER CO GRP INIT VAL This entry permits the global setting of the 01 20 so CO IP Group to be used for LCR calls or 00 72 5 ENTER ALT INDEX INIT VA This entry permits the global setting of the 00 99 a8 Digit Modification Alternate Index 6 INITIALIZE ALL LCR Pressing SAVE will return the LCR LDT and DMT tables to the default no entries setting 2 117 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 2 3 9 2 Toll Tables PGM Code 224 There are five Toll restriction Tables and each has a pair of Table entries Each pair consists of an Allow and a Deny entry Allow and Deny entries for Table A apply to Station and DISA Class of Service
66. Preset Forward can be separately assigned UNCONDITIONAL INTERNAL BUSY INTERNAL NO ANSWER EXTERNAL BUSY EXTERNAL NO ANSWER preset forwarding to any station hunt group or system speed dial bin off net Asa default no Preset Call Forward is assigned Also for the Transfer to Mailbox enter the Station Group number of the Voice Mail group external VM VSF or Feature Server Voice Mail group This permits users to send calls directly to the desired Voice Mail Box 3 250 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Selecting Station ICR Scenario displays the input entry page Figure 3 8 3 1 Station ICR Scenario Station ICR is an extension of call forward where the user enters scenarios to define the call forward feature Each station has ten 10 routing scenarios which define conditions for routing a user s incoming calls Each scenario may define time of day day of week date caller ID and destination for incoming calls In addition the scenarios may be prioritized calls are routed to the Attribute Caller ID Max 23 Digits Start Date End Date YY YY MM DD format Time Condition MONT TUET WED THUS FRI SAT SUNT ALLI Holiday l Start Time End Time HH MM Must be 4 digits 0000 2359 Destination na CO Value Dial Digits Max 23 digits Scenario Priority 0 9 Calle
67. Remote Services Gateway Module provides a number of local services in addition to transparent access to the host iPECS system The RSGM is intended for use when connected to the iPECS via an unmanaged IP network These include BGM MOH Alarm Doorbell monitor and External Control contacts RSGM capacity for each model is provided in Table 1 1 1 System Capacity Chart The programs in this group allow for configuration of the RSGM identification and attributes for each RSGM unit 2 3 12 1RSGM amp Remote Device Table PGM Code 430 The MAC address or MAC address and Password of all of remote devices including RSGM modules must be assigned in Admin 442 Remote Registration table for proper registration After registration is completed the MAC address IP address and other device specific configurations will be displayed in Admin 430 table The registered MAC address can be modified for device replacement PROCEDURE REMOTE DEVICE TABLE 1 Press the PGM button and dial 430 SELECT BIN 001 035 Use the dial pad to enter the RSGM device number 01 13 for the iPECS Micro 01 25 for the iPECS 50 01 35 for the MFIM100 001 150 for the MFIM300 PRESS FLEX KEY 1 5 and 001 300 for the MFIM600 and 001 600 for the MFIM1200 The VOL UP VOL DOWN button can be used to scroll through bin numbers Refer to Table 2 3 12 1 1 Press Flex button 1 5 for the desired setting refer to Table 2 3 12 1 1 DISPLAY Use the dial pad to
68. Station Auto Release Timer For an internal call the system will return a station 000 300 060 to idle if the call remains unanswered for this seconds duration Unsupervised Conference This timer determines the duration of an 00 99 10 Timer unsupervised conference before the station is minutes recalled or the conference is dropped Prime Line Delay Timer This timer sets the delay no action duration for 01 20 05 delayed Prime Line operation seconds Wink Signal Timer This timer sets the duration of the Seize 010 200 010 Acknowledge Signal Wink sent to the PSTN ona 10 msec DID line Enblock Inter Digit Timer When an ISDN Line is assigned to send digits 01 20 5 Enblock CO Attribute section 3 5 4 1 the system seconds will send digits if the user dials or this Enblock inter digit timer expires DTMF Duration Timer This timer establishes the duration of DTMF tones 04 99 10 sent on a CO line 10 msec 3 119 im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Flex DID Timer The system will receive DID digits for this timer 01 99 30 After the timer expires the system will use the last 100 msec 2 to 4 digits received as the DID digits R2 Out Manage Timer Reserved for future usage for R2 timers 01 50 14 seconds R2 In Manage Timer Reserved for future usage for R2 timers 01 50 14 seconds R2 Disappear Timer Reserved for future
69. VSF Announce 1 Auto a Drop VSF Announce 2 Location 00 70 VSF Announce 2 Auto Drop VSF Announce 2 Repeat Timer 000 999 sec VSF Announce 2 Repeat OFF STAMNET or Hunt C Station or Group Number oe ne 7X Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Figure 3 5 6 3 2 ACD Group Attributes 3 139 C Internet im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Table 3 5 6 3 2 ACD GROUP ATTRIBUTES Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT VSF Announce 1 Timer If all stations in the group are busy when a call is offered the call may continue to wait queue for an available station If the queue period exceeds the VSF Announce 1 Timer the call is sent to a VSF announcement If the timer is set to 000 the call will receive the first announcement in full prior to the hunt process guaranteed announcement 000 999 seconds 015 Guar Annc Timer 0 Wait If Busy When a call assigned to receive a guaranteed announcement arrives and all channels are busy the call may wait with Ringback until a channel is available ON or bypass the announcement OFF OFF ON ON VSF Announce 2 Timer After the 1st announcement a 2nd timer is activated At expiration if the call remains queued to the group the call is sent to the assigned 2nd VSF announcement 000 999 seconds 000
70. announcements for use with Station Groups Note that a station can belong to multiple groups if the groups are all of the same type Also note that when a station group is assigned to a group type Circular Terminal ACD VM FS VM VSF VM Net VM UCS and Ring the group attributes are initialized to the default values 3 133 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Selecting the Station Group Overview item will return the Station Group Overview page Figure 3 5 6 1 1 This page displays the Station Group attributes type pick up attribute and member stations for all the Station Groups Note that data cannot be entered on this page Selecting the blue colored text in the Table header will sort the table based on the selected column Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DAR File Edit Yiew Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm DG6M E 0Ap APRIO8 sion 1 0Ah JAN O 104 122 Copyright C 2006 by LG Noriel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 6 1 1 Station Group Overview 3 134 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 190 Selecting Station Group Assignment will display the Station Group data entry page Figure 3 5 6 2 1 Enter the desired Station Group number and click Load to display the Group Assignment Z iPECS Web Services M
71. button and dial 224 PRESS FLEX_KEY 1 10 ALLOW TABLE A Press Flex button 1 10 ENTER BIN NO 01 50 Button 1 Allow Table A i Button 2 Deny Table A Button 3 Allow Table B Button 4 Deny Table B Button 5 Allow Table C Button 6 Deny Table C Button 7 Allow Table D Button 8 Deny Table D Button 9 Allow Table E Button 10 Deny Table E Use the dial pad to select a bin number 01 50 Use the dial pad to enter the dialed number desired up to 20 digits Use as a wild card to represent any digit and at the end of an entry dial to end the entry To delete a Toll Table entry press the SPEED button Press the SAVE button to store the data entry 2 118 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 2 3 9 3 Emergency Code Table PGM Code 226 The Emergency Code Table is used to identify emergency numbers which when dialed will override all COS dialing restrictions An Emergency Code number may be up to fifteen 15 digits in length PROCEDURE EMERGENCY SVC CALL 1 Press the PGM button and dial 226 ENTER BIN NO 01 10 EMERGENCY SVC CALL Use the dial pad for the desired Emergency code entry 01 10 IN US soansonccsnsca Use the dial pad to enter the Emergency code number After entering the number dial the number is displayed with an E indicating END of entry Press the SAVE button to store the data entry 2 3 9 4 Authorization
72. several parameters must be set to indicate the capabilities related to the station such as 3 1 KHz audio for ISDN use Refer to Table 2 3 3 3 1 for a description of the attributes and the inputs available STATION ATTRIBUTES ENTER STA RANGE 100 110 STATION ATT PRESS FLEX_KEY 01 12 Refer to Table 2 3 3 3 1 DISPLAY Table 2 3 3 3 1 STATION ISDN ATTRIBUTES PGM 114 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 100 110 CLIP DISPLAY CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 0FF OFF an ISDN service sends the number of the 1 ON calling party to the system in the call SETUP message If enabled here the number will be shown in the iPECS Phone LCD 2 26 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 2 100 110 COLP DISPLAY 1 ON 0 OFF OFF COLP Connected Line Id Presentation an ISDN service sends the number of the answering party to the system in the call CONNECT message If enabled here the number will be shown in the iPECS Phone LCD 0 OFF 1 ON OFF 100 110 PROGRESS IND 1 ON 0 OFF OFF When employing a non ISDN terminal specifically a modem or analog FAX the ISDN call SETUP message must include this message and the Progress Indication parameter should be set to ON 0 OFF 1 ON OFF 100 11 CLIR S
73. 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 OFF ON in the number of attempts assigned in FAC 1 ON RETRY COUNT Pam CODE 160 btn 16 the station is disconnected or the Station COS is changed to COS 7 In the later case the user must employ COS Restore in Station User PGM CODE 2 to return the station to the normal COS 18 UNIFIED SERIAL MSG System Integration Messages are sent out 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 OFF OFF the defined serial or TCP channel see AIM 1 ON manual 19 RECORD WARNING TONE When call recording is active a tone can be 0 OFF ON 1 ON 0 OFF OFF sent to all connected parties to indicate the 1 ON conversation is being recorded 20 CPU REDUNDANCY USE When redundancy is employed this field 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 0FF OFF informs the master MFIM that a redundant 1 ON MFIM is available 21 CHG ACT BY POWER FAIL When power fails the active MFIM is 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 OFF OFF changed to the standby mode and the 1 ON standby MFIM becomes active 22 SMS CENTER NUMBER When the PSTN will be used to send SMS 23 digits the phone number of the Short Message Service Center must be entered 23 SMS PROTOCOL The Short Message Service Protocol must be 0 7 NONE 0 5 NONE 0 selected to support SMS 0 No PSTN SMS support 1 ETSI P1 2 ETSI P2 3 KT LivingNet 4 SIP Text 5 SIP XML 6 KT IP PBX 7 SKN IP PBX 24 SYSTEM 2 ADDED ATTR Select btn 24 to access added attributes 1 3 FLEX 1 PRESS FLEX KEY 1 3 FLEX 3 24 1 G722 PACKETIZATION lms The G 722 voice
74. 00 14 FLASH 240 IPM FLASH 240 IPM FLUTTER flashing rate FLUTTER 6 10 COL DISA IND CO button DISA indication flashing rate 00 14 FLASH 240 IPM FLASH 240 IPM 5 2 78 im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 11 COL SUPP CW CO button supplementary call waiting 00 14 FLASH 240 IPM FLASH 240 IPM FLUTTER flashing rate FLUTTER 6 12 COL SUPP HOLD CO button supplementary hold flashing 00 14 FLASH 480 IPM FLASH 480 IPM rate 8 13 DSS CO RING DSS button CO ring flashing rate 00 14 FLASH 30 IPM FLASH 30 IPM 2 14 DSS ALL RING DSS button ICM ALL ring flashing rate 00 14 FLASH 60 IPM FLASH 60 IPM 3 15 DSS ASC RING DSS button ICM ring associate device 00 14 FLASH 120 IPM FLASH 120 IPM flashing rate 10 16 DSS IN DND DSS button station in DND 00 14 FLASH 60 IPM FLASH 60 IPM 3 17 DSS LOCK OUT DSS button station in lockout 00 14 FLASH 480 IPM FLASH 480 IPM FLUTTER FLUTTER 7 18 DSS PRESEL MSG DSS button station in pre selected 00 14 FLASH 30 IPM FLASH 30 IPM message 2 19 DSS ICM HOLD DSS button station on ICM hold 00 14 FLASH 60 IPM FLASH 60 IPM 3 20 DSS OTHER DSS button station in other state 00 14 FLASH 120 IPM FLASH 120 IPM 10 21 UC
75. 00 DIGIT REPEAT When the number plan code Flex 2 is for 0 NO NO 0 NO 1 YES NO PSTN call or transit call this number code 1 YES can be enveloped in SETUP message or not whether if this field is set or not 9 00 NET PSTN ENBLOCK Choose Transit out Public Line to Enblock 0 NO NO 0 NO 1 YES NO or Over lap 1 YES 10 00 CO ATD CODE CLI Determine whether if Centralized ATD CLI is 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 0FF OFF sent or not when slave system makes transit 1 ON call 11 00 FIREWALL ROUTING Select IP address Firewall IP address or 0 OFF ON 1 0N 0 0FF OFF Non firewall IP address 1 ON If the destination system VOIM is in same VPN then Non firewall IP address should be sent Otherwise the firewall IP address should be sent ON Send firewall IP address OFF Send Non firewall Internal IP address 12 00 AUTHO CODE COS USE When there s a transit out call request from 0 NO NO 0 NO 1 YES NO slave system user by seizing CO line apply 1 YES COS according to the authorization code 13 00 SMDR DIAL HIDDEN Determine to display dialed digit of transit out 0 NO NO call or not at the slave system it can contain 1 YES authorization code 2 133 im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 2 3 10 5 Network Feature Code Table PGM Code 325 PROCEDURE NET FEATURE CODE TBL 1 Press the PGM button and dial 325 ENTER BIN NO 01 20 01 NET FEATURE CODE TBL Use the dial pad to enter the bin no
76. 000 300 030 take any action the system will automatically seconds release the CO IP path when this timer expires 13 CCR INT DGT TMR 100ms Inter digit timer used with Customer Call 000 300 030 000 300 030 Routing function 100 msec 14 CALL RESTRICT TMR min Not used Check PGM123 Btn2 00 99 00 00 99 00 minutes 15 CO DIAL DLY TMR 100ms Delay for through connection to prevent 00 99 05 00 99 01 illegal dialing when CO PBX has slow 100 msec response 16 RLS GUARD TMR 100ms When a CO Line is returned to idle the 010 150 020 010 150 020 system will deny access for this time to 100 msec assure the PSTN returns the CO circuitry to idle 17 CO RING OFF TMR 100ms This timer sets the maximum OFF duration 010 150 060 010 150 060 of the incoming ring cycle to determine when 100 msec 2 90 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 18 CO RING ON TMR 100ms This timer sets the ON time of the incoming 1 9 2 1 9 2 ring cycle for the Ring Detect circuitry of the 100 msec system to recognize an incoming call 19 ELAPSED CALL TMR sec Users can receive a periodic tone indicating 060 900 180 060 900 180 the length of an outgoing ca
77. 0000 2359 Default 0900 1800 none 3 Wednesday 0000 2359 4 Thursday 0000 2359 5 Friday 0000 2359 6 Saturday 0000 2359 7 Sunday 0000 2359 PGM Code 234 Voice Mail Dial Table il VM dial codes 1 9 12 digits 0 Prefix 1 Suffix PGM Code 235 Registration Table 1 Mac Address Information XX XX XXXX XXXX Regardless of registration DIP switch this device can be registered 2 Max port of device 00 99 0 PGM Code 236 Mobile Extension Table 1 Program Authority 1 ON 0 OFF 0 OFF 2 Access Authority 1 ON 0 OFF 0 OFF 3 CO Group 01 MFIM amp 100 00 24 Other 00 72 MFIMs 4 Telephone number 5 Mobile extension CLI 6 Hunt Call enable 1 ON 0 OFF 0 OFF 7 VSF VMIM Notify 1 USE 0 NOT USE 0 NOT USE 8 Notify Retry 1 to 9 Times 3 Times 9 Retry Interval 1 to 3 minute 3 minute PGM Code 250 Hot Desk Attributes 1 Number of Agents 10 MFIM amp 100 00 64 MFIME amp 300 000 300 MFIM600 000 400 MFIM1200 000 600 2 View Agent Range 390 399 3 Auto Logout Timer 00 24 00 1 hours increments D 24 im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 TABLE D 10 NETWORK DATA PGM Code 320 Network Basic Attributes PGM Code 321 Network Su PGM Code 322 Network CO Line Attributes PGM Code 324 Network Numbering Plan Table PGM Code 325 Network Feature Code D 25 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 TABLE D 11 NATION SPECIFIC Button SUB MENU RANGE REMARK PGM Code 400 IP
78. 007 20 msec increments 6 R2 Dial tone Delay Timer 01 30 20 1 sec increments Web Only Web Access Authorization User Access Level ON OFF ON Each PGM CODE Admin Access Level ON OFF ON Each PGM CODE Web Only Speed Dial List D 17 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button SUB MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK CO Type CO Value Dial Digits Name Web Only Custom Messages Message 11 20 24 Characters PGM Code 195 NTP Attributes 1 Network Time Date 0 2 TIME SOURCE TABLE D 7 STATION GROUP DATA Button SUB MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK PGM Code 190 Station Group Assignment 620 659 1 Group Type 0 9 0 0 No Assignment 1 Circular 2 Terminal 3 ACD 4 Ring 5 VM 6 Pick Up 7 VSF VM 8 FS VM 9 NET VM 10 UCS 2 Pick up Attribute 1 ON 0 OFF OFF Not applicable VM group 3 Member assignment Station Not applicable VM group PGM Code 191 Station Group Attributes by Group Type CIRCULAR GROUP 1 VSF Announce 1 Timer 000 999 015 1 second increments 2 VSF Announce 2 Timer 000 999 000 1 second increments 3 VSF Announce 1 Location 00 70 00 4 VSF Announce 2 Location 00 70 00 5 VSF Announce 2 Repeat Timer 000 999 000 1 second increments 6 VSF Announce 2 Repeat 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 7 Overflow Destination Station Group VSF Speed 8 Overflow Timer 000 600 180 1 second increments 9 Wrap Up Timer 002 999 002 1 second increments 10 No Answer Timer 00 99 15 1 second increments 11 Pilot Hunt 1 ON 0 OFF ON 12 Report No M
79. 1 Last Used 2 First 5 DISA Retry Counter 1 9 3 6 External Night Ring 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 7 Hold Preference 1 Sys 0 Excl System System Exclusive Hold 8 Print LCR Converted Digit 1 LCR 0 User LCR 9 Attendant Call Queue Available 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 10 All Attendant PGM 0 Access 1 ON 0 OFF OFF Except USA version 11 Off Net Prompt Usage 1 ON 0 OFF ON Except USA version 12 Unsupervised Conf Timer Extension 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 13 ACD Information Print 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 14 Call Log List Number 15 50 15 15 Off net DTMF Tone 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 16 FAC Retry Counter 1 9 3 17 Conference Room Telephone number 8 digits PGM Code 161 System Attributes II 1 Off Hook Ring Signal Type 1 Mute 0 Burst Mute D 12 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button SUB MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 2 Page Warning Tone 1 ON 0 OFF ON 3 Privacy 1 ON 0 OFF ON 4 Privacy Warning Tone 1 ON 0 OFF ON 5 ACD PRNT Enable 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 6 ACD PRNT Timer 001 255 001 10 second increments 7 ACD Clear after PRNT 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 8 Override 1 CO Group 1 ON 0 OFF ON 9 Base Codec Type 0 2 0 G711 0 G711 1 G 723 1 2 G 729 10 G 711 Packetization 0 250 20 1 msec increments 11 G 723 Packetization 0 255 30 1 msec increments 12 Network Time Date 0 DISABLE DISABLE USA version do not support ISDN 1 ISDN CLOCK CLOCk 2 NTP 13 Incoming Call Toll Check 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 14 Web Server TCP port TCP ports 00080 15 Web Password Security 1 ON
80. 1 ON 0 OFF ON 5 E1 R2 DSP Check 1 ON 0 OFF ON 6 DCO PX Type 1 1240 STANDARD 2 TDX1B 3 STANDARD 4 CONGES DIS PGM Code 132 Board Base Attributes 1 Router IP address IP Address 2 Device CODEC Type 0 3 3 SYSTEM 3 System Base follows PGM161 ow O G 711 1 G 723 1 2 G 729 3 ee ES 3 Firewall IP address IP Address l 4 RTP Security 1 ON 0 OFF ON 5 TNET Enable 1 ON 0 OFF ON D 8 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button SUB MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 6 UMS Sender e mail address 40 Characters Web only to modify Web Only SIP Gateway Attributes Soft Switch Type Normal Proxy Server Address IP address Primary DNS 32 Characters Secondary DNS 32 Characters Use Outbound Proxy 1 ON 0 OFF OFF Connection Mode TCP UP UDP l 181 Being Forwarded 1 ON 0 OFF OFF l 100rel support 1 ON 0 OFF OFF Use single codec only 1 ON 0 OFF OFF Use rport method 1 ON 0 OFF OFF Domain 32 Characters Invite Acceptance 0 Domain Only 1 From All Contact Address Domain 0 SIP GW Addr 1 Server Domain Proxy Registration Timer Proxy Server Port port 5060 Registration User ID range User ID Table index DTMF Type INBAND 2833 INFO DTMF INFO DTMF RELAY INFO TELEPHONE EVENT INFO NORTEL NETWORKS TABLE D 5 CO LINE DATA Button SUB MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK PGM Code 140 CO Service Attributes CO Service Type Flex 1 3 1 Normal 1 Normal 2 DID 3 TIE Line PGM Code 141 CO IP Line Attributes 1
81. 1 200 201 250 25 1 300 301 350 351 400 40 1 450 451 500 Index Value Range CO Line Range 7 1 200 Index of Flexible DID Table 000 999 MAX 23 Digits Include and CO Line Range 1 200 Index of Flexible DID Table 000 999 MAX 23 Digits Include and CO Line Range 1 200 Index of Flexible DID Table 000 999 MAX 23 Digits Include and CO Line Range 1 200 Index of Flexible DID Table 000 999 MAX 23 Digits PPP Attrib 5 Called Telephone Nunber Include and E CO Line Range 3 1 200 i gt ee 45 7 Index of Flexible DID Table 000 999 MAX 23 Digits Called Telephone Number Called Telephone Number Called Telephone Number Called Telephone Number Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 7 3 1 MSN Tables When an ISDN Line assigned for DID operation receives an incoming call the call will be routed to a station based on the Flexible DID Table Index assigned in the MSN Table Each iPECS configuration has a different capacity as indicated by the entry range in Table 3 5 7 3 1 Table 3 5 7 3 1 MSN TABLE ATTRIBUTES ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT CO Line Number CO Line No IPECS Micro None 01 05 MFIM100 IPECS 50 01 42 Other MFIMs 001 200 or 001 400 Index of Flexible DID Table Index to the Flexible DID Table
82. 100 BLOCK B CALL When an SLT extension tries to transfer a CO 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 OFF ON call to a CO line it is blocked and the call is 1 ON released 21 100 100 BY PASS DTMF When detected DTMF from an SLT may be 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 OFF ON regenerated by LGCM SLTM port can by pass 1 ON 2 25 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 22 100 100 PROCTOR MONIT Enables use of PABX ANI Link device for E 911 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 OFF OFF support Only an SLT can be used for this 1 ON feature 23 100 100 UMS MailSvrID The VSF and VMIM include notification of new messages to the user s voice mail This field defines the user s ID to notify when a new message is received at the VSF or VMIM 24 1 100 100 UMS MailSvrPW Unified Mail server password 24 2 100 100 DOOR OPEN Enables use of Door open feature by station 0 Disable 1 EN 0 DIS DISABLE Default value 1 Enable Korea Disable Austrilia Disable except for port 10r2 Otherwise Enable 24 3 100 100 VSF MSG DD TM When ON play the data time stamp of VSF 0 OFF ON 1 0N 0 0FF ON message 1 ON When a station uses an ISDN Line various parameters relating to ISDN Calling Line Identification and Connected Line Identification can be assigned for each station In addition when the station is an SLT
83. 15 My Area Code Max 6 Digits 16 My Area Prefix Code Max 4 Digits 17 CLI Transit Code 1 0RI 0 CFW CFW 18 Preserve Name for DID calls 1 ON 0 OFF OFF PGM Code 144 CO Ring Assignment 1 Day Station Group Flex 1 Station Delay 0 9 ring cycles 2 Night Station Group sl 2 Hunt 3 Timed Ring Station Group Flex 3 VSF announcement 01 70 Flex 4 AA Ring delay Time 00 30 sec PGM Code 145 DID Service Attributes 1 DID Signal 1 Immediate 2 Wink 2 Wink 3 Delayed Dial 2 DID conv Type 0 2 0 0 DID Data Conversion PGM230 1 call to the valid extension 2 convert with Flex DID Table PGM231 3 DID Digit Receive Number 2 4 3 4 DID Digit Mask 4 digits PGM Code 146 DISA Service Attributes DISA Day Night Timed Ring Flex 1 Day Enter VMIM VSF Announcement Flex 2 Night number Flex 3 Timed PGM Code 147 CO Preset Forward Attributes 1 Co Preset Forward Timer 00 20 00 1 second increments 2 ICLID Ring Table Index 001 250 None 3 VMID Number 0000 9999 None PGM Code 150 NA ISDN Line Attributes 1 Local Exchange Type 1 4 NI 1 1 NI 1 2 NI2 3 5 ESS 4 NORTEL 2 SPID Number 9 20 digits 3 Directory Number 20 digits 4 EKTS Mode 1 EKTS 0 NONE EKTS 5 Type_for_7 8 0 5 0 6 Type_for_10_11 0 5 0 PGM Code 151 ISDN Line Attributes 1 T200 1 5 1 1 second increments 2 T201 125 1 1 second increments 3 T202 IES 2 1 second increments 4 T203 05 15 10 1 second increments 5 T204 05 15 10 1 second increments 6 T302 10 30 15 1 second increments 7
84. 2 4 and 11 Allow and Deny entries for Table B apply to Station and DISA Class of Service 3 4 and 11 Allow and Deny entries for Table C apply to Station and DISA Class of Service 5 and 6 Allow and Deny entries for Table D apply to Station and DISA Class of Service 8 10 and 11 Allow and Deny entries for Table E apply to Station and DISA Class of Service 9 10 and 11 For each Table there can be up to 50 separate Allow and Deny entries total of 100 of up to 20 digits Entries in the Tables can be any digit 0 9 as a wild card don t care digit or as an end of entry digit Based on Table entries stations or DISA users are allowed or denied dialing specified numbers The following rules apply to establishing restrictions based on the Table entries If the appropriate Allow Deny Table pair has no entries and COS is 2 to 4 or 8 to 9 no restrictions are applied If the COS is 5 or 6 no Long Distance dialing is allowed If entries are only made in the Allow Table only those numbers entered can be dialed all other dialed numbers will be restricted If entries are only made in the Deny Table only those numbers entered will be restricted and all other numbers can be dialed When there are entries in both the Allow and Deny Table pair if the number is in the Deny Table the number will be restricted otherwise the number can be dialed without restriction PROCEDURE TOLL EXCEPTION TABLES 1 Press the PGM
85. 2nd announcement which is played if the call remains queued beyond the ANNC 2 TMR duration The announcement location is the VSF ANNC2 number An entry of 00 indicates no announcement Including at the end of an entry instructs the system to disconnect after the announcement 5 FS VM 624 ANNC2 RPT TMR The 2nd announcement can be repeated to 000 999 000 000 999 000 calls that remain in queue at intervals of the seconds ANNounCement 2 RePeaT TiMeR Note repeating must be ON under button 6 below 6 FS VM 624 ANNC 2 RPT After the 2nd announcement if the call 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 OFF OFF remains queued to the group the 2nd VSF 1 ON announcement can be repeated at the ANNounCement RePeaT TiMeR interval 7 FS VM 624 OVERFLOW DES A call to the group will continue to route Station or Grp S H V SPD Dial 1 4 through the group until answered or all Number VSF group members have been tried The call Announce will remain at the last station or routes to System SPD the assigned OVerFLOW DESTination 8 FS VM 624 OVERFLOW TMR A call to a group will remain at the last 000 600 180 000 600 180 station in the group or can be sent to the seconds assigned OVerFLOW DESTination after expiration of the OVERFLOW TiMeR 9 FS VM 624 NO ANS TMR 1s Calls to a station in the group are directed 00 99 15 00 99 15 to the station if unavailable or unanswered seconds routed based on the assigned hunt process
86. 4 0000 9999 8112 8112 8113 8113 2 68 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 8 MULTICAST RTP I PAGE 5 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 5 0000 9999 8114 8114 8115 8115 9 MULTICAST RTP I PAGE 6 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 6 0000 9999 8116 8116 8117 8117 10 MULTICAST RTP I PAGE 7 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 7 0000 9999 8118 8118 8119 8119 11 MULTICAST RTP I PAGE 8 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 8 0000 9999 8120 8120 8121 8121 12 MULTICAST RTP I PAGE 9 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 9 0000 9999 8122 8122 8123 8123 13 MULTICAST RTP IPAGE 10 RTP and RTOP ports for Internal Page 10 0000 9999 8124 8124 8125 8125 14 MULTICAST RTP I PAGE ALL RTP and RTCP ports for Internal All Call 0000 9999 8126 8126 8127 Page 8127 15 MULTICAST RTP E PAGE 1 RTP and RTCP ports for External Page 1 0000 9999 8128 8128 8129 8129 16 MULTICAST RTP E PAGE 2 RTP and RTCP ports for External Page 2 0000 9999 8130 8130 8131 8131 17 MULTICAST RTP E PAGE ALL RTP and RTCP ports for External All Call 0000 9999 8132 8132 8133 Page 8133 18 MULTICAST RTP PAGEALL RTP and RTCP po
87. 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 The Database Upload selection returns the Database Upload page as shown in Figure 3 7 1 2 1 By selecting the database file desired from the local PC the desired database can be uploaded to the iPECS system s database iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm DB Upload OAp APR 08 1 DAR JANOT Please check O if you want to restart the system after DB upload Select Database File Database Download Upload Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 7 1 2 1 Database Upload 3 245 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 The iPECS system can download SMDR data in a SYLK format file sIk This file can be opened under any common spreadsheet application The system will provide a view of SMDR data for the station range entered in the Web page Figure 3 7 2 1 This page may also be employed to delete SMDR records for the station range entered Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm Q6N E 0Ap APRIOS REIS SMDR View Station Range 7 SMDR Delete Station Range on 1 0Ah JAN O Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Done Internet E Figure 3 7 2 1 SMDR Access
88. 543 543 543 543 543 ENTER NEW 543 access dial code im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Btn DISPLAY FEATURE DEFAULT iPECS iPECS 50 MFIM MFIM MFIM Micro MFIM100 300 600 1200 3 MEET ME PAGE Meet Me Page 544 544 544 544 544 ENTER NEW 544 answer dial code 4 EXT PAGE ZONE 1 External Page Zone 1 n a 545 545 545 545 ENTER NEW 545 access dial code Not available in iPECS Micro 5 EXT PAGE ZONE 2 External Page Zone 2 n a 546 546 546 546 ENTER NEW 546 access dial code Not available in iPECS 50 and iPECS Micro 6 EXT ALL CALL External All Call Page n a 548 548 548 548 ENTER NEW 548 access dial code Not available in iPECS Micro 7 ALL CALL PAGE All Call Page access 549 549 549 549 549 ENTER NEW 549 dial code 8 smpR ACT CODE ENTER Dial code to signify the 550 550 550 550 550 ENTER NEW 550 start of an SMDR Account Code 9 lFLASH CMD TO CO Dial code to generate 551 551 551 551 551 ENTER NEW 551 a Flash on the active CO Line 10 suT LAST SPD DIAL SLT Last Number 552 552 552 552 552 ENTER NEW 552 Redial feature access dial code 11 DND Dial code to activate 553 553 553 553 553 ENTER NEW 553 Do Not Disturb 12 caLL FWD Dial code to activa
89. 70 Each Station Hunt Group can be assigned an announcement which is played if the call remains queued beyond the ANNC 1 TMR duration The announcement location is a VSF ANNC1 number An entry of 00 indicates no announcement Including at the end of an entry instructs the system to disconnect after the announcement 00 70 00 none 2 98 im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 4 ACD 622 ANNC2 LOC The Station Hunt Group can be assigned 00 70 00 none VSF ANNC 00 70 a 2nd announcement which is played if the call remains queued beyond the ANNC 2 TMR duration The announcement location is a VSF ANNC2 number An entry of 00 indicates no announcement Including at the end of an entry instructs the system to disconnect after the announcement 5 ACD 622 ANNC2 RPT TMR The 2nd announcement can be repeated 000 999 000 000 999 000 to calls that remain in queue at intervals of seconds the ANNounCement 2 RePeaT TiMeR Note repeating must be ON under button 6 below 6 ACD 622 ANNC2 RPT After the 2nd announcement if the call 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 OFF OFF remains queued to the group the 2nd 1 ON VSF announcement can be repeated at the ANNounCement RePeaT TiMeR interval
90. 8 specific CO Line IP channel from Hold 21 faccess co IN 1ST co crp Dial code to access the 9 9 9 9 9 ENTER NEW 9 1st available CO Line in any accessible group 22 ATTENDANT CALL Dial code to call an 0 0 0 0 0 ENTER NEW 0 Attendant 23 VM MSG WAIT ENABLE Dial code for external g g g g g ENTER NEW 8 Voice mail to activate Message Wait indication 24 VM_MSG WAIT CANCEL Dial code for external 9 g 9 9 9 ENTER NEW 9 Voice Mail to deactivate Message Wait indications 2 15 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Table 2 3 2 5 3 FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN PART C PGM 108 Btn DISPLAY FEATURE DEFAULT IPECS 50 MFIM MFIM MFIM MFIM100 300 600 1200 1 DOOR OPEN 1 Dial code to activate Door 1 1 1 1 1 ENTER NEW 1 contact open door 1 2 DOOR OPEN 2 Dial code to activate Door 2 2 2 2 2 ENTER NEW 2 contact open door 2 Not available in iPECS 50 3 DOOR OPEN 3 Dial code to activate Door 3 3 3 3 ENTER NEW 3 contact open door 3 MFIM300 amp MFIM600 only 4 DOOR OPEN 4 Dial code to activate Door 4 4 4 4 ENTER NEW 4 contact open door 4 MFIM300 amp MFIM600 only Table 2 3 2 5 4 FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN PART D PGM 109 Btn DISPLAY FEATURE DEFAULT iPECS MFIM MFIM MFIM 50 Micro 300 600 1200 MFIM100
91. All Call Forward Type Unconditional a xI Station Type P110 Station Attributes P111 113 Station ISDN Attributes P114 Flex Buttons P 115 129 Station COS P116 COMP Group Access P117 Internal Page Zone P113 Ptt Group Access P119 Intemal Busy Intemal No Answer x x Extemal Busy x Extemal No Answer x Transfer Mail Box Idle Line Selection P121 IP Call Access P122 Preset FWD Timer P123 Linked Station P124 Station ICM Group P125 Station SIP Attnbutes P126 Chatinn Mama DMinwliee Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 2 9 1 Preset Call Forward Stations can be programmed so that incoming CO and Intercom calls are forwarded to a preset station or station group This allows an external or internal call to initially ring at a station and forward to a pre determined destination Preset Forward can be separately assigned Unconditional Internal Busy Internal No Answer External Busy or External No Answer preset forwarding to any station hunt group system speed dial bin off net or Station ICR As a default no Preset Call Forward is assigned For Transfer Mail Box enter the Station Group number of the Voice Mail group external VM VSF or Feature Server Voice Mail group This will permit iPECS Phone users to forward calls directly to the desi
92. Automatic IP Assign The system automatically assigns IP addresses to ON modules and terminals On or when OFF IP addresses are assigned manually in Device IP Address Table Second System IP Address When devices have different address scheme on the 0 0 0 0 same LAN enter the MFIM IP address for the second LAN Second System Net Mask Net mask of the second private IP addresses 255 255 255 0 Firewall IP Address When the system is installed behind a NAPT server 0 0 0 0 the fixed IP Address provided by the NAPT server must be assigned here Also use this IP address to identify the MFIM in remote devices First MAC Range MAC Address Range to register a device regardless of the 3rd DIP switch 00 00 00 00 00 00 Second MAC Range MAC Address Range to register a device regardless of the 3rd DIP switch 00 00 00 00 00 00 MFIM E LAN2 Master IP Address When redundancy is to be supported for the MFIM the master and slave are connected via the LAN2 port All 8 wires in the cable must be terminated to the RJ45 The master IP address can be assigned here When the direct connection mode is employed for redundancy the field is ignored 1 2 3 4 MFIM E LAN2 Slave IP Address When redundancy is supported for the MFIM the master and slave are connected via the LAN2 port All 8 wires in the cable must be terminated to the RJ45 The slave IP address can be assigned here When the direct connection mode is employed for r
93. CO Call 1 4 4 PGM Code 174 RS 232 Port Settings 1 Baud Rate 1 6 38400 1 Not Used 2 9600 BAUD 3 19200 BAUD 4 38400 BAUD 5 57600 BAUD 6 115200 BAUD 2 CTS RTS 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 3 Page Break 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 4 Line Page 001 199 066 5 XON XOFF 1 XON 0 XOFF XOFF PGM Code 175 Serial Port Function Selection Print Port Selection Flex 1 2 Flex 1 Dynamic Flex 2 Static 1 Select dynamic port SERIAL1 1 2 Serial 3 5 dynamic TCP port l Off line SMDR Statistics Print 1 5 SERIAL1 1 2 Admin Print 1 5 SERIAL1 1 3 Traffic Print 1 5 SERIAL1 1 4 SMDI Print 1 5 SERIAL1 15 Call Info Print 1 5 SERIAL1 T On line SMDR Print 1 5 SERIAL1 ISi Trace Print 1 5 SERIAL1 ists Debug Print feo SERIAL1 1 9 ACD Package Print 1 5 SERIAL1 2 Select Static Port 2al Off line SMDR Statistics Print 19999 ULL Came Admin Print 1 9999 NULL 2 3 Traffic Print 1 9999 NULL 2 4 SMDI Print 1 9999 ULL 25 Call Info Print 1 9999 NULL 250 On line SMOR Print 1 9999 ULL Ci Trace Print 1 9999 NULL 2 8 Debug Print 1 9999 ULL 2 9 ACD Package Print 1 9999 NULL PGM Code 176 Break Make Ratio D 15 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button SUB MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 Break Make ratio 1 66 33 60 40 0 60 40 PGM Code 177 SMDR Attributes 1 SMDR Save Enable 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 2 SMDR Print Enable 1 ON 0 OFF ON ON Real time OFF On demand 3 SMDR Recording Call Type 1 LD 0 ALL LD LD Long Distance ALL All 4 SMDR LD Ca
94. CO Group CO Access Code Or CO Group Access Code D 5 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button SUB MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 15 Send SLT CLI 1 ON 0 OFF ON Send CLI info to SLT Soft Wit phone 16 ACD Member Priority 0 9 0 17 ez Attendant Password 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 18 Emergency CO CO Access Code Any CO Or CO Group Access Code 19 Station Account code required 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 20 Auto Call recording 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 21 Call Recording Station Station number 22 Voice Mail Back up 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 23 VM Back up Station Station number 24 VM Back up Prompt 1 ON 0 OFF OFF PGM Code 113 Station Attributes III 1 ADMIN EN DIS ENABLE 2 VSF Access EN DIS DISABLE 3 Group Listen EN DIS DISABLE 4 Override Privilege EN DIS DISABLE 5 SMDR Hidden Dialed Digits EN DIS DISABLE 6 Voice Over EN DIS ENABLE 7 Prime Line 1 HOT 0 WARM WARM 8 Alarm Door Bell Attribute EN DIS DISABLE 9 DID Call Wait 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 10 Left Msg Exe 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 11 E amp MIC Headset 1 ON 0 OFF OFF For new Soft Key Key set 12 Enblock Mode 1 ON 0 OFF OFF For new Soft key Key set 13 VSF Message Retrieve 1 FIFO 0 LIFO LIFO 14 VMID Number Station number STA For adjunct Voice Mail box id 15 Auto ACD DND dial pad digit 0 O no reason code 16 Fwd if OOS 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 17 Backlight 0 2 busy 0 Off 1 busy 2 al
95. CO IP Group Assignment MFIM amp 100 00 21 IP 20 CO 01 Group 21 is for unused CO Lines and Other MFIMs 00 73 IP 72 CO 01 Group 73 is for unused IP Channels 2 CO Line COS 1 5 1 3 CO Start Signal 1 Ground 0 Loop Loop 4 CO Line Type 1 PBX 0 CO CO 5 CO Line Signal Type 1 DTMF 0 Pulse DTMF 6 Flash Type 1 Ground 0 Loop Loop 7 Universal Night Answer 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 8 CO IP Group Auth 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 9 Data Station No 4 digits 0 FAX Modem can be assigned to STA 10 Tenancy Group 00 15 00 11 VoIP Protocol es 1 1 iPECS 2 H 323 3 SIP 13 WAIT IF DVU BUSY 1 ON 0 OFF ON PGM Code 142 CO IP Line Attributes II 1 CO Line Name Display 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 2 CO Line Name Assign 2 characters Max 12 character alpha entry 3 Metering Unit O 11 0 D 9 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button SUB MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 4 Line Drop using CPT 1 ON 0 OFF OFF Not Supported 5 DISA Authorization Code 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 6 CO Line MOH 0 3 1 0 none 1 Int Ext 1 2 Ext 2 3 VSF BGM 7 CO Dial Tone 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 8 CO Ring Back Tone 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 9 CO Error Tone 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 10 CO Busy Tone 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 11 DISA CO Access 1 ON 0 OFF ON 12 CO Flash Timer 000 300 050 10 msec Increments 13 Open Loop Detect Timer 00 20 04 100 msec Increments 14 ICLID Detect Timer 00 20 00 1 sec Increments 17 CO Line Dial Tone Source 0 dial tone 0 1 Int Ext 1 2 Ext 2 3 VSF 18 CO Line Ri
96. COS programs in section 3 5 2 5 and 3 5 5 6 respectively The start times for Day Night and start and end times for Timed modes are entered for each day of week After the Timed end time the mode returns to day if time is not in the Night mode The Attendant can override the Automatic selection and select the desired mode Day Night and Timed manually A separate Auto Ring Table can be established for each ICM Tenant Group in section 3 5 2 14 indices 1 15 and for the system index 00 3 178 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 234 Selecting Voice Mail Dialing Table will display the Voice Mail Dialing data entry page Figure 3 5 8 13 1 Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer BEE File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm LCR Control Attribute P220 Voice Mail 1 Put Ma fa a APDE LCR LDT P221 eur AA LCR DMT P222 Voice Mail 2 Get see 12 pear gaa LCR Table Initialization P223 Pause D F Toll Exception Table P224 a PsP Max 12 Digits Include P D F Emergency Code Teble P226 Voie Mail 3 bey P Pause D DND F Flash Authorization Code Table P227 CCR Teble P228 Voice Mail 4 No Answer Max 12 Digits Include P D F P Pause D DND F Flash Executive Secretary P229 Flexible DID Conversion P231 Voice Mail 5 Error System Speed Zone P232
97. Checking Auth Checking Speed Bin Range In Zone Station Range to Access Zone Toll Checking Auth Checking Speed Bin Range In Zone Station Range to Access Zone Toll Checking Auth Checking Speed Bin Range In Zone Station Range to Access Zone Toll Checking Auth Checking Speed Bin Range In Zone LCR Control Attribute P220 LCR LDT P221 Executive Secretary P22 Flexible DID Conversion P231 Auto Ring Mode Table P23 Copyright C 2006 by LC Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Figure 3 5 8 11 1 System Speed Zone The system has 10 System Speed Dial zones except MFIM600 which has twenty 20 and MFIM1200 which has fifty 50 System Speed Dial Bins assigned to a zone are only available to stations allowed access to that zone Each zone can be assigned to apply the appropriate Station and CO Line COS for the speed dial number prior to dialing 3 177 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Re PGM CODE 23 Issue 5 0 Selecting Auto Ring Mode Table will display the Auto Ring Mode Table data entry page Figure 3 5 8 12 1 Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Dor Address http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm LCR Control Attribute P220 LCR LDT P221 LCR DMT P222 LCR Table Initialization P223 Toll Exception Table P224 Emergency Code
98. Close Close activate the Alarm close or open 0 Open Alarm Mode The contact can be treated to function as a doorbell 1 Alarm ALARM instead of an alarm 0 Door Alarm Signal Mode The assigned stations will receive a Repeating signal or 1 Repeat RPT single burst ONCE as the alarm tone 0 Once MOH Type Assigns the source for MOH 1 Music 1 Music 1 0 HOLD TONE Int Ext1 Music Assigns the input for source 1 Internal or External 1 EXT1 Int This is the source for BGM MOH Music 0 Int RTP Relay GW Slot Only VOIP CO line g w slot sequence number can be Number of Slots NULL Seq assigned for this When connected via an unmanaged network RTP packets are exchanged over an IP channel from this VOIP CO g w Diff Serv Code DiffServ Code Point option value 00 63 4 First CO Access Select RSGM CO line or System CO line for First CO RSG RSG line access 9 SYS Firewall Protected Firewall Protected value is automatically set by the 0 OFF ON system 1 ON 3 197 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Web Administration AE AA ATEEN LIK300 Version iPECS VD96M E 0Ap APR 08 Tnet CM attribui Tnet LM attribui Tnet FoPSTN tak Tnet Control Co Tnet Music Alar Copyright C 2006 by LG_Noriel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Figure 3 5 11 1 TNET Central Control Networking Data In a Centralized Control TNET Transparent Networking remote devices may be registered to a Central MFIM CM and to a
99. Codes Table PGM Code 227 Authorization codes are employed to control access to the system resources and facilities Walking COS CO IP Group access DISA callers and certain Call Forward types may require input of a valid Authorization code Codes up to 12 digits may be entered into the system database The station has an associated Station Authorization bin which can be assigned by the user from the user s telephone The System Authorization codes are stored in System bins and are entered or deleted only through Admin The number of System Authorization codes available is 474 when using the iPECS Micro 001 474 450 when using the iPECS 50 001 to 450 430 when using MFIM100 001 4380 700 when using MFIM300 001 to 700 1400 when using MFIM600 001 1400 and 3400 when using MFIM1200 PROCEDURE AUTHORIZATION CODE 1 Press the PGM button and dial 227 F1 STA_AUTH F2 SYS_ AUTH Refer to Table 2 3 9 4 1 Press Flex button 1 or 2 to select the desired entry Flex button 1 Station authorization code DISPLAY Flex button 2 System Authorization code For Flex button 1 enter a station range enter the same station number twice for a single station entry For Flex button 2 enter the bin number 001 474 for iPECS Micro 001 450 for iPECS 50 001 430 for MFIM100 001 700 for MFIM300 and 0001 1400 for MFIM600 and 0001 3400 for MFIM1200 Then press Flex button 1 to set the password and Flex button 2 to set the COS Day
100. Control Contacts P163 LED Flashing Rate P170 Music Sources P171 PBX Access Codes P172 RLP Prionity P 173 RS 232 Port Settings P174 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 5 9 1 LCD Display Mode The LCD display mode sets the time 12 24 hr date day month order and language Refer to Table 3 5 5 9 1 and Table 3 5 5 9 2 for a description of the modes and the data entries required Table 3 5 5 9 1 LCD DISPLAY MODES ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT LCD Date Display Mode Sets the Date display as month day or day month MM DD YY DD MM YY DD MM YY LCD Time Display Mode Sets the Time display mode as 12 hour or 24 hour 12 Hour Mode 12 Hour military time 24 Hour Mode Language Display Mode Sets the Language used in the display refer to English Table 3 5 5 9 2 below 3 99 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT LCD Weekday Display Sets the Day of Week DoW display mode Follow PGM169 Follow Mode 0 no DoW BTN1 PGM169 1 display mmm dd DoW alpha month display TYPE1 MM DD BTN1 overrides setting of button 1 above WDY 2 display mm dd DoW numeric month TYPE2 MM DD display overrides setting of button 1 above WDY Table 3 5 5 9 2 LCD LANGUAGE SELECTION LANGUAGE English Italian Finnish Dutch Swedish Danish Norwegian Hebrew German French Portuguese Sp
101. Don t Care Emergency Code Table P226 MAX 20 Digits Authorization Code Table P227 Include E Stop D Don t Care 5 a MAX 20 Digits CR Table P223 nclude E Stan LCR Control Attribute P220 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 8 5 1 Toll Exception Table There are ten Toll restriction Tables arranged in pairs Each pair consists of an Allow Table and a Deny Table Allow and Deny entries for Table A apply to Station and DISA Class of Service 2 4 and 11 Allow and Deny entries for Table B apply to Station and DISA Class of Service 3 4 and 11 Allow and Deny entries for Table C apply to Station and DISA Class of Service 5 and 6 Allow and Deny entries for Table D apply to Station and DISA Class of Service 8 10 and 11 Allow and Deny entries for Table E apply to Station and DISA Class of Service 9 to 11 The Allow and Deny Tables each permit up to 50 entries of up to 20 digits Entries in the Tables can be any digit 0 9 as a wild card don t care digit or as an end of entry digit Based on Table entries stations or DISA users are allowed or denied dialing specified numbers The following rules apply to establishing restrictions based on the Table entries If the appropriate Allow Deny Table pair has no entries and COS is 2 to 4 no
102. Edit Yiew Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm TT ed Boot Version 1 04h JANIOF Index 1 50 51 100 101 150 Nation Korea f Korea Korea Korea Korea SSIS IS I Korea Korea Korea Olol lal al ul al wl rule Korea Korea Korea Korea Station User Login P443 Korea Korea SS all esa cl ll Korea Copyright C 2006 by LG Noriel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 13 1 1 Remote Phone amp Gateway Registration When a device attempts to register with the controlling iPECS the system will check the device MAC address and password against the Registration table If a match is found the device is registered regardless of Dip switch position 3 The system database is updated and the device receives device specific configuration data from the MFIM Table 3 5 13 1 1 REMOTE PHONE amp GATEWAY REGISTRATION ATTRIBUTE REMARK RANGE DEFAULT Mac Address Mac address of remote device MAC Address Password Password if any assigned in the devices database via Up to 12 digits Device Web admin Zone The Zone to be assigned to the device 01 32 01 Nation Nation or country location of the device See Table Assigned i
103. FIRST ROUND DISA Retry Count A DISA user is allowed to retry erroneous authentication 1 9 3 code entries This entry sets the number of retries before the system disconnects External Night Ring CO IP calls which are assigned UNA can activate the ON OFF Loud Bell Contact While in the Night mode an OFF incoming call will activate the contact Hold Preference A single depression of the HOLD button places the call System System on the preferred hold System or Exclusive Exclusive Print LCR Converted digits SMDR will output the number dialed by either the LCR LCR system s LCR or the user USER Attendant Call Queuing The system can be configured to queue incoming calls ON OFF to a busy Attendant OFF USE PGM_0O IN ALL ATD Allows Main Attendants to activate Day Night mode ON OFF Not available in USA version OFF Offnet Prompt Usage When a call is routed to a destination external to the ON OFF iPECS the Off Net routing prompt can be played Not OFF available in US version CO to CO Unsupervised When an Unsupervised Conference is established with ON OFF Conference Timer Extend DISA Off Net Fwd etc the Unsupervised Conference OFF timer section 3 5 5 20 determines the allowed duration of the call If enabled here the user may extend the allowed duration Discovery Manager Print When the optional ACD Event messages are required ON OFF the system must be enabled here to send the events OFF CALL LOG Num The Call Log that saves the
104. FLEX 1 2 and 001 300 for the MFIM600 and 001 600 for the MFIM1200 Use the VOL UP VOL DOWN button to scroll 001 001 EXT CONTACT Select Flex button 1 2 for the desired External Control contact circuit Flex 1 Door Unlock NO1 1 1 Press the SAVE button to save any changes 2 3 12 4 RSGM Alarm Attribute PGM Code 433 The RSGM incorporates circuitry to monitor an external contact This contact is most often employed as an Alarm indicator or Doorbell The Alarm attributes define the operation of the monitoring circuitry For the Alarm the signal to the RSGM stations can be repeating or a single burst the former is often desired For the Doorbell a single tone is sent each time the contact activates Refer to Table 2 3 12 4 1 for a description of the features the data entries required and LCD displays for each attribute PROCEDURE RSGM ALARM ATTR 1 Press the PGM button and dial 433 ENTER RANGE 001 035 Use the dial pad to enter the RSGM device number 01 13 for the iPECS Micro 01 25 for the iPECS 50 01 35 for the MFIM100 001 150 for the MFIM300 PRESS FLEX 1 4 and 001 300 for the MFIM600 and 001 600 for the MFIM1200 Refer to Table 2 3 12 4 1 Press Flex button 1 4 for the desired attribute refer to Table 2 3 12 4 1 DISPLAY Use the dial pad to enter the required data refer to Table 2 3 12 4 1 Press the SAVE button to save any changes Table 2 3 12 4 1 RSGM ALARM ATTR
105. Fast 2 H323 TUNNEL MODE H 323 IP calls can be set up using the H 245 0 OFF Off 1 0N 0 OFF OFF encapsulation Tunneling 1 ON 3 H323 DTMF PATH During a connection DTMF digits can be sent 1 Outband Out VoIP 1 0UT O IN OUTBAND in band or out of band H 245 0 Inband In VOIM 4 001 001 DIFFSERV PRETAG Diffserv pre tagging for Voice packet Note 0 63 4 CODE 00 63 04 high values may cause high packet discard levels 5 RAS USAGE Determine whether VOIM VOIP Gateway 0 OFF Off 1 0N 0 0FF OFF will be used as a GateKeeper 1 ON 6 RAS MULTICAST IP Multi cast IP address for RAS Information of IP Address 224 0 1 41 224 0 1 41 Gatekeeper 7 Ras MuLTicast Port Multi cast IP Port for RAS Informationof IpPot 178 00001 65535 00001 Gatekeeper 8 RAS UNICAST IP Uni cast IP address for RAS Information of IP Address 82 134 80 2 82 134 80 2 Gatekeeper 9 fRas untcast porr Unicast IP Port for RAS Informationof IPPot 1719 00001 65535 00001 Gatekeeper 10 RAS KEEP ALIVE TM The time between exchange of RAS 001 999 120 001 999 120 sec Information between GK and VOIM SEC 11 RAS NUM PLAN PREFIX The numbering plan for Calling Number in Number RAS Setup 24 digits 12 RAS GATEWAY ID The GateKeeper ID This can be 128 ONLY POSSIBLE BY WEB AD programmed only via WEB Admin Character 13 RAS LIGHT RRQ The system can be assigned to use the 0 OFF OFF 1 O0N 0 OFF OFF simple RRQ Registration Request messa
106. Flexible Numbering Plan part A to D PGM CODES 106 to 109 in section 2 3 2 5 SYSTEM ID PRESS FLEX KEY 1 5 See Table 2 3 1 1 DISPLAY Table 2 3 1 1 SYSTEM ID PGM 100 Btn DISPLAY REMARK RANGE DEFAULT 1 COUNTRY CODE Refer to Table 2 3 1 2 below Note system 4 digits 1 1 must be re initialized if changed 2 CUSTOMER SITE NAME Refer to Table 2 1 2 1 for alphanumeric dial 23 pad entries character 3 MY AREA CODE Enter the area code of the installed site 6 digits 4 NUMBERING PLAN 1 8 Refer to Appendix B for details of Numbering 1 8 1 Plan selection 5 SYSTEM ID Returns the System Id to default SYSTEM RESET 2 3 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Table 2 3 1 2 COUNTRY CODES COUNTRY CODE COUNTRY CODE COUNTRY CODE America 1 Argentina 54 Australia 61 Bahrain 973 Bangladesh 880 Belgium 32 Bolivia 591 Brazil 55 Brunei 673 Burma 95 Cameroon 237 Chile 56 China Taiwan 886 CIS 7 Colombia 57 Costa Rica 506 Cyprus 357 Czech 42 Denmark 45 Ecuador 593 Egypt 20 El Salvador 503 Ethiopia 251 Fiji 679 Finland 358 France 33 Gabon 241 Germany 49 Ghana 233 Greece 30 Guam 671 Guatemala 502 Guyana 592 Haiti 509 Honduras 504 Hong Kong 852 India 91 Indonesia 62 lran 98 Iraq 964 Ireland 353 Israel 972 Italy 39 Japan 81
107. Forward No Answer Timer 0 tseo 000 600 M Cut OfF Timer D__ Kimin 00 99 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Figure 3 5 2 12 1 Station Timers Internet Certain timers can be assigned on a station basis Available timers description and valid inputs are given in Table 3 5 2 12 1 Table 3 5 2 12 1 STATION TIMERS PGM 123 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Station Forward No This timer determines the duration the station will ring 000 600 000 Answer Timer prior to Ring No Answer Forward This setting affects seconds both manual and Preset Call Forward and overrides the System No answer forward timer section 3 5 5 20 Cut Off Timer Allowed length of CO IP calls when station is assigned 00 99 00 Call Time restriction in Station Attributes II PGM CODE 112 minutes button 3 3 43 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 124 Selecting Linked Station will display the Linked Station input page Figure 3 5 2 13 1 Select the Station Order range above the table header Input the data for the linked station and click the save button Selecting the blue colored text in the Table header will sort the table based on the selected column Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm iPECSHVD96M E 0Ap APRIOS Boot Version 1 04h
108. Groups for clarity a single RTP Relay Group should be used within a Zone Table 3 5 12 2 1 DEVICE ZONE ATTRIBUTES ATTRIBUTE REMARK RANGE DEFAULT Device Password Registration password assigned in device for Remote 12 digits max none stand alone device only Diff Serv MFIM assigned code point will take precedence Applies 0 63 4 to all devices 3 208 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance identifying the device Zone i e Branch1 Issue 5 0 Nation Code National location of the device Available selections are Country Code MFIM given in Table 2 3 1 2 Language Code Devices default language The language selection type Language Code Nation is this default language or English dependent Codec Type The codec selection method can be defined as device Board based Board based based see PGM CODE 132 or based on the codec type or Zone assigned to the Zone RTP Relay Group Assigns the RTP Relay group employed by the device 00 15 00 Zone parameters define the VOIM to employ no relay Page Area Group Assigns the Paging Area group identity to relay paging 00 15 00 data across the network using VOIM or Paging Agent same paging relay area VSF VMIM GW Slot Assigns the VSF VMIM used to support Voice Mail for a Seq device The VSF VMIM must be under control of the same MFIM as the device being assigned Select Multi User recorded language prompt is played to the user Type of prompt De
109. Hunt Number Overflow Destination VSF Announce C 0 Drop SYS SPD C Systera Speed Dial Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved 01 70 Internet Figure 3 5 6 3 1 Terminal amp Circular Group Attributes Table 3 5 6 3 1 TERMINAL amp CIRCULAR GROUP ATTRIBUTES ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT VSF Announce 1 Timer If all stations in the group are busy when a call is 000 999 015 offered the call may continue to wait queue for an seconds available station If the queue period exceeds the VSF Announce 1 timer the call is sent to a VSF announcement If the timer is set to 000 the call will receive the first announcement in full prior to the hunt process guaranteed announcement 3 137 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Guar Annc Timer 0 Wait If When a call assigned to receive a guaranteed OFF ON Busy announcement arrives and all channels are busy the ON call may wait with Ringback until a channel is available ON or bypass the announcement OFF VSF Announce 2 Timer After the 1st announcement the 2nd ANNC TMR is 000 999 000 activated At expiration if the call remains queued to seconds the group the call is sent to the assigned 2nd VSF announcement VSF Announce 1 Location The Station Group can be assigned an 0
110. IP address should be sent Otherwise the firewall IP address should be sent ON Send firewall IP address OFF Send Non firewall Internal IP address Transit Out Auth COS When there s a transit out call request from slave Yes No system user by seizing CO line apply COS according to No the authorization code SMDR Dgt Hide Determine to display dialed digit of transit out call or not Yes No at the slave system it can contain authorization code No im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Re PGM CODE 325 Selecting Network Feature Code Table returns the data entry page Figure 3 5 9 5 1 Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm SS SESS SSS lt Copyright C 2006 by LC Nortel Co Lid All Rights Reserved Issue 5 0 Figure 3 5 9 5 1 Network Feature Code Table Table 3 5 9 5 1 NETWORK FEATURE CODE TABLE EXT PAGE ZONE 1 2 ALL CALL PAGE ZONE INT 1 EXT 2 ALL 3 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Net Feature Code Networking Feature Code programming for Networking 16 digits None paging call Net Feature Destination INT PAGE ZONE N A MFIM100 1 10 MFIM300 MFIM600 MFIM1200 1 35 1
111. Include DAY 1 MAX 12 Digits Include DAY 1 MAX 12 Digits Include DAY 1 MAX 12 Digits Include DAY 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Night Night Night Night Night Night Night 1 Timed Ring 1 1 1 1 1 1 Night 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Timed Ring Timed Ring Timed Ring Timed Ring 1 Y Timed Ring 1 Y Timed Ring Timed Ring Timed Ring Timed Ring Timed Ring Timed Ring Timed Ring 1 M lt CESARE LCR Control Attribute P220 MAX 12 Digits Include DAY LCR LDT LCR DMT LCR Table Initialization P223 Toll Exception Tab Night Night Night Night Night MAX 12 Digits Include DAY MAX 12 Digits Include DAY MAX 12 Digits Include DAY MAX 12 Digits Include DAY MAX 12 Digits Include DAY CCR Table P223 MAX 12 Digits Include DAY Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved SNS N16 sis Emergency Code Table P226 MEIE IESE SEI SS SSIES SE RE Re EN NN I lt iis Internet Figure 3 5 8 7 1 Authorization Code Table Authorization codes are employed to con
112. Internal or External 1 Ext Music 1 The LM incorporates circuitry to monitor an external contact This contact is most often employed as an Alarm indicator or Doorbell The Alarm attributes define the operation of the monitoring circuitry For the Alarm the signal to the LM stations can be repeating or a single burst the former is often desired For the Doorbell a single tone is sent each time the contact activates TNET LM ALARM ATTR ENTER BIN NO 01 15 LM 01 ALARM ATTR PRESS FLEX KEY 1 4 Refer to Table 2 3 11 7 1 DISPLAY Table 2 3 11 7 1 ALARM ATTRIBUTES PGM 336 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 ALARM ENABLE This parameter enables the external contact 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 OFF OFF monitoring circuitry 1 ON 2 ALARM CONTACT TYPE This parameter establishes the contact state 0 Open CLOSE 1 CLOSE 0 OPEN CLOSE that will activate the Alarm close or open 1 Close 3 ALARM DOORBELL MODE The contact can be treated to function as a 0 Bell ALARM 1 ALARM 0 BELL ALARM doorbell instead of an alarm 1 Alarm 4 ALARM SIGNAL MODE The assigned stations will receive a 0 Once RPT 1 RPT O ONCE RPT Repeating signal or single burst ONCE of 1 Repeat alarm tone 2 139 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 2 3 12 RSGM amp Remote Device Data PGM CODES 430 435 The RSGM
113. LED FLASH RATE TABLE Flash Rate DESCRIPTION Steady On 30 ipm flash 830 On 60 ipm flash 30 On 60 ipm double wink 30 On Off On Off 7 amp 0 On oy JV N 240 ipm flash 30 On 3 102 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Flash Rate DESCRIPTION 240 ipm flutter 30 On Off On Off On amp 70 Off 480 ipm flash 30 On 480 ipm flutter 30 On Off On Off On amp 70 Off 15 ipm flash 30 On 120 ipm flash 30 On 120 ipm flutter 30 On Off On Off On amp 70 Off 30 ipm double flash 30 On Off On amp 70 Off 480 ipm double wink 30 On Off On Off 7 amp 0 On 480 ipm double flash 830 On Off On amp 70 Off 3 103 Issue 5 0 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 171 Selecting Music Sources will display the Music Sources data entry page Figure 3 5 5 11 1 iPECS Web Services Windows Internet Explorer G ED v htp 192 168 123 44 a index htm ffx Nave de iPECS Web Services A m E HOA Gro Td System Attributes 160 161 System Password 162 Attribute Value Alarm Attributes 163 BGM Type Internal External Music 1 x Attendant Assignment 164 MOH Type InternavExternal Music 1 Multicast RTP RTCP 165 internal External Music internal i J DISA COS 166 DID DISA Destination 167 SLT M
114. Line Attributes P15 Copyright C 2006 by LGC Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 4 6 1 NA ISDN Line Attributes To comply with the North American ISDN standards certain attributes must be defined for the system These include Directory telephone Number and Service Profile Id SPID for the device Note that this programming is required only for Country Code 1 USA installations Refer to Table 3 5 4 6 1 for information on individual attributes Table 3 5 4 6 1 NA ISDN LINE ATTRIBUTES ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Local Exchange Type The type of PSTN determines several specifics of the NI 1 NI 1 protocol and is required for proper operation NI 2 5 ESS Nortel 3 71 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT SPID Number The Service Profile Identifier SPID is a number assigned 20 digits to a fully initializing ISDN terminal and enables the Stored Program Control switching System SPCS to identify the ISDN terminal at layer 3 of the D channel signaling protocol The SPID is a free formatted numeric string composed of 9 to 20 numeric 0 9 International Alphabet IA5 characters The SPID uniquely identifies a particular set of subscription parameters assigned to a TSP Directory Number Initializing terminals are required to store a 7 digit DN in 20 digits order to perform the compatibility
115. Local MFIM LM In this way the CM maintains control of the remote device Should the WAN connection between an LM and CM fail polling error the LM will initiate operational control of the locally registered devices Calls between the systems CM and LM can automatically shift to PSTN Modules registered with the LM for Fail over operation The configuration and characteristics of LMs and CM are configurable as is Fail over operation 3 198 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 330 Selecting Tnet Basic Attributes will display the Tnet Basic Attributes page Figure 3 5 11 1 1 iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DER File Edit Yiew Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm E Log Out Tnet CM attribut Tnet LM attributes P33 Copyright C 2006 by LG Noriel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 11 1 1 TNET Basic Attributes Each MFIM in a Central Control network environment must be enabled for TNET operation in order to function as part of the network 3 199 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 5 11 2 Tnet M Attribute Re PGM CODE 331 Selecting Tnet CM attributes will display the Tnet CM Attributes page Figure 3 5 11 2 1 F iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help SS http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm Attribute
116. MFIM GS98N E 0Dt MAY 09 t Version 1 042 09 Boot Version 1 0A4a JAN 09 Attribute Value anne E I PPP Destination ooo Station Number F User ID 1 jikppp0 MAX 12 Chars ystemm II b I User Password 1 MAX 12 Chars F User ID 2 j likppp02 MAX 12 Chars I User Password 2 MAX 12 Chars I PPPIP Addr i T PPP PtoP IP Addr Copyright C 2008 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Figure 3 5 7 6 1 PPP Attributes In addition to remote access via an IP network connection the system database may be accessed remotely via an ISDN connection Placing a call over an ISDN Line to the designated PPP Station will provide a connection to the system database The system will request a user id and password which must match one of the User Ids and passwords assigned After matching id and password are received the iPECS Home page is provided and Web Admin is available as explained earlier in this section 3 Table 3 5 7 6 1 PPP ATTRIBUTES ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT PPP Destination If the incoming capability is 64 Kbps unrestricted Station None digital and the called party number matches the PPP number destination the system will automatically answer the call and request PPP ID and password User ID 1 System accepts this PPP ID 1 12 Character likppp01 User Password 1 The password entered is used to authori
117. Multicast for BLF service 0 0 0 0 Net Trans Rcl timer Network transfer fault recall timer to be used when no 001 300 10 responses from other systems msec 3 186 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT NET Reroute CO Group The start times for Day Night and start and end times MFIM amp 0 for Timed modes are entered for each day of week MFIM100 amp After Timed end time the mode goes to day if time is IPECS less than Night mode Micro amp IPECS 50 00 20 Other MFIM 00 72 3 187 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 322 Selecting Network CO Line Attributes will display the Network CO Line Group entry page Figure Enter the desired data and click Load to display the Network CO Line Group Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm TT et iPECSNVDS6M E 0Ap APRIDS Boot Version 1 0Ah JAN OT Enter Co Range CO Range From 1 to 1 Attribute Networking CO Group Network CO Line Type Save Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 9 3 1 Network CO Line Attributes Table 3 5 9 3 1 NETWORK CO LINE ATTRIBUTES ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Net CO Group Networking CO group programm
118. Name 32 characters D 7 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button SUB MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Authentication User Password 18 digits Contact Number Station number Asc Station Number Station number User ID Register Register Register Provision User ID Usage 1 ON 0 OFF OFF Ring Route Type User ID User ID Station Ring Assignment DID station Conversion DID Conversion Type loo 1 Use as is 2 Convert 3 Use Flex Table Number of Digits 2 4 Expected 2 4 2 from DID Circuit DID Digit Mask 4digits 0 9 ee TABLE D 4 BOARD GATEWAY DATA Button SUB MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK PGM Code 130 H 323 VoIP Attributes l 1 H323 Setup Mode 0 1 0 0 Fast 1 Normal 2 H323 Tunneling Mode 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 0 Off 1 On 3 H323 DTMF Path 0 1 MFIM Out 1 Out 0 In VOIM Inband 4 H323 DiffServ Pre tagging 00 63 4 5 RAS Usage 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 6 RAS Multi cast IP Address IP address 224 0 1 41 l 7 RAS Multi cast IP port Port number 1718 l 8 RAS Uni cast IP Address IP address 82 134 80 2 9 RAS Uni cast IP port Port number 1719 10 RAS Keep alive Timer 001 999 120 1 second increments 11 RAS Numbering Plan prefix 24 digits 12 RAS Gateway Id 128 characters Web Admin only 13 RAS Light RRQ 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 14 TCP Keep Alive 1 ON 0 OFF ON PGM Code 131 T1 PRI Attributes 1 T1 Setup Mode 0 1 D4 0 D4 1 ESF 2 T1 Line Mode 0 1 B8ZS 0 B8ZS 1 AMI 3 PRI Line Mode 0 1 ME O NT 1 NT 4 PRI CRC Check
119. Network CO Line Attributes Network Numbering Plan Table Network Feature Code Table Tnet Basic Attributes Tnet CM attributes Tnet LM attributes Tnet FoPSTN table Tnet Control Contact Tnet Music Alarm Station User Login DECT Registration DECT Attibutes Initialization F 3 3 rf v z S F F i Fi 3 LCR Control Attribute LCR LDT LCR DMT LCR Table Initialization Toll Exception Table Emergency Code Table Authorization Code Table Customer Call Routing Table Executive Secretary Table Flexible DID Conversion Table System Speed Zone Table Auto Ring Mode Table oice Mail Dialing Table Registration Table Mobile Extension Table RSGM device Table RSGM Music Address RSGM Alarm Attibute Device Zone Number Device Zone Att Access amp Page Relay Zone Attribute Zone RTP Relay Group Inter Zone Attribute Zone Holiday Assignment n c D oi e im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 File Upload amp Remote Upgrade a Ty All Database LCR Table System Speed Dial Station Speed Dial Networking Data Station Group Data System Data Flexible Numbering Plan Station Flexible Buttons RSGM Table Toll Table MSN Table Flexible DID Table Password Data Mobile Extension Table ICLID Table Figure 1 6 1 Admin Menu Structure im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 While in the PROGRAM MODE the Liquid Crystal Display LCD and Flex button LEDs of a
120. Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 14 1 Initialization 3 221 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 450 Selecting Initialization will display the Initialization Table data entry page Figure 3 5 14 1 1 F iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DAR File Edit Yiew Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm ia All Database Flexible Numbering Plan Station Data CO Line Data System Data Station Group Data ISDN Tables System Timer Toll Tables LCR Data Other Tables Flexible Button Networking Data SIP Data PGIM126 PGM133 Tnet Data PGM330 PGM333 Zone Data PGM436 PGM441 PGM444 Remote Phone CO G W Registration PGIM442 Station User Login PGM443 3 a a 9 9 a 9 9 A 9 aan Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 14 1 1 Initialization Menu The system has been pre programmed with certain features using the default data The default data are loaded into memory when the system is initialized The system should always be initialized when first installed or the database appears corrupted The system can be initialized manually during installation refer to the iPECS Description amp Installation Manual section 4 4 2 After Initialization the system should be reset
121. ON or bypass the announcement 17 ACD 622 MAX QUE C CNT When the number of calls queued to the 00 99 99 00 99 99 group match this parameter new calls will receive error tone and be disconnected after the VSF AA announcement if assigned is played 18 ACD 622 SUPERVISOR Any valid IP Phone can be assigned as a Station Supervisor max 5 ACD Supervisors 19 100 110 123 124 ACD Group members may be assigned a 0 9 0 0 0 0 0 priority 0 9 Members with the highest priority are sent calls ahead of lower priority members This field is the same as PGM CODE 112 btn 16 20 acD 622 ACD _DND W_TmR ACD agents are placed in the Wrap up 002 200 sec 010 002 200 010 mode for the Wrap up timer duration after call completion OFF 22 GROUP NAME An ACD group name can be designated 12 character btn 1 23 for the attribute desired 23 ACD 622 CIQ ROUTE CCR for ACD Calls in queue permits FLEX 1 FLEX PRESS FLEX KEY 01 10 caller to re route the call by dialing a 10 single digit The destination is assigned to Flex button 1 10 for digits 1 9 amp 0 23 1 ACD 622 CIQ ROUTE When an ACD call is queued and the 23 10 INPUT 1 NOT ASSIGNED caller may exit this queue by entering one digit The queued call can be routed to station hunt system speed bin or network station Dial 1 Enter a station number Dial 2 Enter a hunt group number Dial 3 Enter
122. OUT OF OFFICE RETURN AT TIME HH MM Must be 4 Digits OUT OF OFFICE RETURN AT DATE MM DD Must be 4 Digits OUT OF OFFICE RETURN UNKNOWN CALL TO STATION Phone Number IN OFFICE STATION Station Number IN A MEETING TIME HH MM Must be 4 Digits AT HOME AT BRANCH OFFICE SYSTEM CUSTOM MESSAGE unregistered message SYSTEM CUSTOM MESSAGE unregistered message SYSTEM CUSTOM MESSAGE unregistered message SYSTEM CUSTOM MESSAGE unregistered message SYSTEM CUSTOM MESSAGE unregistered message SYSTEM CUSTOM MESSAGE unregistered message POTENT Ohl My i nresistered messase Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Pre Select Message http 150 150 131 21 1 ANCHORZ024 Internet Figure 3 8 5 1 Pre selected Message A user can select a message to be displayed on the LCD of a calling iPECS Phone There are ten pre defined messages index 1 10 several allow for auxiliary information such as a time date or number A user may activate Custom Display Messaging to send a custom text message to the LCD of a calling iPECS Phone Up to 11 Custom Messages ten system level and one for each user may be entered in the system database System level Custom Messages index 11 20 may be entered from the Attendant or Administrator s phone or via the Admin amp Maintenance Web page The User s Custom Message in
123. P152 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 4 9 1 DCOB CO Line Attributes Table 3 5 4 9 1 DCOB LINE ATTRIBUTES ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Line Status Send Line status information to PX when a call 1 9 6 routed to subscriber before the called party is ringing DNIS Service In R2 determine whether system will send caller ON OFF OFF information to PX or not Number of CLI Digits In R2 Gateway request CLI Digit to PX 01 15 10 DCOB Type According to this type the line can be restricted to 0 2 2 seize CO line for outgoing call Call Category In R2 signaling category signal used by iPECS is 1 9 1 defined here 3 79 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Selecting the System Data program group returns the sub menu displayed in Figure 3 5 5 1 Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit view Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm a Tad m iPECS VD96M E 0Ap APRIOS Boot Version 1 0Ah JANIOF System Attributes P160 161 System Password P162 Web Administration Alam Attnbutes P163 Attendant Assignment P164 LIK300 Version iPECS VD96M E 0Ap APR 08 Multicast RTP RTCP P165 DISA COS P166 DID DISA Destination P167 External Control Contacts P163 LCD Display Mode P169 LED Flashing Rate P170 Music Sources P17 PBX Acce
124. Page Zone to receive CIQ 2 Announcement 00 15 or 00 Zone 00 40 CIQ 2 Page Alert Delay Delay timer for CIQ 2 Announcement 000 180 015 Time CIQ 2 Page Alert Repeat Interval for repeating the CIQ 2 Announcement 000 180 025 Time CIQ 3 Page Alert If the queued call count exceeds the threshold the 00 99 30 Threshold system plays the CIQ 3 Announcement to the CIQ 3 Page Zone after the CIQ 3 Announcement Delay Timer Announcements are repeated at intervals of the CIQ 3 Announcement Repeat Timer CIQ 3 Page Alert VSF announcement number for the CIQ 3 00 70 Message Number Announcement CIQ 3 Page Alert Page Page Zone to receive the CIQ 3 Announcement 00 15 or 00 Zone 00 40 CIQ 3 Page Alert Delay Delay timer for the CIQ 3 Announcement 000 180 015 Time CIQ 3 Page Alert Repeat Interval for repeating the CIQ 3 Announcement 000 180 005 3 142 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT ACD Agent Priority ACD Group members may be assigned a priority 0 9 Members with the highest priority are sent calls ahead of lower priority members 0 9 0 Forced Forward Destination Calls to a hunt group may forward directly to a defined destination bypassing the hunt process Forced Forward below must be enabled Sta NET Hunt grp VSF Annc Sys Speed Forced Forward Calls to a hunt group may forward directly to a d
125. Phone H S Receive Gain Control IPKT Rx Gain Flex 1 8 PGM Code 401 IP Phone H F Receive Gain Conirol IPKT Rx Gain Flex 1 8 PGM Code 402 SLTM Receive Gain Control SLTM Rx Gain Flex 1 8 PGM Code 403 ACOB Receive Gain Conirol ACOB Rx Gain Flex 1 8 PGM Code 404 DCOB Receive Gain Control DCOB Rx Gain Flex 1 8 PGM Code 405 VSF Receive Gain Control VSF Rx Gain Flex 1 8 PGM Code 406 External Page Receive Gain Control Ext Page Rx Gain Flex 1 8 PGM Code 420 System Tone Cadence Sys Tone Cadence 01 37 PGM Code 421 System Tone Frequency Sys Tone Frequency 01 37 PGM Code 422 Tone Generation Gain Tone Generation Gain 01 37 PGM Code 423 ACNR Tone Cadence ACNR Tone Cadence 1 5 PGM Code 424 ACNR Ring Frequency gt ACNR Ring Frequency 1 5 PGM Code 425 SLT Tone Cadence SLT Tone Cadence 1 2 PGM Code 426 DTMF PCM Tone Generation Gain DTMF PCM Tone Generation Gain 1 5 PGM Code 427 DTMF RTP Tone Generation Gain DTMF RTP Tone Generation Gain 1 4 PGM Code 429 LGCM Configuration LGCM Configuration Type 1 5 TABLE D 12 RSGM DATA Button SUB MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK PGM Code 430 RSGM and Associated Device Information 1 RSGM IP Address IP address 0 0 0 0 2 RSGM MAC Address MAC address Not Assigned 3 RSGM Associated IP Phone Station None 4 RSGM Associated SLT Station None 5 RSGM Associated CO Line CO Line None PGM Code 431 RSGM Multi cast Port D 26 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Ma
126. RAS MultiCast IP Port bms o 1 65535 RAS MultiCast IP Address 224 0141 RAS UniCast IP Port 1719 1 65535 RAS UniCast IP Address 82 134 80 2 RAS Keep Alive Time 120 001 999 1sec RAS Number Plan Prefix Max 24 Digits RAS Light RRQ Usage RAS Gate Way ID 128Char TCP Keep Alive Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 3 1 1 H323 VoIP Attributes Except for the MFIM600 MFIM1200 MFIMs incorporate a 6 channel VoIP gateway The optional VOIM8 provides up to 8 VoIP channels and the VOIM24 provides up to 24 VOIP channels These VOIP channels are used for Distributed Networking access to SIP or H 323 networks and for remote iPECS devices When the standard a H 323 VoIP protocol is employed for an external VoIP call several attributes of these channels can be assigned The H 323 call set up mode and tunneling H 245 Encapsulation can be established Also for H 323 support a RAS Registration Admissions and Status channel can be defined The RAS channel IP addresses uni cast and multi cast as well as the IP port Numbering Plan and other H 323 set up characteristics are defined This page also allows setting the IP TOS bit for Diffserv a commonly recognized packet 3 52 im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance prioritization
127. RTP Relay Device Utilization For Both Side Sre RTP Relay GW Slot Seq Max 3 Digits Dest RTP Relay GW Slot Seg O O Max 3 Digits Max Inter Zone Conns 0 0 300 0 No Limit Zone Holiday Assigument 444 A Device Zone Number 436 x Device Zone Attr 437 Access amp Page Relay 43 Zone Attribute 439 Zone RTP Relay Group 440 x x x x Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Lid All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 12 6 1 Inter Zone Attributes Inter Zone Attributes define RTP packet relay treatment for communications between devices in different Zones Table 3 5 12 6 1 INTER ZONE ATTRIBUTES ATTRIBUTE REMARK RANGE DEFAULT Codec Type Not Assigned RTP Relay Rule Assigns when to use the packet relay function between If needed If needed Zones with If Need the MFIM will automatically RTP Relay Group determine when to use packet relay while RTP Relay Group will always implement packet relay for RTP packets between the Zones 3 214 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 RTP Relay Device Assigns how to employ the Source and Destination VoIP Both Both Sides Utilization channels The assigned Source channels may be used Separate for both sides of the communication or separately only for a device in the Source Zone The Destination channels ar
128. RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 16 0000 9999 8136 8136 8137 8137 20 M CAST RTP I PAGE 17 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 17 0000 9999 8138 8138 8139 8139 21 M CAST RTP I PAGE 18 RTP and RTOP ports for Internal Page 18 0000 9999 8140 8140 8141 8141 22 M CAST RTP I PAGE 19 RTP and RTOP ports for Internal Page 19 0000 9999 8142 8142 8143 8143 23 M CAST RTP I PAGE 20 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 20 0000 9999 8144 8144 8145 8145 24 M CAST RTP I PAGE 21 RTP and RTOP ports for Internal Page 21 0000 9999 8146 8146 8147 8147 25 M CAST RTP I PAGE 22 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 22 0000 9999 8148 8148 8149 8149 26 M CAST RTP I PAGE 23 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 23 0000 9999 8150 8150 8151 8151 27 M CAST RTP I PAGE 24 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 24 0000 9999 8152 8152 8153 8153 28 M CAST RTP I PAGE 25 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 25 0000 9999 8154 8154 8155 8155 29 M CAST RTP I PAGE 26 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 26 0000 9999 8156 8156 8157 8157 30 M CAST RTP I PAGE 27 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 27 0000 9999 8158 8158 8159 8159 31 M CAST RTP I PAGE 28 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 28 0000 9999 8160 8160 8161 8161 32 M CAST RTP I PAGE 29 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 29 0000 9999 8162 8162 8163 8163 33 M CAST RTP I PAGE 30 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 30 0000 9999 8164 8164 8165 8165 2 7
129. Register Enable IP Address L Connect IPKTS Port number 5588 0001 9999 Total no of port 000 999 Polling Count 00 99 Polling Interval 00 99 Tnet Basic Attributes P330 Tnet LM attributes P332 Tnet FoPSTN table P333 Tnet Control Contact P334 Tnet Music Alarm P3 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 11 2 1 TNET CM Attributes Each LM Local MFIM which is part of a Central Control Network must be defined with the IP Address of the CM Central MFIM as well as the LM configuration data that will be sent to the CM at the time the LM registers with the CM Total port counts define the ports which are allocated in the CM database for use by devices registered to the LM The number of ports defined in the database of each LM must be equal or less than the ports defined in the CM for the LM see PGM CODE 332 in order to register properly Table 3 5 11 2 1 TNET CM ATTRIBUTES ATTRIBUTE REMARK RANGE DEFAULT Register This field informs the LM to attempt registration with the CM This field 0 OFF OFF Enable must be set to ON for proper registration 1 ON IP Address This field defines the IP address of the CM that will be used by the LM IPv4 address 3 200 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 IPKTS Port In the TNET environment the IP KTS prot
130. Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 201 Selecting CLIP COLP Table will display the CLIP COLP Table Attributes data entry page Figure 3 5 7 2 1 Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm IPECSND96M E DAp APRIOS Boot Version 1 04h JAN OT Table COLP Table 0 MAX 10 Digits include and COLPTable1 MAZ 10 Digits include and COLPTabe2 MAX 10 Digits include and COLPTale3 MAX 10 Digits include and COLP Tbhe4 MAX 10 Digits include and COLP Table 5 MAX 10 Digits include and COLP Table 6 MAX 10 Digits include and COLP Tbe MAX 10 Digits include and COLP Tbes MAX 10 Digits include and ISDN Attributes P200 COLPTable9 MAX 10 Digits include and COLP Table 10 MAX 10 Digits include and MSN Table P202 COLP Table 11 MAX 10 Digits include and ICLID Route Table P203 COLPTeble 12 MAX 10 Digits include and ICLID Ring Assignment P204 COLPTable 13 MAX 10 Digits include and __PPP Attributes P205 COLPTable14 MAX 10 Digits include and MOREE NERTI a COLP Table15 MAX 10 Digits include and COLP Table 16 MAX 10 Digits include and O
131. Reroute Busy Destination Flex 1 3 Flex 1 Tone F1 Tone F2 Attendant F3 Hunt 6 Reroute Error Destination Flex 1 3 Flex 1 Tone F1 Tone F2 Attendant F3 Hunt 7 Reroute No Answer Destination Flex 1 3 Flex 1 Tone F1 Tone F2 Attendant F3 Hunt PGM Code 168 External Control Contacts 1 First Contact 1 4 1 LBC 2 Door 3 Ext 1 4 Ext 2 2 Second Contact 1 4 1 LBC 2 Door 3 Ext 1 4 Ext 2 3 Third Contact 1 4 1 LBC 2 Door 3 Ext 1 4 Ext 2 4 Forth Contact 1 4 1 LBC 2 Door 3 Ext 1 4 Ext 2 PGM Code 169 LCD Date Time amp Language Mode 1 Date Display Mode 1 MMDDYY DDMMYY 0 DDMMYY 2 Time Display Mode 1 12H 0 24H 12H 3 Language Display Mode 00 14 00 Eng 4 Weekday Display Mode 0 2 0 0 PGM 169 BTN 1 1 MM DD WDY 2 MM DD WDY PGM Code 170 Flexible Button LED Flashing Rate 1 CO Incoming Ring Flashing Rate 00 14 2 30 IPM 2 CO Transfer Ring Flashing Rate 00 14 10 120 IPM 3 CO Queue Ring Flashing Rate 00 14 6 240 IPM Flutter 4 CO Recall Ring Flashing Rate 00 14 7 480 IPM Flutter 5 CO Hold Flashing Rate 00 14 12 30 IPM WINK 6 CO System Hold Flashing Rate 00 14 3 60 IPM 7 CO Exclusive Hold Flashing Rate 00 14 10 120 IPM 8 CO Out going disabled Flashing Rate 00 14 6 240 IPM Flutter 9 CO incoming call off net forward 00 14 6 240 IPM Flashing Rate Flutter 10 CO DISA Indication Flashing Rate 00 14 5 240 IPM 11 CO supplementary call waiting Flashing 00 14 6 240 IPM Rate Flutter 12 CO Supplem
132. Reserved Internet Figure 3 6 3 1 Upgrade Process View 3 232 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 The VSF Prompt Upgrade View provides a status window refer to Figure 3 6 4 1 VSF Prompt Upgrade Process View for VSF prompt upgrade activity in process Note that up to three prompt files one for each supported language can be uploaded to the VSF or VMIM Dok iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm Select Voice Prompt File and Wait for Uploading to End Position Versin First KR10Ba Second KR104a Third NO PPT Don t Use Space Character in File Name First w Browse Upload Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Done Internet ee Figure 3 6 4 1 VSF Prompt Upgrade Process View 3 233 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 The following are screens associated with Upload and download of VSF prompts and Greetings Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm Ju Select System Greeting Message and Wait for Uploading to End Valid File Name 1 wav 72 wav or x_l wav x_72 wav x 1 3 Message should be G 711 u law wave file format Don t Use Space Character in File Name girs Browse Upload Co
133. Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 5 10 1 LED Flashing Rate The LED flash rate for various functions and states can be assigned any one of the system s 15 signals The various functions and states are shown in Table 3 5 5 10 1 The 15 flash signals available in the system are shown in Table 3 5 5 10 2 Table 3 5 5 10 1 LED INDICATION ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT CO Incoming Ring CO button Incoming ring flashing 00 14 FLASH 30 IPM rate 2 CO Transfer Ring CO button transfer ring flashing 00 14 FLASH 120 IPM rate 10 COL Queue Ring CO button queue call back ring 00 14 FLASH 240 IPM FLUTTER flashing rate 6 COL RCL Ring CO button recall ring flashing rate 00 14 FLASH 480 IPM FLUTTER 7 COL Hold Ring CO button hold flashing rate 00 14 FLASH 30 IPM WINK 12 COL System Hold Ring CO button system hold flashing rate 00 14 FLASH 60 IPM 3 3 101 im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT COL Exclusive Hold Ring CO button exclusives hold flashing 00 14 FLASH 120 IPM rate 10 COL Outgoing Disabled CO button outgoing disabled 00 14 FLASH 240 IPM FLUTTER flashing rate 6 COL Incoming Offnet CFW CO button incoming off net call 00 14 FLASH 240 IPM FLUTTER forward flashing rate 6 COL DISA Indication CO button DISA indication flashing 00 14 FLASH 240 IPM r
134. Scenano stan co Th Stan Co tine Sconatio End CO fo End Coline Caller ID NIA x Max 23 Oige San Date eng Date I YYYYMWIDO format Time Condition i MONT TUEN weol THU FRI Sat SUNT Aau Hoia eal Stan Time End Tene sconone bed apis Destination NA DEST Valve Destination tpe and value Scenario Priority 0 9 Onighest priority 4 Scenario Active OFF w Scenario EnableDivable p L aA ama je ir Bl Daeiinidanissaneiiro avaa Sonaria Gos E Scenano DISAACTIVE OFF w DISA Enadie Scenario ICM_Grp b Tenancy Group No Figure 3 5 5 299 1 System Call Routing This Web page displays system call routing configurations and del Condition 1 Caller ID Os Table No 0 Idx Attribute Value Range Del Caller ID Max 23 Digits _ sij EndDate sd YYYYIMM DD format WEDI THUS FRID SAT SUNT ALLI Holiday HH MM Must be 4 digits __ End Time Ld 0000 2359 tee eee L ET EE Bee oe tiie Time Condition 2 Time 3 ICM_Grp Tenancy group 4 Zone 5 CO range Destination 1 Destination 3 131 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Destination Scenario Priority 0 Scenario Active Scenario YMID Scenario Cos Scenario DISA ACTIVE Scenario ICM_Grp Scenario ZoneNo Scenario Start CO T 2 Scinario VMID is used when Destination is VM
135. Sequence number is assigned The system uses the Sequence Number to assign logical software port numbers This Sequence Number relates the hardware and software port numbers for each gateway Module using the Modules MAC addresses When employing a Main Cabinet it may be desirable to have the logical and physical RJ21X appearances port numbers in agreement This may be accomplished by assigning Cabinet slot numbers matching the appropriate Sequence Numbers This also may be accomplished by proper installation im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 sequence of the gateway modules Table 2 3 2 3 1 provides the analog CO Line and ISDN Line port numbers based on the physical RJ 21X terminations on the Main Cabinet back plane PROCEDURE 001 002 003 004 005 006 1 Press the PGM button and dial 104 001 005 003 006 002 004 001 002 003 004 005 006 Press eee ean ee N seat Sequence eee use the ebro an uttons for the next previous set of six Sequence Num 001 005 003 006 002 004 l P 4 eee 001 002 003 004 005 006 Using the dial pad enter new slot numbers Note slot numbers cannot be duplicated and duplicates will cause an error The SPEED button may be 001 002 003 004 005 006 used to erase the slot number associated with the selected Sequence Number Press the SAVE button to store the new Slot data Table 2 3 2 3 1 RJ 21X TERMINATIONS SLOT COLINE PORT 1 1 4 5 8 g 12 13 16 17 20 21 24 25 28
136. Station none this field may be used to establish the link Enter the number secondary station number 3 45 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 125 Selecting Station ICM Group displays the Station ICM Group input page Figure 3 5 2 14 1 Select ICM Tenant Group the system will display the ICM Tenant Group Characteristics Check the appropriate box to allow access to the group and enter the station number of the group Attendant iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DAR File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm iPECSIVD96N E 0Ap APRIOS Boot Version 1 04h JAN OT Enter ICM Tenancy Group No 01 15 ICM Tenancy Group 1 ATD STA Number Access Group 1 Station Type P1 10 Ecs Groupa Station Attributes P111 113 Station ISDN Attnbutes P114 Flex Buttons P 115 129 Station COS P116 COMP Group Access P117 Internal Page Zone P113 Ptt Group Access P119 Preset Call Forward P120 Idle Line Selection P121 IP Call Access P122 Preset FWD Timer P123 Linked Station P 124 Access Group 3 Access Group 4 Access Group 5 Access Group 6 Access Group 7 Set Access Group Access Group 3 Access Group 9 Access Group 10 Access Group 11 Access Group 12 Access Group 13 Access Group 14 Access Group 15 te B 559 9 9 915 5 5 5 5 95 75 lt Station S
137. TONE Permits camp on tone to be sent to a station 0 OFF ON 1 0N 0 0FF ON when the station receives camp on request 1 ON 21 100 110 SERIAL DSS Assigns Serial DSS usage authority 0 Disable 1 1 EN 0 DIS ENABLE 1 Enable 22 100 100 DLTN 00 10 Each station can choose one of eleven dial 00 dial tone 0 DIAL TONE 00 tone sources 01 Music 1 02 Music 2 03 VSF MOH 04 SLTMOH1 05 SLTMOH2 06 SLTMOH3 07 SLTMOH4 08 SLTMOHS5 09 VSFMOh2 10 VSFMOH3 23 100 100 RBTN 00 10 Each station can choose one of eleven ring 00 ring back 0 RING BACK TONE 00 back tone sources tone 01 Music 1 02 Music 2 03 VSF MOH 04 SLTMOH1 05 SLTMOH2 06 SLTMOH3 07 SLTMOH4 08 SLTMOHS5 09 VSFMOH2 10 VSFMOH3 24 100 100 ATTACH MSG When e mail notification of a new VSF VMIM 0 OFF ON 1 0N 0 0FF ON message is enabled PGM 236 btn 7 the e 1 ON mail may include the voice mail as a wav file attachment UMS mail server IP Pam 113 btn18 amp UMS Mail Address Pam 113 btn19 are required for proper operation Table 2 3 3 2 2 STATION ATTRIBUTES II PGM 112 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 100 110 CALL TIME TN A tone can be sent periodically indicating the 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 OFF OFF elapsed time of an outgoing CO IP call The 1 ON Elapsed Call Timer PGM CODE 180 btn 19 determines the period between tones 2 22 im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance
138. Table 2 3 3 4 In addition for the iPECS DSS Console use VOL UP VOL DOWN buttons to access the next previous 24 Flex buttons Press the SAVE button to store the Flex button data entry 2 28 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Table 2 3 3 4 1 FLEX BUTTON TYPE amp VALUE CODES PGM 115 Issue 5 0 TYPE DESCRIPTION VALUE Remarks iPECS Micro MFIM300 MFIM600 MFIM1200 iPECS 50 MFIM100 1 Empty Button Empty unassigned button may be defined by the user 2 User Program PGM amp PGM amp Pam amp Pam amp Assigns button to perform a Fixed XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX User Program function from Numbering the Fixed Numbering Plan Plan Appendix C 3 SPEED xxx SPEED amp SPEED amp SPEED amp SPEED amp Station or System Speed Dial 00 19 000 099 000 099 000 099 bin 200 999 2000 4999 2000 7999 20000 31999 4 Flexible digits digits digits digits Assigns button to dial a code Numbering from the Flexible Numbering Plan Code Plan see Appendix B 5 Station or digits digits digits digits Assign network station Network number from network table Station 6 MSN digits digits digits digits Enter desired MSN Table index Table 2 3 3 4 2 iPECS PHONE BUTTON DEFAULT CONFIGURATION PGM 115 IPECS 50 MFIM100 MFIM300 MFIM600 amp MFIM1 200 Button iPECS Phone 8004 8008
139. Table P226 Authorization Code Table P227 CCR Table P223 Executive Secretary P229 Flexible DID Conversion P231 System Speed Zone P232 Voice Mail Dialing Table P234 Registration Table P235 Select Index O 15 _ Loan Auto Ring Mode Table Index 0 Week Atiribute lt amp S Range Day Start Time Must be 4 Digits HH MM 0000 2359 Night Start Time Must be 4 Digits HH MM 0000 2359 Timed Ring Start Time Must be 4 Digits HH MM 0000 2359 Timed Ring End Time Must be 4 Digits HH MM 0000 2359 Day Start Time Must be 4 Digits HH MM 0000 2359 Night Start Time Must be 4 Digits HH MM 0000 2359 Timed Ring Start Time Must be 4 Digits HH MM 0000 2359 Timed Ring End Time Must be 4 Digits HH MM 0000 2359 Day Start Time Must be 4 Digits HH MM 0000 2359 Night Start Time Must be 4 Digits HH MM 0000 2359 Timed Ring Start Time LTEVENUIU EVEIUIUENE Must be 4 Digits HH MM 0000 2359 Copyright C 2006 by LC Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Figure 3 5 8 12 1 Auto Ring Mode Table Internet The system can be programmed to automatically select the Ring and COS based on time of day and day of week Three Ring amp COS modes are available Day Timed and Night The Ring assignments are as defined in CO Ring Assignments section 3 5 4 2 COS assignments are made in Station COS and DISA
140. Timer 1sec 000 600 Carap on Recall Timer Isec 000 600 Exclusive Hold Recall Timer Bo tsec 000 600 I Hold Recall Timer Isec 000 600 System Hold Recall Timer 1sec 000 600 Transfer Recall Timer 1sec 000 600 ACNR Delay Timer 1sec 000 300 ACNR Pause Timer 1sec 030 300 ACNR Retry Counter 01 13 ACNR Tone Detect Timer 1sec 001 300 Automatic CO Release Timer 1sec 000 300 CCR Inter Digit Timer 100rmsec 000 300 Call Restrict Timer Do mn 00 99 CO Dial Delay Timer B K 100msec 00 99 CO Release Guard Timer 100msec 010 150 CO Ring Off Timer 100msec 001 150 f _ ystem Multi Language P179 System Timers P180 182 186 Web Access Authorization NTP Attributes P195 SNMP Attribute P196 Cabinet Attnbute P197 Hot Desk Attributes P250 Systera Speed Dial Ol aol yl anal uw Bi WwW bd Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved http 150 150 131 211 ANCHOR180 Internet Figure 3 5 5 20 1 System Timers A number of timers can be assigned to control and affect many features and functions Refer to Table 3 5 5 20 1 for a description of the timers and the input required Table 3 5 5 20 1 SYSTEM TIMERS ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Attendant Recall Timer Determines the amount of time the attendant 00 60 01 receives recall after which the system will minutes disconnect the call
141. Up to 10 Executive Secretary pairs can be defined for the iPECS with an iPECS Micro iPECS 50 or MFIM100 and up to 36 for the iPECS with other MFIM models An Executive may have only one Secretary however a Secretary can be assigned to multiple Executives A Secretary of one pair may be the Executive of another however assignments that form a loop back are not allowed In addition when active the Secretary can be assigned to receive the Executive s voice messages refer to Station Attributes section 3 5 2 2 The CO Call to Sec option will route all CO calls to the Executive to the defined Secretary s station regardless of the Executive s station status The Call Exec if Sec DND option will route Executive calls back to the Executive if the Secretary is in DND The Exec Grade permits higher grade Executives to override the Executive Secretary Forward feature to call a lower grade Executive Korea only The highest grade is 1 and the lowest grade is 12 The lcm Call to Sec option will route all internal calls to the Executive excecpt for calls from higher or same grade executive to the defined Secretary s station regardless of the Executive s station status 3 174 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 231 Selecting Flexible DID Conversion Table will display the Flexible DID Table data entry page Figure 3 5 8 10 1 Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DER File Edit Vie
142. Vv Direct IP Call Station Type P110 Station Attributes P111 113 Station ISDN Attributes P114 Flex Buttons P 115 129 Station COS P116 COMP Group Access P117 Internal Page Zone P113 Ptt Group Access P119 Preset Call Forward P 120 Idle Line Selection P 121 Preset FWD Timex P123 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Figure 3 5 2 11 1 Station IP Attributes Stations are allowed access to the systems VoIP resources based on the Station IP Attributes 3 42 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 123 Selecting Station Timers will display the Station Timers input page Figure 3 5 2 12 1 valid station range and click Load to enter the Station Timers data Enter a Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit Yiew Favorites Tools Help Q mx Q x a O pe Search FF Favorites Aredia A 23 g hm Address http 192 168 123 50 a_index htm Tam Station Type 110 Station Attnbutes 111 113 Enter Station Range a Station ISDN Attributes 114 Flex Buttons 115 129 Station COS 116 COMP Group Access 117 Internal Page Zone 113 Ptt Group Access 119 Preset Call Forvard 120 Idle Line Selection 121 IP Call Access 122 Linked Station 124 Station ICM Group 125 Station SIP Attributes 126 Station Range Frora 2004 to 2004 change Attribute Value Range M Station
143. When sent all dialed digits are sent to the system in a block Enblock mode is only available to iPECS Phones with soft keys 13 100 110 MSG RETRIEVE Messages stored in the VSF may be retrieved in 1 FIFO LIFO 1 FIFO O LIFO LIFO either a FIFO first in first out or LIFO last in 0 LIFO first out order based on this entry 14 When using an adjunct VM the system can 0000 9999 Station appropriate Voice Mailbox None message detection so DTMF is not detected 16 100 110 FWD IF OOS If a station is Out of Service and has previously 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 0FF OFF forwarded calls the system will forward the 1 ON calls if enabled here 17 100 110 BACK LIGHT The backlight of the LIP 7000 series phones is 0 OFF 1 0 OFF 1 BUSY 2 0N 0 assigned to stay off light only when the station 1 Busy is busy or light constantly 2 ON 18 100 100 UMS MailSvrIP The VMIM includes notification of new IP v4 messages to the user s e mail This field address displays the user s e mail mail server for the Or notification Use Web Admin PGM CODE 132 to Mail server modify this value name 19 100 100 UMS Mail Addr The VMIM includes notification of new e mail Xyz abcco com messages to the user s e mail This field address displays the e mail address to notify when a new message is received at the VMIM Use Web Admin to modify this value 20 100
144. When unavailable DID DISA calls to the station can ON OFF be routed to the ACD Group to which the station is a OFF member Ring Group Service When unavailable DID DISA calls to the station can ON OFF be routed to the Ring Group to which the station is a OFF member Two way Record When allowed the station can activate the Two way ON OFF record feature to record a conversation OFF Message Scroll Speed Select message scroll speed Not used at present 0 7 3 Hot Desk Station A station can be assigned as a Hot Desk phone ON OFF Users and agents can login and use resources of the OFF system through the Hot Desk phone Prefer CO or Group System will seize this CO Line or CO group number CO Line when the station dials 9 First available Co access or CO Grp code Send SLT CLI Info When allowed the system sends CLI information to ON OFF the SLT OFF UCD Login Priority ACD Group members may be assigned a priority 0 0 9 0 9 Members with the highest priority are sent calls ahead of lower priority members This field is the same as PGM CODE 191 btn 19 EZ PWD Login For ez Atd enables disables required Auth code use ENABLE Disable DISABLE ADMIN Enables station access to the system Database ENABLE Enable DISABLE VSF Access Permits station access to the built in AA VM ENABLE Disable DISABLE Group Listening Enables Group Listen feature audio is sent to both ENABLE Disable the handset and speaker with the handset DISABLE microphone active an
145. admin and cannot access Keyset admin 2 ADMIN PASSWORD Admin password configurable database 12 digits none reece access in Web Admin can access Keyset Admin 3 MAINT PASSWORD Maintenance password full and unlimited 12 digits none sereeeneee access to database and maintenance functions The system can monitor an external contact This contact is most often employed as an Alarm indicator or Doorbell The Alarm attributes define the operation of the external contact The Alarm Signal sent to assigned stations can be repeating or a single burst the former is often desired For the Doorbell a single tone is sent each time the contact activates Refer to Table 2 3 6 3 1 fora description of the features the data entries required and LCD displays for each attribute SYSTEM ALARM ATT PRESS FLEX KEY 1 4 Refer to Table 2 3 6 3 1 DISPLAY Table 2 3 6 3 1 ALARM ATTRIBUTES PGM 163 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 ALARM ENABLE This parameter enables the external contact 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 0FF OFF monitoring circuitry 1 ON 2 ALARM CONTACT TYPE This parameter establishes the contact state 0 Open CLOSE 1 CLOSE 0 OPEN CLOSE that will activate the Alarm close or open 1 Close 3 ALARM DOORBELL MODE The contact can be treated to function as a 0 Bell ALARM 1 ALARM 0 BELL ALARM doorbell
146. after digits are removed Digits 0 9 and special characters HOLD timed Pause DND Dial tone detect FLASH Billing station number 2 DMT 55 REMOVAL POSITION This entry defines the position of the digit 01 12 01 12 01 where removal is to begin starting with the 1st dialed digit 01 3 DMT 55 NUM OF REMOVE This entry defines the number of digits to 01 12 DIGITS 01 12 00 remove starting at the Removal Position 4 DMT 55 ADD POSITION This entry defines the position in the number 01 13 01 13 01 after digits are removed where the Add Digits are inserted 5 DMT 55 CO IP GROUP This entry defines the CO IP Group that the 01 20 01 72 01 system will attempt to use for the call or 01 72 6 DMT 55 ALT INDEX This entry defines an Alternate Digit 00 99 00 99 Modification Table Index to use if no path is available in the assigned CO IP Group 7 DMT 55 NET NUM PLAN BIN This entry defines the Net Number Plan Table 000 251 000 251 bin that the system will attempt to use for the transit out call 2 116 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 The LCR Table Initialize allows global values to be assigned to the various Digit Modification Table entries In addition the LCR Leading Digits and LCR Digit Modification Tables can be initialized no entries state INITIALIZE LCR DB
147. and manually poll each IP KTS device VIRTUAL DIP SWITCH PRESS FLEX KEY 1 6 Refer to Table 2 3 17 1 DISPLAY Table 2 3 17 1 VIRTUAL DIP SWITCH PGM 453 Button DISPLAY REMARK RANGE DEFAULT 1 VIRTUAL DIP SWITCH Device polling if enabled On the system 0 OFF ON DEVICE POLLING ON will check each registered device Gateway 1 ON and iPECS Phone to determine if the device is alive or not 2 VIRTUAL DIP SWITCH SMDI setting is enabled for output 0 OFF OFF SMDI SETTING OFF 1 ON 3 VIRTUAL DIP SWITCH If this value is set the LED commands from 0 OFF OFF MULTICAST LED OFF MFIM will be sent to gateways terminals in 1 ON the multi cast mode 4 VIRTUAL DIP SWITCH This field enables negotiation of speed 0 AUTO AUTO AUTO NEGO AUTO between the LAN switch port and the 1 MANUAL system 5 VIRTUAL DIP SWITCH The duplex mode of LAN connections can 0 FULL FULL FULL HALF FULL be set according to this field 1 HALF 6 VIRTUAL DIP SWITCH The speed of the Ethernet interface is 0 100 100 10 100 TX 100 established based on this field 10 Base T or 1 10 10 100 Base T 2 149 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 DECT Attributes define functions associated with the DECT equipment and operation Generally the entry will turn the feature ON enable or OFF disable DECT ATTRIBUTES PRESS FLEX KEY 1 3 Se
148. are considered long distance calls for SMDR and COS purposes Print Incoming Call The system can output records for Incoming ON OFF calls as well as outgoing calls If enabled OFF incoming as well as outgoing calls are recorded Print Lost Call When incoming call records are enabled the ON ON system can also provide records for OFF unanswered incoming abandoned calls Records In Detail The system can output detailed call records ON ON ON or summary call information total OFF 0 Right SMDR Currency Unit The unit of currency used for call cost can be identified with 3 characters for easy reference Max 3 Characters SMDR Cost Per Metering Pulse When call metering is provided by the PSTN the cost per metering pulse can be assigned 6 digits 000000 SMDR Decimal Location This value determines the position of the decimal in the Cost per Pulse entry above starting from the right most digit 0 5 Start Timer To allow for call set up times through the PSTN a Valid call timer can be set 000 250 msec 000 SMTP Mail Server IP Address SMTP Mail server address to receive e mail SMDR reports 12 digits SMDR User Mail Address IP Address to which system sends SMDR data 40 Characters SMDR System Domain Name Domain name of SMTP Mail server to receive SMDR reports Use this field in place of SMTP Mail Server IP Address above Max 18 Characters SMDR Mail Se
149. as described in Table 3 5 2 10 1 when the station goes off hook The Idle Line Selection Prime Line can be either immediate or delayed after going off hook The immediate delay selection is based on the Hot Warm assignment in Station Attributes Prime Line section 3 5 2 2 Table 3 5 2 10 1 IDLE LINE SELECTION TYPE amp VALUE TYPE RANGE DESCRIPTION iPECS iPECS 50 MFIM300 MFIM 600 MFIM1200 Micro MFIM100 No Selection Returns Intercom dial tone Flex Button 01 24 01 24 01 24 01 24 01 24 Flex button activates Flex button as if pressed CO Line 01 05 01 42 01 200 001 400 001 600 CO IP path seizes CO line CO IP Group 01 20 01 20 01 72 01 72 01 100 CO IP Group seizes CO line from the CO IP Group Station Net 100 125 iPECS 50 100 399 1000 1599 1000 2199 Station calls the assigned 100 149 station MFIM100 100 169 3 41 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 122 Selecting Station IP Attributes will display the Station IP Attributes data input page Figure 3 5 2 11 1 Enter a valid station range and click Load to enter the Station IP Attributes data Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help DEK Address http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm IPE S6M EOAp ion R IPECS D96M E 0Ap APR OS Enter Station Boot Version 1 04h JAN OT Station Range From 100 to 100 change Attribute
150. below Forward Member Calls A member activating Call Forward may be placed in OFF no FWD ON an unavailable state for hunt group calls ON When ON FWD OFF group calls are sent to the member as normal Group Name An ACD group name can be designated 12 character CCR digit 1 When an ACD call is queued the caller may be CCR digit 2 allowed to dial a digit to exit the queue and route to CCR digit 3 another destination The alternate destination is CCR digit 4 based on the user dialed digit and can be a station CCR digit 5 hunt system speed bin or network station Dial the CCR digit 6 digit below for the type of destination and the value CCR digit 7 associated with the destination CCR digit 8 1 Enter a station number CCR digit 9 2 Enter a hunt group number CCR digit 10 3 Enter a system speed bin 4 Enter a network station number ZAP Tone Agents using a headset can have ACD calls ON OFF connected to them automatically preceded by a tone OFF im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Threshold system plays the CIQ 1 Announcement to the CIQ 1 Page Zone after the CIQ 1 Announcement Delay Timer Announcements are repeated at intervals of Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT CIQ Ment Play On OFF If enabled queued callers receive the CIQ message ON OFF You are in queue after the 1 and 2 OFF announcement VSF Wait Station When an ACD call overflows or routes to the VM Station group a stat
151. by a Look up in the Flexible DID Table The destination for the call is generally defined as a type and a value The type selects options such as station station group VSF etc The value specifies the particular station station group etc In addition ICLID routing can be enabled for DID lines or can be assigned as an index to the Auto Ring Mode table Table 3 5 8 10 1 FLEXIBLE DID CONVERSION ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Name Name associated with the destination 11 characters 3 175 im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Day Ring Mode Destination Destination setting for Day Ring mode Type amp Value Night Ring Mode Destination Destination setting for Night Ring mode Type amp Value Timed Ring Mode Destination Destination setting for Timed Ring mode Type amp Value Reroute Destination Destination setting for Reroute Ring mode Type amp Value ICLID Table Use ICLID Routing section 3 5 7 4 ON OFF OFF Auto Ring Table Destination Table Index N A 0 15 Table 3 5 8 10 2 FLEXIBLE DID DESTINATION TYPE DESCRIPTION DESTINATION iPECS MFIM Micro 50 100 300 600 1200 1 Route to a Station 100 125 100 149 100 169 100 399 1000 1599 1000 2199 2 Route to a Station 620 631 620 659 620 659 620 667 620 667 401 500 Group 3 Route with System 200 999 200 999 200 999 2000 4999 2000 7999 20
152. checking procedures that are part of call termination EKTS Mode The EKTS Electronic Key Telephone Service terminal NONE EKTS permits a user to operate those features that are specific EKTS to EKTS as well as voice features that may function distinctly in the EKTS environment EKTS allows a DN to be shared by more than one terminal on the same or on different interfaces Type for 7 8 ISDN CALLED NO uses the International format National Unknown Unknown format Network format Subscriber format or Abbreviated International format when the user dials less than 10 digits National Network Subscriber Abbreviated Type for 10 11 ISDN CALLED NO is constructed with International Unknown Unknown format National format Network format Subscriber International format or Abbreviated format when the user dials more National than 10 digits Network Subscriber Abbreviated 3 72 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODES 143 amp 151 Selecting ISDN CO Line Attributes will display the ISDN Line Attributes data input page Figure 3 5 4 7 1 Enter a valid CO range and click Load to enter the ISDN Line Attributes data Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help oor Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm iPECSAVDO6N E OAp APRI08 i Boot Version 1 0Ah JAN OT EnterCORange J ____ _Load CO Range From 1 to 1 Uncheck All Attributes xI
153. day during which 00 24 Time Zone 3 is active 3 162 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 221 Selecting LCR LDT Leading Digit Table will display the LCR LDT data entry page Figure 3 5 8 2 1 Select the LDT Index range desired blue text above the table header iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help 5 amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm H Log Out IPECSMD96M E DAp APR 08 Boot Version 1 0 amp h JAN OT 0 24 25 49 50 74 75 99 100 124 125 149 150 174 175 199 200 224 225 249 Index Value Range LCR Type BOTH Compared Digits MAX 12 Digits Include and Check Password DMT 1 Must be 6 Digits DMT 2 Must be 6 Digits DMT 3 Must be 6 Digits LCR Type Compared Digits MAX 12 Digits Include and Check Password DMT 1 Must be 6 Digits DMT 2 Must be 6 Digits LCR Control Attribute P220 LCR DMT P222 DMT 3 Must be 6 Digits LCR Table Initialization P223 LCR Type Compared Digits MAX 12 Digits Include and Check Password DMT 1 Must be 6 Digits Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 8 2 1 LCR Leading Digit Table The Leading Digits Table is used to analyze the user dialed digits to determine an appropriate Digit Modificati
154. each 1 5 can be assigned If dialed as the 1st digits digits 0 9 the call is considered an LD call amp asa wild card 20 SMDR RIN CLI CPN SVC_I For incoming calls the system will send the 0 RING RING time 0 RIN 1 CLI 2 CPN 1 defined data item for Field The data item 1 CLI may be CLI CPN or Ring Service Time Note 2 CPN the User dialed number is always provided for an outgoing call 21 MSN PRINT ON SMDR Print MSN number Information in SMDR 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 0FF OFF Record 1 ON 22 SMDR RIN CLI CPN SVC_II For incoming calls the system will send the 0 RING RING time 0 RN 1 CL 2 CP 3 NO 2 defined data item for Field Il The data item 1 CLI may be CLI CPN or Ring Service Time 2 CPN 3 None 23 PRINT SERIAL NO Print record number as part of SMDR output 0 OFF OFF 1 ON O OFF OFF will reset to 1 when SMDR capacity is reached 1 ON or SMDR records are deleted see btn 18 24 1 SMDR HIDE DGT When HIDDEN DIALED DIGIT is enabled 0 Left Left 1 RIGHT O LEFT RIGHT button 8 above this field determines if leading 1 Right or trailing digits are hidden 000 144 000 Call can be set 0 means no monitoring If CO call duration exceeds this value a notification will be sent to NMS server and alarm will be displayed 24 2 SMDR INTERFACE SVC When enabled the system stores SMDR data 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 OFF OFF to sen
155. et IPECSVDS6M E 0Ap APRIOS Boot Version 1 0Ah JAN OT i Attribute ra NET Enable g NET Retry Count NET CNIP Enable NET CONP Enable NET Signal Method NET Cas Enable NET VPN Enable NET CC Retain Mode Net Supplementary Attr P321 Net CO Line Attribut 322 Some SUN EI NENES Copyright C 2006 hy LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 9 1 1 Network Basic Attributes Table 3 5 9 1 1 NETWORK BASIC ATTRIBUTES ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Net Enable Enable Networking function 1 ON OFF 0 OFF Net Retry Count Reserved for future usage 00 99 00 Net CNIP Enable The name of calling station is sent to the called system 1 ON ON between iPECS systems CNIP is displayed at called 0 OFF party stations display based on the programming Net CONP Enable Reserved for future usage 1 ON OFF 0 OFF Net Signal Method Select the information element type for QSIG 1 FAC FAC supplementary service message 0 UUS Net Cas Enable It is not used 1 ON OFF 0 OFF Net VPN Enable Reserved for future usage 1 ON OFF 0 OFF Net CC Retain Mode It is not used 1 0N OFF 0 OFF 3 185 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Re PGM CODE 321 Selecting Network Supplementary Attributes will display the Network Supplementary Attributes entry page Figure 3 5 9 2 1 A iPECS Web
156. expiration of the Overflow Timer No Answer Timer Calls to a station in the group are directed to the 00 99 15 station if unavailable or unanswered in the No seconds assigned hunt process Forced Forward must be enabled for the group Pilot Hunt A FS VM hunt group can be set so that only calls to ON ON the pilot number station group number will hunt OFF Alternate Destination When a call comes into the group and there are no STA NET or Hunt group members available the call will be routed to the Number System assigned Alternate Destination SPD Hunt Group type The hunt process for the FS VM group can be defined CIRC TERM as Circular or Terminal TERM Wrap Up Timer After terminating any call the FS port will be 000 999 008 maintained in a busy state for the duration of the seconds Wrap Up Timer Forced Forward Calls to a hunt group may forward directly to a defined Sta NET Destination destination bypassing the hunt process Forced Hunt grp Forward below must be enabled VSF Annc Sys Speed Forced Forward Calls to a hunt group may forward directly to a defined OFF OFF destination see above Forced Forward Destination ON 3 149 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm TT et M E OAp APRIOS 1 0Ah JANIOF Group Number
157. frame packetization time 10 20 30 20 10 30 20 determines the interval at which voice msec samples are packetized and sent when the G 722 codec is used 24 2 NOT USED This filed is used only for KOREA 2 63 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 24 3 SMS CENTER CLI When the CO IP will be used to receive SMS 23 digits geososousnocposubeosoes the Caller Id expected from the Short Msg Service Center must be defined 24 4 TRANSIT OUT SECURITY Check IP address for transit out in the master 0 OFF ON 1 0N 0 0FF ON system if it is not valid IP address then it will 1 0N be denied 24 5 EMR CALL ATD NOTIFY Provide notification to attendant when user 0 OFF ON 1 0N 0 O0FF dial emergency number 1 0N 24 6 3WAY CONF PREFERENCE Use MCIM to make 3 way conference if it is 0 LOCAL MCIM 1 MCIM 0 LOCAL MCIM MCIM otherwise conference will be done on 1 MCIM each member 24 7 FIRST DIGIT IN SPD If it is 0 then the first in speed will be used O DISPLAY 0 DISPLAY DISPLAY SECURITY 0 for display security otherwise DTMF willbe SECURITY SECURITY send 1 DIGIT 24 8 SIP POUND USAGE ON Send digit when user press 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 OFF OFF OFF The is used for sending complete 1 0N
158. http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm eee on iPECS VD96M E 0Ap APRIOS Boot Version 1 0Ah JANIOF Attribute Attendant Ring Assign Hunt Group Tone Attendant Ring Assign Hunt Group Busy Destination D NN Enor Destination DNN Syster Attnbutes P160 161 System Password P162 Tone Attendant Ring Assign C Hunt Group e Alann Attributes P163 No Answer Destination Attendant Assignment P164 Multicast RTP RTCP P165 DISA COS P166 VSF Prompt Usage Busy Prompt Usage Enor Prompt Usage Dnd Prompt Usage External Control Contacts P163 LCD Display Mode P169 LED Flashing Rate P170 Tone Mus PRPA a PBX Access Codes P172 Reroute Busy Destination Attendant Ring Assign o ES RLP Priority P173 Hunt Group Tone No Ans Prompt Usage Atd Xfer Prompt Usage RS 232 Port Settings P174 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 5 7 1 DID DISA Destination When a DID line or DISA user dials an invalid vacant or busy station number the caller will be sent to the assigned destination The destination is separately defined for invalid busy and No Answer conditions and can be defined as the Attendant busy tone or a Station Group For calls on a DID line to a busy station DID Call Wait can be assigned refer t
159. iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DAR File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm IPECS D96M E 0Ap APR 0S Boot Version 1 Oh JANIO MFIMIE IP Address MFIMJE Sub Net Mask 255 255 255 0 Router IP Address 7 System IP Range fio 211 131 10 10 211 255 254 System ID P100 System Sub Net Mask 25525500 Automatic IP Assim ON Y CO GW Sequence Number P104 Second System IP Address booo lt Flexible Station Numbex P105 Second System Net Mask Flexible Numbering Plan P 106 Firewall IP Address Tee TT iia First MAC Range 000000000000 000000000000 Second MAC Range 000000000000 000000000000 MFIMIE LAN2 Master IP Address MFIM E LAN2 Slave IP Address 1 2 3 5 DNS IP Address 0 0 0 0 Find Show Hidden Item Order Seq Del Logical Num Type DEV ID MAC Address IP Address ARP Regis CO Gateway 00405a1 56425 150 150 131 211 L OFF Multi VOIP z E GW ISDN Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 1 33 1 System amp Device IP Address Plan System IP Address The System IP Address Plan sets several IP addresses including the MFIM IP address required for external VoIP calls the IP address for the router and the system s internal private IP address Plan Note that the MFIM and Router addr
160. iPECS series modules can be upgraded by remote access Selecting S W Upgrade from the main Web screen returns the Appliance Version page and sub menus as shown in Figure 3 6 1 iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 150 150 131 21 1fa_index htm LIK300 Version iPECS VD96M E0Ap APRI03 Appliances Version Classification Type Logical Num IP Address Version Connection State co voIPGW 1 6 150150131211 EDAp Connected 1 Idle 2 1dle 3 ale 4 1c Idle 8 Tale Tale 10 1ele 1 DNP 14Idle 15 1dle 16 Idle 17 Idle co Ai 7 36 1021113139 504b Connected 21 Idle 22 Idle 23 Idle 24Idle 28 Idle 29 Idle 20 Idle 31 Idle B5 IdeJ B6 LGcM PETA co Loops 37 44 1021113118 X 0Be Cae p ee GW 44 Idle 45 dle 46 Tale 47 Tale 48 Tale eon 52 1dle 53 Idle 54 Idle 55 Idle co pa 45 74 1021113140 504b Connected 59 Idle 60 Idle 61 Idle 62 1dle 66 Idle 67 Tale 68 Idle 69 Idle 731dle 74 co ee 75 76 1021113130 12Ga Connected 751dke 76 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Lid All Rights Reserved Figure 3 6 1 File Upload amp Remote Upgrade There are two types of upgrade images application and kernel image If both are required upgrade the application then the kernel The VSF is part of the MFIM and VSF prom
161. instead of an alarm 1 Alarm 4 ALARM SIGNAL MODE The assigned stations will receive a 0 Once RPT 1 RPT O ONCE RPT Repeating signal or single burst ONCE of 1 Repeat alarm tone 2 65 im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 2 3 6 4 Attendant Assignment PGM Code 164 A maximum of four 4 Attendants can be assigned with the iPECS Micro iPECS 50 and MFIM100 or five 5 with other MFIMs One is the System Attendant and remaining are the Main Attendants The System Attendant has higher priority in call handling and system management functions with access to PGM 0 As a default the System Attendant is assigned Station 100 Main Attendants are not assigned by default PROCEDURE ATTENDANT ASSIGNMENT 1 Press the PGM button and dial 164 MOO aa seeders ATTENDANT ASSIGNMENT Select the desired button 400 Button 1 System Attendant Button 2 Main Attendants Use the dial pad to enter desired station numbers for the System and Main Attendants Use the SPEED button to erase an entry and the VOL UP VOL DOWN button to scroll through the Main Attendants Press the SAVE button to store the Attendant assignment entry 2 3 6 5 Multi cast RTP RTCP Ports PGM Code 165 Multi cast is employed by the system to send BGM MOH paging and Push To Talk packets Employing a single multi cast packet reduces the overall LAN traffic In some cases specifically when multiple syst
162. name for Terminal Circular VM UCS 5 0d3 17 Feb 09 Add instruction to expand BRI channel of iPECS 50B in section 1 4 2 Change MFIM replacement procedure in the section 1 4 2 5 0d4 01 Apr 09 Add device type field in the PGM 235 Register table 5 0d5 16 Apr 09 Add a field ISDN REDIRECTING NUMBER in the PGM 143 5 0d6 09 May 09 Add a field 4 9th in the PGM 161 5 0d7 15 May 09 Add Unused line type in the PGM 140 Add Reject Anonymous in the PGM 142 Flex19 Add SMS protocols in the PGM 161 Flex23 Add Long time call monitoring in the PGM 177 Flex6 Add Net Num Plan Bin in the PGM 222 Flex7 Rearrange Destination type index and wording in the PGM 231 Add error busy no answer destination in the PGM 228 Flex 11 Flex13 Add Outgoing mail box destination in the PGM 114 Flex19 Add PPP IP address in the PGM 205 Flex6 Flex7 Web Admin Add PGM 101 Device Port Num Change 5 0d8 12 Jun 09 Add PGM 451 20th and 21th 20th Print out strings those are used to display flexible button 21th Print out strings those are used to activate feature 5 0d9 17 Aug 09 Web Admin Add iPECS Micro content im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Table Of Contents Paiste colatileisie Cooter enter eT mt mre terete turn ee rernrre crt orn sem rent Tent rer eter tt l 1 1 1 Manual Application sssssseeeeeesessssssssesrerrrrereseeessssssssseererrresesssssssseerereeee 1 1 1 2 General snscesonopaoii iiaii cist er
163. of firewall for external network D 1 WAN IP access im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button SUB MENU DEFAULT REMARK 11 First Start Mac Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 First Start MAC Address to register a device regardless of the 3 dip switch 12 First End Mac Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 First End MAC Address to register a device regardless of the 3 dip switch 13 Second Start Mac Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Second Start MAC Address to register a device regardless of the 3 dip switch 14 Second End Mac Address 00 00 00 00 00 00 Second End MAC Address to register a device regardless of the 3 dip switch 15 System IP Address plan Reset Returns System IP Address Plan to default values 16 Master MFIM LAN2 IP Address 0 0 0 0 17 Slave MFIM LAN2 IP Address 0 0 0 0 18 MFIM DNS IP Address 0 0 0 0 PGM Code 103 Device IP Address Plan 1 CO IP Gateway IP Address 2 Station IP Address 3 MISC IP Address 4 VMIM amp VSF IP Address 5 MCIM IP Address 6 Device IP Address Plan PGM Code 104 CO IP GW Sequence Number CO IP Module Sequence Assignment 10 10 10 10 254 On On 10 10 10 10 254 On On 10 10 10 10 254 On On 10 10 10 10 254 On On 10 10 10 10 254 On On System Reset Next available PGM Code 105 Flexible Station Number Base 1 Flexible Station Number MFIM amp 100 MFIME amp 300 MFIM 600 MFIM1200 100 169 100 399 1000 1599 1000 2199 PGM Code
164. position 3 is in the ON position the system will respond to the gateway Module or terminal with a Registration command including the system IP and MAC address During the registration process the Module or terminal will receive data from the system including a Sequence Number IP address RTP characteristics etc as well as default settings appropriate to the type of Module or terminal Once registered the Module or terminal will maintain the system IP and MAC address in non volatile memory and will not attempt further registrations If the Registration switch is in the OFF position the system will not respond to normal registration requests from a local device 1 4 2 Replacement Module Registration Under certain situations it is necessary to force the registration of gateway modules and terminals specifically when an MFIM gateway Module or iPECS Terminal is replaced When replacing an MFIM gateway Modules and iPECS terminals must be forced to register with the new system With Module or terminal replacement the system must recognize the replacement status to transfer the existing database values When replacing an MFIM after following the instructions of section 4 4 2 in the iPECS Description amp Installation Manual the local Web interface is used to access the system The user may update the system database using the database downloaded from the previous MFIM memory Using the Terminal mode Command Line interface maint gt r
165. section 3 5 8 10 000 999 None Called Telephone Number Telephone Number called number 23 Digits None 3 156 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 203 Selecting ICLID Route Table will display the ICLID Route Table data entry page Figure 3 5 7 4 1 Select the ICLID Table Index range desired blue text above the table header Selecting the blue colored text in the Table header will sort the table based on the selected column Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DER a File Edit view Favorites Tools Help ss http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm Te 1 iPECSA D96M E Ap AFR 08 Boot Version 10Ah JAN OF Station Order 1 50 51 100 101 150 151 200 201 250 ICLID Ring Assign Index Caller Telephone Number ISDN Attnbutes P200 CLIP COLP Table P201 MSN Table P202 wololral a uUulal wl re ICLID Ring Assignment P204 aaa C J Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Lid All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 7 4 1 ICLID Route Table The system can employ ICLID Incoming Calling Line Id to determine the routing of incoming external call
166. station 5 I HOLD RECALL TMR sec Determines the amount of time before a call 000 300 030 000 600 030 that is recalling the station will recall before seconds also recalling the attendant 6 S HOLD RECALL TMR sec Determines the amount of time before a call 000 300 030 000 600 030 placed on system hold will recall the station seconds 7 TRANS RECALL TMR sec Determines the amount of time a transferred 000 300 030 000 600 030 call will ring at the receiving station before seconds recalling the station that transferred the call 8 ACNR DELAY TMR sec If the ACNR Pause Timer expires and no CO 000 300 030 000 300 030 Line is available for ACNR recall the delay seconds decremented by this action a call has been abandoned 9 ACNR PAUSE TMR sec This timer establishes the time between 030 300 030 030 300 030 ACNR recall attempts For CIS 5 300 seconds 10 ACNR RETRY COUNT This counter sets the number of recall 1 13 03 01 13 03 attempts for ACNR before ACNR is abandoned For CIS 1 9 11 ACNR TONE DTC TMR sec If call progress tones are not available for 001 300 30 001 300 030 ACNR the system will wait this duration after seconds dialing before considering the called party as busy no answer 12 AUTO RELEASE TMR sec If a user accesses a CO IP path and does not 000 300 030
167. the covering station and will receive ring immediate or delayed 0 to 9 ring cycles 14 100 110 OFFNET FWD A station must be allowed Off Net Fwd to 0 Enable 0 1 DIS 0 EN ENABLE forward external incoming calls outside the 1 Disable system or otherwise establish a CO to CO connection Unsupervised Conference Except USA version 15 100 110 FORCED ICM When placing an intercom call a user can 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 OFF OFF change the ICM signaling mode Tone Ring 1 ON to Hands free answer mode or HF Answer to Tone Ring 16 100 110 ACT PTT GRP A station can be assigned to a PTT group 0 9 0 ACTIVE PTT GROUP 0 and the group enabled so the station can place and receive PTT announcements for the group 17 100 110 ICM GROUP Assigns station to an ICM Tenancy Group 1 15 1 01 15 01 refer to PGM CODE 125 18 Assigns the VSF or VMIM where messages Seq no 100 100 VSEF VMIM GW GW SLOT SEQ 29 for the station are stored 2 21 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 19 100 100 SIP UID TBL Index to SIP User ID table PGM CODE 126 for iPECS Micro 00 70 000 the station Note PGM 126 is accessible by 0 26 Web only IPECS 50 0 50 MFIM100 0 70 MFIM300 0 300 MFIM600 0 600 MFIM1200 0 1200 20 100 100 CAMP ON
168. the CLI Station Number PGM CODE 114 is sent in place of the station number For all other CLIP COLP Table entries the station number is sent as a suffix to the number in the Table There are 10 available entries for the iPECS Micro iPECS 50 and MFIM100 and 50 available entries for all other MFIM models Note that this number is sent only if CLIR and COLR are disabled under the CLIR Service and COLR Service assignments in the 2 108 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Station ISDN Attributes PGM CODE 114 PROCEDURE CLIP COLP TABLE ENTRY 1 Press the PGM button and dial 201 ENTER BIN NO 0 9 CLIP COLP TABLE 05 Use the dial pad to enter the desired Bin number 00 09 for the iPECS Micro amp iPECS 50 amp MFIM100 or 00 49 for other MFIMs Use the dial pad to enter the desired CLIP COLP data maximum 10 digits Press the SAVE button to store the CLIP COLP data entry 2 3 8 3 MSN Table PGM Code 202 When an ISDN Line assigned for DID operation receives an incoming call the call will be routed to a station based on the Flexible DID Table Index in the MSN Table The iPECS Micro iPECS 50 and MFIM100 provide for 250 entries and other MFIMs provide for up to 500 entries PROCEDURE MSN TABLE ATT 1 Press the PGM button and dial 202 ENTER BIN NO 001 250 MSN TABLE 121 Use the dial pad to enter a MSN Table index number 001 250 for the iPECS Micro amp IPECS 50 amp MFIM100
169. the Cost per Pulse button 10 starting from the right most digit 12 SMDR START TIMER 1sec To allow for call set up times through the 000 250 000 000 250 000 PSTN a Valid call timer can be set A call seconds must be longer than the SMDR Start Timer for a call record to be generated if enabled under button 1 above 13 SMTP MAIL SERVER ADDR SMTP Mail server IPv4 address to receive the 12 digits o 0 0 0 SMDR e mail reports 14 USER MAIL ADDR ONLY WEB IP Address to which system sends SMDR XXX XXX XXX XXX data display only To change data use Web Admin 15 MAIL SEND WEEKLY SET Sets day of week to send SMDR data weekly 0 7 0 N A 0 7 0 for no weekly data 1 7 for Monday through Sunday 16 MAIL SEND DAILY SET Sets time of day for SMDR data to be sent on 00 23 00 00 00 23 a daily basis 00 for no daily records 01 23 for hour of the day 17 AUTO SEND MODE If the SMDR buffer is full the system can 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 OFF OFF automatically send a notification by e mail 1 ON 2 86 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 18 AUTO DELETE MODE Delete SMDR records after sending e mail 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 19 LONG DISTANCE CODE For SMDR and COS purposes five 5 Long Flex button Btn 1 0 Oo 2 Distance codes of up to two 2 digits
170. the Intercom and 01 20 10 01 20 10 takes no action for this timer the user will seconds receive error tone 7 INTER DIGIT TMR sec This timer sets the maximum allowed time 01 20 05 01 20 05 between user dialed digits At expiration the seconds user will receive error tone 8 MSG REMINDER TONE min An iPECS Phone user will receive periodic 00 60 00 00 60 00 reminder tones of a message waiting at minutes intervals based on this timer 9 PAGE TIME OUT TMR sec Determines the maximum duration of a page 000 255 15 000 255 015 after which the caller and Page Zone are seconds released 10 PAUSE TMR sec A Timed pause of this duration is used in 1 9 3 1 9 3 Speed Dial and during other automatically seconds dialed digits sent to the PSTN 11 SOFT AUTO RLS TMR sec When a Soft Key is used on the 6000 or 7000 1 30 10 01 30 10 series iPECS Phone after expiration of this seconds timer the display will return to the previous display 12 VM PAUSE TMR 100 msec When the system sends a Pause to Voice 1 90 30 01 90 30 Mail using In band signals the Pause interval 100 msec is defined by this timer Not available in the USA 2 91 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Table 2 3 6 20 3 SYSTEM TIMERS Ill PGM 182 Button ATTR
171. the page length the number of lines 001 199 66 the system will send before sending the page break XON XOFF This entry enables disables XON XOFF protocol XON XOFF XOFF im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 175 Selecting Serial Port Selections will display the Serial Port Function Selections data entry page Figure 3 5 5 15 1 For each function select the desired output using the drop down menu and if a TCP channel is assigned enter the TCP port Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer BEE File Edit Yiew Favorites Tools Help Address http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm to RS 232 Port Settings P174 Break Make PAREO Attribute Value TCP PORT SMDR Attnbutes P177 Off line SMDRStatistics Print Serial 1 Port NULL System Date amp Time P178 Lue ADMIN Data Print Serial 1 Port x NULL em Multi Language P179 i v NULL em Timers P180 182 186 Traffic Print Serial 1 Port oF Web Access Auth ion SMDI Print Serial 1 Port v NULL NTP Attributes P195 Call Information Print Serial 1 Port v NULL SNMP Attnbute P196 On line SMDR Print Serial 1 Port NULL Cabinet Attribute P197 Trace Print Serial 1 Port NULL Hot Desk Attributes P250 Debug Print Serial 1 Port v NULL Sy speed Dia Discovery Manager Print Serial 1 Port NULL E Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel
172. type may detrimentally affect the iPECS system performance The iPECS SNMP attributes are defined here Refer to Table 3 5 5 277 1 for description and values that can be entered Table 3 5 5 277 1 SNMP ATTRIBUTES ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT SNMP service SNMP Service field is used to set the SNMP ON OFF agent in the iPECS On or Off SNMP Port SNMP Protocol port number 161 Read Only Community Read only community should be used when 4 16 SNMP manager NMS is trying to read data from characters SNMP agent MFIM Read Write Community When the SNMP manager NMS needs to both 4 16 read and write data to the agent iPECS this characters attribute should be enabled Trap Community For the SNMP agent iPECS this field defines 4 16 the destination IP address to receive trapped characters messages Alarm fault events Trap Destination IP address of iPECS NMS server port 162 IP address should not be changed Message Type Defines how the agent sends the message Notify Notify Inform Trap 3 129 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Selecting Cabinet Attributes will display the Cabinet Attribute entry page Figure 3 5 5 288 1 Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DAR File Edit Yiew Favorites Tools Help Address http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm Enter Cabinet Index 0 31 __ _Load Cabinet Index 0 Attribute Value
173. usage for R2 timers 01 50 14 seconds R2 Pulse Timer Reserved for future usage for R2 timers 01 30 07 seconds R2 Ready Timer Reserved for future usage for R2 timers 000 500 07 msec Dial Tone Delay Timer Reserved for future usage for R2 timers 01 30 20 msec 3 120 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 183 The Supervisor Station can set the In Room Indication for all members in the same Group up to 10 bins can be programmed and each bin has at most 20 members excluding the Supervisor iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit Yiew Favorites Tools Help Q x amp x a O Va Search g Favorites media amp 2 amp Enter In Room Number 01 10 In Room Number 1 Index Station Number Supervisor 2004 Member 1 2002 Member 2 Member 3 Member 4 Member 5 Member 6 Member 7 Member Member 9 Member 10 Member 11 Member 12 Member 13 Member 14 Member 15 Member 16 Authorization v Member 17 NTP Attributes 195 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 5 21 1 In Room Indication ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Supervisor Assign number of hot desk agent Member 01 20 Th
174. valid station range and click Load to enter CO IP Group Access data Check the appropriate boxes to allow or delete access to each CO IP Group Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm IPECS VD96M E 0Ap APR O8 Boot Version 1 0Ah JAN OF Enter Station Range Station Range From 100 to 100 Uncheck All COIP Group Delete All Vv Group 1 Group 2 x x lt Station Type P110 Station Attributes P111 113 Station ISDN Attributes P114 Flex Buttons P 115 129 Station COS P116 Group 3 XI xI Group 4 x Group 5 Group 6 Group 7 Internal Page Zone P118 Group aa a4 Ptt Group Access P119 Group 9 Preset Call Forward P 120 Idle Line Selection P121 IP Call Access P122 Preset FWD Timen P123 Linked Station P 124 Station ICM Group P125 Group 10 Group 11 a 31 Group 12 a Group 13 Group 14 Group 15 x gaalaan Group 16 Group 17 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved XI xI x lt Internet Figure 3 5 2 6 1 CO IP Group Access Stations can be allowed or denied access to CO Lines and IP Channels by group As a default all stations are allowed access to all groups except Private Lines group 00 and unused CO Lines The CO Line of an RSGM is assigned as a Private L
175. with R2 E1 0 S1240 STANDARD 0 3 STANDARD 2 Gateway 1 TDX1B 2 STANDARD 3 CONGES DI Appliances gateway Modules and IP Phones can be connected to the iPECS over a managed WAN without the need to employ a VoIP channel In this case the system does not implement security IPSec or QoS treatment over the link To implement the managed WAN connectivity the iPECS must be assigned with the IP address of the router for all appliances that may attempt a 2 43 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 point to point connection over the managed WAN including devices on the iPECS LAN Note that if the device s Router IP address is not defined the system will use the Router IP address defined in PGM CODE 102 The default codec employed by each device can be specifically defined as G 711 G 723 G 729 G 722 or the system default codec PGM CODE 161 can be defined Note that the Sequence Number can be determined in PGM CODE103 Button 1 BOARD BASE ATTRIBUTE ENTER RANGE 001 143 001 BOARD ATTRIBUTE PRESS FLEX KEY 1 7 Refer to Table 2 3 4 3 1 DISPLAY Table 2 3 4 3 1 BOARD ATTRIBUTES PGM 132 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 002 002 ROUTER IP ADDR Enter the default gateway Router IP address o 0 O0 0 associated with the selected devices 2 002 002 DEV CODEC TYPE Select the CODEC type for the selected devices 0 3 3 0 4 SYSTEM COD
176. xI Station Type P110 Station Attnbutes P111 113 x Progress Indication OFF xI CLIR Service OFF Flex Buttons P115 129 Station COS P116 COMP Group Access P117 Internal Page Zone P118 Ptt Group Access P119 Preset Call Forvrard P120 Idle Line Selection P121 IP Call Access P122 Preset FWD Timer P 123 Linked Station P124 Station ICM Group P125 Station SIP Attnbutes P126 Cindia Wawa Tiawlase COLR Service OFF CLI Station Number 100 3 1KHz Audio OFF x x x CLI Name Display OFF wololal alul al wi vw xl x CLI Redirect Display Original 5 x CLITP Message Wait OFF a EXT or ATD ATD D x MSN Wait OFF Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 2 3 1 Station ISDN Attributes When a station uses an ISDN Line various parameters relating to ISDN Calling Line Identification and Connected Line Identification can be assigned for each station In addition when the station is an SLT several parameters must be set to indicate the capabilities related to the station such as 3 1 KHz audio for ISDN use Refer to Table 3 5 2 3 1 for a description of the attributes and the inputs available 3 32 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 T
177. 0 Cio o Station Range lel DELETE Add Group Member Station Number Station Range es INSERT Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Figure 3 5 6 5 1 Pick Up Group Assignments Table 3 5 6 5 1 PICK UP GROUP ASSIGNMENT ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Member Assign stations as members of a station group or for the Net VM group type defines the Net Number of the group 3 152 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 IPECS D96M E 0Ap APR 08 Boot Version 1 0Ah JAN OT Web Administration LIK300 Version iPECS VD96M E 0Ap APR OS ISDN Attributes P200 CLIP COLP Table P201 MSN Table P202 ICLID Route Table P203 ICLID Ring Assignment P204 PPP Attnbutes P205 ead ee ae Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 7 1 ISDN Line Data Each ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network Line provides digital services to the end user Basic Rate Lines have three 3 channels 2 B channels and a D channel The 2 B channels provide 64 Kbps each a total of 128 Kbps for Bearer or voice channels The D channel provides a 16 Kbps signaling channel Primary Rate Lines have 23 30 64 Kbps B channels and 1 2 64 Kbps signaling channels For proper operation entries are required for various attrib
178. 0 70 00 none announcement which is played if the call remains queued beyond the VSF Announce 1 Timer duration The announcement location is the VSF Announcement number An entry of 00 indicates no announcement VSF Announce 1 Auto If this attribute is selected the call will drop after the Check box Drop 1st VSF announcement VSF Announce 2 Location The Station Hunt Group can be assigned a 2nd 00 70 00 none announcement which is played if the call remains queued beyond the VSF Announce 2 Timer duration The announcement location is the VSF Announcement number An entry of 00 indicates no announcement VSF Announce 2 Auto If this attribute is selected the call will drop after the Check box Drop 2 VSF announcement VSF Announce 2 Repeat The 2nd announcement can be repeated to callers 000 999 000 Timer that remain in queue at intervals of the announcement seconds 2 repeat timer Note VSF Announce 2 Repeat below must be ON VSF Announce 2 Repeat After the 2nd announcement if the call remains ON OFF queued to the group the 2nd VSF announcement can OFF be repeated at the Announce 2 Repeat Timer interval defined above Overflow Destination A call to the group will continue to route through the STA NET or group until answered or all group members have been Hunt Number tried The call will remain at the last station or route to VSF Announce the assigned overflow destination If VSF System SPD Announcement is selected Auto Drop can be ch
179. 0 M bps TABLE D 19 DECT DATA Button SUB MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK PGM Code 491 DECT ATTRIBUTES 1 AUTO CALL RLS ON OFF OFF 2 BASE FAULT ALARM Enable Disable Disable 3 CHAIN FAULT ALARM Enable Disable Disable D 30 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance PGM Code PGM Code PGM Code PGM Code 492 WTIM DECT RX Gain Control WTIM RX Gain Flex 1 10 493 Device RX Gain Control from WTIM DECT DEV RX Gain from WTIM Flex 1 9 494 WTIM DECT TX Gain Control WTIM TX Gain Flex 1 10 495 Device TX Gain Control to WTIM DECT DEV TX Gain to WTIM Flex 1 9 D 31 Issue 5 0 m oOo Ee E Ir cz G oa Administration amp Maintenance Manual LG N RTEL
180. 00 169 100 399 1000 1599 1000 2199 Route to a Station Group 620 631 620 659 620 659 620 667 620 667 401 500 Route with System Speed Dial 200 999 200 999 200 999 2000 4999 2000 7999 20000 31 999 Route as PBX Transfer with System 200 999 200 999 200 999 2000 4999 2000 7999 20000 31 Speed Dial Flash then dial speed dial 999 digits Route to VSF Announcement 01 70 01 70 01 70 01 70 01 70 01 70 Route to VSF Announcement and 01 70 01 70 01 70 01 70 01 70 01 70 disconnect Route to Networked Station 100 125 100 149 100 169 100 399 1000 1599 1000 219 9 Conference Room 1 9 1 9 1 9 1 9 1 9 1 9 Internal Page 01 10 01 10 01 10 01 35 01 35 01 100 External page n a 01 02 01 02 01 02 01 02 01 02 All Call Page O1 internal O1 internal O1 internal 01 internal 01 internal 01 internal 03 all O2 external O2 external 02 external 02 external 02 external 03 all 03 all 03 all 03 all 03 all Route to voice mail station 620 631 620 659 620 659 620 667 620 667 401 500 group station number 100 125 100 149 100 169 100 399 1000 1599 1000 2199 3 173 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 229 Selecting Executive Secretary will display the Executive Secretary Table data entry page Figure 3 5 8 9 1 Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DER File Edit view Favorites Tools Help Address http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm F CO Ca
181. 000 31999 Speed Dial 4 Route as PBX Transfer 200 999 200 999 200 999 2000 4999 2000 7999 20000 31999 with System Speed Dial Flash then dial speed dial digits 5 Route to VSF AA 01 70 01 70 01 70 01 70 01 70 01 20 Announcement 6 Route to VSF AA 01 70 01 70 01 70 01 70 01 70 01 20 Announcement and disconnect 7 Route to a Networking 100 125 100 149 100 169 100 399 1000 1599 1000 2199 Station 8 Conference Room 1 9 1 9 1 9 1 9 1 9 1 9 9 Internal Page 01 10 01 10 01 10 01 35 01 35 01 100 10 External page n a 01 02 01 02 01 02 01 02 01 02 11 All Call Page O1 internal O1 internal O1 internal 01 internal 01 internal 01 internal o3 all 02 external 02 external 02 external 02 external 02 external 03 all 03 all 03 all 03 all 03 all 12 Voice Mail Box Group 620 631 620 659 620 659 620 667 620 667 401 500 Voice Mail Box Station 100 125 100 149 100 169 100 399 1000 1599 1000 2199 13 ICLID Ring Assignment 001 250 001 250 001 250 001 250 001 250 001 250 Table 3 176 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 232 Selecting System Speed Zone will display the System Speed Zone data entry page Figure 3 5 8 11 1 iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer Eel File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm Feature Speed Bin Range In Zone Station Range to Access Zone Toll
182. 01 50 Max 20 digits PGM Code 226 Emergency Code Table Emergency Code Table 01 10 Max 15 digits PGM Code 227 Authorization Code Table Table entry Max 12 digits Flex 1 Station Flex 2 System PGM Code 228 Customer Call Routing Table CCR Table index 01 20 1 10 Select Flex 1 10 Station 1 Station 2 Hunt Group 3 System Speed 4 PABX Xfer 5 VSF Announcement 6 Call Disconnect Announcement 7 Route to Networked Station PGM Code 229 Executive Secretary Table 1 Executive Secretary Pair Station 10 entries for MFIM amp 100 35 entries for other MFIMs 2 CO Call to Secretary ON OFF OFF 3 Call to Exec if Secretary in DND ON OFF OFF 4 Executive grade 01 12 12 PGM Code 231 Flexible DID Table 1 station f 2 group 1 DID Destination Name 11 characters 2 Day Destination 1 6 3 Night Destination 1 6 4 Timed Ring Destination 1 6 D 23 3 System im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button SUB MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 5 Reroute Destination 1 6 4 PBX Xfer 5 VSF 6 VSF amp Disconnect 7 Networked Station 8 Conference Room 6 Use ICLID ON OFF OFF PGM Code 232 System Speed Zone 1 Speed Bin Range in Zone MFIM amp 100 200 999 Other 2000 4999 MFIMs 2 Station Range MFIM amp 100 100 169 MFIME amp 100 399 300 1000 1500 MFIM600s 3 Toll Checking 1 ON 0 OFF ON PGM Code 233 Day Nite Timed RING Table 1 Monday Timer 0000 2359 Assign Day Night and Timed start times 2 Tuesday Timer
183. 015 1 sec increments 2 DID DISA No Answer Timer 00 99 20 1 sec increments 3 VSF User Max Record Timer 000 999 60 1 sec increments 4 VSF Valid User Message Timer 0 9 4 1 sec increments 5 Door Open Timer 05 99 20 100 msec increments 6 ICM Dial Tone Timer 01 20 10 1 sec increments 7 Inter Digit Timer 01 20 05 1 sec increments 8 Message Wait Reminder Tone 00 60 00 1 min increments Timer 9 Paging Timeout Timer 000 255 015 1 sec increments 10 Pause Timer 1 9 3 1 sec increments 11 3 Soft Auto Release Timer 01 30 30 1 sec increments Reserved for new keyset 12 VM Pause Timer 01 90 30 100 msec increments Except USA version PGM Code 182 System Timers Ill 1 SLT Hook Switch Bounce Timer 01 25 01 100 msec increments 2 SLT Max Hook Switch Flash Timer 01 25 10 100 msec increments 3 SLT Min Hook flash Timer 000 250 030 10 msec increments 4 Station Auto Release Timer 000 300 060 1 sec increments 5 Unsupervised Conference Timer 00 99 10 1 minute increments 6 Prime Line Delay Timer 01 20 05 1 sec increments 7 Wink Timer 010 200 010 10 msec increments 8 Enblock Inter Digit Timer 01 20 5 1 sec increments 9 DTMF Duration Timer 04 99 10 10 msec increments 10 Flexible DID Timer 01 99 30 100 msec increments PGM Code 186 DCOB System Attributes 1 R2 Out manage Timer 01 50 14 1 sec increments 2 R2 Incoming manage Timer 01 50 14 1 sec increments 3 R2 Disappear Timer 01 50 14 1 sec increments 4 R2 Pulse Timer 01 30 07 20 msec increments 5 R2 Ready Timer 000 500
184. 02 CLIP TABLE INDEX When a call is placed on an ISDN Line the iPECS None INDEX NOT ASSIGNED system will send caller id using the number Micro from the CLIP COLP Table PGM Code 201 jpecs 50 amp entry defined by this parameter For entry 00 MEIM100 the CLI STA NO entered in PGM CODE 114 bitn 6 will be used in place of the station number 09710 For other entries the station number is added Oner MEI as a suffix to the entry in PGM CODE 201 00 50 3 01 02 EN BLOC SENDING This entry determines if the system sends 0 OFF ON 1 0N 0 OFF ON dialed digits to the ISDN line as they are 1 ON received Overlap or collects all digits and forwards them in a block ENBLOC 2 48 im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 4 01 02 TYPE OF NO 0 4 For outgoing calls on the ISDN Line this 0 4 2 NATIONAL 2 parameter defines the Type of Number Plan provided in Calling Party Information Element of the ISDN call SETUP message 0 UNKNOWN 1 INTERNATIONAL 2 NATIONAL 3 Not used 4 SUBSCRIBER 5 01 02 DID REMOVE NO When a DID call is received on an ISDN Line 00 99 00 00 99 00 this entry determines the number of digits that will be removed starting with the first received digit 6 01 02 T
185. 1 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 34 M CAST RTP I PAGE 31 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 31 0000 9999 8166 8166 8167 8167 35 M CAST RTP I PAGE 32 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 32 0000 9999 8168 8168 8169 8169 36 M CAST RTP I PAGE 33 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 33 0000 9999 8170 8170 8171 8171 37 M CAST RTP I PAGE 34 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 34 0000 9999 8172 8172 8173 8173 38 M CAST RTP I PAGE 35 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 35 0000 9999 8174 8174 8175 8175 39 M CAST RTP I PAGE ALL RTP and RTCP ports for Internal All Call 0000 9999 8176 8176 8177 Page 8177 40 M CAST RTP E PAGE 1 RTP and RTCP ports for External Page 1 0000 9999 8178 8178 8179 8179 41 MULTICAST RTP E PAGE 2 RTP and RTOP ports for External Page 2 0000 9999 8180 8180 8181 8181 8182 8183 Page 8183 43 M CAST RTP PAGE ALL RTP and RTOP ports for All Call Page 0000 9999 8184 8184 8185 8185 44 M CAST RTP PTT 1 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 1 0000 9999 8186 8186 8187 8187 45 M CAST RTP PTT 2 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 2 0000 9999 8188 8188 8189 8189 46 M C
186. 1 02 CLI TRANSIT When the system must send CLI to the ISDN 0 CFW CFW 1 ORI 0 CFW CFW for an off net call the CLI can be either the 1 ORI original caller s CLI or the CLI of the Off net forwarding transferring station 18 01 02 PRESERVE NAME For DID lines the CLI is normally displayed 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 OFF NET only during ringing If enabled here the CLI 1 ON will be displayed for the entire call duration 19 01 02 REDIRECT INFO When the system need to send Redirecting 0 NO NO NO SERVICE 0 number to the ISDN for an off net call the SERVICE SERVICE Redirecting number can be either the original 4 ORG CLI caller s CLI or the CLI of the Off net 2 CFW CLI forwarding transferring station If it is no service then system will not send this information If it is OGR CLl original CLI then system will send original CLI that is received from incoming CO line If it is CFW CLI then system will send redirecting CLI that is CLI for call off net call forwarded station Table 2 3 5 2 4 STATION CO LINE COS TOLL RESTRICTIONS CO COS 1 CO COS 2 CO COS 3 CO COS 4 CO COS 5 STA COS 1 No Restriction No Restriction No Restriction Only Local Call LD No Restriction Code Counter and Table C STACOS2 Exception Table A Exception Table A No Restriction Only Local Call LD No Restriction governs the dialing governs the dialing Code Counter and Table C STACOS3 Exception Table B No Restriction Exception Table B Only Local Call LD No Rest
187. 1 ANNC 2 RPT After the 2nd announcement if the call 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 OFF OFF remains queued to the group the 2nd VSF 1 ON announcement can be repeated at the ANNounCement RePeaT TiMeR interval 7 CIRC 621 OVERFLOW DEST A call to the group will continue to route Station or S H V SPD Dial 1 4 through the group until answered or all Group group members have been tried The call Number VSF will remain at the last station or will pass to Announce the assigned OVerFLOW DESTination System SPD 8 CIRC 621 OVERFLOW TMR A call to a group will remain at the last 000 600 180 000 600 180 station in the group or can be sent to the seconds assigned OVerFLOW DESTination after expiration of the OVERFLOW TiMeR 9 CIRC 621 WRAP UP TMR After terminating any call a Group 002 999 002 002 999 002 member will be maintained in a busy state seconds for the duration of the WRAP UP TiMeR 10 IcIRC 621 NO ANS TMR 1s Calls to a station in the group are directed 00 99 15 00 99 15 to the station if unavailable or unanswered seconds in the NO ANSwer TiMeR the call can be routed based on the assigned hunt process 11 CIRC 621 PILOT HUNT A circular terminal hunt group can be set 0 OFF ON 1 ON 0 OFF ON so that only calls to the pilot number 1 ON Station Group number will hunt 12 CIRC 621 RPT NO MEMBER If a call is received and no members are 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 OFF OFF on duty an ICM call will return re order 1 ON t
188. 1 MCID REQUEST Dial code to activate Malicious Call ID 0 0 0 0 ENTER NEW 0 Request in ISDN Supplementary service Not available in USA version 2 AME FEATURE Dial code to assign an Answering 564 564 564 564 ENTER NEW 564 Machine Emulation Flex button 3 US CONF TMR EXTENSION Dial code to extend Unsupervised H HH H ENTER NEW conference time 4 Push To Talk group login and logout 0 0 0 0 PTT GROUP LOGIN OUT ENTER NEW 0 dial code The station must have a PTT button for proper operation 5 ACD AGENT P LOGIN ACD Agent Primary Login code 581 581 581 581 ENTER NEW 6 ACD AGENT P LOGOUT ACD Agent Primary Logout code 582 582 582 582 ENTER NEW 7 ACD AGENT S LOGIN ACD Agent Secondary Login code 583 583 583 583 ENTER NEW 8 ACD AGENT S LOGOUT ACD Agent Secondary Logout code 584 584 584 584 ENTER NEW 9 ACD Agent wrap up end code 585 585 585 585 ACD AGENT WRAPUP END ENTER NEW im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Btn DISPLAY FEATURE DEFAULT iPECS MFIM MFIM MFIM 50 Micro 300 600 1200 MFIM100 10 TNET CM LOGIN OUT When Central Control networking 586 586 586 586 ENTER NEW 586 TNET is employed a station can be manually logged in or out of the Central system using this code 11 ENTER INTO CONF ROOM Code for a station to enter a 59 59 59 59 ENTER NEW 59 confere
189. 1 a_index htm Web Administration LIK300 Version iPECS VD96M E 0Ap APR 08 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 1 Admin Menu im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Selecting the System ID amp Numbering Plans program group returns the sub menu displayed in Figure 3 5 1 1 Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm 108 Fi Web Administration LIK300 Version iPECS VD96M E 0Ap APR 08 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 1 1 System ID amp Numbering Plans sub menu 3 10 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 100 Selecting System ID will display the Input Entry page Figure 3 5 1 1 1 Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DER File Edit View Favorites Tools Help amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm TT ed iPECS VD96M E OAp APRIOS Boot Version 1 0Ah JANIOT Attribute Nation Code Site Name Max 24 Characters My Area Code Max 6 Digits Device IP P102 103 Numbering Plan Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 1 1 1 System ID Under System ID the country is identified using the international dial codes Nation Code A tw
190. 10 60 Timer used in accepting Received signal 10 60 40 10 60 40 sec seconds 12 001 002 N200 1 5 The terminal shall provide one N200 1 5 3 1 5 3 counter for each logical link supported The default value of this counter shall be 3 13 001 002 N201 250 300 The N201 counter sets the maximum 250 300 260 250 300 260 byte number of Octets in the ISDN information bytes field 14 001 002 N202 1 5 If the terminal transmits a TEI Identify 1 5 3 1 5 3 Request message to request assignment of a TEI the terminal shall provide one N202 counter for each logical link that it supports 15 001 002 N204 1 5 The N204 counter establishes the 1 5 1 SS g al maximum number of XID re transmissions from the terminal The terminal shall provide one K counter for 1 5 1 2 57 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 2 3 5 9 T1 Line Timers PGM Code 152 North American T1 standards require that the T1 terminating device in this case the iPECS system include various adjustable timers and counters as described below PROCEDURE COL T1 ATT 1 Press the PGM button and dial 152 ENTER CO RANGE 001 002 COL T1 ATT Use the dial pad to enter a CO Line range Ex 001 002 For a single CO Line PRESS IEM REV OEE enter the same number twice For the iPECS Micro the acceptable range is 01 05 for the iPECS 50 and MFIM100 the acceptable range is 01 42 for the MFIM300 the accepta
191. 106 Flexible Numbering Plan part A Base 1 D 2 Flex1 Set IP Address Flex2 Set Mac Address Flex3 Direct Send Flex 4 Local Device Flex 5 CPU Type Flex 6 Device Id type Flex1 Set IP Address Flex2 Set Mac Address Flex3 Direct Send Flex 4 Local Device Flex 5 CPU Type Flex 6 Device Id type Flex1 Set IP Address Flex2 Set Mac Address Flex3 Direct Send Flex 4 Local Device Flex 5 CPU Type Flex 6 Device Id type Flex1 Set IP Address Flex2 Set Mac Address Flex3 Direct Send Flex 4 Local Device Flex 5 CPU Type Flex 6 Device Id type Flex1 Set IP Address Flex2 Set Mac Address Flex3 Direct Send Flex 4 Local Device Flex 5 CPU Type Flex 6 Device Id type Sequence numbers are assigned to the maximum available for the system Default Numbering Plan Country Code 1 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button SUB MENU DEFAULT REMARK 1 Internal Page Zone MFIM 501 510 Other 501 535 MFIMs 2 Internal All Call Page 543 3 Meet Me Page 544 4 External Page Zone 1 545 5 External Page Zone 2 546 6 External All Call Page 548 7 All Call Page Internal amp External 549 8 SMDR Account Code Enter 550 SLT 9 Flash Command to CO Line 551 SLT 10 Last Number Redial 552 SLT 11 DND Toggle On Off 553 SLT 12 Call Forward 554 13 Speed Dial Programming 555 SLT 14 Message Wait Callback Enable 556 SLT 15 Message Wait Callback Return 557 SLT 16 Speed Dial Access 558 SLT 17 Cancel DND F
192. 15 DISABLED Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved SABLED SABLED SABLED SABLED SES SSS SS SSIES SABLED SABLED lt SABLED Internet Figure 3 5 12 3 1 Zone Page RTP Packet Relay iPECS protocol employs multi cast to send of RTP packets to multiple devices at one time This improves efficiency and lowers traffic by sending a single multi cast packet to multi cast group members In particular paging employs this multi cast technique However since multi cast is not commonly supported outside of the LAN uni cast must be used to transport such signals between routers At the receiving Zone a local VoIP channel receives the uni cast signal from the controlling MFIM The VoIP channel then converts the packet address to a multi cast signal for delivery to devices in the same Zone RTP Relay Group Table 3 5 12 3 1 Zone Page RTP Packet Relay ATTRIBUTE REMARK RANGE DEFAULT Page RTP Relay to From this device to the Zone selected enable or disable Enable disable Zone Disable Page By RTP Relay To this device from the Zone selected enable or disable Enable disable From Zone Disable 3 210 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Selecting the Zone Attributes returns the Zone Attributes data input page Figure Figure 3 5 12 4 1 Enter the desired Zone number range and click Load
193. 182 136 KOREA Prompt Usage OFF v uthorization UNKNOWN Prompt Usage OFF v NTP Attributes P195 SNMP Attnbute P196 Cabinet Attnbute P197 Hot Desk Attributes P250 System Speed Dial Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved http 150 150 131 211 mainmenu htm Internet Figure 3 5 5 19 1 System Multi Language Support The VSF and VMIM support multiple languages up to three languages may be supported simultaneously Once the prompts are downloaded to the VSF VMIM the caller receives the Language selection announcement for DISA and CCR calls as well as proceeding a Hunt Group guaranteed announcement or DID error announcement The language selection announcement will only affect the language prompts enabled for use 3 116 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODES 180 182 amp 186 Selecting System Timers will display the System Timers data entry page Figure 3 5 5 20 1 Selecting the blue colored text in the Table header will sort the table based on the selected column iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DER File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm irec RLP Priority P173 RS 232 Port Settings P174 Serial Port Selections P175 Break Make Ratio P176 Value Range SMDR Attrbutes P177 Attendant Recall Timer M kim 00 60 System Date amp Time P178 Call Park Recall
194. 2 Voice Mail Box Group 620 631 620 659 620 659 620 667 620 667 401 500 Voice Mail Box Station 100 125 100 149 100 169 100 399 1000 1599 1000 2199 13 ICLID Ring Assignment 001 250 001 250 001 250 001 250 001 250 001 250 Table 2 123 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 The System Speed Dial numbers can be grouped into zones Only stations allowed can access numbers within a zone allowing System Speed Dials to be partitioned Each zone can be assigned to apply the appropriate Station and CO Line COS for the Speed Dial number prior to dialing The MFIM 600 has 20 zones and MFIM1200 has 50 zones other models have 10 zones SYSTEM SPEED ZONE PGM ENTER ZONE NO 01 10 SYSTEM SPEED ZONE 1 F1 ZN F2 STA F3 TCHK F4 AK Refer to Table 2 3 9 8 1 DISPLAY Table 2 3 9 8 1 SPEED ZONE PGM 232 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 ENTER NEW ZONE RANGE Speed Dial Bin range 400 999 for iPECS Micro amp iPECS ZONE 1 XxXxX xxx for zone 50 amp MFIM100 2200 4999 for MFIM300 2200 7999 for MFIM600 20200 31999 for MFIM1200 2 ENTER STA RANGE Station range for zone 100 125 for IPECS Micro ZONE 1 XXX xxx 100 149 for IPECS 50 100 169 for MFIM100 100 399 for MFIM300 1000 1599 for MFIM600 1000 2199 for MFIM1200 3 SPEED ZONE 1 TOLL CHK Assignment to apply toll 0 OFF ON 1 0N 0 OFF ON restriction 1 ON 4 SPEED ZONE 1 AUTH CHK Speed Dial 0 OFF ON 1 0N 0 OF
195. 2 n a 2 2 2 2 contact open door 2 Not available in iPECS 50 3 23 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION DEFAULT iPECS iPECS 50 MFIM300 MFIM600 MFIM1200 Micro amp MFIM100 Door Open 3 Dial code to activate Door 3 n a n a 3 3 3 contact open door 3 Door Open 4 Dial code to activate Door 4 n a n a 4 4 4 contact open door 4 MCID Request Dial code to activate Malicious 0 0 0 0 0 Caller Id Except USA version Unsupervised Conf Dial code to extend HH HH HH Ht HH Timer Extend Code unsupervised conference time PTT Group Logon Logoff Push To Talk group login and 0 0 0 0 0 logout dial code The station must have a PTT button for proper operation ACD Agent Primary ACD Agent Primary Login code 581 581 581 581 581 Login ACD Agent Primary ACD Agent Primary Logout 582 582 582 582 582 Logout code ACD Agent Secondary ACD Agent Secondary Login 583 583 583 583 583 Login Code ACD Agent Secondary ACD Agent Secondary Logout 584 584 584 584 584 Logout Code ACD Agent Wrap up ACD Agent Wrap up end code 585 585 585 585 585 Enc TNET CM LOGIN OUT In a Central Control TNET a 586 586 586 586 586 station can manually log in out of the Central controlling MFIM using this code ENTER INTO CONF Code for a station to enter a 59 59 59 59 59 ROOM conference room ENTER INTO CONF Code for a station to initiat
196. 23 47 12 Number 105 so il iD a 206 Phone 8040L 00405a149b0f 10 123 47 16 207 Phone 8004D OOla ead48Gc 10 123 47 17 208 PC Phone 001109063dde 150 150 150 21 209 210 211 212 213 214 215 216 DTIMGW 00406a13db58 10 123 47 10 MISC Gateway MISC GW 10 00405a28e790 192 168 123 47 VSF Gateway VSF GW 6 00405a28e 790 192 168 123 47 Copyright C 2008 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Figure 3 5 1 2 1 Device Port Num Change Device Delete Port Number Change The system support changing port number or deleting device To change port number or delete device click sequence number of that device Then a user can see pop up window as below Figure 3 5 1 2 2 Device Port Number Change Pop up In this window a user can change Device ID Mac address IP address and port number of that device Also a user can delete that device by checking Device Delete check box System would be restarted when a user change port number or delete device After system restarting whole logical number of that device type would be re ordered Admin DB Move option is used whether admin database move or not when you delete or change port number of device The default value of Admin DB Move option is checked If you uncheck Admin DB Copy option then all admin databases would be same with before If you check Admin DB Copy option then all admin databa
197. 24 9 VSF VMIM SMTP PORT SMTP port of VSF VMIM 00001 655 00025 00001 65535 00025 35 24 10 ICM BUSY SVC If ICM busy choice OHVO or Intrusion 0 OHVO 0 1 INTR 0 OHVO OHVO 4 INTR 24 11 AUTO SAVE NEW MEG If its ON save new message automatically 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 2 3 6 2 System Password PGM Code 162 Access to the system database and maintenance functions can be protected by passwords up to twelve 12 digits Three passwords can be defined User Admin and Maintenance The Maintenance password has full and unlimited access to the database and maintenance functions of the system The User and Admin password have access to database items defined in Web Admin Note there are no default passwords PROCEDURE SYSTEM PASSWORD 1 Press the PGM button and dial 162 PRESS FLEX KEY 1 3 Press the Flex button for the desired password For the Admin password press Flex button 1 For the Maintenance password press Flex button 2 For the User password press Flex button 3 Enter the desired password up to 12 digits To erase a password press the SPEED button Press the SAVE button to store the password entry 2 64 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Table 2 3 6 2 1 System Passwords Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 USER PASSWORD User password configurable database 12 digits none sereenneee access in Web
198. 3 DISPLAY Use the dial pad to enter desired data for the Attribute refer to Table 2 3 5 2 1 through Table 2 3 5 2 5 Press the SAVE button to store the data entry 2 45 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Table 2 3 5 2 1 CO IP ATTRIBUTES I PGM 141 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 01 02 CO IP GROUP Each CO Line is assigned to a group iPECS 01 GRP NO 00 21 01 grouping should be based on the Line type Micro and COS iPECS 50 amp MFIM100 00 21 other MFIM 00 73 2 01 02 CO Line COS Each CO Line is assigned a Class of Service 1 5 1 cos 1 5 1 which will interact with the Station COS refer to section 0 CO COS 1 Station COS applies CO COS 2 Exception Table A governs CO COS 3 Exception Table B governs CO COS 4 Restricts LD calls and Exception Table C CO COS 5 Overrides Station COS 2 6 with no restrictions 3 01 02 CO START SIGNAL The system can recognize a loop closure or 0 LOOP LOOP 1 GND 0 LOOP LOOP a ground as the connect start signal on an 1 GND analogue CO Line 4 01 02 CO LINE TYPE Each CO Line can be assigned as connected 0 CO co 1 PBX 0 CO CO to a CO Line or a PBX CTX Line 1 PBX 5 01 02 CO LINE SIGNAL Each analogue CO Line can be assigned to 0 Pulse DTMF 1 DTMEF 0 PULS
199. 3 1 DISPLAY Table 2 3 9 13 1 HOT DESK ATTRIBUTES PGM 250 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 NO OF AGENT 000 300 Assign number of hot desk agents 00 26 for iPECS Micro 000 010 000 050 for IPECS 50 000 070 for MFIM100 000 300 for MFIM300 000 600 for MFIM600 000 1200 for MFIM1200 2 VIEW AGENT RANGE View the assigned station number 390 P291 399 P300 for agents 3 AUTO LOGOUT TMR hour A Hot desk station will return to 00 00 24 00 inactive if the logged in user takes 0 24 Hrs no action for the Auto Logout timer 2 129 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 NET BASIC ATTRIBUTE PRESS FLEX KEY 1 8 Refer to Table 2 3 10 1 1 DISPLAY Table 2 3 10 1 1 NETWORK BASIC ATTRIBUTE PGM 320 Button DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 NET ENABLE Enable Networking function 0 OFF OFF 1 ON OFF OFF 1 ON 2 NET RETRY COUNT Not used 00 99 00 00 99 00 3 NET CNIP ENABLE The name of calling station is sent to the 0 OFF ON 1 ON OFF ON called system between iPECS systems CNIP 1 ON is displayed at called party stations display based on the programming 4 NET CONP ENABLE Reserved for future usage 0 OFF OFF 1 ON OFF OFF 1 ON 5 NET SIGNAL METHOD Select the information element type for QSIG 0 UUS FAC 1 FAC UUS FAC su
200. 3 11 Station IP Attributes PGM Code 122 Stations are allowed access to the systems H 323 VoIP resources based on the Station IP Attributes Refer to Table 2 3 3 11 1 for a description of the attributes and the inputs available PROCEDURE STATION IP ATTRIBUTE ENTER STA RANGE 1 Press the PGM button and dial 122 100 110 STA IP ATTRI Use the dial pad to enter a station range Ex 100 110 For a single station enter the same number twice PRESS FLEX KEY 1 Refer to Table 2 3 3 11 1 Press the desired Flex button refer to Table 2 3 3 11 1 DISPLAY Use the dial pad to enter desired data for the Station IP Attribute refer to Table 2 3 3 11 1 Press the SAVE button to store the data entry Table 2 3 3 11 1 STATION IP ATTRIBUTES PGM 122 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAUL T 1 100 110 DTR IP CALL Enables station to access an IP channel 0 Disable Enable 1 EN O DIS ENABLE directly by dialing the IP Group access code to 1 Enable place H 323 or SIP VoIP calls 2 3 3 12 Station Timers PGM Code 123 Certain timers can be assigned on a station basis Available timers description and valid inputs are given in Table 2 3 3 12 1 PROCEDURE STATION TIMERS 1 Press the PGM button and dial 123 ENTER STA RANGE 100 110 STATION RANGE Use the dial pad to enter a station range Ex 100 110 For a single station enter the same number twi
201. 3 222 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 491 Selecting the DECT Data program group returns the sub menu displayed in Figure 3 5 15 1 Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DAR File Edit Yiew Favorites Tools Help Address http 150 150 131 21 1 a_index htm Tk Boot Version 1 0A4h JAN OF Web Administration LIK300 Version iPECS VD96M E 0Ap APR OS Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 15 1 DECT Data Main Page 3 223 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Eok Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 167 a_index htm Park Code ie 31100013403248 AC Code DECT Subscribe enable v 1 33x Desired Station Phone Type DECT Subscribe All Data Erase as Password Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 15 1 1 DECT Subscription Screen On this page the DECT id and authorization codes are defined In addition a pull down menu selects one of four subscription events subscribe de subscription mobility or display registered stations A separate password box permits password entry to terminate erase all DECT subscriptions Table 3 5 15 1 1 DECT Registration ATTRIBUTE REMARK RANGE DEFAULT Park Code PARK Portable Access Rights Key Code Uniqu
202. 3 8 9 1 Station List Management A user can manage and control other stations by using station list Stations which can be controlled are inserted or deleted from the Station List To manage another station enter the station number amp password for the desired station and select insert The user can now control properties of the inserted station including DND User name Call Forward Flex Button Assignment Pre selected message etc from the Station Program User portal 3 257 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Selecting Conference Group displays the input entry page Figure 3 8 10 1 Station 3000 Program LIK300 Version iPECS D96M E 0Ao MAR 08 Figure 3 8 10 1 Conference Group Selecting the number of conference group Figure 3 8 10 2 3 258 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Station Conference Group System Conference Group 00 50 No Name CouniMembero Sts DEL N A N A N A N A 04 N A 06 NA 07 N A 08 N A 09 N A 10 N A C 1 N A 12 N A C 13 N A ee ee ee 15 N A 16 N A 17 N A DC p N A T 13 N A T 20 N A T 1 N A 1 Figure 3 8 10 2 Program the attributes of group and set the type co dial number of member Figure 3 8 10 3 3 259 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance System Conference Group 100 Pass
203. 300 seconds ACNR Retry Counter This counter sets the number of recall attempts for 1 13 03 ACNR before ACNR is abandoned for CIS 1 9 ACNR Tone Detect Timer If call progress tones are not available for ACNR 001 300 30 the system will wait this duration after dialing seconds before considering the called party as busy no answer Automatic CO Release If a user accesses a CO IP path and takes no 000 300 030 Timer action the system will automatically release the seconds CO IP path when this timer expires CCR Inter digit Timer Inter digit timer used with Customer Call Routing 000 300 030 function 100 msec Call Restrict Timer Not used Check PGM123 Btn2 00 99 00 minutes CO Dial Delay Timer Delay for through connection to prevent illegal 00 99 05 dialing when CO PBX has slow response 100 msec CO Release Guard Timer When a CO Line is returned to idle the system will 010 150 020 deny access for this time to assure the PSTN 100 msec returns the CO circuitry to idle CO Ring Off Timer This timer sets the maximum Off duration of the 001 150 060 incoming ring cycle for the Ring Detect circuitry of 100 msec the system to detect an abandoned call CO Ring ON Timer This timer sets the On time of the incoming ring 1 9 2 cycle for the Ring Detect circuitry of the system to 100 msec recognize an incoming call Elapsed Call Timer Users can receive a periodic tone indicating the 060 900 180 length of an outgoing call This
204. 308 Tables Data as tetceaee tc nih ene eo ee E E E AES A AET 3 160 3 5 8 1 LCR Control AttriDUte 221 cccccccceecceceseeeceneeceeetecsaeeseneececeeeceanessaaeeceeeeecenenseasseeneecseneeneas 3 161 3 5 8 2 LCR LDT Leading Digit Table cccscccccccecessceeneeeceeeeecsaesseneeceeeeeceenessaseeeeeneessneees 3 163 3 5 8 3 LCR DMT Digit Modification Table 2 cccccccceccceseececeeceeeseeeeneeceeeeeceeeeteseeseeseeetsneetsnes 3 165 3 5 8 4 LCR Table InitiQliZation cccccsscccccesssscecessnesessensecessuanaesessuseesessenaeseesenaeseseeseesessesesesenenees 3 167 3 5 8 5 Toll Exc ption TAD Cait cisscsied eset tieasece sat neiaie aa aai i aaa a i 3 168 3 5 8 6 Emergency Code TAable cscccccccecsseeceenceceeececeaeeeenaecceneeceeeesaaeseeaeeeteesseaaeeseneecenssesnaees 3 170 3 5 8 7 Authorization Code Table ccccccssscccccssssececsessececsessececsesececsesesecsenueseecseaeeeesesseseesenineees 3 171 3 5 8 8 Customer Call Routing Table cccccccesecceessececeeeceeeeenseceeneeceaeeesensecseneecenetsaecseneecsnntees 3 172 3 5 8 9 Executive Secretary Tab le 1 cccccccccecccssseccescecsencesnaeeseneeceseessssaseaeaeecseeseseassaeaeessnneeesaees 3 174 3 5 8 10 Flexible DID Conversion TADIO cccccssccccessscecesessececsenececsenesecsenuesecsesassessenieseesenneees 3 175 3 5 8 11 System Speed Zone Table cccccccccccsccceseceeeeeceeeecseacecseeeessesseneeceeeeesseesseeneeceeeeessansees 3 177 3 5 8 12
205. 44 MAP 9 CO Line 145 192 2 31 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 2 3 3 5 Station Class of Service PGM Code 116 All stations are assigned a Class of Service COS which determines the ability of the user to dial certain types of calls refer to Table 2 3 3 5 1 Separate COS assignments are made for Day Timed and Night Mode system operation As a default all stations are assigned with a Station COS of 1 no restrictions for all three modes The station COS interacts with the CO Line COS to establish overall dialing or Toll restrictions This interaction and the resulting restrictions are given in Table 2 3 3 5 2 Long distance calls are determined by the 1st dialed digit 0 and or the number of digits dialed If the 1st digit dialed is an LD code default O or if the number of digits dialed exceeds the assigned LD digit counter SMDR Attributes PGM CODE 177 button 4 the call is consider a Long Distance call and appropriate restrictions are applied PROCEDURE STATION COS 1 Press the PGM button and dial 116 ENTER STA RANGE 100 110 STATION COS Use the dial pad to enter a station range Ex 100 110 For a single station enter the same number twice DAY 1 NIGHT 1 TIMED 1 Press desired Flex button 1 Day mode COS 2 Night mode COS 3 Timed mode COS Use the dial pad to enter desired data for the Station COS refer to Table 2 3 3 5 1 amp Ta
206. 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 565 566 567 568 569 571 572 573 574 575 576 EST 578 579 7 100 169 100 399 1000 1599 401 410 401 435 43 45 46 48 49 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 10 50 12 Ag 14 15 16 47 20 21 20 23 24 25 26 27 28 100 169 100 999 100 399 100 999 501 510 501 535 543 544 545 546 548 549 550 551 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 565 566 567 568 569 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 Issue 5 0 Remark SLT SLT SLT SLT SLT SLT SLT SLT SLT SLT SLT im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 i CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 B 6 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 APPENDIX C FIXED FUNCTION USER PROGRAM CODES Fixed Function Codes refer to Tables C 1 and C 2 are digit sequences users and the Attendant may dial while in the USER PROGRAM MODE to assign certain Flex buttons and affect the status of a feature or setting For more information on the USER PROGRAM MODE refer to the iPECS Features and Operation Guide Many of these Function Codes may be assigned to a button of an iPECS Phone by pressing the PGM button as the first entry of a Flexible button assignment se
207. 6 digits 3 191 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Selecting the Remote Device Data program group returns the sub menu displayed in Figure 3 5 9 510 1 Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DAR File Edit Yiew Favorites Tools Help 3 http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm iIPECSVD96M E 0Ap APRIO8 Boot Version 1 04h JAN OF Web Administration LIK300 Version iPECS VD96M E 0Ap APR OS Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 9 510 1 Remote Device Data The RSGM Remote Services Gateway Module provides a number of local services in addition to transparent access to the host iPECS The RSGM is intended for use when connected to the iPECS via an unmanaged IP network The local services include Alarm Doorbell monitor BGM MOH and External Control contacts For RSGM capacity refer to Table 1 1 1 The programs in this group allow for configuration of the RSGM identification and attributes for each RSGM unit 3 192 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 430 Selecting Remote Device Address will display the Remote Device Table page Figure 3 5 10 1 1 F iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm F Delete Mac Address IP Address T a 1 2 3 4 5 6
208. 62 562 562 562 562 unavailable AME Feature Dial code to assign an 564 564 564 564 564 Answering Machine Emulation Flex button Alarm Reset Code to reset Alarm contacts 565 565 565 565 565 Group Call Pick Up Group Call Pick up dial code 566 566 566 566 566 Universal Night Answer Universal Night Answer dial 567 567 567 567 567 code Account Code With Bin Dial code for entering an 568 568 568 568 568 Account Code Walking COS Dial code to activate Walking 569 569 569 569 569 Class of Service 3 22 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION DEFAULT iPECS iPECS 50 MFIM300 MFIM600 MFIM1200 Micro amp MFIM100 ACD Agent ON OFF Code to toggle ACD Supervisor 571 571 571 571 571 Duty ON and OFF duty ACD Supervisor Login Supervisor log in dial code 572 572 572 572 572 ACD Supervisor Logout Supervisor log out dial code 573 573 573 573 573 ACD Help Code Agent amp Supervisor dial code 574 574 574 574 574 for Supervisor help ACD Call In Queue Dial code to display calls in 575 575 575 575 575 Display queue ACD Supervisor Status Dial code to display group 576 576 576 576 576 status ACD Supervisor Monitor Dial code to activate 577 577 577 577 577 Supervisor monitor ACD Reroute Queued Code to reroute call after 578 578 578 578 578 Call Answer answer ACD Reroute Queued Code to reroute call prior to 579 579 57
209. 6M E 0Ap APR 08 Boot Version DAR JAN OT EnterCO Range J toaa eave CO Range From 1 to 1 Uncheck All Feature Value Range j 0 71 WSF Announce 0 OiService OFF 71 Only Tone Mode Auto Drop 7 Day i 0 71 VSF Announce 0 0 Service OFF 71 Only Tone Mode Auto Drop D Night COMP Attrbutes P140 142 COMP R igmument P 144 DID Service Attributes P145 0 71 WSF Announce OiService OFF 71 Only Tone Mode Auto Drop D COMP Preset Fwd Attr P147 NA ISDN Line Attributes P150 ISDb ine Atty Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 4 4 1 DISA Service Attributes DISA Service can be enabled on CO lines based on the system operation mode Day Night and Timed DISA calls may be routed to dial tone and await user dialing simple routing or through a multi layered Audio Text menu assigning a VSF AA Announcement and a Customer Call Route CCR Table Index The system can be instructed to disconnect after the announcement Auto Drop or follow the CCR Table routing with a user recorded announcement requesting specific inputs from the user 3 69 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re Station Admin PGM CODE 147 Selecting CO IP Preset Forward Attributes will display the CO IP Preset Forward Attributes data input page Figure 3 5 4 5 1 Enter a valid CO range and click Load to enter the CO IP Pr
210. 7 304A CO Line Data ermi hens eves ie ar a a E a a ANEA EEAS 3 61 3 5 4 1 COMP Attributes siirsin aaa ANN aAa a Eana NDOA EA RANEE 3 62 3 5 4 2 CO RING Assignment va zessthscsssTevesnnes vose tests ti ssenstons wes taataa aAa AE a anaa aasan 3 66 3 5 4 3 DID Service Attribute ccccccccccecececececececececececececesececeecececececetecececececesetetecetecececececeteceeterss 3 67 3 5 4 4 DISA Se rvi c ARribUt S s siuirrnreir iainta aiaia eiiean 3 69 3 5 4 5 CO IP Preset Forward Attributes ccccseeceesseeeereeererererererenenerenerenerereceseseseeeeeeeseseeeeess 3 70 3 5 4 6 NA ISDN Line Attributes cccececccccccccceceessssesceeceececeesueusececeseceenensusserseseeceeretinseeeeesecseres 3 71 3 5 4 7 ISDN CO Line AttriDUteS ccccccccccccccceeeecscccccececsenecnsesceesessesesuseueeesecsersnsssearseseerensneass 3 73 3 5 4 8 PE CO LING Attributes eiorinn enaiis aiaa aia aiiai aaia 3 77 3 5 4 9 DCOB CO Line AttriDUteS cccccccccccccceecsccsccccecceceeneccueseeceeseceeeessuseseeesecsereausasuearsecsenensneass 3 79 gD OV SEM Datania en bsacecguinaceathasetencdeseesavannedeusanticdhdatatelieasitePausanuhdetaveetes 3 80 3 5 5 1 Systemi Attributes ssie bo anoa esd EN sted is ie decd en ea 3 81 3 5 5 2 System PassWord iresi paaa aa bs aE E detente NEEN Ear aiana eat 3 85 3 5 5 3 Alarm Atiribute Seran a E n a a a a sdaban 3 86 3 5 5 4 Attendant ASSIGNING sits cis cacenstesnchas ssy Bost ds abot sas nsina iina EAEN E AAEN
211. 7 8 9 OOO a a a a a a Oo a a a a a Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 10 1 1 Remote Device Table The Remote Device Table displays characteristics of each registered Remote device Prior to registration a MAC must be entered in the Remote Registration Table section 3 5 13 1 for each remote device including RSGM modules The registered MAC address can be modified for device replacement Table 3 5 10 1 1 REMOTE DEVICE TABLE ATTRIBUTE REMARK RANGE DEFAULT Set Mac Address RSGM Remote device MAC address for registration 12 digits None IP Address Display registered RSGM Remote device IP address IP Address None Station Device List Display registered RSGM iPECS Phone device list None SLT Device list Display registered RSGM SLT device list None Gateway List Display registered RSGM COL device list None Remark 3 193 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 431 Selecting Remote Music Address will display the Remote Multicast Address page Figure 3 5 10 2 1 A iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help 3 g http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm BnterRange ___J _ toad Range From 1 to 1 Value Attribute eae z RTP RTCP Multicast 1 8186 8187 0000
212. 8 sscccssccssccssccssccesscetscenssensseens 2 120 2 3 9 6 Executive Secretary Table PGM Code 229 scccssscccsececeeeeessececseeceeeeeseaeeseneesenseesnaees 2 121 2 3 9 7 Flexible DID Conversion Table PGM Code 231 ccccecccccccccsceseecececessseasesesecesseaneneesess 2 122 2 3 9 8 System Speed Zone Table PGM Code 232 11 cccccccccsceceeeesnseceeseeceeecessesseeeesenseesnaees 2 124 2 3 9 9 Auto Ring Mode PGM Code 233 ccccesccesssesssessseesseesseesssessecsseesseessecsaccsscsscesecsssensseens 2 125 2 3 9 10 Voice Mail Dialing Table PGM Code 234 c ccccccscssesssesseesseesseessccsccesecessccsccnscenssessseens 2 126 2 3 9 11 Registration amp Fractional Module Table PGM Code 235 c ccccccssssccsessseeesssseseessnsees 2 127 2 3 9 12 Mobile Extension Table PGM Code 236 gt ou cccccccccccccceseecececeeesessencececeessanenseceeeesessnenes 2 128 2 3 9 13 Hot Desk Attributes PGM Code 250 ou cceccccccceeccccccssseceessesececneeesecseeeeeseeeeeeseenenseseeeenes 2 129 2 3 10 NETWORKING DATA PGM CODES 320 to 324 ov cccccecccsecesccueceaeceues 2 130 2 3 10 1 Network Basic Attribute PGM Code 320 0 ccecccecccccsecneecececeseseaseacececesssaseseceeessssasenes 2 130 2 3 10 2 Network Supplementary Attribute PGM Code 321 o ccssccccsssescecessseeceenseeecessnneeeesennees 2 131 2 3 10 3 Network CO LINE Attribute PGM Code 322 ceciccccccsccsscecececesecesescececceesesseeeceeeesenanenes 2 132 2 3 10 4 NET Numbering P
213. 8 digits im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 CAPACITY DESCRIPTION iPECS Micro iPECS 50 MFIM100 MFIM300 MFIM600 MFIM1200 Save Number 1 48 digits 1 48 digits 1 48 digits 1 48 digits 1 48 digits E Padi 1 48 digits edia Consoles Station ISMDR buffer 5000 5000 5000 10000 15000 30000 CO Line Groups 20 20 72 200 Groups Group Members pairs 500 26 474 500 50 450 2000 4000 600 1400 1200 2800 210 175 280 245 210 175 210 175 n a minutes minutes minutes minutes 4 channels 6 channels 6 channels 6 channels n a 9 hours 9 hours x6 9 hours x 30 i a Voe a 8 wr 16 16 32 32 VoIP channels 5 4 8 ee 6e nma n a Redundancy No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Note 1 The station and CO Line maximums are not simultaneously total ports cannot exceed 100 with MFIM100 50 with IPECS 50 300 with MFIM300 and 600 with the MFIM600 and 1200 with the MFIM1200 Note 2 For maximum RSGM connection ports calculation formula is ports available system station ports 2 there must be sufficient VoIP channels to support packet relay for RSGM rtp packets Note 3 16 M byte is used for prompt 35 minutes Note 4 iPECS 50 can support 8 VoIP channels if G 711 is used or4 channels if complex codec G 723 1 G 729 is used 1 2 GENERAL iPECS can be programmed to meet each customer s individual needs System programming may be accomplished by entering the PROGRAM MODE at an assigned
214. 8012 8024 8040 7004 7008 7016 7024 1 CO 1 CO 1 CO 1 CO 1 CO 1 Trans Pgm Dnd LOOP CO 1 2 CO 2 CO 2 CO 2 CO 2 CO 2 Speed Call Back LOOP CO 2 3 CO 3 CO 3 CO 3 CO 3 CO 3 LOOP LOOP empty CO 3 4 CO 4 CO 4 CO 4 CO 4 CO 4 LOOP LOOP empty CO 4 5 CO 5 CO 5 CO 5 CO 5 empty empty CO 5 6 CO 6 CO 6 CO 6 CO 6 empty empty CO 6 7 CO 7 CO 7 CO 7 CO 7 empty empty CO 7 8 LOOP CO 8 CO 8 CO 8 empty empty CO 8 9 CO 9 CO 9 LOOP empty CO 9 10 CO 10 CO 10 LOOP empty CO 10 11 LOOP LOOP empty LOOP 12 LOOP LOOP empty LOOP 13 empty empty empty 14 empty empty empty 15 empty empty empty 16 empty empty empty 17 empty empty 18 empty empty 19 empty empty 20 empty empty 21 empty empty 22 empty empty 23 empty empty 24 empty empty Note these button definitions cannot be changed 2 29 im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Table 2 3 3 4 3 iPECS PHONE BUTTON DEFAULT CONFIGURATION PGM 115 iPECS Micro Button iPECS Phone 8004 8008 8012 8024 8040 7004 7008 7016 7024 1 CO 1 CO 1 CO 1 CO 1 CO 1 Trans Pgm Dnd LOOP CO 1 2 CO 2 CO 2 CO 2 CO 2 CO 2 Speed Call Back LOOP CO 2 3 CO 3 CO 3 CO 3 CO 3 CO 3 LOOP LOOP empty CO 3 4 CO 4 CO 4 CO 4 CO 4 CO 4 LOOP
215. 8102 ports 8103 External BGM port 2 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for external BGM 2 0000 9999 8104 ports 8105 Internal Page 1 RTP amp RTCP ports RTP and RTOP ports for Internal Page 1 0000 9999 8106 8107 Internal Page 2 RTP amp RTCP ports RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 2 0000 9999 8108 Internal Page 3 RTP amp RTCP ports RTP and RTOP ports for Internal Page 3 0000 9999 T Internal Page 4 RTP amp RTCP ports RTP and RTOP ports for Internal Page 4 0000 9999 T E Internal Page 5 RTP amp RTCP ports RTP and RTOP ports for Internal Page 5 0000 9999 a 71 Internal Page 6 RTP amp RTCP ports RTP and RTOP ports for Internal Page 6 0000 9999 z i Internal Page 7 RTP amp RTCP ports RTP and RTOP ports for Internal Page 7 0000 9999 a A Internal Page 8 RTP amp RTCP ports RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 8 0000 9999 Internal Page 9 RTP amp RTCP ports RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 9 0000 9999 TA 8123 Internal Page 10 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 10 0000 9999 8124 ports 8125 Internal Page 11 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 11 0000 9999 8126 ports 8127 Internal Page 12 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 12 0000 9999 8128 ports 8129 3 91 im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0
216. 8128 ports 8129 Internal Page 13 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 13 0000 9999 8130 ports 8131 Internal Page 14 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 14 0000 9999 8132 ports 8133 Internal Page 15 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 15 0000 9999 8134 ports 8135 Internal Page 16 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 16 0000 9999 8136 ports 8137 Internal Page 17 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 17 0000 9999 8138 ports 8139 Internal Page 18 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 18 0000 9999 8140 ports 8141 Internal Page 19 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 19 0000 9999 8142 ports 8143 Internal Page 20 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 20 0000 9999 8144 ports 8145 Internal Page 21 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 21 0000 9999 8146 ports 8147 Internal Page 22 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 22 0000 9999 8148 ports 8149 Internal Page 23 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 23 0000 9999 8150 ports 8151 Internal Page 24 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 24 0000 9999 8152 ports 8153 Internal Page 25 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 25 0000 9999 8154 ports 8155 Internal Page 26 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 26 0000 9999 8156 ports 8157 Internal Page 27 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RT
217. 8313 Page 8313 108 M CAST RTP PAGE ALL RTP and RTCP ports for All Call Page 0000 9999 8314 8314 8315 8315 109 M CAST RTP PTT 1 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 1 0000 9999 8316 8316 8317 8317 2 73 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 110 M CAST RTP PTT 2 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 2 0000 9999 8318 8318 8319 8319 111 M CAST RTP PTT 3 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 3 0000 9999 8320 8320 8321 8321 112 M CAST RTP PTT 4 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 4 0000 9999 8322 8322 8323 8323 113 M CAST RTP PTT 5 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 5 0000 9999 8324 8324 8325 8325 114 M CAST RTP PTT 6 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 6 0000 9999 8326 8326 8327 8327 115 M CAST RTP PTT 7 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 7 0000 9999 8328 8328 8329 8329 116 M CAST RTP PTT 8 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 8 0000 9999 8330 8330 8331 8331 117 M CAST RTP PTT 9 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 9 0000 9999 8332 8332 8333 8333 118 M CAST RTP PTT ALL RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group ALL 0000 9999 8334 8334 8335 8335 119 M CAST RTP BGM VSF 1 RTP and RTCP ports for VSF VMIM BGM 0000 9999 8336 8336 8337 1
218. 9 579 579 Call No Answer answer Camp On Answer Dial code to answer a Camped 600 600 600 600 600 On call Call Park Locations Dial code to place retrieve a 601 610 601 610 601 619 601 699 601 699 call in a system Park Orbit Station Group Pilot Station group pilot number 620 631 620 659 620 667 620 667 401 500 Number Station User VSF VSF feature access code 66 66 66 66 66 Features Access Call Coverage Ring Code for Call Coverage button 67 67 67 67 76 Direct Call Pick Up Dial code to activate Directed 7 7 7 7 77 Call Pick up Access CO Group Dial code to access a CO Line 801 820 801 820 801 872 801 872 n a from a group Access Individual CO IP_ Dial code to access a specific 8801 8801 88001 88001 88001 CO Line IP Channel 8805 8842 88200 88400 88600 Access Held CO IP Dial code to access last CO 8 8 8 8 8 Line or IP channel from Hold Access Held Individual Dial code to access a specific 8 8 8 8 8 CO IP CO Line IP channel from Hold Access CO In First CO Dial code to access the 1st 9 9 9 9 9 Group available CO Line in any accessible group Attendant Call Dial code to call Main 0 0 0 0 0 Attendant VM MSG Wait Enable Dial code for external Voice 8 8 8 8 8 mail to activate Message Wait indication VM MSG Wait Cancel Dial code for external Voice 9 9 9 9 9 Mail to deactivate Message Wait indication Door Open 1 Dial code to activate Door 1 n a 1 1 1 1 contact open door 1 Door Open 2 Dial code to activate Door
219. 9 8212 8212 8213 8213 58 M CAST RTP SLT MOH 4 RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH 4 use 0000 9999 8214 8214 8215 8215 59 M CAST RTP SLT MOH 5 RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH 5 use 0000 9999 8216 8216 8217 8217 60 M CAST RTP VSF MOH 2 RTP and RTCP ports for VSF VMIM MOH 0000 9999 8218 8218 8219 2 use 8219 61 M CAST RTP VSF MOH 3 RTP and RTCP ports for VSF VMIM MOH 0000 9999 8220 8220 8221 3 use 8221 MFIM1200 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 M CAST RTP BGM INT RTP and RTOP ports for internal BGM 0000 9999 8100 8100 8101 8101 2 M CAST RTP BGM EXT 1 RTP and RTOP ports for external BGM 1 0000 9999 8102 8102 8103 8103 3 M CAST RTP BGM EXT 2 RTP and RTOP ports for external BGM 2 0000 9999 8104 8104 8105 8105 4 M CAST RTP I PAGE 1 RTP and RTOP ports for Internal Page 1 0000 9999 8106 8106 8107 8107 5 M CAST RTP I PAGE 2 RTP and RTOP ports for Internal Page 2 0000 9999 8108 8108 8109 8109 103 M CAST RTP I PAGE 4 RTP and RTOP ports for Internal Page 100 0000 9999 8304 8304 8305 8305 104 M CAST RTP I PAGE ALL RTP and RTCP ports for Internal All Call 0000 9999 8306 8306 8307 Page 8307 105 M CAST RTP E PAGE 1 RTP and RTCP ports for External Page 1 0000 9999 8308 8308 8309 8309 106 MULTICAST RTP E PAGE 2 RTP and RTCP ports for External Page 2 0000 9999 8310 8310 8311 8311 107 M CAST RTP E PAGE ALL RTP and RTCP ports for External All Call 0000 9999 8312 8312
220. 9 8212 SLT MOH 4 RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH4 0000 9999 or SLT MOH 5 RTP and RTOP ports for SLT MOH5 0000 9999 on 8217 Table 3 5 5 5 2 MULTI CAST RTP RTCP iPECS 50 amp MFIM100 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT BGM Internal RTP and RTCP ports for internal BGM 0000 9999 8100 BGM External 1 RTP and RTCP ports for external BGM 1 0000 9999 TA BGM External 2 RTP and RTOP ports for external BGM 2 0000 9999 T Internal Page 1 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 1 0000 9999 T Internal Page 2 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 2 0000 9999 A Internal Page 3 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 3 0000 9999 mo Internal Page 4 RTP and RTOP ports for Internal Page 4 0000 9999 z E Internal Page 5 RTP and RTOP ports for Internal Page 5 0000 9999 A Internal Page 6 RTP and RTOP ports for Internal Page 6 0000 9999 a T Internal Page 7 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 7 0000 9999 gt ie Internal Page 8 RTP and RTOP ports for Internal Page 8 0000 9999 ara Internal Page 9 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 9 0000 9999 ron Internal Page 10 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 10 0000 9999 aon Internal All Page RTP and RTCP ports for Internal All Call Page 0000 9999 aie External Page 1 RTP and RTCP ports for External Page 1 0000 9999 re External Page 2 RTP and RTCP ports for External Page 2 0000 9999 ro External All Page RTP and RTCP ports for External All Call Page 0000 9999 mes Page All RTP and RTCP ports for All Call Page 0000 9999
221. 999 ae ports 8103 External BGM port 2 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for external BGM 2 0000 9999 8104 ports 8105 Internal Page 1 RTP amp RTCP ports RTP and RTOP ports for Internal Page 1 0000 9999 8106 Internal Page 2 RTP amp RTCP ports RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 2 0000 9999 a Internal Page 3 RTP amp RTOP ports RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 3 0000 9999 ae Internal Page 4 RTP amp RTCP ports RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 4 0000 9999 3 A Internal Page 5 RTP amp RTOP ports RTP and RTOP ports for Internal Page 5 0000 9999 fe A 8115 3 93 im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Internal Page 6 RTP amp RTCP ports RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 6 0000 9999 8116 8117 Internal Page 7 RTP amp RTCP ports RTP and RTOP ports for Internal Page 7 0000 9999 8118 8119 Internal Page 8 RTP amp RTCP ports RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 8 0000 9999 8120 8121 Internal Page 9 RTP amp RTCP ports RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 9 0000 9999 8122 8123 Internal Page 10 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 10 0000 9999 8124 ports 8125 Internal Page 11 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 11 0000 9999 8126 ports 8127 Internal Page 12 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 12 0000 9999
222. A RE EAA 3 245 oka OMOR sorre eaei TE EEEE EAE EEA ES 3 246 3 8 STATION PROGRAM User Portal ccccccsssssssssssssssescccccecceceseeeees 3 247 3 05 l Statin Attribute S nursinin n i ea e ei a E ENEE e iaie 3 248 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Ose Call Forward iosita aa a N OEA TRAETERA ESEESE 3 250 3 8 2 1 Station Gall FOrwarO enina amran aaraa AR aaa ARE ENN EAR ERE EREN Ei 3 250 3 8 2 2 Preset Call Forward arpar etenin kaa ane ARRE ARAR EA EEEE A RA RENE EERE ANNARRA AREE EAn 3 250 30 Otao CR SCENA NO urea eo oE EE a E AET 3 251 3 9 4 Station Speed Dial emeent aA EAEE EE E ETE toner etees 3 252 3 8 5 Pre selected Message s ssssssssessesssrssrsrrssrrsrrsrrsstrstrerestresrrsersreserssrsseesreseeseee 3 253 30 0 Ples BPUHON S eener E A EE E E EE E 3 254 DO ernal SoM Saase a a a a a ana 3 255 39 89 Bxtermna oM ossee st saeaavese E aesanee on aeserasuaean utes tea toeuea naa conedasbnney avsaswesetes 3 256 3 8 9 Station List ManagemMent cccecseccssccscccsscesscescesseesscesceesceescnsceeesceesceesceess 3 257 3 8 10 Conference Group wiscssvedcasaicesecesecuscvecvecsaustasuuoeedsedins oudueoveeseadedeseasevebeesexeeasweiveess 3 258 3 8 11 Station L d OUt rnern cectacce EE E E E E E 3 261 xi im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance 1 INTRODUCTION Issue 5 0 1 1 MANUAL APPLICATION This manual provides detailed information on the database management of the iPECS Series syste
223. ALL RTP and RTCP ports for All Call Page 0000 9999 8134 8134 8135 8135 16 M CAST RTP PTT 1 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 1 0000 9999 8136 8136 8137 8137 17 M CAST RTP PTT 2 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 2 0000 9999 8138 8138 8139 8139 18 M CAST RTP PTT 3 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 3 0000 9999 8140 8140 8141 8141 19 M CAST RTP PTT 4 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 4 0000 9999 8142 8142 8143 8143 20 M CAST RTP PTT 5 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 5 0000 9999 8144 8144 8145 8145 2 67 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 21 M CAST RTP PTT 6 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 6 0000 9999 8146 8146 8147 8147 22 M CAST RTP PTT 7 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 7 0000 9999 8148 8148 8149 8149 23 M CAST RTP PTT 8 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 8 0000 9999 8150 8150 8151 8151 24 M CAST RTP PTT 9 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 9 0000 9999 8152 8152 8153 8153 25 M CAST RTP PTT ALL RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group ALL 0000 9999 8154 8154 8155 8155 26 M CAST RTP BGM VSF 1 RTP and RTCP ports for VSF VMIM BGM 0000 9999 8156 8156 8157 use
224. AST RTP PTT 3 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 3 0000 9999 8190 8190 8191 8191 47 M CAST RTP PTT 4 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 4 0000 9999 8192 8192 8193 8193 48 M CAST RTP PTT 5 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 5 0000 9999 8194 8194 8195 8195 49 M CAST RTP PTT 6 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 6 0000 9999 8196 8196 8197 8197 50 M CAST RTP PTT 7 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 7 0000 9999 8198 8198 8199 8199 51 M CAST RTP PTT 8 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 8 0000 9999 8200 8200 8201 8201 52 M CAST RTP PTT 9 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 9 0000 9999 8202 8202 8203 8203 53 M CAST RTP PTT ALL RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group ALL 0000 9999 8204 8204 8205 8205 54 M CAST RTP BGM VSF 1 RTP and RTCP ports for VSF VMIM BGM 0000 9999 8206 8206 8207 use 8207 2 72 im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 55 M CAST RTP SLT MOH 1 RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH 1 use 0000 9999 8208 8208 8209 8209 56 M CAST RTP SLT MOH 2 RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH 2 use 0000 9999 8210 8210 8211 8211 57 M CAST RTP SLT MOH 3 RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH 3 use 0000 999
225. Admin Station or by pointing a Web Browser at the system s MFIM private public IP address Section 2 provides a description for data entry using the Admin Station and Section 3 provides instructions for entering data when using a Web Browser Note that some parameters are available through Web Admin and not the Keyset Admin This section provides general information An index to database entries default value charts for the Flexible Numbering Plan Fixed Function dial codes and the entire database are provided in Appendix A through D respectively The index and charts are helpful references when entering data into the system s database im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 1 3 INITIALIZATION When power is applied to the MFIM or the MFIM Reset button is pressed the system will initiate the Power up routine During the Power Up routine the system will check the Initialization switch 4th position of the MFIM DIP switch refer to the iPECS Description and Installation Manual section 4 4 2 If the switch is in the OFF position the system will perform a simple Power Up routine clear all scratch pad memory load run time programs establish communications with each registered gateway Module and iPECS terminal send RESTART commands and load appropriate settings to the Modules and terminals If a Module or terminal does not respond after several attempts the system places the device in an out of service mode but maintain
226. Auto Ring Mode TAable 2 cccccccccesceeneceeececenneesaaeceeneeceeeeesaesseneeeceeneesaeseeneeseneeeseneees 3 178 3 5 8 13 Voice Mail Dialing Table 2 cccccccccccceessececeeeeceneeeeaeceeaeeceeeessaesseneeeceueetsaesecneeseeneessneees 3 179 3 5 8 14 Registration Table amp Fractional Module Table ccccccccccsssscecsssscecsssseeecsesseeeesenteesees 3 181 3 5 8 15 Mobile Extension Table sccccccccccccecsececseneececeeeceaeeseneeceeeeecesaesseneeseeneessnsseaseseneeecsensees 3 182 3 9 9 Networking Data si ecinic reinas ee wach a ea aana iieii Sess 3 184 3 5 9 1 Network Basic Attributes 1 2cccccecccccssccceneeceseeeseaeesceneeceseeessaesseaeeceeeeesenetseseeseensesenneniaas 3 185 3 5 9 2 Network Supplementary AttriDUteS 11 cccccccccceceseceeneececeeeceeeeeseneeceeeeeceeetsaesseneeceeneeteas 3 186 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 3 5 9 3 Network CO Line Attributes ccccccccccccccccccececececececececccececeeccececeeceeececeecceeecececececeeetetesenaess 3 188 3 5 9 4 Network Numbering Plan Table cccccccccsccccecceceeeesenseeceeeeeseaeeseneeceeeeecsensssnaeecseeeessinetsaes 3 189 3 5 9 5 Network Feature Code Table ou ccccccccccccccccccccccccceccccceceecceeeeeccececeeececeescesececasacacanaeanananaess 3 191 3 5 10 Remote Device Data ccccceccccccccccecccceccscesscscueses tettest estere e seteru errer etesse estrene 3 192 3 5 10 1 Remote Device ACICSS cccccccccccccccecececececececec
227. Auto Ring Mode Table P233 Voice Mail 6 DND l S E EREI Max 12 Digits Include P D F P Pause D DND F Flash Registration Table P235 ee Lo Max 12 Digits Incude P D F Voice Mai P Pause D DND F Flash Max 12 Digits Include P D F P Pause D DND F Flash Max 12 Digits Include P D F P Pause D DND F Flash Voice Mail 3 Voice Mail 9 Disconnect Copyright C 2006 by LC Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 8 13 1 External Voice Mail Dialing Table When an external Voice Mail system is used that connects to an SLT port a digit sequence must be defined for the system to signal various call characteristics to the Voice Mail system The external Voice Mail uses the sequences to determine appropriate announcements or further call routing The Table permits the definition of digits as either a prefix or suffix to other digits station number for mailbox identification Sequences are defined for such call characteristics as Put Mail Get Mail No Answer call etc as described in Table 3 5 8 13 1 Table 3 5 8 13 1 VOICE MAIL DIAL FUNCTIONS ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT VM Table 1 Put Mail Code to send when the voice mail is to receive call to Prefix P record a message Suffix Put Mail Any digits 3 179 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance
228. Button DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 2 MOH TYPE 0 8 Assigns the source for MOH 00 Hold tone 1 MUSIC 1 1 iPECS Micro and iPECS 50 01 Music 1 02 Music 2 does not support selection 2 03 VSF MOH 04 SLTMOH1 Music 2 05 SLTMOH2 06 SLTMOH3 07 SLTMOH4 08 SLTMOHS5 09 VSFMOh2 10 VSFMOH3 3 INT EXT1 MUSIC Assigns the input for source 1 0 Internal Internal 0 INT 1 EXT1 INT Internal or External 1 Ext Music 1 _ _ a _ iPECS Micro does not support this button 4 ASGN SLT MOH F1 F5 Assign the SLTM port as a F1 SLTMOH1 F2 SLTMOR2 er eee SLTMOHx F3 SLTMOHS F4 SLTMOH4 F5 SLTMOHS5 2 3 6 12 PBX Access Codes PGM Code 172 When the system is used behind a PBX CTX the system needs to recognize the PBX CTX Trunk access codes to implement dialing restriction tone detection sequences and Flash timing A maximum of four 4 Trunk Access Codes of one 1 or two 2 digits can be entered PROCEDURE PABX ACCESS CODE 1 Press the PGM button and dial 172 PRESS FLEX_KEY 1 4 PABX ACCESS CODE 1 Select the Flex button for the desired Access Code button 1 4 Use the dial pad to enter the PABX Trunk Access Code two 2 digits 0 9 Use as a wild card any digit entry Press the SAVE button to store the access code data entry 2 3 6 13 Ringing Line Preference Priority PGM Code 173 When multiple calls are ringin
229. CALL ENABLE When the paired station is a member of a hunt 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 OFF OFF group ACD Circular or Terminal group calls 1 ON can be sent to the active mobile extension 7 100 VSF VMIM NOTIFY Enables outbound notification by the system 0 OFF OFF 1 O0N 0 OFF OFF when the VMIM VSF has unheard messages 1 ON 6 100 NOTIFY RETRY cnr Defines the number of attempts the system will 1 9 3 1 9 3 make to complete a notification when receiving busy no answer 6 100 NOTIFY RETRY INT Defines the time between notification attempts 1 3 3 1 3 3 If a notification fails the system will retry after Minutes 2 128 im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 A Hot Desk station allows a user to login for access to the system features and resources Once logged in the user is provided access to system features and resources employing the database for the user s assigned station User station numbers are assigned automatically by the system The system assigns station numbers to each agent starting at the highest station number 125 for iPECS Micro 149 for iPECS 50 169 for MFIM100 and 399 for the MFIM300 1599 for the MFIM600 2199 for the MFIM1200 and decrementing for each agent For example if the number of Hot Desk users under button 1 is five then station numbers 169 168 167 166 and 165 for the MFIM100 are assigned as Hot Desk users HOTDESK ATTRIBUTE PRESS FLEX KEY 1 3 Refer to Table 2 3 9 1
230. CP ports for Internal Page 27 0000 9999 8158 ports 8159 Internal Page 28 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 28 0000 9999 8160 ports 8161 Internal Page 29 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 29 0000 9999 8162 ports 8163 Internal Page 30 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 30 0000 9999 8164 ports 8165 Internal Page 31 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 31 0000 9999 8166 ports 8167 Internal Page 32 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 32 0000 9999 8168 ports 8169 3 94 im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Internal Page 33 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 33 0000 9999 8170 ports 8171 Internal Page 34 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 34 0000 9999 8172 ports 8173 Internal Page 35 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 35 0000 9999 8174 ports 8175 Internal All Page RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal All Call Page 0000 9999 8176 ports 8177 External Page 1 RTP amp RTCP ports RTP and RTCP ports for External Page 1 0000 9999 8178 8179 External Page 2 RTP amp RTCP ports RTP and RTCP ports for External Page 2 0000 9999 8180 8181 External All Page RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for External All Call 0000 9999 8182 ports Page 8183 Al
231. CR assigned allowing further routing of the call or can route using the ICLID routing tables PROCEDURE FLEX DID CONV TABLE 1 Press the PGM button and dial 231 F1 INPUT F2 INIT F3 DEL FLEX DID CONV TBL INPUT Select Flex button 1 3 Flex button 1 Input new data ENTER BIN NO 000 999 Flex button 2 Initialize Table Flex button 3 Delete entry TABLE BIN 001 Use the dial pad to enter a Table index 000 999 PRESS FLEX KEY 1 7 Refer to Table 2 3 9 7 1 Press Flex button 1 7 to select the desired destination refer to Table 2 3 9 7 1 DISPLAY Use the dial pad to enter the desired type and value for the destination refer to Table 2 3 9 7 2 Press the SAVE button to store the data entry 2 122 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Table 2 3 9 7 1 FLEXIBLE DID CONVERSION PGM 231 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT TABLE 001 NAME Name associated with the destination 11 EEE characters TABLE 001 DAY DEST Destination setting for Day Ring mode Type amp NONE 1 8 Value TABLE 001 NIGHT DEST Destination setting for Night Ring mode Type amp NONE 1 8 Value TABLE 001 TIMED _R DEST Destination setting for Timed Ring mode Type amp NONE 1 8 Value TABLE 001 REROUTE DEST Destination setting for Reroute Dest mo
232. CS Micro Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 M CAST RTP BGM INT RTP and RTOP ports for internal BGM 0000 9999 8100 8100 8101 8101 2 M CAST RTP BGM EXT1 RTP and RTOP ports for external BGM 1 0000 9999 8102 8102 8103 8103 3 M CAST CAST RTP BGM EXT2 RTP and RTCP ports for external BGM 2 0000 9999 8104 8104 8105 8105 4 M CAST RTPI PAGE1 RTP and RTOP ports for Internal Page 1 0000 9999 8106 8106 8107 8107 5 M CAST RTP I PAGE 2 RTP and RTOP ports for Internal Page 2 0000 9999 8108 8108 8109 8109 6 M CAST CAST RTP I PAGE 3 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 3 0000 9999 8110 8110 8111 8111 7 MULTICAST RTP I PAGE 4 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 4 0000 9999 8112 8112 8113 8113 8 MULTICAST RTP I PAGE 5 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 5 0000 9999 8114 8114 8115 8115 9 MULTICAST RTP I PAGE 6 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 6 0000 9999 8116 8116 8117 8117 10 MULTICAST RTP I PAGE 7 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 7 0000 9999 8118 8118 8119 8119 11 MULTICAST RTP I PAGE 8 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 8 0000 9999 8120 8120 8121 8121 12 MULTICAST RTP I PAGE 9 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 9 0000 9999 8122 8122 8123 8123 13 MULTICAST RTP IPAGE 10 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 10 0000 9999 8124 8124 8125 8125 14 MULTICAST RTP I PAGE ALL RTP and RTCP ports for Internal All Call 0000 9999 8126 8126 8127 Page 8127 15 MULTICAST RTP PAGE
233. Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 5 15 1 Serial Port Selections The iPECS 50 and MFIM100 have a single RS 232 port while other MFIMs have two 2 RS 232 ports refer to the iPECS Description and Installation Manual Section 4 4 2 In addition the system has three 3 TCP Channels and nine 9 TCP Port connections available from the MFIM A serial port SERIAL 1 or SERIAL 2 is assigned to each function that requires an RS 232 output In addition one of the three 3 TCP channels and one 1 TCP Port may be assigned to each function that requires a TCP connection Each function can select only one output 3 109 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 176 Selecting Break Make Ratio will display the Break Make Ratio data entry page Figure 3 5 5 16 1 F iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DER File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 150 150 131 211fa_index htm H Log Out 60 40 v Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 5 16 1 Break Make Ratio For Pulse dial CO Lines the system supports 10pps and break make ratios of 60 40 or 66 34 3 110 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 177 Selecting SMDR Attributes will display the SMDR Attributes data entry page Figure 3 5 5 17 1 Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DAR Ay
234. Co Ltd All Rights Reserved C Internet Figure 3 6 5 4 VSF Prompt System Greeting upload View 3 235 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 3 6 6 iPECS System Upgrade Process 3 6 6 1 iPECS Software Full Upgrade Sequence The following shows the order in which the upgrade process proceeds and firmware files for iPECS and modules Note the xxxx in the ROM file names indicates the version number of the file lt MFIM Upgrade Process gt 1 Upload MFIM application image IPECS Micro GS91Mxxxx xxxx indicates the version IPECS 50 GS92Mxxxx xxxx indicates the version iPECS 50B GS93Mxxx xxxx indicates the version MFIM 100 300 600 1 200 application image GS 95 96 97 98Mxxxx rom xxxx indicates the version 2 Restart MFIM lt Appliances Upgrade Process gt 1 Upload Appliance application image to MFIM100 300 600 1200 T2 T2U CPU MISC VSF application image for MFIM GS71Vxxxx rom xxxx indicates the version T2 T2U CPU MISC VSF application image for MFIME GS36Vxxxx rom xxxx indicates the version T2 T2U CPU BRIM2 application image for UVT GS71Bxxxx rom xxxx indicates the version BRIM2 application image for STG EU71Bxxxx rom xxxx indicates the version MS CPU BRIM8 application image for UVT GS95Bxxxx rom xxxx indicates the version BRIM8 application image for STG EU95Bxxxx rom xxxx indicates the version TI CPU T1PRI application image for U
235. Code 432 wi cccccccceccceccccccseencececceeseseeneeeeeesenaeanes 2 142 2 3 12 4 RSGM Alarm Attribute PGM Code 433 0cccccccccccccccsscccceessesececseseseesseeeseceeeseseesensesseenes 2 142 2 3 12 5 RSGM Music Assignment PGM Code 434 ceccccccccccccceceeeseesseceeeeeceneeesnaaeceeseecsnneesaees 2 143 2 3 12 6 RSGM Service Attributes PGM Code 435 cccceccccccsccsseecececcessessecececeeseaserseeeeeeeesaeenes 2 144 2 3 13 Zone Data PGM CODES 436 441 444 vec ceccecccssceneceusceaseueseens 2 145 2 3 13 1 Zone Holiday Assignment PGM Code 444 eecccccscccccececeeeeeenseceeeeeceeeeeseaeceeeeessneeesnaees 2 145 2 3 14 INITIALIZATION PGM Code 450 vee ieccecccescccesccsscescccceeeceesccunceusceeeeeas 2 146 2 3 15 PRINT OUT DATABASE PGM Code 4517 vice cceccecccsecsecsceueseaeseens 2 147 2 3 16 VIRTUAL TRACE DIP SWITCH PGM Code 452 wi ccecccsecseceneceneeenes 2 148 2 3 17 VIRTUAL DIP SWITCH PGM Code 458 ie cecccseccnecccensceueceussenseees 2 149 2 3 18 DECT ATTRIBUTES PGM Code 491 wc eeccecccssccescesecsceesecusceaeseueeeens 2 150 Be WESC Esa E EOT E 3 1 3 1 General nomere eee e E ERA E E E E EEN on Me Ag pa cv neces cease memes eae eee 3 1 3 1 2 Environment for LAN connection esssssssressssseersrrssrrrsrrsereerreresrerersererresrrsersrre 3 1 3 1 3 Web Browser Setting ccccccscccseccssccesccesccesccsscsceesseescessceescsesseesscesseesceesseusecess 3 1 3 2 Web Home Pass a ivseiceisdeicietactiataeecg iene A a E
236. D QUE RING 2 CIQ Threshold 1 00 14 FLASH 60 IPM FLASH 60 IPM 3 22 UCD QUE RING 6 CIQ Threshold 2 00 14 FLASH 120 IPM FLASH 120 IPM 10 23 UCD QUE RING 7 X CIQ Threshold 3 00 14 FLASH 240 IPM FLASH 240 IPM 5 24 UCD DND OFF DUTY UCD agent is off duty UCD DND 00 14 FLASH 120 IPM FLASH 120 IPM 10 25 UCD WARNING UCD warning tone 00 14 FLASH 120 IPM FLASH 120 IPM 10 26 UCD HELP UCD help request response 00 14 FLASH 120 IPM FLASH 120 IPM 10 27 FEATURE RECORD FEATURE voice record button 00 14 FLASH 240 IPM FLASH 240 IPM 5 28 FEATURE MSG WAIT FEATURE message wait 00 14 FLASH 30 IPM FLASH 30 IPM 2 29 OUT OF SERVICE Station in out of service state 00 14 FLASH OFF FLASH OFF 00 2 79 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Table 2 3 6 10 2 FLASH RATE TABLE PGM 170 Flash Rate DESCRIPTION 00 Flash OFF 01 Steady On 02 30 ipm flash 30 On 03 60 ipm flash 30 On 04 60 ipm double wink 30 On Off On Off 7 amp 0 On 05 240 ipm flash 30 On 06 240 ipm flutter 30 On Off On Off On amp 70 Off 07 480 ipm flash 30 On 08 480 ipm flutter 30 On Off On Off On amp 70 Off 09 15 ipm flash 30 On 10 120 ipm flash 30 On 11 120 ipm flutter 30 On Off On Off On amp 70 Off 12 30 ipm double flash 30 On Off On amp 70 Off 13 480 ipm double wink 30 On Off On Off 7 amp 0 On 14 480 ipm double flash 30 On Off O
237. D ROUTING DATA PGM CODES 200 205 g sivcuveace 2 108 2 3 8 1 ISDN Attributes PGM Code 200 u c cccccssccccessssececssssesecssenesecsenneeecseenasecseneeseeseneneeeseenanes 2 108 2 3 8 2 CLIP COLP Table PGM Code 201 essccccsssssseceessscecsesnececsenesecsesnesecsenseseesenueseesennneess 2 108 2 3 8 3 MSN Table PGM Code 202 ccccccscccsssssceessecessceesseceesseceussecasseesseceaeeceussssessecensseceunseenes 2 109 2 3 8 4 ICLID Route Table PGM Code 203 u cscccccssessecsssseecsenseececsensnsecseenseecssseeeeesenenseeeeseanes 2 110 2 3 8 5 ICLID Ring Assignment PGM Code 204 ccccscccssseccenceceeeeeesseceeeeececnetsasecseneesenseesnaees 2 111 2 3 8 6 ISDN PPP Web Admin Attributes PGM Code 205 cscccccssssceceeesceeseneesecesnseneeeeensnes 2 112 2 3 9 TABLES DATA PGM CODES 220 to 235 ss ssnds dstnesdnavorinaceeSaabemsercuenun seats 2 113 2 3 9 1 LCR Assignment Tables PGM Codes 220 to 223 wiicccccsssscccseesseseessessesesseseesesseseeeessesnes 2 113 2 3 9 2 Toll Tables PGM Code 224 cccccccccccsssseesseceescecessssessecessecasseessecsntecsnsssesseceessecenseeses 2 118 2 3 9 3 Emergency Code Table PGM Code 226 sccccccsssssecssssscecsenencecsesseeecesseeseeseesnneeeeseanes 2 119 vi im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 2 3 9 4 Authorization Codes Table PGM Code 227 cccccccccccsseseececcceceeesneesececceusunerseceseessssnenes 2 119 2 3 9 5 Customer Call Routing VSF AA Table PGM Code 22
238. DISA COS data entry page Figure 3 5 5 6 1 Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DER File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm anem ee on iPECS VD96M E 0Ap APRIOS Boot Version 1 0Ah JAN OF Atiribute Day COS Night COS Timed Ring COS System Attnbutes P160 161 System Passyrord P162 Alam Attnbutes P163 Attendant Assignment P164 Multicast RTP RTCP P165 DID DISA Destination P167 External Control Contacts P163 LCD Display Mode P169 LED Flashing Rate P170 RLP Pniority P173 RS 232 Port Settings P174 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 5 6 1 DISA COS A DISA user is subject to the dialing restrictions assigned in the DISA Class of Service COS The restrictions applied are the same as with the corresponding Station COS levels 1 11 and interact with the CO IP COS in the same manner An assignment is made for Day Timed and Night Ring mode of system operation The default for all three modes Day Timed and Night of DISA COS is 1 no restrictions 3 96 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 167 Selecting DID DISA Destination will display the DID DISA Destination data entry page Figure 3 5 5 7 1 Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer BEE Li File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address amp
239. DN Lines may provide a digital signal 0 OFF ON 1 0N 0 OFF OFF rather than actual tones In this case the 1 ON iPECS can provide the tones If the ISDN 8 A a ETE provides the tones for buttons 7 to 10 the 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 OFF OFF tone is ON for an iPECS system 1 ON generated tone the ISDN tone is set to i OFF 9 01 02 CO ERROR TONE 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 10 01 02 CO BUSY TONE 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 11 01 02 DISA CO ACCESS Permits DISA users access to the VoIP 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 0FF OFF facilities of the system 1 ON 12 01 02 FLASH TMR This entry sets the duration of a Flash on 000 300 10 050 000 300 10 ms 050 the CO Line mset 500 msec 13 01 02 OPEN LOOP This entry sets the duration of open loop 00 20 04 00 20 100ms 04 that will be recognized as a Disconnect 100 msec Signal 14 01 02 ICLI DT TMR When a call is received the system may 00 20 00 00 20 SEC 00 use the ICLID Incoming Caller ID to 1 sec C route the call The system will delay routing a call for this timer while awaiting ICLID Enter a 00 to disable ICLID routing 15 01 02 SMS OUTGOING Each CO line can be assigned to support 0 Disable Disable 1 EN 0 DIS DISABLE PSTN SMS 1 Enable 16 01 02 SMS RCV STATION When a PSTN SMS is received the Station STA system delivers the message to the assigned station 2 47 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance
240. Device ON 1 ON 0 OFF ON Mode which defines the device as on a common LAN with the MFIM 4 5 CPU TYPE Flex button 5 displays the type of CPU employed T2 in the device 4 6 DEVICE BOARD ID Flex button 6 displays the type designation VSF GW MISC or VMIM 5 001 003 00405A017666 LCD shows MCIM Gateway MCIM 10 10 10 12 Line 1 Sequence Number 2 digits Module IP address MAC Address 12 digits set sequentially Line 2 VSF or VMIM from the range in IP Address 7 12 digits PGM 102 5 1 SET IP ADDRESS Use Flex button 1 to set the device s IP address in 10 10 10 10 254 MCIM 10 10 10 12 IP v4 format 5 2 SET MAC ADDRESS Use Flex button 2 to enter the device s MAC None address into system memory im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Btn DISPLAY FEATURE DEFAULT 5 3 DIRECT SEND MAC Use Flex button 3 to enable disable Direct Send ON 1 0N 0 OFF ON mode which employs layer 2 switching to local devices 5 4 LOCAL DEVICE Use Flex button 4 to enable disable Local Device ON 1 0N 0 OFF ON Mode which defines the device as on a common LAN with the MFIM 5 5 CPU TYPE Flex button 5 displays the type of CPU employed T2 in the device 5 6 DEVICE BOARD ID Flex button 6 displays the type designation GW MCIM MCIM 6 DEVICE IP ADDRESS PLAN If the SAVE button is pressed the system will SYSTEM RESET reset and restart
241. Door Open Not Use Door Open Ext Contact Ext Contact2 Copyright C 2008 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Figure 3 5 10 3 1 Remote Ext Contact The RSGM incorporates a relay contact which can be employed to control an external device The contact is assigned to activate under one of several conditions As a Loud Bell Contact LBC the contact will activate when the RSGM station receives an external call The contact may alternatively activate as a Door Lock Release contact activating when the Door Unlock code is dialed by the RSGM station Table 3 5 10 3 1 REMOTE EXTERNAL CONTACT ATTRIBUTE REMARK RANGE DEFAULT Ext Contact The RSGM External Contacts can be assigned for the Not Use Door Lock Release function Door Open 3 195 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 433 435 Selecting Remote Alarm Attr will display the RSGM Alarm Attributes Music Assignments and the CO IP Group page Figure 3 5 10 4 1 A iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm Enter Range ____ _ _toad Range From 1 to 1 Attribute Value t Alarm Enable OFF Alarm Contact Type Close v Alarm Mode Alarm v Alarm Signal Mode Rpt iv Remote Music Assign Moh Type Musici Int Ext Music Int Remote S
242. E DTMF send either DTMF or Pulses for dialed digits 1 DTMF to the PSTN 6 01 02 FLASH TYPE Analogue CO Lines can generate either an 0 LOOP LOOP 1 GND 0 LOOP LOOP Open Loop or a momentary ground 1 GND connection as the FLASH signal 7 01 02 UNA Universal Night Answer UNA allows any 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 0FF OFF station to answer a call on the CO Line by 1 ON dialing the UNA code 8 01 02 CO IP GRP AUTH Each CO IP Group can be assigned to 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 0FF OFF require the user enter an Authorization Code 1 ON for access 9 01 02 DATA STATION NO Each CO IP line can be assigned to Station 0 FAX recognize a FAX call when a specified Number station answers 10 TENANCY GROUP Only stations in the assigned Tenancy group 00 15 00 00 15 00 are permitted access to the defined CO Line 11 001 001 CO VOIP MODE The VOIM channels can support iPECS 1 iPECS 1 VOIP MODE 1 3 H 323 or SIP protocols This field defines the 2 H 323 protocol for the VoIP channel s 3 SIP 12 001 001 PROCTOR ON OFF Each analogue CO line can be assigned to 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 OFF OFF send the station number as DTMF digits for 1 ON Proctor service 13 001 001 WAIT IF DVU BUSY When a DID DISA call assigned to receive a 0 OFF ON 1 0N 0 0FF ON VSF VMIM announcement arrives and all 1 ON channels are busy the call may wait with Ringback until a channel is available ON or route to the DID DISA Destination PGM Code 167
243. EC 0 G 711 1 G 723 1 2 G 729 3 G 722 4 System Codec refer to PGM CODE 161 bin 9 3 002 002 FIRWALL IP ADDR Enter the Firewall IP address associated with the 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 selected devices 4 002 002 RTP SECURITY Remote iPECS terminals and the RSGMs use 0 OFF ON 1 0N 0 0FF OFF IPSec to assure a secure connection To reduce 1 ON bandwidth use IPSec may be disabled 5 001 001 TNET ENABLE When a module or station is to be connected in 0 OFF ON 0 ON 0 OFF ON a Centralized Control network TNET the 1 ON device must be enabled for TNET operation 6 UMS SENDER MAIL VSF VMIM e mail address for Mailbox Mail NULL Sending 7 T38 ENABLE T38 mode ON OFF for FAX data transfer 1 ON OFF 1 ON 0 0FF OFF between other iPECS gateways 0 OFF 2 44 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 2 3 5 CO LINE DATA PGM CODES 140 to 151 2 3 5 1 CO Service Type PGM Code 140 Each CO Line is assigned a type Normal or DID Normal CO Lines can be employed for DISA Service PGM CODE 146 DID lines are for incoming only operation and provide call routing based on signaling from the carrier refer to section 2 3 5 4 DID Service Attributes PGM Code 145 PROCEDURE COL SERVICE ATT 1 Press the PGM button and dial 140 ENTER COL RANGE 01 02 SVC TYPE 1 3 Use the dial pad to enter a co Line range For a single CO Line enter the sam
244. ED 115200 BAUDRATE 115200 the RS 232 serial port 2 9600 3 19200 4 38400 5 57600 6 115200 2 SERIAL1 CTS RTS The system s RS232 port can support 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 OFF OFF Clear to Send CTS and Ready to Send 1 ON RTS control leads 3 SERIAL1 PAGE BREAK The system can send a page break 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 OFF OFF command over the serial port at the end of 1 ON each page See button 4 for page length set up 4 SERIAL1 LINE PAGE This entry is used to set the page length 001 199 66 001 199 066 the number of lines the system will send before sending the page break see button 3 above 5 SERIAL 1 XON XOFF This entry enables XON XOFF protocol 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 OFF XOFF 1 ON 2 82 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 2 3 6 15 Serial Port Function Selections PGM Code 175 The system has RS 232 serial ports located on the MFIM one RS 232 serial ports located on iPECS 50 MFIM100 MFIM300 MFIM600 and MFIM1200 Also the system can employ IP over three 3 TCP channels for the output of various system information Each output function is assigned a Serial port or TCP channel that is used to output the information In addition a TCP port must be assigned when a function is defined to use a TCP channel The Serial ports are located on the MFIM refer to the iPECS Description and Installation Manual Se
245. EE 3 3 32 l BrOWSER ACCESS O E ONE U a Na 3 3 3 2 2 User s Guide vi cccccccccceccsscccssccssccsccaucccucccescsusceacanceaseseseascsauceeseeaeseauceessceeceaeseaesees 3 4 Doe Otation IAGO SCAM ae ses cas ce E E ENOL O ooo ena 3 5 3 2 4 Web Admin amp Maintenance c ccccccceccseccsscccssccccessceucesccuuccesceasseaccansceeeceusceuseeens 3 5 vii im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 3 3 WEB ADMIN Data Modification amp ACCESS sssesessesssessesrrensesersersersrssesee 3 6 3 3 1 Web Admin Data Modification e ssssssssesssesssresereserererserrssrtrssrresrrsrrreerreesrreeeres 3 6 3 3 2 Maintenance amp Admin PasSword cccecccccccccsecccesceceesecscsceescscusscseueseseuesesenesesenes 3 6 399 Password PMCrY DUON vecdssoscesdacbedveavesvsdoarsnsennesceevcslisosh sn anes Gedvlestieas bees deaniessabodeoiaberss 3 7 3 4 WEB ADMIN amp MAINTENANCE OVERVIEW ccccccceseseceeeseseeseeesees 3 8 3 5 iIPECS WEB ADMINISTRATION occ tecsecte cot scare si andcsinat oxtetinedencasisvacacasrdeaetat 3 9 3 5 1 System ID amp Numbering Plans seesssnesessesssssrssrssresresssrerrssresrrserserseresresresereeres 3 10 3 5 1 1 System AD Ss cesecivtes spokes sen bbs sce enlesanadbsveccs coveted hwsseat chest AES EAEE ASY 3 11 3 5 1 2 Device Port Num Chane ssccccccccesececesscsencececececesaesseneececneesaeseanaecseneeceanssanaeseeneesennenens 3 12 3 5 1 3 System amp Device IP Address Plan ccccsccccsceceecce
246. EGE Figure 3 5 5 8 1 External Control Contact The MFIMs include programmable contacts which can be used to control external devices Refer to Figure 3 5 5 8 1 for number of available contacts Each contact is assigned to activate under one of several conditions As a Loud Bell Contact LBC the contact will activate when the assigned station or group receives an external call For LBC when the system is in the Night or Timed Ring mode the contact will activate for incoming UNA calls and will ignore any station assignment The contact may alternatively activate as a Door Lock Release contact when External Page Zone 1 is accessed or when External Page Zone 2 is accessed 3 98 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 169 Selecting LCD Display Mode will display the data entry page Figure 3 5 5 9 1 Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DEAR File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm To iPECS VD96M E 0Ap APRIOS Boot Version 1 04h JANIOF Attribute LCD Date Display Mode MM DD YY LCD Time Display Mode 12 Hour Mode Language Display Mode Korean v LCD Weekday Display Mode Follow PGM169BTN1 System Attnbutes P160 161 System Password P162 Alam Attributes P163 Attendant Assigrament P164 Multicast RTP RTCP P165 DISA COS P166 DID DISA Destination P167 External
247. EI TYPE The TEI Terminal Endpoint Identifier is a 0 FIX AUTO 1 AUTO 0 FIX AUTO unique identifier for each device attached to 1 AUTO the ISDN line When the system shares an ISDN connection with other devices the TEI should be automatic to assure no conflict with other attached devices When the ISDN connection is not shared the Fixed identifier option should be employed 7 01 02 ISDN SS CD CR Permits a user access to ISDN 0 Disable Disable 1 EN 0 DIS DISABLE Supplementary Call Deflection or Call Re 1 Deflect route Service Except USA version 2 Reroute 8 01 02 ISDN 1 DGT RM Select one digit remove mode in ISDN Called 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 OFF OFF Digits for Italy 1 ON 9 001 002 AOC TYPE 0 5 When assigned the system will analyze the 0 No Serv 0 NO SERVICE 0 Advice of Charge information in the Facility 1 Italy amp Message according to the ETSI specifications Spain with appropriate regional protocol support 2 Finland 3 Australia 4 Belgium 5 ETSI STD 10 001 002 ISDN LINE TYPE The system will encode voice using the A law 0 A Law u Law 1 U 0 A U_LAW or u law PCM format and should be set to 1 Law match the ISDN Back bone type 11 01 02 CALLING SUBADDR For outgoing calls the user s station number 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 OFF OFF may be included in the ISDN call SETUP 1 ON message Sub address field 12 01 02 IN PREFIX INS Regional ISDN providers may use the Local 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 OFF ON Area Prefix code for s
248. ENABLE bins 1 Enable 9 100 110 UCD GRP svc When unavailable DID DISA calls to the station 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 OFF OFF can be routed to the ACD Group to which the 1 ON station is a member 10 100 110 RING GRP SVC When unavailable DID DISA calls to the station 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 OFF OFF can be routed to the Ring Group to which the 1 ON station is a member 11 100 110 TWO WAY RECD When allowed the station can activate the Two 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 O0FF OFF way record feature to record a conversation 1 ON 12 100 110 MSG SCRL SPD Select message scroll speed for 7000 series IP 0 7 3 0 7 3 phone Not presently used 13 100 110 HOT DESK STN A station can be assigned as a Hot Desk 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 OFF OFF phone Users and agents can login and use 1 ON resources of the system through the Hot Desk phone 14 100 110 PREFER CO GRP The system will seize this CO Line or CO group CO or number when the station dials 9 First CO Grp available CO access code 15 100 110 SEND SLT CLI When allowed system will send CLI information 0 OFF ON 1 O0N 0 OFF OFF to the SLT 1 ON 16 100 110 UCD PRIORITY ACD Group members may be assigned a 0 9 0 0 9 0 priority 0 9 Members with the highest priority are sent calls ahead of lower priority members This field is the same as PGM CODE 191 btn 19 for ACD Groups 17 100 110 EZ PWD LOGIN For ez Atd enables disables required Auth 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 OFF code use 1 ON 18 100 110 EMER
249. ERA ESE EREE E idea Eaa aE 3 87 3 5 5 5 Multi cast RTP RTOP uiccccccccccccccecuscesscsccececeesessuseceseseceesecsuseaeseseceeusuuseeeeseeeeereninsseeeesensenes 3 88 viii im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 3 5 5 6 DISA COG wiht tis was tants es eens els esis nn Dstt asa eae ee alec theses elaine deat eased 3 96 3 5 5 7 DID DISA DOSUNALION s serein inii nn EAEE E EEUE EENE AEEA ENESE REEE EEEE 3 97 3 5 5 8 External Control COMACHS 1 ccccccccecceceseceeneeceeeeeecaaecseneeceeececeaeeseaaesseneeeseaesssnaeseeeeessnneeees 3 98 3 5 5 9 LCD Display ModE sirce nth iist spiel eae eee ada eee ees 3 99 3 5 5 10 LED FlaShing Rate c cccccccsccceccceceeecesnaceceeneecenneesnaesseaeecensessaesseneesseneesssaseseneeseenseseantees 3 101 B 5 9 11 MUSIC SOUICES iee ar EAEE EA ESTEE EEEE EAEE EAS ESETE EE 3 104 3 5 5 12 PBX ACCESS COCES 21 ccsccccscececnceceneeeseneececeeecanesanaecaaeeceenessaesaeaeeceensesssassaeaeecsenneseansees 3 105 3 5 5 13 Ringing Line Preference PriOvity ccccccccccceceeceesnseceeeeceeeeeesaeecsentecseeetsnaesesseeceneeessneees 3 106 3 5 5 14 PS 232 Port Setting Seisi nerna eanas a ana i N ia anaa ana ia aii 3 107 3 5 5 15 Serial Port Function Selections ccccccescecnteceeeeeceneeceeeeeceeeessaeeseneeceneeseaaetesseesenneesenetes 3 109 3 5 5 16 Break Make Ratio nw ceeccccesccccsseceenceceneeeessecseneeceeeessaesscaeecseeessaesseneeceeneeseaesteaseseeneeseenstees 3 110 3 55 17 SMDA AINDUICS aa
250. ERVICE 1 ON 0 OFF OFF CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction an ISDN service removes calling party Id sent from the PSTN to the called party with a RESTRICT instruction in the SETUP message If enabled here the system will send the RESTRICT instruction to the PSTN when an outgoing ISDN call is placed 0 OFF 1 ON OFF 100 110 COLR SERVICE 1 ON 0 OFF OFF COLR Connected Line Id Restriction an ISDN service removes connected party Id sent from the PSTN to the calling party with a RESTRICT instruction in the CONNECT message If enabled here the system will send the restrict instruction to the PSTN when the station answers an ISDN call 0 OFF 1 ON OFF 100 110 CLI STA NO 100 When not restricted btn 4 amp 5 above and entry 00 of the CLIP CLOP Table is selected in PGM CODE 143 btn 1 amp 2 this entry is added to the number sent in the ISDN call SETUP or CONNECT message in place of the station number 12 digits Station number 100 110 3 1 kHz AUDIO 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 100 110 CLI NAME DISP 1 ON 0 OFF OFF When an analog device SLT or FAX uses an ISDN Line in the system the Information Element of the ISDN SETUP message must indicate it only has 3 1 KHz audio capabilities If an SLT or analog FAX will be allowed access to the ISDN Lines this parameter must be ON When the CLI data from the PSTN in the cal
251. ESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 PPP DEST STA If the incoming capability is 64 Kbps Station None ane unrestricted digital and the called party number number matches the PPP destination the system will automatically answer the call and request PPP ID and password 2 PPP USER ID 1 System accepts this PPP ID 1 12 likppp01 EA T Character 3 PPP PASSWORD 1 The password entered is used to authorize 12 lpkts01 PPP ID 1 Character 4 PPP USER ID 2 System accepts this PPP ID 2 12 likppp02 Character 5 PPP PASSWORD 2 The password entered is used to authorize 12 Ipkts02 PPP ID 2 Character 6 PPP IP ADDR Operator can configure PPP IP Address with 0 0 0 0 this option To apply this option system must be restarted 7 PPP PtoP IP ADDR Operator can configure PPP Point to Point IP 0 0 0 0 Address with this option To apply this option system must be restarted 2 112 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 2 3 9 TABLES DATA PGM CODES 220 to 235 2 3 9 1 LCR Assignment Tables PGM Codes 220 to 223 The LCR Tables provide a mechanism to define the database which will route outgoing calls particularly long distance using the most cost effective route User dialed digits are compared to table entries and modified appropriately based on time of day day of week and assigned routes There are four LCR Tables LCR Control Attributes LCR Leading Digit Table LCR Digit Modification Table and LCR Initialization Table
252. ESS FLEX KEY 1 4 displays the linked station type iPECS Phone SLT WLAN iPECS Video SoftPhone 4 1 IPKTU TYPE USEAGE This value is automatically defined by the 1 0N 0 0FF OFF system once the Linked pair is established 4 2 SLT TYPE USEAGE This value is automatically defined by the 1 0N 0 0FF OFF system once the Linked pair is established 4 3 WIT TYPE USEAGE This value is automatically defined by the 1 0N 0 0FF OFF system once the Linked pair is established 4 4 VP TYPE USEAGE This value is automatically defined by the 1 0N 0 0FF OFF system once the Linked pair is established 5 SET LINKED ATTR The following fields are employed to establish PRESS FLEX KEY 1 3 basic connection attributes for the Linked station 5 1 DIRECT SEND MAC Use Flex button 1 to enable disable Direct 0 OFF ON 1 0ON 0 0FF ON Send mode which employs layer 2 switching 1 ON to local devices 5 2 LOCAL DEVICE Use Flex button 2 to enable disable Local 0 OFF ON 1 0N 0 OFF ON Device Mode which defines the device as on 1 ON a common LAN with the MFIM 5 3 CODEC TYPE Select the CODEC type for the selected 0 3 3 0 3 SYSTEM CODEC devices 0 G 711 1 G 723 1 2 G 729 3 SYSTEM CODEC refer to PGM CODE 161 btn 9 6 STA 102 IS LINKED PAIR When a Linked station is pre registered with Station none the system this field may be used to number establish the link Enter the secondary station number 2 39 im C
253. ESS Use Flex button 1 to set the device s IP address in 10 10 10 10 254 MISC 10 10 10 10 IP v4 format 3 2 SET MAC ADDRESS Use Flex button 2 to enter the device s MAC None 001 003 00405A017615 address into system memory 3 3 DIRECT SEND MAC Use Flex button 3 to enable disable Direct Send ON 1 0N 0 OFF ON mode which employs layer 2 switching to local devices 3 4 LOCAL DEVICE Use Flex button 4 to enable disable Local Device ON 1 0N 0 OFF ON Mode which defines the device as on a common LAN with the MFIM 3 5 CPU TYPE Flex button 5 displays the type of CPU employed T2 in the device 3 6 DEVICE BOARD ID Flex button 6 displays the MISC type designation GW MISC 4 001 002 00405A017635 LCD shows IP address of Misc amp VSF 10 10 10 10 Line 1 Sequence Number 2 digits VSF functions in the system s MFIM set automatically 001 003 00405A017666 4 1 SET IP ADDRESS Use Flex button 1 to set the device s IP address in 10 10 10 10 254 VSF 10 10 10 10 IP v4 format 4 2 SET MAC ADDRESS Use Flex button 2 to enter the device s MAC None 001 003 00405A017615 address into system memory 4 3 DIRECT SEND MAC Use Flex button 3 to enable disable Direct Send ON 1 0N 0 OFF ON mode which employs layer 2 switching to local devices 4 4 LOCAL DEVICE Use Flex button 4 to enable disable Local
254. Enables DND to be activated by the station ON OFF OFF Data Security Disables override and camp on tones to the station ON OFF OFF Howling Tone to SLT Permits Howler tone to be sent to an SLT when left ON ON off hook OFF No Touch Answer Enables No touch answer which automatically ON OFF connects transferred calls to the station s OFF speakerphone Page Access Allows station to access paging facilities ON OFF OFF Headset Ring Selects device to receive incoming ring signals Speaker SPEAKER Speaker Headset or Both Headset Both Speakerphone Selects Speakerphone or Headset mode Speaker SPEAKER Headset LCD Display LED The LCD LED upper left of LCD may be used for RING MWI Intercom Call ring Indication or Message Wait MWI Indication Loop LCR Account Station based LOOP LCR authorization used for ON OFF LOOP LCR operation OFF Call Coverage Mode The Call Coverage feature permits an iPECS Phone ON OFF user to receive ring and answer calls at other OFF stations Call Cover Delay Ring When a covered station rings the CALL COVERAGE 0 9 0 ring cycles ENABLE Unsupervised Conference Except USA version Forced hands Free Mode When placing an intercom call a user can change ON OFF the ICM signaling mode Tone Ring to Hands free OFF answer mode or HF Answer to Tone Ring Active PTT Group Number A station can be assigned to a PTT group and the 0 9 group enabled so the station can place and receive PT
255. F ON Authorization Check for 1 ON zone 2 124 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 The system can automatically select the Ring and COS Mode based on time of day and day of week Three Ring and COS modes are supported Day Night and Timed modes The ring assignments are as defined in CO IP Ring Assignment PGM Codes 144 The COS assignments are as defined in and DISA COS PGM Code 166 The start times for Day Night and start and end times for Timed modes are entered for each day of week When the Timed mode ends the system reverts to the appropriate mode based on the Day Night settings and the time of day The Attendant can override the automatic selection and select the desired system Mode Day Night and Timed A separate Auto Ring Table can be established for each ICM Tenancy Group PGM Code 125 indices 1 15 and for the system index 00 WEEKLY TIME TABLE DIAL DIGIT 00 15 WEEKLY TIME TBL 0 PRESS FLEX KEY 1 7 Refer to Table 2 3 9 9 1 DISPLAY Table 2 3 9 9 1 AUTO RING MODE ASSIGNMENT PGM 233 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 MON DAY 09 00 NITE 18 00 Monday DAY NIGHT TIMED ring mode start 0000 2359 DAY 9 00 times and TIMED mode end times NITE 18 00 TDS TDE 2 Tuesday DAY NIGHT TIMED ri
256. FF OFF 1 0N 0 0FF OFF to the Forced destination defined under 1 ON btn 24 24 below 24 6 If the queued call count exceeds the 00 99 10 Repeat Timer btn 10 below 000 180 015 24 7 CIQ 1 ANNC LOC VSF announcement number for the CIQ 00 70 VSF ANNC 00 70 1 Announcement 24 8 CIQ 1 PAGE ZONE Page Zone to receive CIQ 1 00 15 00 00 40 00 Announcement or 00 40 24 9 CIQ 1 ANNC DELAY TMR Delay timer for CIQ 1 Announcement 000 180 015 000 180 015 24 10 CIQ 1 ANNC REPEAT TMR Interval for repeating the CIQ 1 1 180 045 000 180 045 Announcement 24 11 CIQ 2 THRESHOLD If the queued call count exceeds the 00 99 20 00 99 20 threshold the system plays the CIQ 2 Announcement btn 12 below to the CIQ 2 Page Zone btn 13 below after the CIQ 2 Announcement Delay Timer btn 14 below Announcements are repeated at intervals of the CIQ 2 Announcement Repeat Timer btn 15 below 24 12 CIQ 2 ANNC LOC VSF announcement number for the CIQ 00 70 VSF ANNC 00 70 2 Announcement 24 13 CIQ 2 PAGE ZONE Page Zone to receive CIQ 2 00 15 00 00 40 00 Announcement or 00 40 24 14 cIQ 2 ANNC DELAY TMR Delay timer for CIQ 2 Announcement 000 180 015 2 101 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance
257. FIM600 MFIM1200 iPECS 50 amp MFIM100 Empty Empty unassigned may be defined by the user CO Line IPECS Micro 001 200 001 400 001 600 Assigns button to access a defined CO IP 01 05 line iPECS 50 amp MFIM100 01 42 CO Group 01 20 01 72 01 72 01 100 Assigns button to access a free line in the CO IP Group Loop Station Station Station Station Station Assigns button as DSS BLF for the Number Number Number Numbers Numbers assigned station number 3 254 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Programming Num Plan Num Plan Num Plan Num Plan Assigns button to dial a code from the Numbering Code Code Code Code Flexible Numbering Plan see Appendix B Plan Programming Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Assigns button to perform a User Program PGM Code Num Plan Num Plan Num Plan Num Plan function from the Fixed Numbering Plan Code Code Code Code Appendix C Station Speed 00 19 000 099 000 099 000 099 Station Speed Dial bin Bin System Speed 200 999 2000 4999 2000 4999 20000 31999 System Speed Dial bin Bin Net Station Network Network Network Network Refer to section 3 5 9 4 Network Numbering Number Number Table Number Table Number Number Plan Table Table Table Selecting Send Internal SMS displays the input entry page Figure 3 8 7 1 Z iPECS Station Program Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 stn_i
258. FLEX KEY 01 20 180 for System Timers 181 for System Timers II 182 for System Timers III Refer to Table 2 3 6 20 1 to 3 Press the Flex button for the desired Timer refer to Table 2 3 6 20 1 to Table 2 3 6 20 3 DISPLAY Use the dial pad to enter the desired Timer data refer to Table 2 3 6 20 1 to Table 2 3 6 20 3 Press the SAVE button to store the Timer data entry Table 2 3 6 20 1 SYSTEM TIMERS I PGM 180 Button DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 ATD RECALL TMR min Determines the amount of time the attendant 00 60 01 00 60 01 receives recall after which the system will minutes disconnect the call 2 89 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance timer sets the delay before ACNR attempts to access a CO line The retry counter is not Issue 5 0 Button DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 2 CALL PARK TMR sec Determines the amount of time before a 000 600 120 000 600 120 parked call will recall the station that parked seconds the call 3 CAMP ON RECALL TMR sec When a call transfer is camped on this timer 000 200 030 000 600 030 determines the amount of time before the seconds station receives recall 4 EX HOLD RECALL TMR sec Determines the amount of time before a call 000 300 060 000 600 060 placed on exclusive hold will recall the seconds
259. GENCY CO This field defines the CO Line or Group CO or Any CO os employed by the system to place Emergency CO Grp im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 19 100 110 STA ACCOUNT When ON the station user must enter an 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 OFF authorization code to access CO Lines 1 ON 20 100 100 UN CALL REC This field enables unconditional recording of all 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 0FF ON calls placed received by the station 1 ON Recordings in wav format are stored at the Phontage UCS Client defined under button 21 21 100 100 CALL REC STA When unconditional Call recording is enabled station 101 as above the recording Phontage or UCS Client station number is defined here 22 100 100 VSF BK DEL A Phontage or UCS Client may monitor voice 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 OFF ON messages for another station as a back up 1 ON The Phontage or UCS Client will include the message count for the station in the Voice message count When enabled here the Phontage UCS Client may delete messages for the station 23 100 100 VSF BK STA A Phontage or UCS Client may monitor voice station 126 messages for another station as a back up The Phontage or UCS Client will include the me
260. GM 234 Issue 5 0 Digit ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 VOICE MAIL 1 Code sent when the voice mail is to receive 0 Prefix P PREFIX OR SUFFIX 1 2 call to record a message 1 Suffix Put Mail Any digits 2 VOICE MAIL 2 Code sent when the voice mail is to playback 0 Prefix P PREFIX OR SUFFIX 1 2 recorded messages 1 Suffix Get Mail Any digits 3 VOICE MAIL 3 Code sent when the voice mail is to receive a 0 Prefix P 3P PREFIX OR SUFFIX 1 2 call while the user is busy 1 Suffix Busy Mail Any digits 4 VOICE MAIL 4 Code sent when the voice mail is to receive a 0 Prefix P 4P PREFIX OR SUFFIX 1 2 call while the user is in DND 1 Suffix DND Mail Any digits 5 ene Code sent when the voice mail is to receive a 0 Prefix P 5P PREFIX OR SUFFIX 1 2 call when the user did not answer 1 Suffix No Answer Mail Any digits 6 VOICE MAIL 6 Code sent when the voice mail is to receive a 0 Prefix P 6P PREFIX OR SUFFIX 1 2 call when a dialing error exists 1 Suffix Error Mail Any digits 7 VOICE MAIL 7 0 Prefix PREFIX OR SUFFIX 1 2 1 Suffix Any digits 8 VOICE MAIL 8 0 Prefix PREFIX OR SUFFIX 1 2 1 Suffix Any digits 9 VOICE MAIL 9 Code sent when the voice mail is to 0 Prefix ee DISCONNECT DIAL DGT_1 disconnect a call 1 Suffix Disconnect Mail Any digits 2 126 im Cs Rele
261. GR SIP outgoing call is rerouted via alternative 00 22 or 00 00 72 00 backup CO line when received call fail reason 00 72 or there is no answer during 3 seconds 9 BLF SERVICE USAGE Enable disable for BLF manager function 0 OFF OFF 1 0N OFF OFF 1 ON 2 131 im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 2 3 10 3 Network CO LINE Attribute PGM Code 322 PROCEDURE NET COL ATTRIBUTE 1 Press the PGM button and dial 322 ENTER CO RANGE 01 01 NET COL PGM Use the dial pad to enter the CO Range PRESS FLEX KEY 1 2 Refer to Table 2 3 10 3 1 Press the Flex button 1 4 for the desired setting refer to Table 2 3 10 3 1 DISPLAY Use the dial pad to enter the required data refer to Table 2 3 10 3 1 Press the SAVE button to store the new data Table 2 3 10 3 1 NETWORK BASIC ATTRIBUTE PGM 322 Button DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 01 01 NET CO GRP Networking CO group programming for 00 24 00 00 24 00 Networking call 2 01 01 NET CO LINE TYPE Select network CO Line Type 0 PSTN PSTN 0 PSTN 1 NET PSTN 1 QSIG 2 3 10 4 NET Numbering Plan Table PGM Code 324 PROCEDURE NET NUM PLAN TABLE 1 Press the PGM button and dial 324 ENTER BIN NO 00 149 00 NET NUM PLAN TBL Use the dial pad to enter the 2 digit Table index bin number 01 149 PRESS FLEX KEY 1 11 Refer to Table 2 3 10 4 1 Press the Fl
262. Guide Station User Program Codes Code Description Description 11x Intercorn Differential Ring Record Button Assignment With Voice Mail 12x CO Line Differential Ring CLIR Button Assignment 13 Intercom Answer Mode 1 HF 2 TONE 3 PY COLR Button Assignment 14x Call Coverage Attribute Setting ATD DND button assignment 15x Station Ring Download Account Code Button Assignment 21 Knock Down Station COS LOOP Button Assignment 22 Restore Station COS ATD Intrusion Button Assignment 23 Walking COS Camp on Button Assignment 24 ICR Scenario Send Keypad Facility IE Button Assignment 26 LIP Keyset Stat OH O Button Assignment 31 Message Retrieve Method SPEED Button Assignment 32 Message Retrieve Example CONFERENCE button assignment 33 User Authorization Code Registration CALLBACK button assignment 34 DID Call Wait DND button assignment 35 Message Wait in Executive Secretary pair FLASH button assignment 36 Send SMS Message MUTE button assignment 37 Register Mobile Extension MONITOR button assignment 38 Make Mobile Extension active REDIAL button assignment 39 Register Mobile Extension CLI CALL FORWARD button assignment 30 VM Mobile Notify Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Lid All Rights
263. IBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 SLT HOOK BOUNCE 100ms This timer determines the duration the system 01 25 01 01 25 01 considers an actual state change in the hook 100 msec switch and not a spurious contact bounce 2 SLT MAX H_FLASH 100ms This timer sets the maximum time an SLT 01 25 10 01 25 10 user can depress the hook switch for a Flash 100 msec signal 3 SLT MIN H_FLASH 10ms This time sets the minimum time an SLT user 000 250 030 000 250 030 must depress the hook switch for a Flash 10 msec signal 4 STA AUTO RLS TMR sec For an internal call the system will return a 000 300 060 000 300 060 station to idle if the call remains unanswered seconds for this duration 5 UNSUPER CONF TMR min This timer determines the duration of an 00 99 10 00 99 10 Unsupervised conference before the station minutes is recalled or the conference is dropped 6 PRIME LINE TMR sec This timer sets the delay no action duration 01 20 05 01 20 05 for delayed Prime Line operation seconds 7 WINK SIGNAL TMR 10ms This timer sets the duration of the Seize 010 200 010 010 200 010 Acknowledge Signal Wink sent to the 10 msec PSTN on a DID line 8 EN BLOC I_DGT TMR sec When an ISDN Line is assigned to send digits 01 20 05 01 20 05 Enblock PGM CODE 143 btn 3 the system will seconds send the digits if the user dials or this Enblock inter digit timer expires 9 DTMF DURATION TMR 10ms
264. IBUTES PGM 433 Button DISPLAY REMARK RANGE DEFAULT 1 001 001 ALARM ENABLE Selecting Flex button 1 allows the contact 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 0FF OFF monitoring circuitry to be enabled or disabled 1 ON 2 142 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 2 001 001 CONTACT TYPE This parameter establishes the contact state 0 Open CLOSE 1 CLOSE 0 OPEN CLOSE that will activate the Alarm close or open 1 Close 3 001 001 ALARM DOORBELL The contact can be treated to function as a 0 Door ALARM 1 ALARM 0 BELL ALARM doorbell instead of an alarm 1 Alarm 4 001 001 SIGNAL MODE The assigned stations will receive a Repeating 0 Once RPT 1 RPT O ONCE RPT signal or single burst ONCE as the alarm 1 Repeat tone The RSGM provides Background Music BGM to the local iPECS Phone It also provides MOH to the local CO Line when placed on hold BGM is provided from the assigned Music source which may be internal or an external source may be connected MOH may use the assigned Music source or an internal hold tone RSGM MUSIC ASSIGN ENTER RANGE 001 035 001 001 MUSIC ASSIGN PRESS FLEX 1 2 Refer to Table 2 3 12 5 1 DISPLAY Table 2 3 12 5 1 RSGM MUSIC ASSIGNMENTS PGM 434 Button DISPLAY REMARK RANGE DEFAULT 1 001 001 MOH TYPE 0 1 Assigns the source f
265. ID Ring Timer When a call is received the system may use ICLID 00 20 00 Incoming Caller ID to route the call The system will sec delay routing a call for this timer duration while awaiting ICLID Enter a 00 to disable ICLID routing CO VoIP Mode The VoIP channels can support iPECS H 323 or SIP COMMON COMMON protocols This field defines the protocol for the VoIP H323 channel s SIP Wait If DVU Busy When a DID DISA call assigned to receive a VSF VMIM OFF ON announcement arrives and all channels are busy the call ON may wait with Ringback until a channel is available ON or route to the DID DISA Destination PGM Code 167 CO Line Dial Tone One of four dial tones can be used by the CO line Dial Tone Dial Tone Source standard dial tone Int Ext 1 music 1 MOH Ext 2 music2 MOH VSF MOH VSF MOH CO Ring Back Tone One of four ring back tones can be used by the CO line Ring Back Ring Back Source standard ring tone Tone Tone music 1 MOH Int Ext 1 music2 MOH Ext 2 VSF MOH VSF MOH Proctor Service Each analogue CO line can be assigned to send the 0 OFF OFF station number as DTMF digits for Proctor service 1 ON SMS Outgoing Each CO line can be assigned to support PSTN SMS 0 Disable Disable 1 Enable SMS Received Station When a PSTN SMS is received the system delivers the Station message to the assigned station Table 3 5 4 1 2 STATION CO LINE TOLL RESTRICTIONS CO COS 1 CO COS 2 CO COS 3 CO COS 4 CO COS 5 STA No Restriction No Restrictio
266. IGHT ANSWER Universal Night 567 567 567 567 567 ENTER NEW 567 Answer dial code 24 laccouNT CODE WITH BIN Dial code for entering 568 568 568 568 568 ENTER NEW 568 an Account code Table 2 3 2 5 2 FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN PART B PGM 107 Btn DISPLAY FEATURE DEFAULT iPECS iPECS 50 MFIM MFIM MFIM Micro MFIM100_ 300 600 1200 1 WALKING cos Dial code to activate 569 569 569 569 569 ENTER NEW 569 Walking Class of Service 2 lACD AGENT ON OFF DUTY Dial code to toggle ACD 571 571 571 571 571 ENTER NEW 571 Agent or Supervisor ON and OFF duty 3 ACD SUPERVISOR LOGIN Supervisor login dial 572 572 572 572 572 ENTER NEW 572 code 4 ACD SUPERVISOR LOGOUT Supervisor logout dial 573 573 573 573 573 ENTER NEW 573 code 5 lacD HELP CODE Agent dial code 574 574 574 574 574 ENTER NEW 574 requesting Supervisor help and Supervisor Help request Response code 6 laAcD CALLS IN QUEUE Dial code to display 575 575 575 575 575 ENTER NEW 575 calls in queue 7 lACD SUPERVISOR STATUS Dial code to display 576 576 576 576 576 ENTER NEW 576 group status 8 lACD SUPERVISOR MONITOR Dial code to activate 577 577 577 577 577 ENTER NEW 577 Supervisor monitor im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance
267. IP Attributes P 126 Bintinn Waman Tiinnlaer Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Lid All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 2 14 1 Station ICM Tenancy Group Stations can be assigned to an ICM Tenancy group under Station Attributes section 3 5 2 2 Up to 15 Tenant groups can be defined Each group is configured to allow or deny placing intercom calls to stations in other groups and an Attendant station can be defined for each group Table 3 5 2 14 1 STATION ICM TENANCY GROUP ATTRIBUTES ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Tenancy Atd Attendant station for the ICM Tenant group Atd receives Station No dial 0 calls and controls Day Night Service Group Access ICM tenancy groups allowed access by stations of the 1 15 1 selected group 3 46 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 126 Selecting Station SIP Attributes will display the Station SIP input page Figure 3 5 2 15 1 Enter a valid SIP User ID Index Number range see Station Attributes and click Load to view the Station SIP Attributes 2 for the first index in the range Enter new data and click Save to modify the attributes for the index range Selecting the blue colored text in the Table header will sort the table based on the selected column Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm IPECS D96
268. IP SIP GW Addr SIP GW Addr gateway or Server Domain is used Server Domain P Asserted ldentity Address and Tel number of Caller Proxy Registration Timer Time out for registration Proxy Server Port Default port for SIP messages to proxy Port 5060 Registration UID Range Defines the range of User IDs from Station SIP UID Table index Attributes 2 to register with the SIP Registrar Server 000 150 DTMF Type DTMF sending mode INBAND INBAND 2833 INFO DTMF INFO DTMF RELAY INFO TELEPHO NE EVENT INFO NORTEL NETWORKS 3 58 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 1 RPID Remote Party ID lt ID Usage gt Extension Outgoing CLlI Get ID from Station ISDN Outgoing CLI PGM114 PGM143 2 PAI P Asserted Identity lt ID Usage gt Authorized Representative ID Get ID from Authorized Representative ID Table Index of SIP User ID Table xxx This is utilized when 1 Single registration and authentication via P Asserted Identity field and multiple Individual telephone number in From ID field 2 This is determined by programming of Softswitch on SIP Service Provider side ie one representative ID is input in SIP User ID Table 01 with Registration ON ID Usage ON this is used when registration and PAI field of every call setup multiple ID are input in SIP User ID Table 02 to xx with Registration OFF ID Usage ON this is used for From field of every call setup lt ID Individuality gt Extension O
269. JAN OF Station Order 1 50 51 100 101 150 151 200 201 250y z51 7 IP Addr Router IP Addr Station Type NET ARP Not Defined OFF Not Defined OFF Station Type P110 Not Defined OFF Station Attributes P111 113 Not Defined OFF IESE Station ISDN Attnbutes P114 Not Defined Flex Buttons P115 129 Station COS P116 COMP Group Access P117 Internal Page Zone P113 l Not Defined Ptt Group Access P119 0 0 0 Not Defined OFF Not Defined OFF Ka Not Defined OFF OFF OFF Preset Call Forward P120 0 0 0 Not Defined Idle Line Selection P121 IP Call Access P122 Preset FWD Timer P123 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ziz nenentenieneileziiezil il Not Defined Not Defined Not Defined Station ICM Group P125 0 0 0 0 Not Defined SHS NS I SIS SS Station SIP Attribute 0 0 0 0 Not Defined Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Lid All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 2 13 1 Linked Station Pair A station can be linked to another station so that the two stations effectively act as a single station with the attributes of the primary station number An unregistered or registered station may be linked to a primary station When unregistered station
270. Jordan 962 Kenya 254 Korea 82 Kuwait 965 Liberia 231 Libya 218 Malta 356 Luxembourg 352 Malaysia 60 Morocco 212 Mexico 52 Monaco 377 Nigeria 234 Netherlands 31 New Zealand 64 Pakistan 92 Norway 47 Oman 968 Paraguay 595 Panama 507 P N G 675 Portugal 351 Peru 51 Philippines 63 Senegal 221 Qatar 974 Saudi Arabia 966 Spain 34 Singapore 65 South Africa 27 Sweden 46 Sri Lanka 94 Swaziland 268 Tunisia 216 Switzerland 41 Thailand 66 United Kingdom 44 Turkey 90 U A E 971 Y A R 967 Uruguay 598 Venezuela 58 2 3 2 NUMBERING PLANS DATA PGM CODES 102 to 109 2 3 2 1 System IP Address Plan PGM Code 102 The System IP Address Plan sets several IP addresses including the MFIM IP address required for external VoIP calls the IP address for the router and the system s internal private IP address Plan Note that the MFIM and Router addresses and sub net mask must be a routable IP address for access to an external VoIP network remote access by a gateway Module or terminal and remote Web access The VOIM Voice over IP gateway Module must also have a routable IP address for access to from an external VoIP network or remote user When Automatic IP Assignment button 7 is enabled the system will assign IP addresses to each local gateway Module and terminal using the assigned System IP address range These addresses are used for communications between the system and other Modules and terminals The MFIM may be installed on a LAN that is segmented
271. LCR Table Data 11 Tables 12 Nation Specific Data 13 Flexible Button Data Enter station range 14 All Data 15 LCD Message 16 QUIT Print Out 17 String Length 10 or 20 character 18 Board Base Attributes 19 Database Print out TABLE D 18 VIRTUAL DIP SWITCH Button SUB MENU RANGE REMARK PGM Code 452 Virtual Trace Dip Switch Access 1 Call Trace ON OFF Press Flex Button Toggle ON OFF LED lights if trace is ON 2 VoIP Trace ON OFF Press Flex Button Toggle ON OFF LED lights if trace is ON 3 HTTP Trace ON OFF Press Flex Button Toggle ON OFF LED lights if trace is ON 4 Multicast Trace ON OFF Press Flex Button Toggle ON OFF LED lights if trace is ON 5 CTI Trace ON OFF Press Flex Button Toggle ON OFF LED lights if trace is ON 6 Raw Trace ON OFF Press Flex Button Toggle ON OFF LED lights if trace is ON PGM Code 453 Virtual Dip Switch Access 1 Device Polling ON OFF Press Flex Button Toggle ON OFF LED lights if trace is ON 2 SMDI Setting ON OFF Press Flex Button Toggle ON OFF LED lights if trace is ON 3 Multicast LED ON OFF Press Flex Button Toggle ON OFF LED lights if trace is ON 4 Auto Negotiation MANUAL AUTO Press Flex Button Toggle ON OFF LED lights if trace is Manual 5 Full or Half duplex FULL HALF Press Flex Button Toggle ON OFF LED lights if trace is HALF 6 100 M or 10 M Tx Rx bps 100 10 Press Flex Button Toggle ON OFF LED lights if trace is 1
272. LCR Table Initialization P223 Removal Position 01 12 Toll Exception Table Number of digits to be 00 12 removed th Code Tah Add Position 01 13 COMP Group 01 73 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 8 3 1 LCR Digit Modification Table Using the index determined from the analysis of the LCR Leading Digits Table the dialed number is modified in accordance with the Digit Modification Table and sent over the CO IP group assigned for the index Digits of the dialed number can be deleted based on the Removal Position and Number of digits to be removed entries and a digit stream can be inserted in the resulting number Counting from the first dialed digit the Removal Position defines the location of the digit where removal begins and the Number of digits to be removed defines the number of digits to remove The Add Digits are then inserted in the resulting number at the digit position assigned by the Add Position entry The resulting number is then dialed over the CO IP path assigned If the assigned path is not available the Alternate DMT index is used to determine the number and CO IP path to be used 3 165 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Table Index to use if no path is available in the assigned CO IP Group Issue 5 0 Table 3 5 8 3 1 LCR DIGIT MODIFICATION ATTRIBUTE DESC
273. LP Tahle WLA z 10 Dia uelude nt angi Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 7 2 1 CLIP COLP Table Normally the system will send the primary Directory Number of the ISDN Line in the ISDN call SETUP and CONNECT messages to identify the caller CLIP or the answering COLP party respectively Under certain circumstances it may be desirable to provide the secondary or DID number for the ISDN Line In these cases the CLIP COLP Table may be used to define the digits sent The number sent is selected based on the index assigned for the ISDN Line under CO IP line Attributes section 3 5 4 1 For CLIP COLP Table entry 9 iPECS Micro iPECS 50 amp MFIM100 or Table entry 49 MFIM300 amp MFIM600 amp MFIM1200 the CLI Station Number is sent in place of the station number For all other entries the station number is sent as a suffix to the number in the Table Note that this number is sent only if CLIR COLR is disabled under the CLIR Service and COLR Service assignments in the Station ISDN Attributes 3 155 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 202 Selecting MSN Table will display the MSN Table data entry page Figure 3 5 7 3 1 Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer BAE ay File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm iPECS VD96M E 0Ap APRIOS Boot Version 1 BAR JANIO 1 50 51 100 101 150 15
274. LT x No Touch Answer a Page Access Headset Ring Speakerphone LCD Display LED a ololral al ula wiv xI x 5 x a Loop LCR Account D a Call Coverage Mode Call Cover Delay Ring Offnet Forward ENABLE D x T lt x Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 2 2 1 Station Attributes Station Attributes define features and functions available to the station Generally the entry will turn the feature ON enable or OFF disable Refer to Table 3 5 2 2 1 for a description of the features and the input required Table 3 5 2 2 1 STATION ATTRIBUTES ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Auto Speak Selection Enables SPEAKER activation when a CO IP DSS ON ON or other feature button is pressed no need to lift OFF handset 3 27 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Offnet Forward button LED will flash at the covering station and the station will receive ring immediate or delayed 0 to 9 A station must be allowed Off Net Fwd to forward external incoming calls outside the system or otherwise establish a CO to CO connection Enable Disable Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Call Forward Enables Call Forward to be activated by the station ON OFF OFF DND
275. M the master and slave are connected via the LAN2 port All 8 wires in the cable must be terminated to the RJ45 The slaver IP address can be assigned here When the direct connection mode is employed for redundancy the field is ignored 18 MFIM DNS IP ADDR 0 0 0 0 IP Address of Domain Name Server which iPECS will use to resolve urls to an IP address The DNS provides the resolution after receiving the name from iPECS 2 3 2 2 Device IP Address Plan PGM Code 103 As gateway Modules and terminals register to the iPECS a gateway number is assigned which indicates the order of registration Also based on the type of device CO IP gateway Terminal MISC VSF WTIM gateway the system assigns a logical Sequence Number Thus Sequence Numbers for CO VOIM gateway Modules Terminals and the MISC VSF gateway are independently assigned based on the type of gateway These Sequence Numbers are employed to provide a relationship between the physical MAC address and the logical port numbers of the device For the RSGM the CO Line port is assigned a CO IP gateway Sequence Number and the iPECS Phone and SLT port are assigned Terminal Sequence Numbers im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 The system may assign a default private IP address to each Sequence Number If desired this program
276. M E 0Ap APR OS Boot Version 1 0Ah JAN OF Enter SIP User ID Index Number SIP User ID Index From 1 to 1 Uncheck All Attribute Registration User ID x x Station Type P110 Authentication User ID Station Attributes P111 113 Station ISDN Attnibutes P114 Flex Buttons P 115 129 Station COS P 116 COMP Group Access P117 Intemal Page Zone P113 Ptt Group Access P119 Preset Call Forvrard P120 Idle Line Selection P121 Authentication User Password Contact Number 100 Asc Station Number User ID Register Provision lt x x x x x User ID Usage OFF Ring Route Type ID ASSIGNED STATION x xI DID Conversion Type DID Digit Conversion Number of Digits 2 4 x 3 IP Call Access P122 Expected from DID Circuit Preset FWD Timen P123 DID Digit Mask 4 digits Linked Station P 124 0 9 x zy Station ICM Group P125 Chadian Mama DMinwlaee Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 2 15 1 Station SIP Attributes 2 For each station an index to the Station SIP Attributes 2 Table is defined in PGM CODE 111 Station Attributes The Station SIP Attributes 2 Table defines SIP characteristics associated with the index including User ID Authentication name etc These characteristics are required for proper opera
277. M IP ADDRESS PLAN PGM 102 Btn DISPLAY DEFAULT REMARK 1 MFIM E IP ADDRESS 10 10 10 2 Public IP Address required for remote user and external VoIP SSS SSSe SSS STS network access IPv4 format 2 MFIM E SUB NET MASK 255 255 0 0 255 255 255 000 10 10 10 1 IP Address of router for external network WAN IP access Required for shared voice and data LAN external VoIP and remote Web access 4 SYSTEM START IP ADDRESS 10 10 10 10 Start of range for private IP addresses assigned by the 10 10 10 10 system to Modules Terminals 5 SYSTEM END IP ADDRESS 10 10 254 25 End of range for private IP addresses assigned by the system 10 10 10 254 4 to Modules Terminals 6 SYSTEM SUB NET MASK 255 255 0 0 255 255 255 000 7 AUTOMATIC IP ASSIGN ON The system will automatically assign IP addresses to modules 1 ON 0 0FF ON and terminals ON or when OFF IP addresses are assigned manually in Pam CODE 103 Device IP Address Plan 3 ROUTER IP ADDRESS 2 5 im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 8 SECOND SYS IP ADDRESS 0 0 0 0 When devices are located on a different private address on 0 0 0 0 the same net enter the MFIM IP address for the second LAN 9 SECOND SYS SUB NET MASK 255 255 0 0 255 255 0 0 10 FIREWALL IP ADDRESS 0 0 0 0 When the system is installed behind a NAPT server the
278. M uses IP Multicast for local BGM and MOH transport PROCEDURE TNET LM MUSIC ATTR 1 Press the PGM button and dial 335 ENTER BIN NO 01 15 MUSIC ASSIGN eae es 1 2 for iPECS Micro 01 50 for MFIM1200 and 01 15 for other PRESS FLEX_KEY 1 3 Reter to Table 23 1161 Select the desired Flex button refer to Table 2 3 11 6 1 DISPLAY Use the dial pad to select the desired Music Source refer to Table 2 3 11 6 1 To save the Music Source press the SAVE button Table 2 3 11 6 1 MUSIC SOURCES FOR MOH amp BGM PGM 335 Button DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 BGM TYPE 0 3 Assigns the source for BGM 00 Hold tone 1 MUSIC 1 1 Music 2 is not available in the 01 Music 1 02 Music 2 iPECS Micro and iPECS 50 03 VSF MOH 04 SLTMOH1 And VSF MOH is not 05 SLTMOH2 06 SLTMOHS available in the iPECS Micro 07 SLTMOH4 08 SLTMOH5 09 VSFMOH2 10 VSFMOH3 2 138 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 2 MOH TYPE 0 3 Assign the source for MOH 00 Hold tone 1 MUSIC 1 1 Music 2 is not available in the 01 Music 1 02 Music 2 iPECS Micro and iPECS 50 03 VSF MOH 04 SLTMOH1 And VSF MOH is not 05 SLTMOH2 06 SLTMOH3 available in the iPECS Micro 07 S TMOH4 08 SLTMOHS 09 VSFMOH2 10 VSFMOH3 3 INT EXT1 MUSIC Assigns the input for source 1 0 Internal 0 0 INT 1 EXT1 INT
279. M100 or entries 00 to 49 other iPECS Micro amp MFIMs the station number is included as a suffix of iPECS 50 amp the caller id For Using Station s COLP Attribute MFIM100 the CLI STA NO entered in section 3 5 2 3 will be 00 49 other used in place of the station number MFIMs CLIP Table Index When a call is placed on an ISDN Line the system N A N A will send caller id using the number from the Using Station s CLIP COLP Table section 3 5 7 2 entry defined by CLIP Attribute this parameter For entries 00 to 09 iPECS Micro amp 00 09 iPECS 50 amp MFIM100 or entries 00 to 49 other iPECS Micro amp MFIMs the station number is included as a suffix of iPECS 50 amp the caller id For Using Station s CLIP Attribute the MFIM100 CLI STA NO entered in section 3 5 2 3 will be used in 00 49 other place of the station number MFIMs ENBLOC Sending This entry determines if the system sends dialed ON OFF digits to the ISDN line as they are received Overlap OFF or collects all digits and forwards them in a block ENBLOC Type of Number for Calling For outgoing calls on an ISDN Line this parameter Unknown Unknown Party Info defines the Type of Number Plan provided in International Calling Party Information Element of the ISDN call National SETUP message Not Used 0 UNKNOWN Subscriber 1 INTERNATIONAL 2 NATIONAL 3 Not used 4 SUBSCRIBER DID Remove Number When a DID call is received on an ISDN Line this 00 99 00 en
280. MAILBOX MSG WAIT STA When a group call overflows or routes to Station en deere the VM group a station number is used to identify the Mailbox for the Ring group messages 14 MAILBOX PASSWORD The password associated with a group 12 digits ones Mailbox is defined here The password is used in conjunction with the Ring group as with a normal station 15 RING 621 FORCED DEST When a call is delivered to the group the 1 4 S H V SPD DIAL 1 4 system can redirect the call to the Forced destination if enabled under btn 16 below 16 FORCED FWD DEST USAGE Enables the system to redirect group calls 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 0FF OFF to the Forced destination defined under 1 ON btn 15 above 17 WAIT IF 1ST ANNC BUSY When a call assigned to receive an 0 OFF ON 1 ON 0 OFF ON announcement arrives and all channels 1 ON are busy the call may wait with Ringback until a channel is available ON or bypass the announcement 18 GROUP NAME An Ring group name can be designated 12 character Table 2 3 7 2 4 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTES PGM 191 EXTERNAL VM GROUPS Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 VM 626 WRAP UP TMR After terminating any call the VM port will be 002 999 002 002 999 002 maintained in a busy state for the duration of seconds the WRAP UP TiMeR 2 VM 626 PUT MAIL INDEX For external analog Voice Mail groups an 1 4 1 1 4 1 index to the Voice Mail Dial Table which contains the Put Mail dial code 3 VM 626 GET MAIL I
281. MOH 1 use 0000 9999 8158 8158 8159 8159 31 M CAST RTP SLT MOH 2 RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH 2 use 0000 9999 8160 8160 8161 8161 32 M CAST RTP SLT MOH 3 RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH 3 use 0000 9999 8162 8162 8163 8163 33 M CAST RTP SLT MOH 4 RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH 4 use 0000 9999 8164 8164 8165 8165 34 M CAST RTP SLT MOH 5 RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH 5 use 0000 9999 8166 8166 8167 8167 35 M CAST RTP VSF MOH 2 RTP and RTCP ports for VSF VMIM MOH 0000 9999 8168 8168 8169 2 use 8169 36 M CAST RTP VSF MOH 3 RTP and RTCP ports for VSF VMIM MOH 0000 9999 8170 8170 8171 3 use 8171 Table 2 3 6 5 3 MULTI CAST RTP RTCP PORTS PGM 165 MFIM300 amp MFIM600 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 M CAST RTP BGM INT RTP and RTOP ports for internal BGM 0000 9999 8100 8100 8101 8101 2 M CAST RTP BGM EXT 1 RTP and RTOP ports for external BGM 1 0000 9999 8102 8102 8103 8103 3 M CAST RTP BGM EXT 2 RTP and RTOP ports for external BGM 2 0000 9999 8104 8104 8105 8105 4 M CAST RTP I PAGE 1 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 1 0000 9999 8106 8106 8107 8107 5 M CAST RTP I PAGE 2 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 2 0000 9999 8108 8108 8109 8109 6 M CAST RTP I PAGE 3 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 3 0000 9999 8110 8110 8111 8111 7 M CAST RTP I PAGE 4 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 4 0000 9999 8112 8112 8113 8113 8 M CAST RTP I PAGE 5 RTP and RTCP ports
282. Mail Box enter the Station Group number of the Voice Mail group external VM VSF or Feature Server Voice Mail group This will permit other iPECS Phone users to transfer a call directly to the desired user s Voice Mail Box PROCEDURE CALL FWD PRESET 1 Press the PGM button and dial 120 ENTER STA RANGE 100 110 STA PRES FWD Use the dial pad to enter a station range Ex 100 110 For a single station enter the same number twice CONDITION CHOICE F 1 6 F1 STA F2 HUNT F3 SPEED Press Flex Button for the desired type of forward le Unconditional Internal Busy Internal No Answer External Busy External No Answer Transfer to Mailbox destination must the VM Group UNCONDITION Co Cn B 2 IN 2 35 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance ENTER FWD STA NO Issue 5 0 Select Flex button for the Destination type UNCONDITION STA 1 Station 2 Hunt Group or 3 System Speed Bin for Off net 4 Station ICR Use the dial pad to enter the value associated with the selected type For Station amp Net Station enter station number For Hunt Group enter Station Group Number or For System Speed Bin for Off Net enter Speed bin number Press the SAVE button to store the data entry 2 3 3 10 Idle Line Selection PGM Code 121 When a station goes to an off hook condition lifts handset or presses SPEAKER button the system normally provides intercom dial tone In pla
283. Mail box PGM231 destination type 13 added for ICLID Routing table PGM231 flex button 7 added for auto ring assign table PGM325 added for Network feature code table PGM444 added for Zone Holiday Assignment Web Admin PGM102 insert a filed DNS IP Address PGM109 btn 12 13 added for Enter Into Conf Group Station ICR PGM111 btn 21 added for Serial DSS usage PGM111 btn 22 amp 23 added for ICM Dial Ringback Tone PGM115 Serial DSS button program and LSS Label edit description inserted PGM132 Codec Type G 722 added PGM142 btn 17 amp 18 added for CO line Dial Ringback Tone PGM161 btn 24 added for added menu PGM169 btn 4 added for weekday display mode PGM177 btn 26 29 added for SMDR Interface SMDR ICM disconnect cause PGM195 added for NTP Attributes PGM196 added for SNMP Attributes PGM197 added for Cabinet Attributes PGM231 insert a field Auto Ring Mode Table PGM231 insert a destination type PGM325 added for Network feature code table PGM4339 insert a field Display Time Zone PGM444 added for Zone Holiday Assignment Web Admin Station Program Section 3 8 3 added for Station ICR Scenario Section 3 8 9 added for Conference Group Update VSF memory channel capacity Update and add new attributes for SIP G W Module Programming Option Section 3 5 3 4 SIP Gateway Module 5 0d1 07 Jan 08 Update capacity table for iPECS 1200 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Description of Changes 5 0d2 17 Feb 09 Add group
284. N 6 No Touch Answer 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 7 Page Access 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 8 Speaker Headset Ring S H BOTH SPKR SPKR Speakerphone 9 Speakerphone Headset ON OFF ON ON Speakerphone 10 LCD Display LED Ring MWI MWI 11 Loop LCR Account 1 ON 0 OFF OFF Station based LOOP LCR authorization option 12 Call Coverage 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 13 Call Coverage Delay Ring 0 9 9 14 Off net Forward Disable 0 ENA 1 DIS Enable Off net Forward Activation Except USA version 15 Forced ICM Mode Change 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 16 Active PTT Group 0 9 17 Station ICM Tenancy Group 1 15 1 18 VMIM VSF Voice MailGateway 19 SIP User ID Table Index Index to Station SIP Attributes Table MFIM amp 100 0 70 PGM 126 Web only Other MFIMs 0 150 22 ICM Dial Tone Source 0 dial tone 0 1 Int Ext 1 2 Ext 2 3 VSF 23 ICM Ring Back Tone Source 0 ring back tone 0 1 Int Ext 1 2 Ext 2 3 VSF 24 UMS Attach Message 1 ON 0 OFF ON PGM Code 112 Station Attributes Il 1 CO Call Time Tone 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 2 Automatic Hold 1 ON 0 OFF ATD ON Others OFF 3 CO Call Time Restriction 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 4 CO Line Access EN DIS ENABLE 5 CO IP Line Queuing EN DIS ENABLE 6 CO PGM EN DIS DISABLE 7 Ringing Line Preference EN DIS ENABLE 8 Speed Dial Access EN DIS ENABLE 9 UCD Group Service 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 10 Ring Group Service 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 11 Two Way Record 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 12 Message Speed Scroll 0 7 3 Scroll speed for Graphic LCD Key set 13 Hot Desk Station 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 14 Prefer CO
285. NDEX For external analog Voice Mail groups an 1 4 2 1 4 2 index to the Voice Mail Dial Table which contains the Get Mail dial code 4 VM 626 HUNT TYPE The type of Hunt process applied to the SLT 0 TERM TERM 1 CIR 0 TERM TERM ports connected to the VM can be assigned 1 CIRC as Circular or Terminal 5 VM 626 OVERFLOW TMR A call to a group will remain queued to the 000 600 180 000 600 180 group or be sent to the assigned seconds OVERFLOW DEST after expiration of the OVERFLOW TMR 6 VM 626 OVERFLOW DEST A call to the group will continue to route Station or S H V SPD Dial 1 4 through the group until answered or all group Grp Number members have been tried The call will VSF remain at the last station or routes to the Announce assigned OVERFLOW DEST System SPD 7 FORCED FWD DEST USAGE When a call is delivered to the group the 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 OFF OFF system can redirect the call to the Forced 1 ON destination if enabled under btn 8 below 2 104 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 8 VM 621 FORCED DEST S H V SPD DIAL 1 4 Enables the system to redirect group calls to the Forced destination defined under btn 7 above 1 4 An hunt group name can be designated 12 character Table 2 3 7 2 5 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTES PGM 191 PICK UP GROUP
286. Night and Timed Use the dial pad to enter the Authorization code or COS Press the SAVE button to store the data entry 2 119 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Table 2 3 9 4 1 AUTHORIZATION CODES PGM 227 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 1 AUTHORIZATION CODE Authorization code for each station can be ENTER STA RANGE assigned up to 12 digits in length 1 2 AUTHORIZATION CODE Authorization codes for system wide use 001 430 ENTER BIN NO 001 430 can be assigned up to 12 digits in length 001 700 Or 0001 1400 2 1 SYSTEM AUTHORIZATION Selects attribute code or Class of Service F1 SET_PWD F2 SET_COS A password of up to 12 digits is defined 2 1 SYSTEM AUTHORIZATION 001 12345678901 2 2 ser cos Establishes the COS associated with the F1 DAY_F2 NIGHT_F3 TIME System Authorization code during Day Night and Timed Service modes 1 11 7 The system incorporates IVR Integrated Voice Response capabilities called CCR Customer Call Routing After or during a VSF AA Announcement a caller may dial a digit to select a destination or route for the call The CCR VSF AA Routing Audio Text Table defines the destination associated with digits dialed by the caller in response to the VSF AA Announcement 01 70 Up to 70 single level Audio Text menus may be assigned or multi level menu s
287. OH TYPE STN No DISA Destination 167 RIO External Control Contacts 168 SLT MOH 2 LCD Display Mode 169 LED Flashing Rate 170 SENMONA SLT MOH 4 PBX Access Codes 172 SLT MOH 5 ALP Priority 173 RS 232 Port Settings 174 Serial Port Selections 1 75 Break Make Ratio 176 SMDRA Attributes 1 77 System Date amp Time 178 System Multi Language 179 System Timers 180 182 186 In Daama InAlnntin nf 100 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Figure 3 5 5 11 1 Music Sources Music inputs are provided for use as the Background Music and or Music On Hold source inputs iPECS Micro has a single virtual input iPECS 50 has a single input other MFIMs provide for 2 inputs The first input can be either the internal source or the external BGM1 except iPECS Micro iPECS Micro does not has an external BGM source Note that the BGM1 input on the front panel of the MFIM and the BGM1 input on the rear panel of the MFIM are electrically connected and only one 1 should be used refer to the iPECS Description and Installation Manual section 4 4 2 In addition a VSF or VMIM announcement may be recorded and played as MOH to the connected caller And SLTM is used as MOH to the holded caller 3 104 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 172 Selecting PBX Access Codes will display the PBX Access Codes data entry page Figure 3 5 5 12 1
288. ON group calls ON When OFF group calls are sent to the member as normal 24 24 ACD 622 FORCED DEST When a call is delivered to the group the 1 4 S H V SPD DIAL 1 4 system can redirect the call to the Forced destination if enabled under btn 24 5 above Table 2 3 7 2 3 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTES PGM 191 RING GROUPS Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 RING 624 ANNC1 TMR 1s If all stations in the group are busy when a 000 999 015 000 999 015 call is offered the call may continue to seconds wait queue for an available station If the queue period exceeds this 1st ANNounCement TiMeR the call may be sent to a VSF announcement If the timer is set to 000 the call will receive the first announcement in full prior to the hunt process guaranteed announcement 2 102 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 2 RING 624 ANNC 2 TMR 1s After the 1st announcement a 2nd ANNC 000 999 000 000 999 000 TMR is activated At expiration if the call seconds remains queued to the group the call is sent to the assigned 2nd VSF announcement 3 RING 624 ANNC1 LOC Each Ring Group can be assigned an 00 70 00 none VSF ANNC 00 70 announcement which is playe
289. Outgoing call Received 15 50 15 call or Lost call information can be displayed by pressing Call Log Display Button The maximum size of the Call Log per station is defined here Repeat Dtmf tone If enabled the system will repeat DTMF tones to the ON ON caller s station when the call is routed to an off net call OFF forward location Off Hook Ring Type Off hook ring can be a single tone burst or muted MUTE MUTE normal ring BURST Page Warning Tone A warning tone can be sent prior to a page ON ON announcement OFF Automatic Privacy Automatic Privacy can be disabled allowing stations to ON ON join an active CO IP call A warning tone can be OFF provided see Privacy Warning Tone below Privacy Warning Tone If desired a warning tone can be provided when privacy ON ON is overridden OFF ACD Print Enable ACD statistics can be periodically sent to the assigned ON OFF serial port To provide periodic reports this feature OFF must be ON ACD Print Timer This entry defines the time in 10 second increments 001 255 010 between the periodic ACD reports assigned above 10 sec Clear ACD Database When a periodic report is sent the ACD database can OFF OFF be cleared automatically if ON ON Override 1st CO Group When a user dials 9 the system can search all CO IP OFF ON Groups for the first available CO IP line ON 3 82 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance
290. P177 System Date amp Time P 178 System Multi Language P179 System Timers P130 182 186 Web Access Authorization NTP Attnbutes P195 SNMP Attrbute P196 Cabinet Attnbute P197 Systera Speed Dial Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 5 233 1 Hot Desk Attributes A Hot Desk station allows a user to login for access to the system features and resources Once logged in the user is provided access to system features and resources employing the database for the user s assigned station User station numbers are assigned automatically by the system The system assigns station numbers to each agent starting at the highest station number 126 for iPECS Micro 149 for iPECS 50 169 for MFIM100 and 399 for the MFIM300 1599 for the MFIM600 2199 for the MFIM1200 and decrementing for each agent For example if the number of Hot Desk users under button 1 is five then station numbers 169 168 167 166 and 165 for the MFIM100 are assigned as Hot Desk users 3 123 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Table 3 5 5 233 1 HOT DESK ATTRIBUTES ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Number of Agent Assign number of hot desk agent IPECS Micro 00 26 IPECS 50 000 050 MFIM100 000 070 MFIM300 000 300 MFIM600 000 600 MFIM1200 000 1200 View Agent Range View the assigned station numbers for agents Auto Logout Timer A Hot desk stat
291. PGM 450 Button DISPLAY REMARK 1 INITIALIZATION FLEX NUM PLAN 2 INIT STATION DATA STATION DATA ENT STA RNG 3 INIT COL DATA COL DATA ENT COL RNG 4 INIT COL DATA SYSTEM DATA 5 INITIALIZATION STATION GROUP 6 INITIALIZATION ISDN TABLES 7 INITIALIZATION SYSTEM TIMER 8 INITIALIZATION TOLL TABLES 9 INITIALIZATION LCR DATA 10 INITIALIZATION OTHER TABLES 11 INITIALIZATION FLEX BUTTON 12 INITIALIZATION NET DATA 13 INITIALIZATION ALL DATA 14 SYSTEM RESTART RESTART NOW 2 146 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 The system can output all or portions of the system database in order to provide a hard copy The data is output over the appropriate Serial port Serial 1 or Serial 2 DATABASE PRINT OUT PRESS FLEX KEY 01 21 Refer to Table 2 3 15 1 DISPLAY Table 2 3 15 1 DATABASE PRINT OUT PGM 451 Button DISPLAY REMARK 1 DATABASE PRINT OUT FLEX NUM PLAN 2 DATABASE PRINT OUT IP SETTING PLAN 3 DATABASE PRINT OUT A station range must be entered to output the Station data STA DATA ENT STA RNG 4 DATABASE PRINT OUT A CO IP line range 01 42 must be entered to output CO IP COL DATA ENT COL RNG data 5 DATABASE PRINT OUT SYSTEM DATA 6 DATABASE PRINT OUT STATION GROUP 7 DATABASE P
292. PTTGroupO Station Type P110 Station Attributes P111 113 Station ISDN Attnbutes P114 Flex Buttons P115 129 Station COS P116 COMP Group Access P117 Internal Page Zone P113 qa a a q a a a x x o o ao o 0 a a a a a Preset Call Forward P 120 Idle Line Selection P121 IP Call Access P122 Preset FWD Timer P123 Linked Station P 124 Station ICM Group P125 Station SIP Attnbutes P126 Rating Kawa Thnnlaer Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Lid All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 2 8 1 PTT Group Access Each iPECS Phone is assigned to receive PTT announcements from any combination of the nine 9 PTT groups Note a station not assigned to any group will not receive PTT page announcements including Internal All PTT group page As a default all stations except remote stations are assigned to group 1 3 39 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 120 Selecting Preset Call Forward will display the Preset Call Forward data input page Figure 3 5 2 9 1 Enter a valid station range and click Load to enter the Station Preset Call Forward data iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DAR File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address 4 http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm IPECS VD96M E 0Ap APR O8 Boot Version 1 0Ah JAN OF Enter Station Range Station Range From 100 to 100 Uncheck
293. Plan is given in Table B 1 TABLE B 1 Numbering Plan Description Plan Description Range Number MFIM100 MFIM300 MFIM600 MFIM1200 LES ME ESS Default for Sweden max Stations 200 100 169 100 399 Stations above Max ports will be displayed as ORK The station number can be changed within 999 6 Finiand Default max Stations60_ Peme TABLE B 2A Base Numbering Plan 1 4 Default Values Feature Base Numbering Plan 1 2 3 4 Remark Intercom Call MFIM100 IO 100 169 100 169 700 769 noose 100 799 700 999 MFIME300 a i a 100 399 700 999 MFIM600 1000 1599 MFIM1200 1000 2199 Internal Page Zone MFIM100 501 510 501 510 101 110 01 10 501 535 501 535 101 135 01 35 Other MFIMs Internal All Call Page 543 543 3 7 Meet Me Page 544 544 HH HH External Page Zone 1 2 545 546 945 546 41 42 41 42 External All Call Page 548 548 5 5 All Call Page Internal External l 549 549 00 00 SMDR Account Code Enter 550 550 550 9 SLT Flash Command to CO Line 551 551 551 551 SLT B 1 irec Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Feature Last Number Redial DND Toggle On Off Call Forward Speed Dial Programming Message Wait Callback Enable Message Wait Callback Return Speed Dial Access Cancel DND FWD Pre MSG CO System Hold Program Mode Access Attendant Unavailable Alarm Reset Group Call Pickup Universal Answer Account Code with bin Walking COS Code ACD S
294. R DB 224 TOLL Table Allow A TOLL Table Deny A TOLL Table Allow B Toll Exception Tables TOLL Table Deny B TOLL Table Allow C TOLL Table Deny C TOLL Table Allow D TOLL Table Deny D TOLL Table Allow E TOLL Table Deny E NATION SPECIFIC IP Phone H S Receive Gain IP Phone H S Receive Gain System Tone Cadence A 3 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 PROGRAM PGM CODE WEB SUB MENU GROUP RSGM DATA Webony Device Zone Number Assignment Webony Device Attributes Webony Access amp Page Relay Webony i Zone Attributes i O Webonly Zone RTP RelayGroup Webony Inter Zone Attributes Webony Zone Holiday Assignment _ DEVICELOGIN Webonly SC Remote Phone amp Gateway Registration _ Webony Station User Login Initialization Virtual Dip Switch Virtual Dip Switch DECT Data WTIM DECT RX Gain WTIM DECT RX Gain DEVICE RX Gain from WTIM DECT Other devices RX Gain from WTIM DECT WTIM DECT TX GAIN WTIM DECT TX Gain DEVICE TX Gain to WTIM DECT Other devices TX Gain to WTIM DECT A 4 im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 APPENDIX B DEFAULT NUMBERING PLAN The Default Numbering Plan can be selected from 1 of 8 base Numbering Plans shown in Tables B 2A amp B 2B The Number Plan can be changed using the Numbering Plan Programs PROGRAM CODES 106 to 108 A brief description of each Number
295. RINT OUT ISDN TABLES 8 DATABASE PRINT OUT SYSTEM TIMER 9 DATABASE PRINT OUT TOLL TABLES 10 DATABASE PRINT OUT LCR DATA 11 DATABASE PRINT OUT OTHER TABLES 12 DATABASE PRINT OUT NATION SPECIFIC 13 DATABASE PRINT OUT A station range must be entered to output the Station Flex FLX BIN ENT STA RNG button data Data may be output in 20 or 10 character format see Flex button 17 below 14 DATABASE PRINT OUT ALL DATA 15 DATABASE PRINT OUT LCD PRINT 0 2 NORMAL 24 16 DATABASE PRINT OUT TO QUIT PRESS SAVE 2 147 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button DISPLAY 17 STRING LENGTH 1 20 0 10 20 CHAR 18 DATABASE PRINT OUT BOARD ATTRIBUTES 19 DATABASE PRINT OUT NETWORKING TABLE 20 FLEX BIN LCD PRINT Print out strings those are used in flexible button to display STR LEN 0 1 20 the content 21 WORKING LCD PRINT Print out strings those are used to activate some features The Virtual Trace Dip switch is used to enable and disable traces for various functions as defined REMARK The Station Flex button print out can be provide in a 20 or 10 character format default is 20 characters
296. RIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Add Digits This entry defines the digit stream to insert in the 25 digits number after digit removal Digits 0 9 and special characters P timed Pause D Dial tone detect F Billing station number Removal Position This entry defines the position of the digit where 01 12 1 removal is to begin starting with the 1st dialed digit 01 Number of digits to be This entry defines the number of digits to remove 00 12 0 removed starting at the Removal Position Add Position This entry defines the position in the number after 01 13 1 digit removal where the Add Digits are inserted CO IP Group This entry defines the CO IP Group that the system IPECS Micro 1 will attempt to use for the call iPECS 50 MFIM100 01 20 Other MFIM 00 72 Alternative DMT Index This entry defines an Alternate Digit Modification 00 99 3 166 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 223 Selecting LCR Table Initialization will display the LCR Table Initialization data entry page Figure 3 5 8 4 1 Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DEAR File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm iPECSVD96M E 0Ap APRIDS Boot Version 1 04h JAN OT Attribute Must be 6 Digits Must be 6 Digits Must be 6 Digits I DMT 01 73 00 99 I CO Group IT Alternative DMT Index M ANLCR Copyri
297. Re PGM CODE 152 Selecting T1 CO Line Attributes will display the T1 Line Attributes data input page Figure 3 5 4 8 1 Enter a valid CO range and click Load to enter the T1 Line Attributes data i iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit view Favorites Tools Issue 5 0 DoR Address http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm IPECSA DS6N E OAp APRIOS Boot Version 1 0Ah JAN OF COMP Attrbutes P140 142 PR ment P144 COMP Preset Fwd AttP1 NA ISDN Line Attributes P150 ISDN CO Line Attr P143 151 EnterCO Range ___J _ _Load CO Range From 1 to 1 Uncheck All Attributes Value xI PAUSE 2 k 1sec lt RELEASE GUARD 20 k 100msec xI DT DELAY 10 k 100msec x INTER DIGIT 15 k 20msec xI WINK 10 k 20rsec xI OP RATE 60 40 10pps xI SEZ DTC 3 k 20 msec xI RELEASE 7 k 20msec xI IASG TY DTMF v xI RING DTC 2 k 100msec x RING STOP 60 k 100msec x COLLECT DIGIT b xI STORE TIME 15 k 1sec Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 4 8 1 T1 CO Line Attributes North American T1 standards require that the T1 terminating device in this case the iPECS system include various adjustable timers and counters as described below Table 3 5 4 8 1 T1 LINE ATTRIBUTES
298. Relay Group 7 N Relay Group 8 I Relay Group 9 I Relay Group 10 Relay Group 11 I Relay Group 12 M Relay Group 13 W Relay Group 14 Device Zone Number P436 Device Zone Attr P437 Force To RTP Relay Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 12 5 1 Zone RTP Packet Relay Groups While it is strongly recommended that a Zone only have a single RTP Relay Group up to 15 Groups can be assigned to a Zone Devices in an RTP Relay Group should have common requirements for packet relay use In some situations it may be necessary to implement packet relay to groups in a Zone Note that when if Need is assigned as the RTP Relay Rule in the Zone Attributes assignments here are ignored 3 213 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Selecting the Inter Zone Attribute returns the data input page Figure 3 5 12 6 1 Enter the desired Source and Destination Zone number range and click Load to assign Zone characteristics iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DER File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 185 a_index htm Enter Source From Zone Number Lo Enter Destination To Zone Number Load Source Zone Range From 1 To 1 Destination Zone Range From 2 To 2 Uncheck All Attribute Value x Codec Type Not Assigned v RTP Relay Rule IF NEED v
299. Reserved Figure 3 2 2 1 User s Guide Internet 3 4 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 3 2 3 Station Program If the Station Program item is selected from the Home page the user receives the Station Program displays starting with the Station Program password Web page refer to Figure 3 2 3 1 Note that if a password is not assigned for the station the user will not be able to log in to the Station Program Web page For detailed descriptions refer to section 3 8 STATION PROGRAM f iPECS Station Program Microsoft Internet Explorer O File Edit Yiew Favorites Tools Help ay Address http 150 150 131 211 stationpwd htm BE Done Internet Figure 3 2 3 1 Station Password 3 2 4 Web Admin amp Maintenance If the Admin amp Maintenance item is selected from the Home page the user receives the Admin amp Maintenance displays For detailed descriptions refer to section 3 4 3 5 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 3 3 WEB ADMIN DATA MODIFICATION amp ACCESS 3 3 1 Web Admin Data Modification Each of the system s data entry Web pages includes a frame for data display and modification To modify data click in the data field either a drop down menu will appear for entry selection or a cursor will appear in the field and the user may type in the data required Once all new data for a Web page has been entered the SAVE button must be clicked to s
300. S Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 PICK UP 625 AUTO PICKUP 1 ON 0 OFF OFF If a Pick Up Group member is ringing another member of the Pick Up Group can Pick Up a call ringing at another member by simply going off hook 0 OFF 1 ON OFF 2 PICK UP 625 ALL RING 1 ON 0 OFF OFF When a call is offered to a member of the Pick Up Group in the Tone Ring mode all members will ring Note Auto Pickup Button 1 must be ON 0 OFF 1 ON OFF Table 2 3 7 2 6 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTES PGM 191 VSF VMIM VM GROUP Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 VSF VM 626 TIME SET 1d 001 365 365 When voice messages are stored in the VSF the system will maintain store the message for the maximum number of days set in this program 1 to 365 days Not used currently 001 365 day 365 2 VSF VM 626 TIME OUT 1s 00 15 15 This timer determines the inter digit time employed during a VSF VM session If this timer expires while the VSF VM is awaiting user input the system will assume the remote party has disconnected and will return the channel to idle 00 15 seconds Table 2 3 7 2 7 STATION GROUP ATTRIBUTES PGM 191 FEATURE SERVER VM GROUP Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY 1 FS VM 624 ANNC 1 TMR 1s 000 999 015
301. S connected to an accessible LAN iPECS password Maint Admin User if any is known MS Explore 5 5 is recommended Windows PC at least 32MB RAM 64MB or more RAM is recommended NIC Network Interface Card IEEE 802 3 10 100 Base T Static DHCP addressing Firewall requires Network Administrator to allow access Remote access requires a routable public private IP address for the iPECS system Web server This must be assigned to the system prior to access Web browsers may store cache a copy of the iPECS Web pages in a cache memory The Web browser may use these copies to provide a quick view If the Web page has been altered by data entered in Station Admin or a file upgrade the cached copy will be out of date and could cause unexpected system operation To assure proper page views and data entry the browser can be set to eliminate the use of the cached pages Run MS Internet Explore 5 5 in your PC and click Tools Click Internet Options 3 1 irec s Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Internet Options pe ea Cer eC Figure 3 1 3 1 MS Internet Explore Options General Menu Click Settings in Temporary Internet files Settings a Figure 3 1 3 2 MS Internet Explore Settings Menu Check Every visit to the page and click OK 3 2 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 3 2 WEB HOME PAGE 3 2 1 Browser Access During initialization a default databa
302. SP 9 20 digits 001 002 DN NUMBER Initializing terminals are required to store a 7 digit DN in order to perform the compatibility checking procedures that are part of call termination 20 digits 001 002 EKTS MODE 1 EKTS 0 NONE EKTS The EKTS Electronic Key Telephone Service terminal permits a user to operate those features that are specific to EKTS as well as voice features that may function distinctly in the EKTS environment EKTS allows a DN to be shared by more than one terminal on the same or on different interfaces 2 55 1 EKTS 0 None EKTS im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 5 001 002 TYPE 7_8 0 5 ISDN CALLED NO is made with the 0 Unknown 0 UNKNOWN 0 International format National format 1 International Network format Subscriber format or 2 National Abbreviated format when user dials less 3 Network than 10 digits 4 Subscriber 5 Abbreviated 6 001 002 TYPE FOR 10 11 ISDN CALLED NO is constructed with the 0 Unknown 0 UNKNOWN 0 International format National format 1 International Network format Subscriber format or 2 National Abbreviated format when user the dials 3 Network more than 10 digits 4 Subscriber 5 Abbreviated 2 3 5 8 ISDN CO Line Attributes PGM Code 151 ISDN standards require tha
303. STN Numbering Plan Code means any digits can be inserted between 0 9 The digits followed by is a internal station number 16 digits Numbering Plan CO Group 00 means an internal net station number 00 24 CPN Information Flex 1 ISDN CPN INFORMATION Flex 2 FLEX BTN 1 4 16 digits 1 00 CPN INFORMATION 01 2 00 CPN INFORMATION 02 3 00 CPN INFORMATION 03 4 00 CPN INFORMATION 04 Alt Speed Bin Alternative Dial Number System SPD Bin when the 200 999 networking path has a fatal problem or 2000 4999 MFIM E IP Address IP Address of destination MFIM E system only when 0 0 0 0 iPECS systems are configured for Voice Networking MFIM E Port Port Number of destination system for Networking 0000 9999 5588 3 189 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance 3 190 Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Digit Repeat When the number plan code see above is for PSTN Yes No call or transit call this number code can be enveloped in No SETUP message or not whether if this field is set or not Net PSTN Enblock Choose Transit out Public Line as Enblock or Over Yes No lap No CO Attendant Code CLI Determine whether if Centralized ATD CLI is sent or not On Off when slave system makes transit call Off Firewall Routing Select IP address Firewall IP address or Non firewall IP On ON address Off If the destination system VOIM is in same VPN then Non firewall
304. Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm TT et iPECSVDS6M E 0Ap APRIOS Boot Version 1 0Ah JAN OT Net Basic Attributes P320 Net CO Line Attnbutes P322 Net Numbering Plan Net Feature Code Tab Attribute Net Transfer Mode TCP Port For BLF ili 9500 UDP Port For BLF 9501 BLF Manager IP Address Duration of BLF State Multicast IP Address Net Trans RCL Timer REROUT v 9500 9999 9500 9999 01 99 100msec 001 200 sec Net Reroute CO Group BLF Service Usage Copyright C 2006 hy LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Issue 5 0 Internet Figure 3 5 9 2 1 Network Supplementary Attributes Table 3 5 9 2 1 NETWORK SUPPLEMENTARY ATTRIBUTES ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Net Transfer Mode Select type for Transfer and Call forward 1 RERT RERT Rerouting or Join O JOIN TCP Port for BIf TCP port for sending BLF message to BLF Manager 0000 9999 9500 UDP Port for BIf UDP port for sending BLF message to BLF Manager 0000 9999 9501 Bif Manager IP IP Address of BLF Server used only when iPECS is 0 0 0 0 configured with LDK systems for Voice Networking Duration of BLF Status Duration of BLF status message sending to BLF 01 99 10 Server 100 msec Multicast IP IP address of
305. T PTT 1 RTP and RTOP ports for PTT group 1 0000 9999 nea PTT 2 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 2 0000 9999 a PTT 3 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 3 0000 9999 ah PTT 4 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 4 0000 9999 TA PTT 5 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 5 0000 9999 T 8145 3 90 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT PTT 6 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 6 0000 9999 8146 8147 PTT 7 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 7 0000 9999 8148 8149 PTT 8 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 8 0000 9999 8150 8151 PTT 9 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 9 0000 9999 8152 8153 PTT All RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group ALL 0000 9999 8154 8155 BGM Internal VSF RTP and RTCP ports for VSF VMIM BGM 0000 9999 8206 8207 SLT MOH 1 RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH1 0000 9999 8208 8209 SLT MOH 2 RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH2 0000 9999 8210 8211 SLT MOH 3 RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH3 0000 9999 8212 8213 SLT MOH 4 RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH4 0000 9999 8214 8215 SLT MOH 5 RTP and RTOP ports for SLT MOH5 0000 9999 8216 8217 Table 3 5 5 5 2 MULTI CAST RTP RTCP MFIM300 amp MFIM600 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Internal BGM RTP amp RTCP ports RTP and RTCP ports for internal BGM 0000 9999 8100 8101 External BGM port 1 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for external BGM 1 0000 9999
306. T announcements for the group ICM Tenancy Group Assigns stations to an ICM Tenancy Group 1 15 1 Call Time Tone A tone can be sent periodically indicating the elapsed ON OFF time of an outgoing CO IP call The Elapsed Call OFF Timer see System Timers section 3 5 5 20 determines the period between tones Automatic Hold Enables Auto Hold for the station With Auto Hold ON Atd ON enabled the system will place an active external call OFF Others OFF on hold if the user presses a CO IP or DSS button Call Time Restriction All outgoing calls will disconnect at expiration of the ON OFF Call Restrict Timer see System Timers section OFF 3 5 5 20 Individual CO Access Permits stations to use dial codes to access ENABLE Enable individual CO Lines DISABLE CO IP Line Queuing Permits the station to queue for the next available ENABLE Enable Line when an All Lines Busy signal is received DISABLE 3 28 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT CO PGM A station can be permitted to change the CO line ENABLE Disable numbers ports associated with a CO Line button DISABLE Ringing Line Preference Enables Ringing Line Preference for the station ENABLE Enable Calls that ring the telephone are answered by going DISABLE off hook Speed Dial Access Allows the station to access System Speed Dial bins ENABLE Enable DISABLE UCD Group Service
307. T303 01 10 04 1 second increments 8 T305 10 60 30 1 second increments 9 T308 01 10 04 1 second increments 10 T309 001 100 090 1 second increments 11 T310 10 60 40 1 second increments 12 N200 1 5 3 13 N201 250 300 260 bytes 14 N202 1 5 3 D 11 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Button SUB MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 15 N204 1 5 1 16 K Value Ie 1 PGM Code 152 T1 Line Attributes 1 Pause Time 1 9 2 1 sec increments 2 Release Guard Time 01 60 20 100 msec increments 3 Dial Tone Delay Time 02 50 10 100 msec increments 4 Inter Digit Time 15 30 15 20 msec increments 5 Wink Time 07 15 10 20 msec increments 6 Pulse Rate 0 3 0 0 60 40 10pps 1 66 33 10pps 2 60 40 20pps 3 66 33 20pps 7 Seize DTC Time 000 127 003 20 msec increments 8 Release Time 000 127 007 20 msec increments 9 Address Signaling 1 DTMF 0 Pulse 1 DTMF 10 Ring Start Time 2 9 2 100 msec increments 11 Ring Stop Time 10 60 60 100 msec increments 12 Collect Digit 1 6 3 13 Digit Store Time 01 15 15 1 sec increments PGM Code 153 DCOB CO Line Attributes 1 Line Status 1 9 6 2 DNIS Service 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 3 Number of CLI Digits 01 15 10 4 DCOB Type 0 2 2 5 Call Category 1 9 1 TABLE D 6 SYSTEM DATA Button SUB MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK PGM Code 160 System Attributes 1 Attendant Call Queuing Ring Back 1 RBT 0 MOH MOH Tone 2 Camp on MOH Ring Back Tone 1 RBT 0 MOH MOH 3 CO Dial Tone Detect 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 4 CO Line Choice 0 2 Last 0 Round Robin
308. TCP P165 DISA COS P166 DID DISA Destination P 167 Extemal Control Contacts P163 LCD Display Mode P169 LED Flashing Rate P170 Music Sources P171 PBX Access Codes P172 RLP Prionity P173 RS 232 Port Settings P174 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 5 3 1 Alarm Attributes The system can monitor an external contact This contact is most often employed as an Alarm indicator or Doorbell The Alarm attributes define the operation of the external contact For the Alarm the signal to assigned stations can be repeating or a single burst the former is often desired For the Doorbell a single tone is sent each time the contact activates Refer to Table 3 5 5 3 1 for a description of the features and the data entries required for each attribute Table 3 5 5 3 1 ALARM ATTRIBUTES ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Alarm Enable This entry enables disables the contact monitoring ON OFF circuitry OFF Alarm Contact Type This parameter establishes the contact state that will Close Close activate the Alarm close or open Open Alarm Mode The contact can be treated to function as a doorbell or an Alarm Alarm alarm Door Bell Alarm Signal Mode The assigned stations will receive a Repeating signal or Repeat Repeat single burst Once of alarm tone Once 3 86 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 164 Selecting Attendant A
309. TCP ports for Internal Page 6 0000 9999 a ie Internal Page 7 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 7 0000 9999 a T Internal Page 8 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 8 0000 9999 TI Internal Page 9 RTP and RTOP ports for Internal Page 9 0000 9999 oe Internal Page 10 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 10 0000 9999 T Internal All Page RTP and RTOP ports for Internal All Call Page 0000 9999 aia Page All RTP and RTOP ports for All Call Page 0000 9999 T PTT 1 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 1 0000 9999 en 8137 PTT 2 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 2 0000 9999 8138 PTT 3 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 3 0000 9999 TI PTT 4 RTP and RTOP ports for PTT group 4 0000 9999 o PTT 5 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 5 0000 9999 a 8145 PTT 6 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 6 0000 9999 8146 PTT 7 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 7 0000 9999 rare PTT 8 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 8 0000 9999 ee PTT 9 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 9 0000 9999 T PTT All RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group ALL 0000 9999 T BGM Internal VSF RTP and RTOP ports for VSF VMIM BGM 0000 9999 or SLT MOH 1 RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH1 0000 9999 ae SLT MOH 2 RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH2 0000 9999 Por 8211 3 89 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT SLT MOH 3 RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH3 0000 999
310. TOLL RESTRICTIONS PGM 116 CO COS 1 CO COS 2 CO COS 3 CO COS 4 CO COS 5 STA No Restriction No Restriction No Restriction Only Local Call LD No Restriction cos 1 code counter and Table C STA Exception Table A Exception Table A No Restriction Only Local Call LD No Restriction COS 2 governs the dialing governs the dialing code counter and Table C STA Exception Table B No Restriction Exception Table B Only Local Call LD No Restriction COS 3 governs the dialing governs the dialing code counter and Table C STA Exception Table A amp B Exception Table A Exception Table B Only Local Call LD No Restriction COS 4 governs the dialing governs the dialing governs the dialing code counter and Table C STA Local Call only LD Local Call only LD Local Call only LD Only Local Call LD No Restriction COS5 Code 1 or 0 and Code 1 or O and Code 1 or 0 code counter and Table C Table C and Table C Table C STA Only Local Call LD Only Local Call LD Only Local Call Only Local Call LD No Restriction COS 6 code counter and code counter and LD code counter code counter and Table C Table C and Table C Table C STA In house dialing only In house dialing only In house dialing In house dialing only In house dialing COS7 only only STA Exception Table D Exception Table D No Restriction Only Local Call LD No Restriction COS 8 governs the dialing governs the dialing cod
311. Table C 6 The leading digits dialed cannot be a Long Distance code amp digit count cannot exceed the LD digit counter default 7 digits and further denied allowed based on Exception Table C 7 Intercom and paging calls are allowed No outgoing dialing except for emergency calls is allowed on CO Lines 8 The assignments in the Exception Table D are monitored for allow and deny numbers 9 The assignments in the Exception Table E are monitored for allow and deny numbers 10 The assignments in the Exception Table D amp E are monitored for allow and deny numbers 11 The assignments in the Exception Table A amp B and D amp E are monitored for allow and deny numbers Table 3 5 2 5 2 STATION CO COS CO COS 1 CO COS 2 CO COS 3 CO COS 4 CO COS 5 STA No Restriction No Restriction No Restriction Only Local Call LD No Restriction COS 1 code counter and Table C STA Exception Table A Exception Table A No Restriction Only Local Call LD No Restriction COS 2 governs the dialing governs the dialing code counter and Table C STA Exception Table B No Restriction Exception Table B Only Local Call LD No Restriction COS 3 governs the dialing governs the dialing code counter and Table C STA Exception Table Exception Table A Exception Table B Only Local Call LD No Restriction COS 4 A amp B governs the governs the dialing governs the dialing code counter and dialing Table C STA Local Call only LD Local Call only LD Local Call only
312. This entry defines the Digit Modification Table index Must be 6 00 99 for each Time Zone for Day Zone 2 The digits appropriate index will be selected for the current Day 3 DMT and Time Zone One entry DMT index is made for indices each Time Zone six 6 digits DMT3 This entry defines the Digit Modification Table index Must be 6 00 99 for each Time Zone for Day Zone 3 The digits appropriate index will be selected for the current Day 3 DMT and Time Zone One entry DMT index is made for indices 3 164 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 222 Selecting LCR DMT Digit Modification Table will display the LCR DMT data entry page Figure 3 5 8 3 1 Select the DMT Table Index range blue text above the table header desired Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help S amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm iPECS VD96N E 0Ap APRIOS Boot Version 1 0Ah JAN OT 0 24 25 49 50 74 75 99 MAX 25 Digits Include and following Add Digits characters D Tone Detect P Pause F Billing STN Removal Position 01 12 Nureber of digits to be removed Add Position 01 13 COMP Group 01 73 Altemative DMT Index 00 99 MAX 25 Digits LCR Control Attribute P220 a Include and following pis vant Add Digits characters LCR LDT P221 D Tone Detect P Pause F Billing STN 00 12
313. Timed Ring mode for each index 001 to 250 in this table When assigned to ring to a VSF VMIM announcement the call can be automatically Enter Table Index 1 250 Table Index 1 Attribute Station Delay Value Station Range Value Range Delay 100 0 C Hunt Group C WSF Announcement Auto Drop C AA Ring Time C Net Number N Station Range ____ Delay C Hunt Group C VSF Announcement Auto Drop D C AA Ring Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Figure 3 5 7 5 1 ICLID Ring Assignment Table Internet dropped after the announcement by entering after the announcement number When CO Lines are programmed to Ring an external AA VM VSF or Feature Server Group as an Automated Attendant the Ring signal can be on an immediate or delayed basis allowing other stations groups to be assigned Ring and answer prior to signaling the AA The delay is defined in seconds from 00 to 30 3 158 Separate ring im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 205 Selecting PPP Attributes will display the PPP Attributes data entry page Figure 3 5 7 6 1 E iPECS Web Services Windows Internet Explorer 6 C gt E htp 192 168 123 57 a index htm we de iPECS Web Services Ts SLAVE
314. UTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT All Call Page RTP amp RTCP ports RTP and RTCP ports for All Call Page 0000 9999 8184 PTT 1 RTP amp RTCP ports RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 1 0000 9999 a PTT 2 RTP amp RTOP ports RTP and RTOP ports for PTT group 2 0000 9999 Ti PTT 3 RTP amp RTCP ports RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 3 0000 9999 oa PTT 4 RTP amp RTCP ports RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 4 0000 9999 T PTT 5 RTP amp RTCP ports RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 5 0000 9999 non PTT 6 RTP amp RTCP ports RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 6 0000 9999 re PTT 7 RTP amp RTCP ports RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 7 0000 9999 T PTT 8 RTP amp RTCP ports RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 8 0000 9999 T PTT 9 RTP amp RTCP ports RTP and RTOP ports for PTT group 9 0000 9999 Te PTT All RTP amp RTCP ports RTP and RTOP ports for PTT group ALL 0000 9999 ee BGM Internal VSF RTP and RTCP ports for VSF VMIM BGM 0000 9999 eae SLT MOH 1 RTP and RTOP ports for SLT MOH1 0000 9999 an SLT MOH 2 RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH2 0000 9999 E SLT MOH 3 RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH3 0000 9999 e SLT MOH 4 RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH4 0000 9999 ar SLT MOH 5 RTP and RTOP ports for SLT MOH5 0000 9999 a 8217 Table 3 5 5 5 4 MULTI CAST RTP RTCP MFIM1200 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Internal BGM RTP amp RTCP ports RTP and RTOP ports for internal BGM 0000 9999 8100 External BGM port 1 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTOP ports for external BGM 1 0000 9
315. Up Timer 002 999 002 1 second increments 10 Report No Member 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 11 Music Source 0 3 1 12 ACD Warning Tone 1 ON 0 OFF ON 13 Alternate Destination Station Group Speed 14 Supervisor Timer 000 999 030 1 second increments 15 Supervisor Call Count 00 99 00 16 WAIT IF 1ST ANNC BUSY 1 ON 0 OFF ON 17 Maximum Queued Call Counter 00 99 99 18 Supervisors Station Max 5 station can be supervisors 19 UCD ACD Station Priority 0 9 0 20 ACD DND Wrap up Timer 002 200 010 1 second increments 21 ACD ICLID Usage 1 ON 0 OFF OFF When guaranteed announcement is used 22 ACD Group Name 12 Character 23 ACD CIQ Route Flex 1 10 Flex 10 when caller dial 0 Flex 1 9 caller digit 1 9 Ex When Flex 1 is pressed 1 Station Number 2 Hunt Group Number 3 System Speed Number 4 Network Station Number 24 ACD Sub Attribute Flex 1 20 24 1 Zap Tone 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 24 2 Mailbox Message Wait Station Station Number None 24 3 Mailbox Password 12 digits None 24 4 Call In Queue Display 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 24 5 Call In Queue Display Timer 008 300 030 1 second increments D 19 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button SUB MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 24 6 Callin Queue 1 Threshold 00 99 10 24 7 Call In Queue 1 Announcement 00 70 Location 24 8 Call In Queue 1 Page zone 00 15 00 MFIM amp 100 00 15 00 40 Other MFIM 00 40 24 9 Call In Queue 1 Announcement Delay 000 180 015 1 second increments Timer 24 10 Call In Qu
316. VT GS71Qxxxx rom xxxx indicates the version 3 236 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 PRIM application image for STG EU71Qxxxx rom xxxx indicates the version MS CPU T1PRI application image for UVT GS95Qxxxx rom xxxx indicates the version PRIM application image for STG EU95Qxxxx rom xxxx indicates the version PRIM R2 application image DX95Qxxxx rom xxxx indicates the version T2 T2U CPU SLTM2 application image GS71Sxxxx rom xxxx indicates the version MS CPU SLTM8 application image GS95Sxxxx rom xxxx indicates the version SLTM32 application image EU96Sxxxx rom xxxx indicates the version T2 T2U CPU LGCM4 application image GS71Lxxxx rom xxxx indicates the version MS CPU LGCM68 application image GS95Lxxxx rom xxxx indicates the version T2 T2U CPU DIDM2 application image GS71Ixxxx rom xxxx indicates the version MS CPU DIDMB8 application image GS95Ixxxx rom xxxx indicates the version S2500 CPU VOIME application image GS71Txxxx rom xxxx indicates the version MS CPU VOIM8 application image GS95O0xxxx rom xxxx indicates the version VOIM24 application image GS96Oxxxx rom xxxx indicates the version MS CPU DTIM application image 3 237 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 GS95Kxxxx rom xxxx indicates the version MS CPU VMIMB8 application image GS95Vxxxx rom xxxx indicates the version MS CPU MCIM24
317. VoIP channels are assigned to perform the packet relay function and the use can be defined as if needed or use the assigned RTP Relay Group For if Need the MFIM will employ the IP KTS STUN protocol to determine when packet relay is required If assigned RTP Relay Group packet relay will always be employed for RTP packet receipt Table 3 5 12 4 1 ZONE ATTRIBUTES ATTRIBUTE REMARK RANGE DEFAULT Nation Code Nation code of devices in the zone Available selections Country code MFIM are given in Table 2 3 1 2 Language Code Language code of devices in the zone Language Code Nation dependent 3 211 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Codec Type Assigns the codec employed by devices in the Zone G 711 System G 723 1 codec G 729 System codec RTP Relay Rule Assigns when to use the packet relay function with If If needed If needed Need the MFIM will automatically determines when to RTP Relay Group use packet relay while RTP Relay Group will always implement packet relay for RTP packets 1 RTP Relay GW Assigns the local MFIM VoIP or VOIM IP channels that Sequence Slot Seq will be used to implement packet relay for devices in the Number Zone 2 4 RTP Relay GW Back up VoIP channels for RTP packet relay use in the Sequence Slot Seq Zone Number VSF VMIM GW Slot Assigns the VSF VMIM used to support Voice Mail for Sequence Seq devices in th
318. WD Pre MSG 559 SLT 18 CO System Hold 560 SLT 19 Programming Mode Enter Code 561 SLT 20 Attendant Unavailable 562 21 Alarm Reset 565 22 Group Call Pickup 566 23 Universal Night Answer 567 24 Account Code 568 PGM Code 107 Flexible Numbering Plan part B Base 1 1 Walking COS Code 569 2 ACD Agent On Off Duty 571 3 ACD UCD Supervisor Login 572 4 ACD UCD Supervisor Logout 573 5 ACD UCD Help Code 574 6 ACD UCD Calls In Queue Display 575 7 ACD UCD Supervisor Status Display 576 8 ACD Supervisor Monitor 577 9 ACD Reroute Queued Call w answer 578 10 ACD Reroute Queued Call w o answer 579 11 Camp On Answer 600 12 Call Park Locations MFIM amp 601 610 100 601 619 Other MFIMs 13 Group Pilot Number MFIM amp 620 659 100 620 667 Other MFIMs D 3 i S CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 PGM Code 108 Flexible Numbering Plan part C Base 1 PGM Code 109 Flexible Numbering Plan part D Base 1 TABLE D 3 STATION DATA PGM Code 110 Station Type im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button SUB MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 Station Type MFIM 1 6 Other MFIMs 01 12 2 DSS DLS MAP Station PGM Code 111 Station Attributes 1 Auto Speaker Selection 1 ON 0 OFF ON 2 Call Forward 1 ON 0 OFF ON 3 DND 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 4 Data Line Security 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 5 Howler Tone 1 ON 0 OFF O
319. When a CO call is transferred to a busy 1 RBT RBT 1 RBT 0 MOH RBT extension Ring Back Tone or Music On Hold 0 MOH will be played to the CO Line 2 61 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance 000 255 030 determines the interval at which voice samples are packetized and sent when the G 723 1 codec is used Issue 5 0 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 21 CONF WARN TONE As new members join a conference room the 0 OFF ON 1 0N 0 0FF OFF system provides warning tone to conference 1 ON members 22 TLS for WEB Enables Transport Layer Security TLS for 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 0FF OFF Web access 1 ON 23 DUMMY DIAL TONE When a CO IP line does not provide dial tone 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 0FF OFF the system can provide dummy dial tone to the 1 ON user 24 SIP STA MODE SIP phones may set up a point to point RTP 0 RTD RTD 1 PTP O RTD RTD connection PTP or to assure a controlled 1 PTP connection RTP can be routed via a VoIP channel RTD Table 2 3 6 1 2 SYSTEM ATTRIBUTES II PGM 161 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 OFF HOOK RING TYPE Off hook ring can be a single tone burst or 0 BURST MUTE 1 MUTE 0 BURST MUTE
320. Y Table 2 3 6 1 1 SYSTEM ATTRIBUTES I PGM 160 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 ATD CALL QUE RB TONE When calling a busy attendant the system will 1 RB tone MOH 1 RBT 0 MOH MOH provide either ring back tone or MOH If MOH 0 MOH is selected the source must be defined in PGM CODE 171 2 CAMP ON RBT MOH When Camp On is used the calling station will 1 RB tone MOH 1 RBT 0 MOH MOH receive either ring back tone or MOH If MOH 0 MOH is selected the source must be defined in PGM CODE 171 3 CO DIAL TONE DETECT The system can use dial tone detection or a 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 OFF OFF timed pause for Speed Dial numbers that 1 ON contain a Pause 4 CO LINE CHOICE CO Lines are selected by the system from 1 LAST LAST 0 RR 1 LAST 2 FIRST 0 groups using either the LAST used ROUND 0 ROUND robin method or FIRST line in the group 2 FIRST 5 DISA RETRY COUNT A DISA user is allowed to retry erroneous 1 9 3 9 ies authentication code entries This entry sets the number of retries before the system disconnects 6 EXTERNAL NIGHT RING CO IP calls which are assigned UNA can 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 OFF OFF activate the Loud Bell Contact An incoming 1 ON call received while in Night will activate the contact 7 HOLD PREFERENCE A single depression of the HOLD button 1 System SYS 1 SYS 0 EXC
321. a system speed bin Dial 4 Enter a network station number 24 ACD 622 ADDED ATTR To select an ACD group Added FLEX 1 FLEX PRESS FLEX KEY 01 23 Attribute press flex btn 24 then select 23 2 100 im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance CIQ 1 THRESHOLD 00 99 10 threshold the system plays the CIQ 1 Announcement btn 7 below to the CIQ 1 Page Zone btn 8 below after the CIQ 1 Announcement Delay Timer btn 9 below Announcements are repeated at intervals of the CIQ 1 Announcement Issue 5 0 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 24 1 ZAP TONE Agents using a headset can have ACD 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 0FF OFF calls connected to them automatically 1 ON preceded by a tone Zap tone 24 2 MAILBOX MSG WAIT STN When an ACD call overflows or routes to Station one the VM group a station number is used to identify the Mailbox for the ACD group messages 24 3 MAILBOX PASSWORD The password associated with an ACD 12 digits eae group Mailbox is defined here The password is used in conjunction with the ACD group as with a normal station 24 4 CIQ AGENT DISPLAY When an ACD call is in queue the Call in 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 0FF OFF queue information can be displayed on 1 ON LCD of agent and supervisor telephones 24 5 FORCED FWD DEST USAGE Enables the system to redirect group calls 0 O
322. ability 4 DST Start Time Web Only DST Table format 5 DST End Time Web Only DST Table format PGM Code 179 Multi Language Support 1 1 language 1 ON 0 OFF ON 2 2 Language 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 3 3 Language 1 ON 0 OFF OFF PGM Code 180 System Timers 1 ATD Recall Timer 00 60 30 1 min increments 2 Call Park Timer 000 600 120 1 sec increments 3 Camp On Recall Timer 000 200 030 1 sec increments 4 Exclusive Hold Recall Timer 000 300 060 1 sec increments 5 l Hold Recall Timer 000 300 030 1 sec increments 6 System Hold Recall Timer 000 300 030 1 sec increments D 16 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button SUB MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 7 Transfer Recall Timer 000 300 030 1 sec increments 8 ACNR Delay Timer 000 300 030 1 sec increments 9 ACNR Pause Timer 030 300 030 1 sec increments 10 ACNR Retry Counter Icis 3 11 ACNR Tone Detect Timer 001 300 030 1 sec increments 12 Automatic CO Release Timer 000 300 030 1 sec increments 13 CCR Inter digit Timer 000 300 030 100 msec increments 14 CO Restrict Timer 00 99 00 1 minute increments 15 CO Dial Delay Timer 00 99 01 100 msec increments 16 CO Release Guard Timer 010 150 020 100 msec increments 17 CO Ring Off Timer 010 150 060 100 msec increments 18 CO Ring On Timer 1 9 2 100 msec increments 19 CO Elapsed Call Timer 060 900 180 1 sec increments 20 Web Password Guard Timer 001 999 005 1 min increments PGM Code 181 System Timers II 1 Call Fwd No Answer Timer 000 600
323. able 3 5 2 3 1 STATION ISDN ATTRIBUTES ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT CLIP Display CLIP Calling Line Identification Presentation an ISDN ON ON service sends the number of the calling party to the OFF system in the call SETUP message If enabled here the number will be shown in the iPECS Phone LCD COLP Display COLP Connected Line Id Presentation an ISDN service ON OFF sends the number of the answering party to the system in OFF the call CONNECT message If enabled here the number will be shown in the iPECS Phone LCD Progress Indication When employing a non ISDN terminal specifically a ON OFF modem or analog FAX the ISDN call SETUP message OFF must include this message and the Progress Indication parameter should be set to ON CLIR Service CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction an ISDN ON OFF service removes calling party Id sent from the ISDN to the OFF called party with a RESTRICT instruction in the SETUP message If enabled here the system will send the RESTRICT instruction to the PSTN when an outgoing ISDN call is placed COLR Service COLR Connected Line Id Restriction an ISDN service ON OFF removes connected party Id sent from the ISDN to the OFF calling party with a RESTRICT instruction in the CONNECT message If enabled here the system will send the restrict instruction to the PSTN when the station answers an ISDN call CLI Station Number When not restricted and entry of 00 in the CLIP CLOP 4 dig
324. able will display the Tnet Fail over to PSTN page Figure 3 5 11 4 1 Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help a http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm E Log Out Save Enable FoPSTN OFF Initialize FoPSTN J 0 49 50 99 100 149 150 199 Index Numbering Plan CO Group Tel Number Tnet Basic Attributes P330 Tnet CM attnbutes P331 Tnet LM attributes P332 Tnet Control Contact P334 Tnet Music Alann P335 336 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Lid All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 11 4 1 Fail Over to PSTN Table The Fail over function allows the systems in a Centralized Control network TNET environment to complete calls from system to system over a PSTN analog or digital line should the WAN connection to the CM fail A CO gateway Module must be registered to the LM for local control and access CO services Users may call others in the normal manner and the call is routed over CO facilities to the remote CM When calls are directed to a DID line at the receiving system the system will select a line from the assigned CO Group and dial the Tel Number with the station number dialed as the trailing digits Table 3 5 11 4 1 FAIL OVER TO PSTN ATTRIBUTES
325. ae aia a a Eaa se ee 3 111 3 5 5 18 System Date amp Tih secccesccccsccccccceceecesnaeeseneeecenessnaeceeneeceeesessaesgeaeecseneeseanssseaeessensessanstes 3 114 3 5 5 19 System Multi Language 12 cccccceceecceeneeeceeeeeceeeesaaececaeeceueeesaesseeeeeceueeesaeseeneecenntessaneees 3 116 3 5 9 20 System TIMES i ciiecieis ceases onosszeen connse cdetanthascandi deeodhsvarssnuascvnechetalepeaasyhiuseasiiaedashavesetesde 3 117 B 5 5 21 IN ROOM INGICATION 0 2 eesececeessececcesnsececsenececsenuececsesaececseaaececsesaeseceseaaesecsesaesessetietessenetees 3 121 3 5 5 22 Web Access AUthOrizatiOn 2 ccccccccecccsececseneeeceneeesasececaeeceeeessaesseneeceeneeseansteaeeseeeseseaneees 3 122 3 5 5 23 Hot Desk AttriDUtes 2 cccccccccecnceceeeeesnaecseneeceueeessaaecseneeceaneessaesseneecseneesennsssnaseneneeeteanens 3 123 3 5 5 24 System Speed Dial cccesccccsccccccceceeeeesnsecsencececesssnaeseeeeeceeeeessaesseaeecseneesenssaaaeeesensesensees 3 125 3 5 5 25 CUStOM MCSSAGCS 4 12ccccceccceceneeesnsecseneeeceneessnaecaaaeeceneessaessaaeeseeeeesennsesaasseeneessnenessansses 3 126 35 95 26 NTP AUDULCS ea sth reste aaa a e aa aaa a Ea aaa a P ag heeded aden eee 3 127 3 5 9 27 SNMP Affrib l etiese e aiaiai a a e a a aA Eai a aT 3 128 2 5 5 28 Cabinet AliniDUt S vicssssesccssisstazeassonsscehtadsvesitacerastsadnevetstasvedethasocdatsddvecdhhenveistiadevsihinedsesstaii 3 130 3 5 5 29 System Call ROUtNG vice fii ek aii ee dais i aiana a a a e
326. al pad to enter the desired value for the selected Attribute refer to Table 2 3 5 4 1 Press the SAVE button to store the data entry Table 2 3 5 4 1 DID LINE ATTRIBUTES PGM 145 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 01 02 SIGNAL TYPE 1 3 Assigns the type of DID start signaling 1 Immediate Wink 1 3 WINK 2 Immediate Wink or Delayed 2 Wink 3 Delayed 2 52 im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 2 01 02 DID CONV TYPE The received DID digits can be treated to 0 Convert 0 0 2 0 determine call routing simple conversion 1 Use as is PGM CODE 230 use as is no treatment 2 Look up or modify using look up Table PGM CODE 231 3 01 02 DID DGT RCV NO Number of digits expected from the PSTN 2 4 3 3 2 4 DID circuit 4 DID digit modification sequence deletes 0 9 01 02 DID DGT MASK kkkk the digit accepts the digit as is a digit 0 9 replaces the digit The modification is based on the position of the digit 1 4 in the received number 2 3 5 5 DISA Service Attributes PGM Code 146 DISA Service can be enabled on CO lines based on the system operation mode Day Night and Timed DISA calls may be routed to dial tone and await user dialing simple routing or th
327. aled digits match 0 OFF 1 0N 0 OFF OFF the LDT table digits the system will send 1 ON second dial tone to request the user input a valid Authorization code 2 115 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Using the index determined from the analysis of the LCR Leading Digits Table PGM CODE 221 the dialed number is modified in accordance with the Digit Modification Table and sent over the CO IP group assigned for the index Digits of the dialed number can be deleted based on the Removal Position RP and Number of Remove digits NR and a digit stream can be inserted in the resulting number Counting from the first dialed digit the Removal Position defines the location of the digit where removal begins and NR defines the number of digits to remove The Add Digit Stream is then inserted in the resulting number at the digit position assigned by the Add Position entry The resulting number is then dialed over the CO IP path assigned If the assigned path is not available the Alternate DMT index is used to determine the number and CO IP path to be used Table 2 3 9 1 3 1 provides the displays descriptions and entry ranges for the Digit Modification Table DMT TABLE ENTER DMT BIN 00 99 Table 2 3 9 1 3 1 LCR DIGIT MODIFICATION PGM 222 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 DMT 55 ADDED DGT This entry defines the digit stream to insert in 25 digits ye peers the number
328. amp or 001 500 for other MFIMs PRESS FLEX_KEY 1 3 Press the Flex button for the desired MSN Table entry refer to Table 2 3 8 3 1 Refer to Table 2 3 8 3 1 DISPLAY Use the dial pad to enter the desired Table data Press the SAVE button to store the Table data entry Table 2 3 8 3 1 MSN ATTRIBUTES PGM 202 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 MSN TABLE 121 CO RANGE CO Line number associated with the MSN iPECS Micro None iPECS 50 MFIM100 01 42 MFIM300 01 200 MFIM600 01 400 MFIM1200 01 600 2 MSN TABLE 121 Index to the Flexible DID Table PAM CODE 000 999 None INDEX 100 231 3 TABLE 121 TEL NUMBER Telephone Number called number 23 Digits None 2 109 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 The system can employ ICLID Incoming Calling Line Id to determine the routing of incoming external calls Each CO IP Line and ACD group may be assigned to employ ICLID routing The system will compare the received ICLID to entries in the ICLID Route Table and if a match is found will route the call to the destination indicated by the index bin number of PGM CODE 204 ICLID ROUTE TABLE ATT ENTER BIN NO 001 250 ICLID ROUTE TABLE 001 PRESS FLEX KEY 1 4 Refer to Table 2 3 8 4 1 DISPLAY Table 2 3 8 4 1 ICLID ROUTE INDEX PGM 203
329. and Dest Value is VM group 3 Scinario COS Scenario Start CO 0 Start Co line Scenario End CO 0 End Co line Scenario Group 0 Group Number 4 If you set Scenario Mode manually in attendant you set scenario group 3 132 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 IPECS VD96M E 0Ap APR 08 Boot Version 1 0Ah JAN O Web Administration LIK300 Version iPECS VD96M E 0Ap APR OS Station Group Overview Station Group Assignment P190 Station Group Attributes P191 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 6 1 Station Group Data Menu Stations can be grouped so that incoming calls will search hunt for an idle station in the group The system allows assignment of three hunt processes Circular Terminal and UCD In addition there are eight 8 functional groups available ACD Automatic Call Distribution based on UCD hunt Ring Call Pick Up External Voice Mail SLT connected VSF Voice Mail iPECS Feature Server Voice Mail and Network Voice Mail and UCS Groups The Station Group capacities for the iPECS systems are shown in below table CAPACITY ITEM iPECS Micro iPECS 50 MFIM100 Other MFIMs Number of Groups 12 40 40 48 Stations in a Group 26 50 70 70 Certain types of groups can incorporate announcements which are given to the calling party The system s VSF can store up to seventy 70
330. ange refer to section 3 5 1 3 System amp Device IP Address Plan and click Load to assign a Zone number for the device DOR iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm Attribute P439 Enter DevicelGW Slot Seq J C Device Gateway Sequence Slot Range From 1 To 1 Uncheck All Attribute Range x Remote Access Password Max 12 Digits lt Diff Serv CE Max 2 Digits xI Nation Code Korea v x Language Code Korean v lt CODEC Type FOLLOW ME ADM132 x RTP Relay Group RLY GRP 00 lt PAGE Area Group PAGE AREA 00 v x VSF MIM GW Slot Seq SSE Max 3 Digits x Select Default Multi Language UNKNOWN Prompt Remark Max 21 Chars Zone RTP Relay Group P440 Inter Zone Attribut xI L Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Done Internet a Figure 3 5 12 2 1 Device Zone Attributes Device Zone Attributes define characteristics specific to the device including the registration password DiffServ Code Point Nation etc In addition Zone characteristics set at the Device level take precedence over characteristics for the Zone Attributes While a Zone may incorporate up to 15 different RTP packet Relay
331. anish Korean Estonia Russian 3 100 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 170 Selecting LED Flashing Rate will display the data entry page Figure 3 5 5 10 1 Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help s amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm ea ee Td iPECSVD96M E 0Ap APR 08 Boot Version 1_0Ah JAN OF Attribute Value CO Incoming Ring Flash 30 IPM CO Transfer Ring COL Queue Ring Flash 240 IPM Flutter COL RCL Ring Flash 480 IPM Flutter COLI Hold Ring Flash 30 IPM Wink COL System Hold Ring Flash 60 IPM COL Exclusive Hold Ring Flash 120 IPM COL Outgoing Disabled Flash 240 IPM Flutter COL Incoming Offnet CFW Flash 240 IPM Flutter COL DISA Indication Flash 240 IPM stination P 167 COL Supplementary Call Waiting Flash 240 IPM Flutter External Control Contacts P 168 COL Supplementary Call Hold Flash 480 IPM LCD Display Mode P169 DSS CO Ring SSN aUIEM DSS All Ring Flash 60 IPM DSS Associated Ring Flash 120 IPM rac eal Mu PE 7 RLP Prionity P173 DSS In DND Flash 60 IPM EAEE NENEN EANA RS 232 Port Settings P174 DSS Lock Out Flash 480 IPM Flutter Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights
332. application image GS95Cxxxx rom xxxx indicates the version T2 T2U CPU LIP24 application image GS71Pxxxx rom xxxx indicates the version TI CPU LIP 70XXX application image GS36Pxxxx rom xxxx indicates the version LIP 8012 8024 8040L application image GS96Pxxxx rom xxxx indicates the version LIP 8004 application image GS95Pxxxx rom xxxx indicates the version 2 Select target appliances amp Upgrade application image 3 Wait until upgrade process completes 4 Automatically restart when upgrade completes successfully lt Upgrade of Voice Prompt to VSF for iPECS Micro IPECS 50 100 300 600 1200 gt 1 Access to iPECS Micro iPECS 50 100 300 600 VSF Prompt Upgrade page 2 Select First Second Third for multiple lanquage voice prompt 3 Upload the proper prompt file to iPECS Micro iPECS 50 100 300 600 1200 VSF prompt file 22 96Wxxxx rom Is nation i e GS DM KR etc xxxx indicates the version lt Upgrade of Voice Prompt to VMIM gt 1 Access to VMIM 2 Select First Second Third for multiple lanquage of voice prompt 3 Upload the proper prompt file to VMIM VMIM prompt file 22 96Wxxxx rom Is nation i e GS DM KR etc xxxx indicates the version 3 238 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 First confirm previous version of MFIM then upload the desired ROM files and reset system If the new system database is not compatible with existing system datab
333. ark SLT SLT SLT SLT SLT SLT SLT SLT SLT SLT xx 01 20 iPECS 100 xx 01 72 iPECS 300 irec s Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 irec Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance TABLE B 2B Base Numbering Plan 5 8 Default Values Feature Intercom Call MFIM amp 100 MFIME amp 300 MFIM600 Internal Page Zone MFIM amp MFIM100 Other MFIMs Internal All Call Page Meet Me Page External Page Zone 1 2 External All Call Page All Call Page Internal External SMDR Account Code Enter Flash Command to CO Line Last Number Redial DND Toggle On Off Call Forward Speed Dial Programming Message Wait Callback Enable Message Wait Callback Return Speed Dial Access Cancel DND FWD Pre MSG CO System Hold Program Mode Access Attendant Unavailable Alarm Reset Group Call Pickup Universal Answer Account Code with bin Walking COS Code ACD Supervisor On Off Duty ACD Supervisor Login ACD Supervisor Logout ACD Help Code ACD Calls In Queue Display ACD Supervisor Status Display ACD Supervisor Monitor ACD Reroute Queued Call w answer ACD Reroute Queued Call w o answer 200 269 200 499 2000 2599 101 110 101 135 3 Ht 41 42 5 00 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 690 691 692 695 697 698 699 671 672 673 674 675 676 677 678 679 B 4 Base Numbering Plan 6 10 79 10 79 501 510 501 535 543 544 545 546 548
334. ase it will be necessary to initialize the system database This can be done manually using the Initialize Dip switch located on the MFIM refer to section 1 or using the Initialization process of section 1 3 Upgrade of the MFIM includes HTML files a separate upload of the HTML files is not required The system s html files in File View Menu upload file and reload page Upload time of html will take 5 10 minutes Upload appliance image and click Upgrade process to select upgrade appliances If appliances are selected click Upgrade The page shown in Figure 3 6 3 1 will be displayed indicating the Upload command has been sent and upgrade process is working This page will display the Upload status When the appliance upgrade process is successful the status is updated to Success If the upgrade process fails the process is attempted an additional three 3 times before abandoned Should the above MFIM managed upgrade process fail appliances gateway Modules and iPECS Phones can be upgraded directly using the appliance IP address as the upgrade destination address Note the later may require local access 3 239 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 IP Phone Web Configuration Pages Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Back gt A A QSearch GyFavortes Meda D 3 0 A Address a http 192 168 57 99 index htrn Go IP Phone Dow
335. ase 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 When multiple iPECS systems are located on the same LAN it may be desirable to register add on devices employing the Registration Table By entering the devices MAC address the system will allow the device to register regardless of the system Registration switch position MFIM 3rd DIP switch In addition the number of channels ports available to the device can be limited to support functions such as Fractional T1 Lines where only a portion of the channels are needed REGISTRATION TBL ENTER TBL NO 1 5 REG TBL 1 NO MAC INFO NO OF PORT 1 Refer to Table 2 3 9 11 1 DISPLAY Table 2 3 9 11 1 MAC REGISTRATION PGM 235 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 TBL 1 SET MAC ADDR Enter the MAC address of the device to MAC 1 00405A127F20 register 2 TBL 1 SET MAX PORT Enter maximum number of ports channels for 00 99 00 NO OF PORT 10 the device For a 00 entry the system will accept physical port number 3 TBL 1 DEV TYPE Enter device type when register internal 0 6 0 N A DEV TYPE gateway 0 N A VSF MISC VOIP SLTM LGCM BRIM 1 VSF To register external gateway it should be N A 2 MISC as default 3 VOIP 4 SLTM 5 LGCM 6 BRIM 2 127 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 A mobile phone can be used in conjunction with an iPECS Phone The Mobile phone can access system resour
336. ate 5 COL Supplementary Call Waiting CO button supplementary call 00 14 FLASH 240 IPM FLUTTER waiting flashing rate 6 COL Supplementary Call Hold CO button supplementary hold 00 14 FLASH 480 IPM flashing rate 8 DSS CO Ring DSS button CO ring flashing rate 00 14 FLASH 30 IPM 2 DSS All Ring DSS button ICM ALL ring flashing 00 14 FLASH 60 IPM rate 3 DSS Associated Ring DSS button ICM ring associate 00 14 FLASH 120 IPM device flashing rate 10 DSS Incoming Ring DSS button station is in DND 00 14 FLASH 60 IPM 3 DSS Lock Out DSS button station is in lock out 00 14 FLASH 480 IPM FLUTTER 7 DSS Pre select Message DSS button station is in pre 00 14 FLASH 30 IPM selected message 2 DSS ICM Hold DSS button station is in ICM hold 00 14 FLASH 60 IPM 3 DSS Other DSS button station is in other state 00 14 FLASH 120 IPM 10 UCD Queue Ring 2 CIQ 1 Threshold 00 14 FLASH 60 IPM 3 UCD Queue Ring 6 CIQ 2 Threshold 00 14 FLASH 120 IPM 10 UCD Queue Ring 7 X CIQ 3 Threshold 00 14 FLASH 240 IPM 5 UCD DND Off Duty UCD a agent is off duty UCD DND 00 14 FLASH 120 IPM 10 UCD Warning UCD warning tone 00 14 FLASH 120 IPM 10 UCD Help UCD help request response 00 14 FLASH 120 IPM 10 Feature Record FEATURE voice record button 00 14 FLASH 240 IPM 5 Feature Message Wait FEATURE message wait 00 14 FLASH 30 IPM 2 DSS Out of service state DSS button a station is in out of 00 14 FLASH OFF service state 00 Table 3 5 5 10 2
337. ated At expiration if seconds the call remains queued to the group the call is sent to the assigned 2nd VSF announcement 3 CIRC 621 ANNC1 LOC The Station Group can be assigned an 00 70 00 none VSF ANNC 00 70 announcement which is played if the call remains queued beyond the ANNC 1 TMR duration The announcement location is the VSF ANNC1 number An entry of 00 indicates no announcement Including at the end of an entry instructs the system to disconnect after the announcement 2 96 im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 4 CIRC 621 ANNC2 LOC The Station Hunt Group can be assigned a 00 70 00 none VSF ANNC 00 70 2nd announcement which is played if the call remains queued beyond the ANNC 2 TMR duration The announcement location is the VSF ANNC2 number An entry of 00 indicates no announcement Including at the end of an entry instructs the system to disconnect after the announcement 5 CIRC 621 ANNC2 RPT TMR The 2nd announcement can be repeated 000 999 000 000 999 000 to calls that remain in queue at intervals of seconds the ANNounCement 2 RePeaT TiMeR Note repeating must be ON under button 6 below 6 CIRC 62
338. ble 2 3 3 5 2 Press the SAVE button to store the data entry Table 2 3 3 5 1 STATION CLASS OF SERVICE PGM 116 STATION COS RESTRICTIONS 1 No restrictions are placed on dialing from the station 2 The assignments in Exception Table A are monitored for allow and deny numbers 3 The assignments in Exception Table B are monitored for allow and deny numbers 4 The assignments in both Exception Tables A amp B are monitored for allow and deny numbers 5 The leading digit dialed cannot be a Long Distance code default 0 and further denied allowed based on Exception Table C 6 The leading digits dialed cannot be a Long Distance code amp digit count cannot exceed the LD digit counter default 8 digits and further denied allowed based on Exception Table C 7 Intercom and paging calls are allowed No outgoing dialing except for emergency calls is allowed on CO Lines 8 The assignments in the Exception Table D are monitored for allow and deny numbers 9 The assignments in the Exception Table E are monitored for allow and deny numbers 10 The assignments in the Exception Table D amp E are monitored for allow and deny numbers 11 The assignments in the Exception Table A amp B and D amp E are monitored for allow and deny numbers 2 32 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Table 2 3 3 5 2 STATION CO LINE COS
339. ble range is 001 200 and for the MFIM600 1200 the range is 001 400 600 See Table 2 3 5 9 1 Press the desired Flex button refer to Table 2 3 5 9 1 DISPLAY Use the dial pad to enter desired data for the Attribute refer to Table 2 3 5 9 1 Press the SAVE button to store the data entry Table 2 3 5 9 1 T1 LINE TIMERS PGM 152 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 001 002 PAUSE A timed pause may be included in a 1 9 2 1 9 2 sec Speed Dial number in which case the seconds pause time is defined by this entry Not currently implemented 2 001 002 RLS GRD The Rls Grd Guard timer defines the 01 60 20 01 60 20 100ms length of time the system will maintain a 100 ms Line as busy after the call has been terminated to assure the PSTN has sufficient time to clear down the circuit Not currently implemented 3 001 002 DT DELAY The DT Dial tone Delay timer defines 02 50 10 02 50 10 100ms the duration that dial tone must be 100 ms received for DT recognition Not currently implemented 4 001 002 INTER per The Inter Digit timer defines the duration 15 30 15 15 30 15 20ms between digit transmissions 20 ms Not currently implemented 5 001 002 WINK For TIE or DID Lines the Wink timer 7 15 10 07 15 10 20ms defines the length of time the
340. by two separate private IP address schemes This segmenting technique is often used to separate voice and data devices However with this segmenting technique the MFIM would normally treat the segmented gateway Modules and Terminals such as iPECS SoftPhones as remote devices using valuable WAN bandwidth 2 4 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Assigning the MFIM an IP address from the second segment Second Sys IP address permits the MFIM to communicate with the devices directly over the LAN iPECS can be installed behind a NAPT server if the NAPT server provides fixed address translation and port forwarding to the system In this case the system will employ the Firewall IP address button 10 as the fixed public IP address for communication with remote devices This address must be assigned as the MFIM address in the remote device In some situations specifically when multiple iPECS systems are installed on the same LAN it may be advantageous to register devices employing MAC addresses in place of the plug amp play mechanism using the MFIM registration DIP switch The system allows a range of MAC addresses to be entered allowing devices with a MAC address in the range to register with the iPECS regardless of the Registration switch position For convenience two ranges can be defined in the database SYSTEM IP ADDRESS PLAN PRESS FLEX KEY 1 18 See Table 2 3 2 1 DISPLAY Table 2 3 2 1 SYSTE
341. cacacaeanananeess 2 6 2 3 2 3 CO Gateway Sequence Number PGM Code 104 c cccccssssccccssssececssssescecseseeeessnseeeenens 2 10 2 3 2 4 Flexible Station Numbering Plan PGM Code 105 2 ccccccccsssecseneeceeeceseseetsneeseseeessnnetees 2 11 2 3 2 5 Flexible Numbering Plan part A to D PGM Codes 106 to 109 ccccsssssccssssteseesesteeeees 2 12 2 3 3 STATION DATA PGM CODES 110 125 wii ceeccccssceeseseeesseenesenens 2 17 2 3 3 1 Station Type PGM Code 110 ccccccscesssesscessccssccsseessecssecssecssscsssceascsscessesssceussenssensseease 2 17 2 3 3 2 Station Attributes I to III PGM Codes 111 113 ccccccccscccceesssceceessscecceessececeersnseceentnaeees 2 20 2 3 3 3 Station Attributes IV PGM Code 114 icceccccccccccccccsessscssccesecsesecsrseseecsecserssnsaseeeseceserenensass 2 26 2 3 3 4 Flexible button Assignment PGM Code 115 ssccccssecsseeceeeeeenseceeneeceeeetsneeseeneesseneteas 2 28 2 3 3 5 Station Class of Service PGM Code 11 6 cccccccccccccecccececececececececececececececececetecececeeaeseaeas 2 32 2 3 3 6 CO IP Group Access PGM Code 117 cccsccccssccenceceeeeecsneseeneeceeneecseneesasesenseceensestnasenes 2 34 2 3 3 7 Internal Page Zone Access PGM Code 11 8 ccsccccsseeceenceceeeeeensececeeeceneeetsaeceeseetsneeetes 2 34 2 3 3 8 PTT Push To Talk Group Access PGM Code 119 cccccsccessseceeneeceneeeteeeseseeetsnnenees 2 35 2 3 3 9 Preset Call Forward PGM Code 120 ui cccccccccccececececec
342. can monitor agent conversations ON OFF A warning tone can be provided to the agent and OFF connected party when the supervisor activates the monitor feature Alternate Destination When a call comes into the group and there are no STA NET or group members available the call will be routed to the Hunt Number assigned Alternate Destination System SPD Supervisor Timer When calls have been in queue longer than the 000 999 030 Supervisor Timer the ACD supervisor is notified by a seconds display of the longest queue time Supervisor Call Count When the number of calls in queue exceeds the 00 99 00 by a display of queued calls ON bypass the announcement OFF Zap tone 3 141 Maximum Queued Call When the number of calls queued to the group match 00 99 99 Counter this parameter new calls will receive error tone and be disconnected after the VSF Announcement 1 if assigned is played Supervisor 1 to 5 Any valid iPECS Phone with display can be assigned Station as a Supervisor max 5 ACD Supervisors UCD DND Wrap Timer ACD agents are placed in the Wrap up mode for the 002 200 sec 010 Wrap up timer duration Entered Caller ID ICLID Within 5 seconds of a guaranteed announcement the ON ON Usage caller may dial digits as an ICLID The user dialed OFF digits are compared to the ICLID Table entries for routing or for a single dialed digit to the ACD CCR table
343. ce Issue 5 0 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 5 100 110 HOWLING TONE Permits Howler tone to be sent to a SLT 0 OFF ON 1 0N 0 0FF OFF when left off hook 1 ON 6 100 110 NO TCH ANS Enables No touch answer this will 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 0FF OFF automatically connect transferred calls to the 1 ON station s speakerphone 7 100 110 PAGE ACCESS Allows station to access paging 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 8 100 110 HEADSET RING This item selects device to receive incoming 1 Speaker SPKR 1 S 2 H 3 BOTH SPKR ring signals Speaker Headset or Both 2 Headset 3 Both 9 100 110 SPKR HEAD Selects Speakerphone mode or Headset 1 Speaker SPKR 1 SPKR 0 HEAD SPKR mode 0 Headset 10 100 110 LCD DISP LED The LCD LED upper left of LCD may be 1 Ring MWI 1 RING 0 MWI MWI used for Intercom Call ring Indication or 0 MWI Message Wait Indication 11 100 110 LOOP LCR ACCT Station based LOOP LCR authorization this 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 OFF OFF is used for LOOP LCR operation 1 ON 12 100 110 CALL COVERAGE The Call Coverage feature permits an iPECS 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 0FF OFF Phone user to receive ring and answer calls 1 ON to other stations 13 100 110 CALL COVERAGE When a covered station rings the CALL 0 9 0 DELAY RING 0 COVERAGE button LED will flash at
344. ce PRESS FLEX KEY 1 2 Refer to Table 2 3 3 12 1 Press the desired Flex button DISPLAY Use the dial pad to enter desired data for the Station IP Attribute refer to Table 2 3 3 12 1 Press the SAVE button to store the data entry 2 37 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Table 2 3 3 12 1 STATION TIMERS PGM 123 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 STA FWD NO ANS TMR sec This timer determines the duration the station 000 600 000 000 600 000 will ring prior to Ring No Answer Forward seconds This setting affects both manual and Preset Call Forward and overrides the System Ring No Answer timer PGM CODE 181 bin 1 2 CUT OFF Min Allowed length of CO IP calls when station is 00 99 00 00 99 00 assigned Call Time restriction in Station minutes Attributes Il PGM CODE 112 button 3 A station can be linked to another station so that the two stations effectively act as a single station with the attributes of the primary station number An unregistered or registered station may be linked to a primary station When unregistered station linking is used the linked station does not reduce the system s capacity However in this case either the linked station must be an iPECS Phone Phontage UCS Client or an SLT connected to an SLTM2 Unregistered linking of stations connected to other modules is not allowed When an SLT ph
345. ce of the dial tone the station can be programmed to access a CO Line CO IP Group or call a Station or Station Group as described in Table 2 3 3 10 1 The Idle Line Selection Prime Line can be either immediate or delayed after going off hook The immediate delay selection is based on the Hot Warm assignment in Station Attributes IIl Prime Line PGM CODE 113 button 7 and System timers PGM CODE 182 button 6 PROCEDURE IDLE LINE SELECTION 1 Press the PGM button and dial 121 ENTER STA RANGE 100 110 IDLE LINE NOT ASSIGNED 1 4 Use the dial pad to enter a station range Ex 100 110 For a single station enter the same number twice Use the dial pad to enter the type and value for the desired Idle Line selection refer to Table 2 3 3 10 1 Press the SAVE button to store the data entry Table 2 3 3 10 1 IDLE LINE SELECTION TYPE amp VALUE PGM 121 TYPE VALUE DESCRIPTION iPECS iPECS 50 MFIM300 MFIM600 MFIM1200 Micro MFIM100 1 Flex button Flex button Flex button Flex button Flex button Flex button activates Flex Number as if dialed 2 01 05 01 42 001 200 001 400 001 600 CO IP path seizes CO line 3 01 20 01 20 01 72 01 72 01 200 CO IP Group seizes CO line from the CO IP Group 4 100 125 IPECS 50 100 399 1000 1599 1000 2199 Station calls the assigned station 100 149 MFIM100 100 169 2 36 im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 2 3
346. cement number An entry of 00 indicates no announcement VSF announce Auto Drop If this attribute is selected the call will drop after the Check box 2 VSF announcement VSF Announce 2 Repeat The 2nd announcement can be repeated to calls that 000 999 000 Timer remain in queue at intervals of the VSF Announce 2 seconds Repeat Timer Note VSF Announce 2 Repeat below must be ON VSF Announce 2 Repeat After the 2nd announcement if the call remains ON OFF queued to the group the 2nd VSF announcement can OFF be repeated at the VSF Announce 2 Repeat Timer interval defined above Overflow Destination A call to the group will continue to route through the Station or Group group until answered or all group members have been Number VSF tried The call will remain at the last station or routes Announce to the assigned Overflow Destination If VSF System SPD Announce is assigned Auto Drop is available Overflow Timer A call to a group will remain at the last station in the 000 600 180 group or route to the assigned Overflow Destination seconds after expiration of the Overflow Timer Warp Up Timer After terminating any call a Hunt Group member will 002 999 002 be maintained in a busy state for the duration of the seconds Wrap Up Timer Music Source A Music source can be assigned so that calls to the none Int Ext 1 group will receive audio from the assigned source in Int Ext 1 place of ring back tone Ext Music 2 VSF MOH Maximum Queued Call Whe
347. ces available to the user s wired phone and will receive ring for incoming iPECS calls The user may be allowed to enable the Mobile extension and define the mobile number The system can be defined to employ a specific CO IP Line Group to place calls to the Mobile phone The Mobile Extension Table also defines Notification of new VMIM VSF messages When a new message is received for a user in the VMIM VSF the system will call the assigned Tel Number notifying the user of the new message MOBILE EXTENSION TABLE ENTER STA NUMBER 100 MOBIL EXT ATTR PRESS FLEX KEY 1 9 Refer to Table 2 3 9 12 1 DISPLAY Table 2 3 9 12 1 MOBILE EXTENSION PGM 236 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 100 PGM AUTHORITY The user may be allowed to activate the 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 0FF OFF mobile extension feature 1 ON 2 100 ACCESS AUTHORITY The user can be allowed to register a Mobile 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 0FF OFF phone number 1 ON 3 100 ACCESS CO GRP CO group used to call ring the mobile 00 72 01 CO GRP 01 extension or 00 24 4 100 TEL NUMBER Telephone number of the Mobile extension Not assigned 5 TABLE 001 CLI When the mobile Telephone number and CLI Not do not match the CLI entered here is used to assigned authorize incoming calls from the mobile the timer expires 6 100 HUNT
348. cesecseeececeeeecaaeceeaeeceeneecsanetsnaeseeneessnneteas 3 15 3 5 1 4 CO Gateway Sequence NUIMDGEL 21 ccccccccecceceeeceeneeceeeeeeceaeeseneeceeneeceeeesaessensececensetsaeetes 3 18 3 5 1 5 Flexible Station Numbering Plan u csccccescceseeeceeeeeensecscneeceeeeesaecseneeecsaeeesaaesseneeeeentetsaeetes 3 20 3 5 1 6 Flexible Numbering Plan cccccceceeceessececeeeeceeeeenaecceneeceeeessaesseneeceeeeeceanesseneeeeneeeseaeetes 3 21 3 0 2 Station Data Pro Sram vevis cess ccavacecokesecevvad eeri ea vassngesvadessavbevagdie nvsetaetewdineiacbessisseaerse 3 25 3 5 2 1 Station TYDE oerien anag nto o cous eu aaa aa diathaid onde aiana e Seen ony bdo 3 26 3 5 2 2 Station AUiDUtOS isis orite aia ei eaaa a iaa i e aea aAa ea ai 3 27 3 5 2 3 Station ISDN AttriDUte cccccccccccecececececececececececececeececetecececscececetececececetecetecececececececeeteess 3 32 3 5 2 4 Fl xibl BUTLONS apane E a a aae r aae adriai 3 34 3 5 2 5 STATON COS vsccscsicedavnitwcedsscustasrwaneasessadvavisstasnesesssvessiaveeseansuasvassscenivaasdsdvasvasnntilssuedadestasnsitens 3 35 3 5 2 6 COIP Group ACCOSS 215250 seieissisessastinsttieljcenstbenucdb enana iaoiai aian araia ieee i ernia 3 37 3 5 2 7 Internal Page Zone ACCESS ccsccccescsesceceeeneceneeeenaecaeeeeceseeessaecaeaeeceeneeseanssanaesecenteseaestas 3 38 3 5 2 8 PTE Group ACCES Saleni Bi ial dete el i i el ee 3 39 3 5 2 9 Preset Call Forward u cccccccccccccceceececececececececececececececec
349. ck station Tone Tone Ring Back tone Int Ext 1 MOH 1 Ext 2 MOH 2 VSF MOH VSF MOH UMS MSG Attach Message When e mail notification of a new VSF VMIM 0 OFF ON message is enabled PGM 236 btn 7 the e mail 1 ON may include the voice mail as a wav file attachment UMS mail server IP PGM 113 18 amp UMS Mail Address PGM 113 19 are required for proper operation Door Open Enables use of Door open feature by station 0 Disable ENABLE 1 Enable Outgoing Mailbox Destination If a CO IP incoming Caller dials 0 when listening to a station s VSF mailbox greeting the call is routed according to this option VSF MSG Date Time When ON play the data time stamp of VSF message 0 OFF ON 1 ON 3 31 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 114 Selecting Station ISDN Attributes will display the Station ISDN Attributes data input page Figure 3 5 2 3 1 Enter a valid station range and click Load to enter Station ISDN Attributes data Selecting the blue colored text in the Table header will sort the table based on the selected column Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DER File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm irec iPECSIVD96M E 0Ap APR 08 Boot Version 1 OAh JANOT Enter Station Range _Load Station Range From 100 to 100 Order Uncheck All Attribute Value CLIP Display OFF COLP Display OFF x
350. code Meet Me Page Meet Me Page answer dial 544 544 544 544 544 code External Page Zone 1 External Page Zone 1 access n a 545 545 545 545 dial code External Page Zone 2 External Page Zone 2 access n a 546 546 546 546 dial code Not available in iPECS 50 External All Call Page External All Call Page access n a 548 548 548 548 dial code All Call Page All Call Page access dial code 549 549 549 549 549 SMDR Account Code Dial code to signify the start of 550 550 550 550 550 Enter an SMDR Account Code Flash Command To CO Dial code to generate a Flash 551 551 551 551 551 Line on the active CO Line SLT Last Number Redial SLT Last number redial feature 552 552 552 552 552 access dial code Do Not Disturb DND Dial code to activate Do Not 553 553 553 553 553 Disturb Call Forward Code to activate Call Forward 554 554 554 554 554 Speed Dial Program SLT Speed Dial programming 555 555 555 555 555 access code Activate Message Code to activate Message 556 556 556 556 556 Wait Call Back Wait Call Back Message Wait Call Back Code to return Message 557 557 557 557 557 Answer Wait Call Back SLT Speed Dial Access SLT Speed Dial access code 558 558 558 558 558 DND FWD Cancel Code to cancel 559 559 559 559 559 DND FWD MSG Wait SLT CO System Hold Code to place a CO Line call 560 560 560 560 560 on System Hold SLT Program Mode SLT user program access code 561 561 561 561 561 Access Attendant Unavailable Code to make attendant 5
351. conds 2 R2 IN MANAG TMR sec Reserved for future usage for R2 timers 01 50 14 01 50 14 seconds 3 R2 DISAPPEAR TMR sec Reserved for future usage for R2 timers 01 50 14 01 50 14 seconds 4 R2 PULSE TMR 20msec Reserved for future usage for R2 timers 01 30 07 01 30 07 20 msec 5 R2 READY TMR 20msec Reserved for future usage for R2 timers 000 500 07 000 500 007 20 msec 6 DIAL TONE DELAY TMR Reserved for future usage for R2 timers 01 30 20 01 30 20 msec 2 93 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 The system can employ the Network Time Protocol NTP or ISDN clock to synchronize the system time with the NTP time server or ISDN clock The system requests the time from the NTP server at 10 minute intervals and then determines the time differential If the system time is more 2 seconds off the NTP time the system time is adjusted to synchronize with the NTP server time NTP ATTRIBUTES PRESS FLEX KEY 1 1 Refer to Table 2 3 6 233 1 DISPLAY Table 2 3 6 233 1 NTP ATTRIBUTES Button DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 NETWORK TIME DATE Sets time synchronization for the system as 0 DISABLE 0 0 2 DISABLE 0 Disable 1 ISDN ISDN clock 2 NTP NTP NTP Attributes are set only via the Web Stations can be grouped so that incoming calls will s
352. ction 4 4 2 Note each function can be defined to use only one output Refer to Table 2 3 6 15 1 and Table 2 3 6 15 2 for a description of the selections the data entries required and LCD displays PROCEDURE PRINT PORT SELECTION 1 Press the PGM button and dial 175 PRESS FLEX_KEY 1 2 SELECT TCP NO Press Flex Dao to ee Hee output m for ae or be nee 2 PRESS FLEX KEY 1 9 assign the port for the function when a channel is selected for the function Refer to Table 2 3 6 15 1 or 2 is the Flex button for the desired function refer to Table 2 3 6 15 1 or Table DISPLAY 3 6 15 2 Use the dial pad to enter the output type Flex button 1 or TCP port Flex button 2 For Flex button 1 the entries available are 1 Serial port 1 2 Serial port 2 3 TCP channel 1 4 TCP channel 2 5 TCP channel 3 Press the SAVE button to store the data entry Table 2 3 6 15 1 FUNCTION OUTPUT TYPE PGM 175 Button DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 OFF LINE SMDR 1 5 Defines the serial port or TCP channel used 1 5 SERIAL1 SERIAL1 1 for Off line SMDR Statistics output 2 ADMIN DATA 1 5 Defines the serial port or TCP channel used 1 5 SERIAL1 SERIAL1 1 for the ADMIN Report output 3 TRAFFIC 1 5 Defines the serial port or TCP channel used 1 5 SERIAL1 SERIAL1 1 for the TRAFFIC report output 4 SMDI 1 5 Defines the serial port or TCP channel used 1 5 SERIAL1 SERIAL1 1 for the SMDI output
353. d OVerFLOW DESTination after expiration of the OVERFLOW TiMeR 9 RING 624 WRAP UP TMR After terminating any call a Ring Group 002 999 002 002 999 002 member will be maintained in a busy state seconds for the duration of the WRAP UP TiMeR 10 RING 624 MUSIC SRC A Music source is assigned so that calls to 00 none 0 00 10 00 the group will receive audio from the 01 Music 1 assigned source in place of ring back 02 Music 2 tone Note Ext 2 is not available in the 03 VSF MOH iPECS Micro and iPECS 50 And VSF 04 SLTMOH1 MOH is not available in the iPECS Micro 05 SLTMOh2 06 SLTMOH3 07 SLTMOH4 08 SLTMOHS5 09 VSFMOh2 10 VSFMOH3 2 103 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 11 RING 624 MAX QUE C CNT When the number of calls queued is 00 99 99 00 99 99 reached new calls will receive error tone and be disconnected after the VSF AA announcement if assigned is played 12 RING 624 MBR FORWARD A member activating Call Forward may be 0 OFF ON 1 ON 0 OFF ON placed in an unavailable state for hunt 1 ON group calls ON When OFF group calls are sent to the member as normal 13
354. d and for the PRI TE or NT operation can be selected Refer to Table 3 5 3 2 1 for a description of the features and the input required Table 3 5 3 2 1 T1 PRI ATTRIBUTES ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT T1 Setup Mode Select T1 Setup mode 1 ESF D4 D4 frame Using In Band Control Protocol 0 D4 ESF Using Data link Message T1 Line Mode Select T1 line coding AMI B8ZS 1 AMI 0 B8ZS B8ZS PRI Line Mode Select TE NT Mode TE NT TE PRI E1 CRC Check Enable CRC Cyclical Redundancy Check ON OFF ON E1 R2DSP check Used for R2 E1 Gateway or E1 Gateway ON OFF ON DCO PX Type Reserved for future usage for R2 E1 Gateway 1 1240 2 TDX1B STANDARD 3 STANDARD 4 CONGES DIS 3 54 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 132 Selecting Board Base Attributes returns the Board Base Attributes data input page Figure 3 5 3 3 1 Enter the Sequence Range refer to section 3 5 1 3 and click Load to enter attribute values Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DAR File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay s http 150 150 131 21 1 a_index htm iPECS VD96M E OAp APRIOB Boot Version 1 0Ah JANIOT Enter Sequence Nunber ___ Sequence Range From 1 To 1 Uncheck All Attribute Value Vv Router IP Address Device Codec Type System Codec v Firewall IP Address xI x H 323 VoIP Attributes P130 TLELPRI Attrbutes P131 xI RTP Secu
355. d dial 177 PRESS FLEX KEY 01 24 Refer to Table 2 3 6 17 1 Press the desired Flex button refer to Table 2 3 6 17 1 DISPLAY Use the dial pad to enter the desired data refer to Table 2 3 6 17 1 Note for LD codes first select the code using Flex button 1 5 then enter the 1 or 2 digit LD code desired To save SMDR Attribute data press the SAVE button Table 2 3 6 17 1 SMDR ATTRIBUTES PGM 177 Button DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 SMDR SAVE The system can store all outgoing calls ON 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 OFF OFF or only calls that exceed the SMDR Timer 1 ON OFF The later allows PSTN call set up times to be removed from the recorded call time For SMDR Timer settings refer to button 12 below 2 SMDR PRINT The system can output SMDR records 0 OFF ON 1 ON 0 OFF ON automatically as they occur real time or only 1 ON when requested When this attribute is ON SMDR output is automatic at call completion 2 85 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 3 RECORD TYPE The system can record all outgoing calls or 1 LD LD 1 LD 0 ALL LD only long distance calls Long distance calls 0 ALL are identified by the LD digit count and LD call
356. d if the call remains queued beyond the ANNC 1 TMR duration The announcement location is a VSF ANNC1 number An entry of 00 indicates no announcement Including at the end of an entry instructs the system to disconnect after the announcement 4 RING 624 ANNC2 LOC The Ring Group can be assigned a 2nd 00 70 00 none VSF ANNC 00 70 announcement which is played if the call remains queued beyond the ANNC 2 TMR duration The announcement location is a VSF ANNC2 number An entry of 00 indicates no announcement Including at the end of an entry instructs the system to disconnect after the announcement 5 RING 624 ANNC2 RPT TMR The 2nd announcement can be repeated 000 999 000 000 999 000 to calls that remain in queue at intervals of seconds the ANNounCement 2 RePeaT TiMeR Note repeating must be ON under button 6 below 6 RING 624 ANNC2 RPT After the 2nd announcement if the call 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 OFF OFF remains queued to the group the 2nd 1 ON VSF announcement can be repeated at the ANNounCement RePeaT TiMeR interval 7 RING 624 OVERFLOW DEST A call to the group rings at member Station or Grp S H V SPD Dial 1 4 stations until the Overflow timer expires Number VSF then the call passes to the assigned Announce OVerFLOW DESTination System SPD 8 RING 624 OVERFLOW TMR A call to a ring group will continue to ring 000 600 180 000 600 180 stations in the group or be sent to the seconds assigne
357. d speakerphone microphone OFF Override Privilege Enables intrusion to gain access to an active CO IP ENABLE Disable call DISABLE SMDR Hidden Dialed Digits Enables hiding dialed digits in SMDR output ENABLE Disable DISABLE Voice Over Enables use of Voice Over by the station ENABLE Enable DISABLE Prime Line Enables Delayed Prime Line Idle Line activation HOT WARM see Idle Line Selection section 3 5 2 10 and Prime WARM Line Delay timer section 3 5 5 20 Alarm Door Bell Assigns station to receive Alarm Door Bell signal ENABLE Disable DISABLE DID Wait When a busy station receives a DID call the call may ON ON queue to the station instead of receiving busy tone OFF With DID Call Wait the caller hears Ring back and the user sees the CO line button LED flash Left Msg Exec When a call is forward to the Secretary of an 1 ON ON Executive Secretary pair messages can be left for 0 OFF the Executive ON or Secretary OFF 3 29 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT E amp Mic Headset Select E amp Mic or Headset mode for the IP Phone 1 ON OFF 0 OFF Enblock mode When On the user dialed digits are stored at the 1 ON OFF iPECS Phone until explicitly sent by the user When 0 OFF sent all dialed digits are sent to the system ina block Enblock mode is only available to iPECS Phones with soft keys VMID Number When
358. d to applications including NMS upon 1 0N request 24 3 SMDR ICM SAVE When enabled intercom call data is stored as 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 OFF OFF part of the SMDR data 1 0N 24 4 SMDR ICM PRINT When enabled intercom call data is printed as 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 OFF OFF part of the On line SMDR 1 0N 24 5 SMDR DISC CAUSE When enabled the disconnect cause is stored 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 0FF OFF in Off line SMDR data and printed as parted of 1 0N the On line SMDR 24 6 LONG TIME CALL 10min To monitor long time CO call a Long Time 000 144 000 2 87 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 The system Date Time and DST feature are established by this entry The date and time are employed for several features and functions including LCR LCD displays SMDR outputs Auto Ring Mode Selection Wake Up Alarm etc If DST is enabled the system time will be adjust one hour forward and back at the DST start and end times respectively SET TIME DATE amp DST PRESS FLEX_KEY 1 5 See Table 2 3 6 18 1 DISPLAY Table 2 3 6 18 1 SYSTEM TIME DATE amp DST PGM 178 Button DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 SET TIME Sets the system time HH MM TIME 00 22 HH MM 2 SET DATE Sets the system date MMDDYY DATE 01 13 08 MMDDYY 3 DST ENABLE MODE Enables DST feature for System Time 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 4 DST START TIME Th
359. de Type amp NONE 1 8 Value TABLE 001 USE ICLID A DID Conversion Table index can be 0 OFF OFF 1 0N o 0FF OFF assigned to employ ICLID routing section 1 ON 2 3 8 4 TABLE 001 TENAN TBL NO A DID Conversion Table Index can be Type amp N A 00 16 16 N A assigned to employ an Auto ring mode table Value section 2 3 9 9 Table 2 3 9 7 2 FLEXIBLE DID DESTINATION PGM 231 TYP DESCRIPTION DESTINATION E iPECS MFIM Micro 50 100 300 600 1200 1 Route to a Station 100 125 100 149 100 169 100 399 1000 1599 1000 2199 2 Route to a Station Group 620 631 620 659 620 659 620 667 620 667 401 500 Route with System 200 999 200 999 200 999 2000 4999 2000 7999 20000 31999 Speed Dial 4 Route as PBX Transfer 200 999 200 999 200 999 2000 4999 2000 7999 20000 31999 with System Speed Dial Flash then dial speed dial digits 5 Route to VSF AA 01 70 01 70 01 70 01 70 01 70 01 20 Announcement 6 Route to VSF AA 01 70 01 70 01 70 01 70 01 70 01 20 Announcement and disconnect 7 Route to a Networking 100 125 100 149 100 169 100 399 1000 1599 1000 2199 Station 8 Conference Room 1 9 1 9 1 9 1 9 1 9 1 9 9 Internal Page 01 10 01 10 01 10 01 35 01 35 01 100 10 External page n a 01 02 01 02 01 02 01 02 01 02 11 All Call Page O1 internal O1 internal O1 internal 01 internal 01 internal 01 internal 03 all O2 external O2 external 02 external 02 external 02 external 03 all 03 all 03 all 03 all 03 all 1
360. ded for VMIM VSF Multi language support PGM 190 amp 191 added UCS group PGMs 330 333 added for TNET and Fail over Web Admin Added changes as above Deleted Menu Tree structure from section 3 4 added section 1 6 see above Added section 3 3 3 Java applet for Web password encryption Station SIP Attributes 2 added for SIP protocol support PGM 132 added UMS Sender e mail address for VM notification to e mail SIP Gateway Attributes added for SIP protocol support PGM 177 added SMDR System Domain Name to allow FQDN support for e mail delivery Zone Data section 3 5 12 added for Zone configurations Device Login section 3 5 13 added for Remote Registration Table and Password Login out Station Program section 3 8 expanded 4 0d3 30 Sep 06 Update for iPECS S W Phase 4 General edits for errata 4 0d4 01 Dec 06 Update for iPECS S W Phase 4 General edits for errata im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Issue Date Description of Changes 4 0d5 15 Mar 07 Updated for iPECS S W Phase 4 General edits for errata Keyset Admin PGM 174 Attr 6 Deleted Purpose MISC PGM 435 firewall protect default value from OFF to ON Web Admin PGM 106 109 Updated in case of MFIM600 PGM 174 Attr 6 Deleted Purpose MISC PGM 435 firewall protect default value from OFF to ON PGM 113 insert a field BY PASS DTMF Web Admin PGM 113 insert a field BY PASS DTMF
361. ders may use the Local Area ON ON Insertion Prefix code for special services The system can OFF insert the My Area Code and My Local Prefix Code in the Connect message as defined in those items below ISDN Line Type The system will encode voice using the A law or u u Law u Law law PCM format to match the installed ISDN Back A Law bone International Access Code When an incoming call includes the international 4 digits Country code in the ISDN call SETUP message the Country code can be included in the station display To include the Country code Incoming Prefix insertion and CLI display in Station Attributes section 3 5 2 3 must be On Calling Sub address For outgoing calls the user s station number may be ON OFF included in the ISDN call SETUP message Sub OFF address field My Area Code Regional ISDN providers may use the Local Prefix Max 6 digits and Area codes for special services The system will insert this Local Area Code in the call SETUP messages defined under the Incoming Outgoing Prefix Code Insertion entries above My Area Prefix Code Regional ISDN providers may use the Local Prefix Max 4 digits and Area codes for special services The system will use this code for insertion of the Local Prefix Code in the call SETUP messages if Local Prefix Insertion is enabled above CLI Transit When the system must send CLI to the ISDN for an ORI ORI off net call the CLI can be either the original caller s CFW CLI or the CLI o
362. dex 0 may also be assigned from the user s phone or via the Station Program User portal Web page 3 253 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Selecting Flex Buttons will display the input entry page Figure 3 8 6 1 F iPECS Station Program Microsoft Internet Explorer DAR File Edit View Favorites Tools Help http 150 150 131 211 stn_index htm Master Station C Slave Station Load Select Flex Button Type C Empty C LOOP CO Line CO Group C Station Number C Net Station Number Station Speed Bin System Speed Bin C Programming PGM Code C Programming Numbering Plan Flex Buttons Enter Flex Button Range Ej Set Master Station Button Flex Button 1 CO Line Flex Button 2 CO Line Flex Button 3 CO Line Flex Button 4 CO Line Flex Button 5 CO Line Flex Button 6 CO Line Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Lid All Rights Reserved amp http 150 150 131 211 ANCHOR2025 Internet Figure 3 8 6 1 Flex Buttons Each Flex button for each iPECS Phone DSS Console can be assigned a function TYPE from the pull down menu as shown in Table 3 8 6 1 After selecting the Type for a button enter the value if required Table 3 8 6 1 FLEX BUTTON TYPE amp VALUE TYPE VALUE REMARK IPECS Micro MFIM100 M
363. dit View Favorites Tools Help amp http 150 150 131 211 stn_index htm Station Attributes F Attribute DND ICM Signaling Mode Call Coverage Mode Delay Ring Cycle 0 9 Ear Mic Headset Authorization Code MAX 12 Digits Include DID Call Wait Choice Exec Sec Message Mobile Extension Telephone Number MAX 24 Digits Mobile Extension Usage Mobile Extension CLI Number MAX 16 Digits Wake up Time repeat HH MM Must be 4 digits Headset or Speaker Mode Speaker Headset Ring Mode Both he User Name Registration MAX 12 Chars BGM ov o o aa aE ono E Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Lid All Rights Reserved http 150 150 191 211 ANCHORZ021 Internet Figure 3 8 1 1 Station Attributes Station Attributes define features and functions available to the station Refer to Table 3 8 1 1 fora description of the features and the input required Table 3 8 1 1 STATION ATTRIBUTES ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT DND Enables DND to be activated by the station ON OFF OFF ICM Signaling Mode Selects Handsfree Privacy or Tone ring ICM H T Signaling mode T P Call Coverage Mode The Call Coverage feature permits an iPECS Phone ON OFF user to receive ring and ans
364. e Get Mail dial code 3 145 im CS Rele ase 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Hunt Type The type of Hunt process applied to the SLT ports CIRC TERM connected to the VM can be assigned as Circular or TERM Terminal Overflow Timer A call to a group will remain at the last station in the 000 600 180 group or be sent to the assigned Overflow seconds Destination after expiration of the Overflow Timer Overflow Destination A call to the group will continue to route through the STA NET or group until answered or all group members have Hunt Number been tried The call will remain at the last station or VSF Announce will route to the assigned Overflow Destination If System SPD assigned VSF Announce Auto Drop is available Forced Forward Calls to a hunt group may forward directly to a Sta NET Destination defined destination bypassing the hunt process Hunt grp Forced Forward below must be enabled VSF Annc Sys Speed Forced Forward Calls to a hunt group may forward directly to a OFF OFF defined destination see above Forced Forward ON Destination Forced Forward must be enabled for the group Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help s http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm ae at pare TT TT Td a On Nae Group Number is 620 Group T
365. e If the Lock key is installed to increase the number of channels at some time after installation the BRI gateway will have to be deleted in the maintenance menu and then Re Registered with MAX Port 8 using the Registration Table PGM235 iPECS devices modules and terminals support the IEEE 802 1p Q standard for Virtual LAN operation The VLAN priority and ID tag are assigned in the Web Admin of each module and terminal For the MFIM assign VLAN parameters in maintenance through the RS 232 port or a TCP IP connection with the following commands maint gt vianset pri value _ _ priority from 0 to 7 maint gt vianset id value vlan id value 0 to 4094 maint gt vlan start start Database Administration is accomplished by entering PROGRAM CODES from the dial pad of an iPECS phone or selecting an item from the Navigation pane in iPECS Web Admin pages Items in the Navigation pane roughly correlate with the Program codes however certain items can only be assigned via the Web interface Data items are organized as a group with a common affect i e station system numbering plan etc Items may be further grouped forming a multi layered menu structure as shown in Figure 1 6 1 1 5 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 System amp Device IP Address Plan CO GW Sequence Number Station Type Flexible Station Number Station Attributes Station Data Station ISDN Attributes Flex Buttons Fle
366. e NORMAL cou number twice For the iPECS Micro the acceptable range is 01 05 for the w iPECS 50 and MFIM100 the acceptable range is 01 42 for the MFIM300 the acceptable range is 001 200 and for the MFIM600 1200 the range is 001 400 600 Use the dial pad to enter the desired service type 1 Normal CO line 2 DID line 3 TIE line 4 Unused line Press the SAVE button to store the data entry 2 3 5 2 CO IP Attributes I II PGM Codes 141 143 CO IP Attributes define various characteristics of the CO lines and IP facilities under control of the system Most require a dial pad input of 1 or O to set the characteristic refer to Table 2 3 5 2 1 to Table 2 3 5 2 3 Specific descriptions for Class of Service and CO line Call Metering tones are provided in Table 2 3 5 2 4 and Table 2 3 5 2 5 respectively PROCEDURE CO IP ATTRIBUTE 1 1 Press the PGM button and dial ENTER COL RANGE 141 for CO IP Attributes 142 for CO IP Attributes II 143 for CO IP Attributes III 01 02 CO IP ATT 1 Use the dial pad to enter a CO IP line range For a single CO IP Line enter the PRESS FIEMIKEY Oca same number twice For the iPECS Micro the acceptable range is 01 05 for the iPECS 50 and MFIM100 the acceptable range is 01 42 for the MFIM300 the acceptable range is 001 200 and for the MFIM600 1200 the range is 001 400 600 See Table 2 3 5 2 1 to 3 Press the desired Flex button refer to Table 2 3 5 2 1 to Table 2 3 5 2
367. e Conference Warning Tone When new member joins a conference room the system ON ON provides warning tone to conference members OFF TLS for Web Enables Transport Layer Security TLS for Web access 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 3 83 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Dummy Dial Tone When a CO line does not provide dial tone the system ON OFF can provide dummy dial tone OFF SIP Station Mode SIP phones may set up a point to point RTP connection 0 RTD RTD PTP or to assure a controlled connection RTP can be 1 PTP routed via a VoIP channel RTD SMS Center Number When the PSTN will be used to send SMS the phone 23 digits number of the Short Message Service Center must be entered SMS Center CLI When the CO IP will be used to receive SMS the Caller 23 digits Id expected from the Short Msg Service Center must be defined SMS Protocol The Short Message Service Protocol must be selected O 5 NONE to support SMS 0 No PSTN SMS support 1 ETSI P1 2 ETSI P2 3 KT LivingNet 4 SIP Text 5 SIP XML G722 Packetization The G 722 voice frame packetization time determines 10 20 30 020 the interval at which voice samples are packetized and 1 msec sent when the G 722 codec is used Transit out security Check IP address for transit out in the master system if 0 OFF ON it is not valid IP address then it will be denied 1 0N Emergency call attendant Provid
368. e SAVE button to store the DISA COS data entry 2 3 6 7 DID DISA Destination PGM Code 167 When a DID line or DISA user dials an invalid vacant or busy station number the caller will be sent to the assigned destination The destination is separately defined for invalid busy and no answer conditions and can be defined as the Attendant busy tone or Station Group Note that for calls on a DID line to a busy station Call Wait can be assigned refer to PGM CODE 113 Station Attributes III button 9 Also for DID calls only announcements prompts can be sent from the VSF to the caller for various conditions busy error DND No Answer reroute busy reroute error reroute no answer or Attendant Transfer PROCEDURE DID DISA DESTINATION 1 Press the PGM button and dial 167 PRESS FLEX_KEY 1 7 BUSY DESTINATION Select the desired Flex button Button 1 Busy Destination TONE F1 F7 Button 2 Error Destination Button 3 No Answer Destination Button 4 VSF Prompt Usage Button 5 Reroute Busy Destination Button 6 Reroute Error Destination Button 7 Reroute No answer Destination 2 75 im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 For Flex button 1 3 or 5 7 use the dial pad to enter 1 ON or 0 OFF for the following VSF prompts 1 Tone 2 Attendant 3 Station Group number For Flex button 4 select Flex button 1 5 for the desired VSF prompt and use the dial pad to enter 1 ON or 0 OFF Button 1 Bu
369. e 14 digits System Id entered at DECT handset subscription to identify the system To assign a PARK code enter code and click SAVE AC Code Authentication Code entered at DECT handset to verify Up to 8 digits subscription To assign AC Code enter AC value and click SAVE DECT Subscribe Enables the system to accept subscription from a DECT Enable handset Figure 3 5 15 1 1 Desired Station Desired station number for the wireless DECT handset 3 224 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Type of Phone Several types of handsets may be selected including type 3 for the GDC 400H GDC 400H 3 Press SEND after entering the number and type DECT Unsubscribe Terminates the subscription for a DECT handset Figure 3 5 15 1 2 Station Number Enter the registered station number and click SEND the subscription is terminated and the wireless DECT handset will no longer be serviced Station number DECT Mobility When a DECT handset is registered at multiple systems that are networked calls can be routed over the network to the DECT handset location Figure 3 5 15 1 3 Station Number Enter the registered station number select Mobility ON or OFF and click SEND Station number Registered Stations Displays all registered DECT handsets Figure 3 5 15 1 4 Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit Vi
370. e 3 5 4 3 1 DID SERVICE ATTRIBUTES ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT DID Start Signal Assigns the type of DID start signaling Immediate Wink Immediate Immediate or Delayed Wink Delayed 3 67 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT DID Conversion Type The received DID digits can be treated to determine call Convert Convert routing simple conversion Convert use as is no Use as is treatment or modify using Flexible DID Conversion Table Look up Look up Number of Digits Number of digits expected from the PSTN DID circuit 2 4 3 Expected from DID In USA version use Table in section 3 5 8 10 Circuit DID Digit Mask DID digit modification sequence deletes the digit 0 9 ee accepts the digit as is a digit 0 9 replaces the digit The modification is based on the position of the digit 1 4 in the received number In USA version use Table in section 3 5 8 10 3 68 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 146 Selecting DISA Service Attributes will display the DISA Service Attributes data input page Figure 3 5 4 4 1 Enter a valid CO range and click Load to enter the DISA Service Attributes data F iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DAR File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm iPECSIVD9
371. e DCOB Attributes defines various characteristics of the E1 PRI module when employing R2 signaling DCOB COLINE ATT ENTER CO RANGE 001 002 DCOB CO ATT PRESS FLEX KEY 1 5 See Table 2 3 5 10 1 DISPLAY Table 2 3 5 10 1 DCOB CO ATTRIBUTE PGM 153 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 001 002 LINE STATUS Send Line status information to PX when a call 1 9 6 1 9 6 routed to subscriber before the called party is ringing 2 001 002 DNIS SERVICE In R2 determine whether system will send 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 0FF OFF caller information to PX or not 1 ON 3 001 002 NO OF CLI DGTS In R2 Gateway request CLI Digit to PX 01 15 10 01 15 10 4 001 002 DCOB TYPE According to this type the line can be 0 2 2 0 2 2 restricted to seize CO line for outgoing call 5 001 002 CALL CATEGORY In R2 signaling the category signal used by 1 9 1 1 9 1 the iPECS is defined here 2 59 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 There are two 2 System Attributes programs to define settings that affect system wide features and functions Generally the entry will turn the feature ON enable or OFF disable Refer to Table 2 3 6 1 1 and Table 2 3 6 1 2 for a description of the Attributes LCD displays and the data entries required SYSTEM ATTRIBUTES 1 PRESS FLEX KEY 01 20 See Table 2 3 6 1 1 amp 2 DISPLA
372. e DST start time See DST 2 Sunday ONLY POSSIBLE BY WEBADM This can be set only via WEB Admin Table of March at 2 00 AM 5 DST END TIME The DST end time See DST 1 Sunday ONLY POSSIBLE BY WEBADM This can be set only via WEB Admin Table in Nov at 2 00 AM 2 88 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 2 3 6 19 Multi Language PGM Code 179 The VSF and VMIM support multiple languages up to three languages may be supported simultaneously Once the prompts are downloaded to the VSF VMIM the caller receives the Language selection announcement for DISA and CCR calls as well as proceeding a Hunt Group guaranteed announcement or DID error announcement The language selection announcement will only affect the language prompts enabled for use PROCEDURE SET MULTI LANGUAGE 1 Press the PGM button and dial 179 PRESS FLEX KEY 1 3 English Prompt Usage mae fa e utton 1 anguage 1 0N 0 OFF OFF Suee Button 2 2 language Button 3 3 language Us the dial pad to enable or disable the desired language prompts Press the SAVE button to store the data entry 2 3 6 20 System Timers I to II PGM Codes 180 182 A number of timers can be assigned to control and affect many features and functions of the system Refer to Table 2 3 6 20 1 to Table 2 3 6 20 3 for a description of the timers and the input required PROCEDURE SYSTEM TIMER 1 1 Press the PGM button and dial PRESS
373. e Flex button Programming in the iPECS Features and Operation Guide TABLE C 1 STATION USER PROGRAM FIXED FUNCTION CODES FUNCTION CODE FUNCTION 10 Enblock Dialing 600 amp 7000 only 11 X Intercom Differential Ring X 1 8 12 X CO Line Differential Ring X 1 8 13 Intercom Answer Mode 1 HF 2 TONE 3 PV 14X Call Coverage Attribute 1 On Off 2 Ring Delay 15X Station Ring Download X 0 9 19 Ear Mic Headset 600 amp 7000 only 21 Knock Down Station COS 22 Restore Station COS 23 Walking COS 24 ICR SCENARIO 31 Message Retrieve Method 32 Message Retrieve Example 33 User Authorization Code Registration 34 DID CALL WAIT button assignment 35 Message Wait in Executive Secretary pair 36 Send SMS Message 37 Register Mobile Extension 38 Make Mobile Extension active 39 Register Mobile Extension CLI 41 Set Wake Up Time 42 Wake Up Time Disable 51 XX Custom Pre select Message Display XX 00 20 52 Register Custom Message Message 00 53 Create Conference Room C 1 irec Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 irec Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 TABLE C 3 ATTENDANT USER PROGRAM FIXED FUNCTION CODES C 3 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 APPENDIX D DEFAULT VALUES The following Tables divided based on the PROGRAM group and PROGRAM provide the default values assigned to all Admin entries Prior to changing an entry during
374. e Table 2 3 18 1 DISPLAY Table 2 3 18 1 DECT ATTRIBUTES PGM 491 Button DISPLAY REMARK RANGE DEFAULT 1 AUTO CALL RLS If enabled when the other party of an active 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 0FF OFF internal call disconnects the LG Nortel GDC 1 ON 400H returns to idle 2 BASE FAULT ALARM If enabled DECT Base station GDC 400B 0 Disable Disable 1 EN 0 DIS DISABLE alarms are sent to the Attendant 1 Enable 3 CHAIN FAULT ALARM If enabled WTIM chain fault alarms are sent 0 Disable Disable 1 EN 0 DIS DISABLE to the Attendant 1 Enable 2 150 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 iPECS incorporates a Web Server located in the MFIM which is employed by the system s Web Service Using a Web browser the system s Web Server can be accessed and the database managed in a user friendly environment In addition to modifying the system database Web Admin provides for system file upload remote upgrade and database download The iPECS default database includes assignment of a private IP address to the system This address 10 10 10 2 may be used to access the system from the LAN However a routable IP address must be assigned for access from a remote location refer to section 3 2 1 To access the iPECS Web Server requires Operating iPECS series system IP address assigned in MFIM and is known TCP port assigned in MFIM and is known iPEC
375. e Zone The VSF VMIM must be under Number control of the same MFIM as the device being assigned Remark Descriptive information to help installer programmer in identifying the device Zone i e Branch1 Display time zone The time amp date displayed at the station are based on Time zone System the time zone selected or the system time time Max Total Inter Zone Maximum Total Inter Zone Connections When this value IPECS Micro 0 Conns is set to 0 it means that there is no limit of total inter 0 26 zone connections IPECS 50 0 50 MFIM100 0 70 MFIM300 0 300 MFIM600 0 600 MFIM1200 0 1200 Max Outgoing Co Maximum Outgoing Co Calls When this value is set to 0 IPECS 50 amp 0 Calls it means that there is no limit of outgoing co calls MFIM100 0 42 MFIM300 0 200 MFIM600 0 400 MFIM1200 0 600 3 212 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Selecting the Zone RTP Relay Group returns the RTP Relay ON OFF data input page Figure Figure 3 5 12 5 1 Enter the desired Zone and Group numbers and click Load to assign Zone characteristics Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DEAR File Edit view Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm Enter Zone Number 1 32 aril Enter RTP Relay Group Number 1 15 Zone Number 1 RTP Relay Group Number 1 Attribute Value I Relay Group 1 M Relay Group 2 Relay Group 3 Relay Group 4 I Relay Group 5 Relay Group 6
376. e a 68 68 68 68 68 GROUP conference group STATION ICR Code for a station to activate 587 587 587 587 587 ICR forward PICK UP GROUP PICK Pick Up Group Call Pick up dial 588 588 588 588 588 UP code ACCESS CO GROUP Dial code to access a CO Line n a n a n a n a 589 or IP channel from a CO IP group EMERGENCY PAGE Code for emergency page 589 589 589 589 589 REMOTE MEX Code to control the mobile 580 580 580 580 580 CONTROL extension settings remotely Agent ON OFF Duty In Code to change the state of the 58 58 58 58 58 ALL GRP Agent ON Off duty in all hunt group 3 24 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Selecting the Station Data program group returns the Station Data sub menu displayed in Figure 3 5 2 1 iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DER File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm irec IPECS VD96M E 0Ap APRIO8 Boot Version 1 04h JAN OF Wee ule Station Type P110 Station Attributes P111 113 Station ISDN Attributes P114 Flex Buttons P115 129 Station COS P116 COMP Group Access P117 Internal Page Zone P113 Ptt Group Access P119 Preset Call Forward P120 Idle Line Selection P121 IP Call Access P122 Preset FWD Timer P123 Linked Station P124 Station ICM Group P125 P Attnbutes P126 Web Administration LIK300 Version iPECS VD96M E 0Ap APR 08 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Right
377. e according to the re ordered logical number Check Admin DB Mave option Uncheck Admin DB Move option 0 6 0 There is no change in Admin DB But in case of STA G W or phone you have to program again below admin list even if you checked Admin DB Move option if below admin have station number in their attributes then you have to program again Flex buttons PGM115 Station Call Forward amp Preset Call Forward PGM120 CO IP Ring Assignment PGM144 ICLID Ring Assignment PGM204 Flexible DID table PGM231 Station Group Member Assignment PGM190 and so on Figure 3 5 1 2 2 Device Port Number Change Pop up Table 3 5 1 2 1 Device Port Number Change ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION DEFAULT Sequence Display sequence number of device Logical Number Display logical number of device Device Type Display the device type Device ID Change the device type Mac Address Change the Mac address of device None IP Address Change device s IP address in IP v4 format 10 10 10 10 254 Device Delete Delete the device Max Port Display maximum port number of device Current Port Display current registered port number of device New Port Set port number to be registered after system restarting Admin DB Move If this option is checked Admin DB would be moved checked according to the re ordered logical number Virtual Registration The system support virtual device regi
378. e agent and connected party when the supervisor activates the monitor feature 13 When a call comes into the group and Station or Grp ACD 622 ALTER DEST S H SPD Dial 1 3 there are no group members available the call will be routed to the assigned alternate destination Number System SPD 2 99 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance 21 ACD 622 ICLID USAGE 1 ON 0 OFF OFF Within 5 seconds of a guaranteed announcement the caller may dial digits as an ICLID The User dialed digits are compared to the ICLID Table entries PGM CODE 203 for routing or for a single dialed digit to the ACD CCR table Pam CODE 191 Btn 23 0 OFF 1 ON Issue 5 0 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 14 ACD 622 SP VISOR TMR When calls have been in queue longer 000 999 030 000 999 030 than the Supervisor Timer the ACD seconds supervisor is notified by a display of the longest queue time 15 ACD 622 SP VISOR C CNT When the number of calls in queue 00 99 00 00 99 00 exceeds the Supervisor Call Counts the ACD Supervisor is notified by a display of queued calls count 16 WAIT IF 1ST ANNC BUSY When a call assigned to receive an 0 OFF ON 1 0N 0 0FF ON announcement arrives and all channels 1 ON are busy the call may wait with Ringback until a channel is available
379. e and day of week display Refer to Table 2 3 6 9 1 and Table 2 3 6 9 2 for a description of the modes the data entries required and LCD displays for each attribute LCD DISPLAY MODE PRESS FLEX KEY 1 3 Refer to Table 2 3 6 9 1 DISPLAY Table 2 3 6 9 1 LCD DISPLAY MODE PGM 169 Button DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 LCD DATE MODE Sets the Date display as month day or 1 MM DD YY DDMMYY 1 MMDD 0 DDMM DUMMY day month 0 DD MM YY 2 LCD TIME MODE Sets the Time display mode as 12 hour 1 12 Hour Mode 12 Hour 1 12H 0 24H 12H or 24 hour military time 0 24 Hour Mode 3 LCD LANGUAGE 00 14 Sets the Language used in the LCD 00 14 00 ENGLISH 00 refer to Table 2 3 6 9 2 below English 4 LCD WEEKDAY MODE 0 2 Sets the Day of Week DoW display 0 use btn 1 Use btn 1 PGM 169 BTN 1 0 mode 1 MMM DD 0 no DoW see PGM 169 Bin1 DoW 1 display mmm dd DoW alpha 2 MM DD DoW month display overrides btn 1 2 display mm dd DoW numeric month display overrides btn 1 Table 2 3 6 9 2 LCD LANGUAGE SELECTION ENTRY LANGUAGE 00 English 01 Italian 02 Finnish 03 Dutch 04 Swedish 05 Danish 06 Norwegian 07 Hebrew 08 German 09 French 10 Portuguese 11 Spanish 12 Korean 13 Estonian 14 Russian 2 77 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance The LED flash rate for various f
380. e counter and Table C STA Exception Table E Exception Table E No Restriction Only Local Call LD No Restriction COS9 governs the dialing governs the dialing code counter and Table C STA Exception Table D amp E Exception Table No Restriction Only Local Call LD No Restriction COS 10 governs the dialing D amp E governs the code counter and dialing Table C STA Exception Table A amp B Exception Table A amp B No Restriction Only Local Call LD No Restriction COS 11 and D amp E governs the and D amp E governs code counter and dialing the dialing Table C 2 33 im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 2 3 3 6 CO IP Group Access PGM Code 117 Stations can be allowed or denied access to CO Lines and IP Channels by group refer to CO Line Attributes pam cope 141 button 1 As a default all stations are allowed access to all groups except Private Lines group 00 and unused CO Lines The CO Line of an RSGM is assigned as a Private Line by default PROCEDURE CO IP GROUP ACCESS 1 Press the PGM button and dial 117 ENTER STA RANGE 100 110 CO IP GRP Use the dial pad to enter a station range Ex 100 110 For a single station enter the same number twice PRESS FLEX KEY 01 20 The first 20 Flex button LEDs indicate group access for the iPECS Micro iPECS 50 amp MFIM100 For other MFIMs the first 24 Flex buttons indicate access for Line groups 1 to 24 To see groups 25 to 48 and
381. e notification to attendant when user dial 0 OFF ON notify emergency number 1 0N 3 way conference Use MCIM to make 3 way conference if it is MCIM 0 LOCAL MCIM preference otherwise conference will be done on each member 1 MCIM First digit in SPD If it is 0 then the first in speed will be used for display 0 DISPLAY 0 DISPLAY security otherwise DTMF will be send SECURITY SECURITY 1 DIGIT SIP pound usage ON Send digit when user press 0 OFF OFF OFF The is used for sending complete 1 0N VSF VMIM SMTP port SMTP port o VSF VMIM f 00001 655 00025 35 3 84 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 162 Selecting System Password will display the System Password data entry page Figure 3 5 5 2 1 Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DAR File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm Ta i i H Log Out IPECS D96M E 0Ap APRIOS Enter Current User Password Enter New User Password MAX 12 digits Confirm New User Password Enter Current Admin Password Enter New Admin Password MAX 12 digits Alama Attributes P163 Senam Ney Admin kasor Attendant Assignnent P164 m e Multicast RTP RTCP P165 Enten Comers Maint Peseword DISA COS P166 Enter New Maint Password MAX 12 Digits System Attnbutes P160 161 DID DISA Destination P 167 Confirm New Maint Passw
382. e system to recognize the station s capability and set default Flex button configurations In addition for iPECS DSS BLF consoles the associated station is input 3 26 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODES 111 113 Selecting Station Attributes will display the Station Attributes data input page Figure 3 5 2 2 1 Enter a valid station range and click Load to enter Station Attributes data Selecting the blue colored text in the Table header will sort the table based on the selected column Use the check mark to indicate which attributes to define data for checked attributes is stored for the entire range of stations when saved Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer Ce File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm Tam iPECS VD96N E 0Ap APR 08 s Boot Version 1 0Ah JAN O7 Enter Station Range _Load Station Range From 100 to 100 Order Uncheck All Attribute Auto Speaker Selection xI xI Station Type P110 Call Forward DND x Station ISDN Attributes P114 Flex Buttons P 115 129 Station COS P116 COMP Group Access P117 Internal Page Zone P113 Ptt Group Access P119 Preset Call Forward P120 Idle Line Selection P121 IP Call Access P122 Preset FWD Timer P123 Linked Station P124 Station ICM Group P125 Station SIP Attributes P126 x Data Security Howling Tone to S
383. e then used as back up channels or only for devices in the Destination Zone Src RTP Relay GW Sequence number of MFIM VoIP or VOIM to handle Slot Seq Packet relay for Source Zone Dest RTP Relay GW Sequence number of MFIM VoIP or VOIM to handle Slot Seq Dest packet relay When Utilization is Separate the channels are used for devices in the destination Zone otherwise they are used as back up for both sides Max Inter Zone Maximum Inter Zone Connections between source zone IPECS Micro 0 Conns and destination zone When this value is set to 0 it 0 26 means that there is no limit of inter zone connections IPECS 50 between zones 0 50 MFIM100 0 70 MFIM300 0 300 MFIM600 0 600 MFIM1200 0 1200 3 215 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 444 Selecting the Zone Holiday Assignments returns the data input page Figure 3 5 12 7 1 Enter the desired Source and Destination Zone numbers range and click Load to assign Zone holiday Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm H Log Out Enter Zone Number C toaa Zone Number Range From 1 To 1 Attribute Value Ring 7 Mode Timed Ring Mode v YYMMUDD YYIMMDD Vacation j format Must be 12 digits p P440 Inter Zone Attribute P441 MMDD format Must be 4 digits
384. earch hunt for an idle station in the group The system allows assignment of three hunt processes Circular Terminal and UCD In addition there are eight 8 functional groups available ACD Automatic Call Distribution based on UCD hunt Ring Call Pick Up External Voice Mail SLT connected VSF Voice Mail iPECS Feature Server Voice Mail Network Voice Mail and UCS Groups The Station Group capacities for the iPECS system are shown in Table 2 3 7 1 Table 2 3 7 1 STATION GROUP CAPACITY CAPACITY ITEM iPECS Micro iPECS 50 MFIM100 MFIM300 600 MFIM1200 Number of Groups 12 40 40 48 100 Stations in a Group 26 50 70 70 200 Certain types of groups can incorporate announcements which are given to the calling party The system s VSF or VMIM can store up to seventy 70 announcements for use with Station Groups Note that a station can belong to multiple groups if the groups are all of the same type Also note that when a station group is assigned to a group type Hunt ACD VM FS VM VSF VM Net VM UCS and Ring the group attributes are initialized to the default values 2 94 im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 2 3 7 1 Station Group Assignment PGM Code 190 Under Station Group Assignments the type members and Pick Up attribute are assigned to the Station Group Note for the Net VM group the network number must be assigned as the Net VM group member station Re
385. ecececececececacecececaeacaeaeaeaeseaeaeacaeaearaeaeanaeaeaess 3 193 3 5 10 2 Remote MUSIC Address siisii aiin aaan aai 3 194 3 5 10 3 Remot Ext COMAGCT sissccccsscdisccscecscecesiactadesicaticesiactactsssccddesiecsisivasieledesbuc vacasiessevabacidusdsncs 3 195 3 5 10 4 RSGM Alarm Attributes cccccccccccccccesecececsccececeeseeusussecseceesesusaseseeseseesenensuteareesseneneneass 3 196 3 5 11 TNET Central Control Networking Data ssssssnsessennreenresssrnresrsreresssrrresss 3 198 3 5 11 1 Tnet Basic Attributes PGM 330 ccccccsccccensccesssecsssceeseeceessecssssceessecesseenseseesseceesseceaeeees 3 199 3 95 11 2 Tnet CM Attributes PGM 331 eriarstina aeaiia 3 200 3 5 11 3 Tnet LM Attributes PGM 332 ccccccccccsssccesscceescecesssseeseeceessecessseesseesensecenseseesseceenseceaneees 3 202 3 5 11 4 Tnet FOPSTN table PGM 333 cccccccccccsssccesecesssecesssesesseceessecsasssesseesneeceesecsseeesenseceesees 3 203 3 5 11 5 TNET LM EXT CONTACT PGM 334 ccccccsccccesssccsssceessecesesecsscsesseecsesecsseseeseeeseesecseeees 3 204 3 5 11 6 TNET LM MUSIC ALARM ATTRIBUTES PGM 335 336 cccccccsscccsscccessecsssceeeecenseeees 3 205 OZ Zne Datnes a a a e e e iei eeii 3 206 3 5 12 1 Devic Zone NUMDEL cccccccccccecececececececececececeecececececececececececececacececstececececececececaeanatanaess 3 207 3 5 12 2 Device ZONE Attributes cccccccccccccecececececececececececeececececececececececececececececececacecacacauaea
386. ecececececececscececececececevececececececetecaeaeaeas 2 35 2 3 3 10 Idle Line Selection PGM Code 121 ccccccccccccccccccccccccececececacacacacacacacacacauacauacananaeananananas 2 36 2 3 3 11 Station IP Attributes PGM Code 122 cccccccccssccccccecsesscescceceseesensnsessecseseeeeseressearseseeeeenes 2 37 2 3 3 12 Station Timers PGM Code 123 cccccccccessssccecssssececssssececsesecesesssesecsssesecsnseseesssseseensnnsess 2 37 2 3 3 13 Linked Station Table PGM Code 124 cccccccccccecccccccccecececececceecececacacacacacacaeacauanaeanananaeas 2 38 2 3 3 14 ICM Tenancy Group PGM Code 125 cccccceecceesseceeneecenececeaeeseeneeceeeeeseneseseeeeeeeessnnenees 2 40 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 2 3 3 15 LSS Label Edit PGM Code 129 wo cceeecscccccsssccceessececesnececsensaececseaaeeeeseaaeesesesaeeeseenaeeeeeees 2 41 2 3 4 BOARD GATEWAY DATA PGM CODES 130 to 132 cceees 2 41 2 3 4 1 H323 VoIP Attributes PGM CODE 130 cssccccsesssceceessececsesnnesecseseesecseseseeseseseesenseeees 2 41 2 3 4 2 T1 E1 PRI Attributes PGM CODE 131 ccccccccccesssceesscccessecesssecsececseeceussecssessessecesnesecsaees 2 43 2 3 4 3 Board Base Attributes PGM CODE 132 wecccccessscccssssssecssssececesnnesecsennesecessensessennnseseesnaees 2 43 2 3 5 CO LINE DATA PGM CODES 140 to 151 seciecuncaneiscersstoimeuscihantncacactncennes 2 45 2 3 5 1 CO Service Type PGM Code 140 0 cccsccecceecceeseeceeneeeceeeees
387. ecevececacacacecacacacacacaracacacacauacanaeauanananaess 3 40 3 52 10 ADO Line S lection rsrs anar E E E a AS 3 41 3 5 2 11 Station IP AttriDUteS cccccceccececececececececececececececececececececececeececscececececececececececececeteceteteretss 3 42 35 212 Station TMe Sene a a aa a a a i aea aa iaaii 3 43 B 5 2 13 Link d Station cccccccccececcececececececececeeececececececececesecececeeeceececetetecetecetececerstecstecstecetecetetetecetee 3 44 3 5 2 14 Station ICM Tenancy Group ssscccccccecesececneeecenecessaecseneececaeecsaessenaecseaeeceeneseaeeeeeeeessnneseaes 3 46 3 5 2 15 Station SIP AttriDUtOS 2 oo ccccccccccccccccccececececececcecececececececececececececececececacacacacacacaearaeaeanataeananas 3 47 3 5 2 16 Station Name Display ccccccccccceceenceeeneeceeeeeceeeeessaecseneeceeeeecsaesseaaecseaeeesassseneeceeeeetenneeeaes 3 49 BBL Station CODY mienie sath Daca ent eins eaaa aaa aaa a aaaea a adaa nana Doai eriari 3 50 3 5 3 Board gateway Module Data ives sssuacece scvysncacetee veaniaangsmin ss vobndesdeadecesdeaodecedapovaaben 3 51 3 5 3 1 H323 VOIP Attributes ccccccecceccccccceceeeeuecesececceceenensesusecececeeneususuueeeteceenesnsuseseesecserenineas 3 52 3 5 3 2 TA PRU Alli DUN O Senarier naia aiaei a aiene aa aAA 3 54 3 5 3 3 Board Base AttriDUte ccccccccccccccccccccecccccecececcceceeeueceueeauananecansaeaeceseaeneneneneneseusaeaeaaaaaaas 3 55 3 5 3 4 SIP Gateway Attrib l e Snaim i i vd ees ee lee de 3 5
388. ecked Overflow Timer A call to the group will remain at the last station in the 000 600 180 group or can be sent to the assigned Overflow seconds Destination after expiration of the Overflow Timer Warp Up Timer After terminating any call a Group member will be 000 999 002 maintained in a busy state for the duration of the seconds Wrap Up timer No Answer Timer Calls to a station in the group are directed to the 00 99 15 station if unavailable or unanswered in the No seconds Answer Timer the call can be routed based on the assigned hunt process Pilot Hunt A circular terminal hunt group can be set so that only ON ON calls to the pilot number station group number will OFF hunt REPT No Member If a call is received and no members are on duty an ON OFF ICM call will return re order tone while a CO IP call OFF will be routed to the Attendant 3 138 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Music Source A Music source can be assigned so that calls to the none Intv Ext 1 group will receive audio from the assigned source in Int Ext 1 place of ring back tone Ext 2 VSF MOH Allow Forward Member A member activating Call forward may be placed in ON OFF an unavailable state for hunt group calls ON When OFF OFF group calls are sent to the member as normal OFF VSF Wait Station When a call overflows or routes to the VM group a Station Number stat
389. ed ene aoa ENEE 1 2 1 3 Piuahzati Nesnenin i aN Ea res E E E EEEN ERES 1 3 1 4 RegisStra ti N essre o ri edea a a E e iiei 1 3 1 4 1 Normal Registration Process sssssssessssessessererrsrrsssrestreererresrrrererrsrrserssresrrsresree 1 3 1 4 2 Replacement Module Registration c cecccseccseccsecccsccescuscceescceceaeceauccesceeceusceues 1 4 1 5 Virtual LAN Sanini enne nain a E E E N S 5 1 6 Program Men Structure voyenn E a a A 1 5 2 Station Admin Programming s sssesesesesesesrererererereesrsrsrersrseserereer 2 1 2 1 GENET Alae E AE EAE E E AE 2 1 21 1 LCD amp Button Functions cccsscccessecentseccessecetecessscenssscenssscesevensssceeesesensesenses 2 1 2 1 2 Alphanumeric Data Entries oo ceccceeccsecccssccssccuscceesceusceusccuasceeceaeceaceaneceneees 2 1 2 1 3 Required Data Entries ccccccecsseccssccescccseccssccescsccessceesceesceesscaeseeeceacsasscesseeusces 2 2 2 2 Data Entry Mod eien a a e aie hse agate ce aac tetra ae En ers 2 2 2 3 PROCEDURES FOR DATA ENTRY sccisiscvscesseesccanasssaaxewseuaiasssebesannsereustoaes 2 2 2al SYSTEM ID PGM CODE LOO seics scetaceiceridsscniesseciceaiezenceehiis E a AEE a 2 2 2 3 2 NUMBERING PLANS DATA PGM CODES 102 to 109 7 eseese 2 4 2 3 2 1 System IP Address Plan PGM Code 102 u csccccssseceeseceeeeeceseeeeneecseneeecsaeeseneeeeeeeersnnetsnes 2 4 2 3 2 2 Device IP Address Plan PGM Code 103 wicccccccccccccecececececececececececececececeeecacecaca
390. edundancy the field is ignored 1 2 3 5 DNS IP Address IP Address of Domain Name Server which iPECS will use to resolve urls to an IP address The DNS provides the resolution after receiving the name from iPECS 0 0 0 0 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 104 Selecting CO Gateway Sequence Number will display the input entry page Figure 4 1 Selecting the blue colored text in the Table header will sort the table based on the selected column F iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 150 150 131 21 1 a_index htm TT ed j iPECSVD96M E 0Ap APR 08 Boot Version 1 0Ah JANIO7 Type Sequence Num IP Address VOIP GW 150 150 131 211 ISDN PRI GW 10 211 131 39 nN System ID P100 LGCM LOOP 3 GW 10 211 131 18 System amp Device IP P102 103 ISDN PRIGW 10 211 131 40 ISDN BRI GW 10 211 131 30 ISDN BRI GW 10 211 131 31 w n Flexible Station Number P105 Flexible Numbering Plan P 106 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 4 1 CO Gateway Sequence Number Each CO IP gateway Module is assigned a Sequence Number for each MAC address The LGCM4 DID and BRIM have two 2 MAC addresses and thus they are assigned two Sequence Numbers Other gateway Modules and the sys
391. efined destination see above Forced Forward Destination Forced Forward must be enabled for the group OFF ON OFF Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help SS amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm TT et iPECS VD96M E 0Ap APRI08 Boot Version 1 04h JAN 07 Group Number Station Group Assignment P190 Group Number is 621 Group Type Ring Group Pick up Attribute OFF Attribute VSF Announce 1 Timer Guar Anne Timer 0 Wait If Busy 000 999 sec VSF Announce 2 Timer 000 999 sec VSF Announce 1 Location YSF Announce 1 Auto Drop 00 70 VSF Announce 2 Location VSF Announce 2 Auto Drop 00 70 VSF Announce 2 Repeat Timer 000 999 sec VSF Announce 2 Repeat STAINET or Hunt Station or Group Number VSF Announce C 0 Drop Overflow Destination Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved 01 70 Figure 3 5 6 3 3 Ring Group Attributes Table 3 5 6 3 3 RING GROUP ATTRIBUTES Internet ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT VSF Announce 1 Timer If all stations in the group are busy when a call is offered the call may continue to wait queue for an available station If the queue period exceeds the VSF Annou
392. egister devices employing MAC addresses in place of the plug amp play mechanism using the MFIM registration DIP switch The system allows a range of MAC addresses to be entered allowing devices with a MAC address in the range to register with the iPECS regardless of the Registration DIP switch position For convenience two ranges can be defined in the database Once a device has been registered the database entries are eliminated and the device will remain registered unless deleted from the device list Device IP Address As gateway Modules and terminals are registered to the iPECS a gateway number is assigned which indicates the order of registration Also based on the type of device CO IP gateway Terminal MISC VSF gateway the system assigns a logical Sequence Number Thus Sequence Numbers for CO VOIM gateway Modules Terminals and the MISC VSF gateway are independently assigned based on the type of gateway These Sequence Numbers are employed to provide a relationship between the physical MAC address and the logical port numbers of the device For the RSGM the CO Line port is assigned a CO IP gateway Sequence Number and the iPECS Phone and SLT port are assigned Terminal Sequence Numbers The system may assign a default private IP address to each Sequence Number If desired this program may be used to modify the assigned IP address for each gateway Module and iPECS Phone iPECS devices may be assigned as part of a Centralized Co
393. eive Call 1 9999 NULL TCP PORT NULL Information output 6 ON LINE SMDR 1 9999 Defines the TCP port used for the On line 1 9999 NULL TCP PORT NULL SMDR 7 TRACE 1 9999 Defines the TCP port used for the Trace 1 9999 NULL TCP PORT NULL output 8 DEBUG 1 9999 Defines the TCP port used for the Debug 1 9999 NULL TCP PORT NULL output 9 Defines the TCP port used for Unified 1 9999 NULL ACD PACK 1 9999 TCP PORT NULL Messages 2 84 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 2 3 6 16 Break Make Ratio PGM Code 176 For Pulse dial CO Lines the system supports 10pps and the percent break make ratios of 67 33 or 60 40 PROCEDURE BREAK MAKE RATIO 1 Press the PGM button and dial 176 1 66 33 0 60 40 60 40 Dial the digit 1 or 2 for the desired Break Make ratio 1 66 33 2 60740 To save Break Make ratio data press the SAVE button 2 3 6 17SMDR Attributes PGM Code 177 Station Message Detail Recording SMDR is an ASCII output of details on both incoming and outgoing calls Various SMDR attributes can be assigned including output records for all calls or LD only call cost per pulse when using call metering etc Refer to Table 2 3 6 17 1 for a description of each Attribute LCD displays and the data entries required PROCEDURE SMDR ATTRIBUTES 1 Press the PGM button an
394. ember 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 13 Music Source 0 2 1 14 Member Forward 1 ON 0 OFF ON Mailbox Message Wait Station Station Number None Mailbox Password 12 digits None 19 WAIT IF 1ST ANNC BUSY 1 ON 0 OFF ON TERMINAL GROUP 1 VSF Announce 1 Timer 000 999 015 1 second increments 2 VSF Announce 2 Timer 000 999 0 1 second increments 3 VSF Announce 1 Location 00 70 00 4 VSF Announce 2 Location 00 70 00 5 VSF Announce 2 Repeat Timer 000 999 000 1 second increments D 18 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button SUB MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 6 VSF Announce 2 Repeat 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 7 Overflow Destination Station Group VSF Speed 8 Overflow Timer 000 600 180 1 second increments 9 Wrap Up Timer 002 999 002 1 second increments 10 No Answer Timer 00 99 15 1 second increments 11 Pilot Hunt 1 ON 0 OFF ON 12 Report No Member 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 13 Music Source 0 2 1 14 Member Forward 1 ON 0 OFF ON Mailbox Message Wait Station Station Number None Mailbox Password 12 digits None 19 WAIT IF 1ST ANNC BUSY 1 ON 0 OFF ON UCD ACD GROUP 1 VSF Announce 1 Timer 000 999 15 1 second increments 2 VSF Announce 2 Timer 000 999 000 1 second increments 3 VSF Announce 1 Location 00 70 00 4 VSF Announce 2 Location 00 70 00 5 VSF Announce 2 Repeat Timer 000 999 00 1 second increments 6 VSF Announce 2 Repeat 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 7 Overflow Destination Station Group VSF Speed 8 Overflow Timer 000 600 180 1 second increments 9 Wrap
395. ems are connected to the same default gateway router it may be advantageous to define different ports for each system For systems employing the iPECS Micro there are 33 RTP Real time protocol and 33 RTCP Real time Control protocol For iPECS 50 or MFIM100 there are 36 RTP Real time protocol and 36 RTCP Real time Control protocol ports that are defined For systems employing other MFIM models there are 54 RIP Real time protocol and 54 RTCP Real time Control protocol ports that are defined PROCEDURE MULTICAST RTP RTCP 1 Press the PGM button and dial 165 PRESS FLEX KEY 1 2 MULTICAST RTP Press Flex button 1 for RTP ports or Flex button 2 for RTCP ports PRESS FLEX_KEY 01 24 Press the desired Flex button refer to or The 24 Flex buttons are used to assign ports for the first 24 RTP RTCP functions To assign port numbers for additional RTP RTCP functions use the VOL UP VOL DOWN buttons Referto or 2 Use the dial pad to enter desired data for the port refer to or DISPLAY Press the SAVE button to store the Attendant assignments data entry 2 66 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Table 2 3 6 5 1 MULTI CAST RTP RTCP PORTS PGM 165 iPE
396. end the new page to the system and save the modified data Some of the Web pages include blue colored text in the table headers Selecting this text will order the table based on the column selected In some cases where mentioned it may be necessary to reset the system The system can be reset manually as described in the iPECS Installation and Description Manual or by selecting the Reset System button on the Initialization Web page 3 3 2 Maintenance amp Admin Password On the Home page click Admin amp Maintenance the Web server returns the password Web page refer to Figure 3 3 2 1 The iPECS System supports a multi level password structure The Maintenance Password controls the access rights of the Admin and User level passwords It is highly recommended that a password be assigned In addition the Web password can be encrypted see section 3 3 3 A iPECS Web Administration Microsoft Internet Explorer BAE Ele Edit wiew Favorites Tools Help ay ress http 150 150 131 211 systempwd htm Internet Figure 3 3 2 1 System Password 3 6 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 iPECS will when enabled in PGM CODE 161 implement decryption of the password employing RC 6 block encryption iPECS employs a Sun Java Virtual Machine applet to implement AES encryption The PC entering the Password must have a JAVA Virtual Machine and the JRE Java Runtime Environment Explorer option enabled to proper
397. ension SIP User ID Table gt wm S Contacta Extension SIP Userib Table K Remote Party Id Extension SIP User ID Table Offnet Call Route ID Transit CO to CO Direct Call Forward Vv From Contact ld ORG hd v P Asserted Identity svsatD Vv Remote Party Id ORG hd Offnet Call Forward by Station v From Contact Id EXT g Vv P Asserted Identity EXT X v Remote Party Id EXT X Mobile Extension Externel Call Vv From Contact ld ORG z Vv P Asserted Identity EXT x Vv Remote Party Id EXT X Fixed Table Assignment Vv SIP User ID Table Index 4 External CODEC Priority Configuration Vv Ist priority none Vv 2nd priority none v 3rd priority none J Vv 4th priority none Vv 5th priority none a SIP Call Setup FailOver Option v Call Setup No Response Time 10 0 3 10Sec Vv FailOver CO Group Number 1 20 CO Group Figure 3 5 3 4 1 SIP Gateway Base Attributes Various parameters must be entered for proper operation of SIP Trunking including the SIP proxy and Registrar as outlined in Table 3 5 3 4 1 Table 3 5 3 4 1 SIP GATEWAY ATTRIBUTES ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Soft Switch Type Allows identification of soft switch to support extended Broadsoft Normal soft switch capabilities Normal KT SK TELINK Service Provider KT SK TELINK Proxy Server Address SIP Proxy server IP address IP address Primary DNS Domain Name Server Max 32 Characters Secondary DNS 2 back up DNS Max 32 Characters
398. entary Hold Flashing Rate 00 14 8 480 IPM 13 DSS button Flashing Rate for CO Ring 00 14 2 30 IPM 14 DSS button Flashing Rate for ICM all 00 14 3 60 IPM Call 15 DSS button Flashing Rate for ICM Ring 00 14 10 120 IPM associate 16 DSS button Flashing Rate for a station 00 14 3 60 IPM in DND 17 DSS button Flashing Rate for a station 00 14 7 480 IPM in Lock out Flutter 18 DSS button Flashing Rate for a station 00 14 2 30 IPM in pre selected message mode 19 DSS button Flashing Rate for a station 00 14 3 60 IPM in ICM Hold 20 DSS button Flashing Rate for a station 00 14 10 120 IPM in other case 21 CIQ 1 Threshold 00 14 3 60 IPM 22 CIQ 2 Threshold 00 14 10 120 IPM 23 CIQ 3 Threshold 00 14 5 240 IPM im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button SUB MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 24 ACD DND button 00 14 10 120 IPM 25 ACD Warning tone 00 14 10 120 IPM 26 ACD Help Button 00 14 10 120 IPM 27 Voice Record button 00 14 5 240 IPM 28 Message Wait button 00 14 2 30 IPM PGM Code 171 Music Source 1 BGM Type 0 3 1 0 No 1 Musici 2 Music 2 3 VMIM VSF 2 MOH Type 0 3 1 0 No 1 Musici 2 Music 2 3 VMIM VSF 3 Int Ext1 Music 0 Internal Internal 0 Internal source 1 External 1 External Source PGM Code 172 PBX Access Codes 1 4 PBX Access Code Max 2 digits Maximum 4 PBX access code PGM Code 173 Ringing Line Preference Priority 1 Transfer CO Call 1 4 1 2 Recalling CO Call 1 4 2 3 Incoming CO Call 1 4 3 4 Queued
399. enter the required data refer to Table 2 3 12 1 1 Press the SAVE button to save any changes Table 2 3 12 1 1 REMOTE DEVICE PGM 430 Button DISPLAY REMARK RANGE DEFAULT 001 DISP IP ADDRESS Display registered Remote device IP address IPv4 None 1 IP 150 150 57 75 Address 001 SET MAC ADDRESS Use to input MAC address if the RSGM must 12 digits None 2 MAC 00 40 50 Q0 17 4D be replaced 001 STA DEV LIST Display registered RSGM iPECS Phone None 3 NONE device list 4 NONE 001 COL DEV LIST Display registered RSGM COL device list None 5 NONE 2 140 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 The iPECS system does not provide BGM MOH to an RSGM The RSGM employs local BGM and MOH facilities which reduces traffic load on the WAN and IP channel processors The RSGM uses IP Multicast for local BGM and MOH transport There are two music sources available with the RSGM an internal tone music source and an external source may be connected Separate UDP port numbers are required for RTP and RTCP packets for each source The system default established port numbers are programmable RSGM MUSIC ADDR ENTER RANGE 001 035 001 001 MULTICAST ADDR PRESS FLEX 1 2 Refer to Table 2 3 12 2 1 DISPLAY Table 2 3 12 2 1 RSGM MULTI CAST RTP PORTS PGM 431 Button DISPLAY REMARK RANGE DEFAULT MCAST RTP PORT Press Flex button 1 2 t
400. enty three 23 character Site Name and the local My Area Code maybe defined This information is used to set gain frequencies and other system characteristics specific to the country and regional regulatory requirements The Site Name is primarily useful for the installer programmer as a reference to customer In addition the system can be programmed to select one of eight 8 base Flexible Number Plans refer to Appendix B Individual items from the selected base Numbering Plan can be changed under Flexible Numbering Plan in section 3 5 1 6 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Selecting Device Port Num Change 101 will display the input entry page Figure 3 5 1 33 1 A 5 0Dt MA 09 0A JUL 08 a i System oveniew If you want to delete or change port number of device please click sequence number of that device Virtual Registration Order Seq Logical Num Type Current Port MAC Address IP Address System ID 100 CO Gateway 1 6 VOIP GW 6 00405282790 192 168 123 47 7 35 ISDN PRIGW 30 00405a13dc99 10 123 47 18 STA 200 Phone 8024D 1 201 Phone 7024D 1 202 Phone 7024D 1 203 Phone 24B i 00405a017bc3 10 123 47 13 204 Phone 24B 1 00405a127eea 10 123 47 14 205 Phone 7016D 1 00405a12b996 10 123 47 15 1 i i 8 amp Device IP 102 103 quence Number 104 N 001a7ea3583c 10 123 47 19 00405a 15673 10 123 47 11 001a7e005133 10 1
401. er used in accepting Received signal 10 60 40 seconds N200 The terminal shall provide one N200 counter for each 1 5 3 logical link it supports The default value of this counter shall be 3 N201 The N201 counter sets the maximum number of 250 300 260 Octets in the ISDN information field bytes N202 If the terminal transmits a TEI Identify Request 1 5 3 message to request assignment of a TEI the terminal shall provide one N202 counter for each logical link that it supports N204 The N204 counter establishes the maximum number 1 5 1 of XID re transmissions from the terminal K Value The terminal shall provide one K counter for each 1 5 1 logical link it supports DID Name Maintenance For DID lines the CLI is normally displayed only 1 0N OFF during ringing If enabled here the CLI will be 0 OFF displayed for the entire call duration ISDN Redirecting Number When the system need to send Redirecting number 0 NO SERVICE NO to the ISDN for an off net call the Redirecting 1 ORG CLI SERVICE number can be either the original caller s CLI or the 2 CFW CLI CLI of the Off net forwarding transferring station If it is no service then system will not send this information If it is OGR CLI original CLI then system will send original CLI that is received from incoming CO line If itis CFW CLI then system will send redirecting CLI that is CLI for call off net call forwarded station 3 76 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance
402. ering Unit Selects the call metering signal from the PSTN to indicate See Table None call cost refer to Table 3 5 4 1 3 3 5 4 1 3 Line Drop CPT Each CO Line can be programmed to disconnect if a ON OFF second dial tone is detected Not Support OFF DISA Account Code With DISA Account Code ON users are required to ON ON enter a DISA Authorization code Codes are entered in OFF the Authorization Code Table section 3 5 8 7 CO Line MOH A held call can be connected to one 1 of four 4 None Int Ext 1 possible audio sources while on Hold as Music on Hold Refer to Sys MOH Hold Int Ext 1 Ext 2 VSF MOH CO Dial Tone ISDN Lines may provide a digital signal rather than actual ON ON tones In this case the iPECS can provide the tones If OFF CO Ring Back Tone the ISDN provides the tone the Tone is ON for an ON OFF iPECS system generated tone the tone is set to OFF OFF CO Error Tone ON OFF OFF 3 63 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT CO Busy Tone ON OFF OFF DISA IP Access Permits DISA users access to the VoIP facilities of the ON OFF system OFF Flash Timer This entry sets the duration of a Flash on the CO Line 000 300 050 10 msec 500 msec Open Loop This entry sets the duration of open loop that will be 00 20 04 recognized as a Disconnect Signal 100 msec ICL
403. ervice Attribute RTP Relay GW Slot Seq DittSeve Coe fe id First CO Access Firewall Protect Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Figure 3 5 10 4 1 Remote Service Attributes The RSGM incorporates circuitry to monitor an external contact This contact is most often employed as an Alarm indicator or Doorbell The Alarm attributes define the operation of the monitoring circuitry For the Alarm the signal to the RSGM stations can be repeating or a single burst the former is often desired For the Doorbell a single tone is sent each time the contact activates Refer to Table 3 5 10 4 1 for a description of the features and the data entries required for each attribute The RSGM provides Background Music BGM to the local iPECS Phone It also provides MOH to the local CO Line when placed on hold BGM is provided from the assigned Music source which may be an internal or an externally connected source MOH may use the assigned Music source or an internal hold tone 3 196 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 When connected over an unmanaged network internet an RSGM communicates with the iPECS resources and other users by way of a VoIP channel Except for the MFIM600 and MFIM1200 MFIMs include a multi channel VoIP interface which is intended for use over a managed network LAN WAN The VOIMs Voice over IP Modu
404. es During initialization a default database is established refer to section 1 3 and Appendix A D However there are several data entries which MUST be completed to assure proper operation of the system The system employs the Country Code refer to section 2 3 1 to establish tone and gain plans specific to the country Also the MFIM IP address sub net mask and Default Gateway Router IP address refer to section 2 3 2 1 must be assigned for proper external IP call operation and WAN access as well as remote Web Admin access 2 2 DATA ENTRY MODE All data entry is accomplished from an Admin Station or station assigned for data entry Station Attributes II PGM CODE 113 Flex button 1 After initialization and registration any iPECS Phone may access the system database In addition as default there is no Station Admin password defined To enter the PROGRAM MODE from the Admin Station follow the procedure below In the left column of the chart are the LCD displays and in the right column are step by step instructions to modify database items PROCEDURE STATION 100 T Press the PGM button Dial and 04 SEP 01 02 49 PM Enter the Admin password Confirmation tone is received ENTER PGM NUMBER To select a program use the instructions in the following sections starting with Press the PGM button and dial the specified Admin PROGRAM CODE 2 3 PROCEDURES FOR DATA ENTRY The following sections provide specific inst
405. es specifically when multiple systems are connected to the same default gateway router it may be advantageous to define different IP ports for each system For systems employing the iPECS Micro there are 33 RTP Real time protocol and 33 RTCP Real time Control protocol For the systems employing an MFIM100 iPECS 50 there are 36 RTP Real time protocol and 36 RTCP Real time Control protocol ports that can be defined For systems with the MFIM300 or MFIM600 there are 54 RTP and RTCP ports defined as shown in and Table 3 5 5 5 2 below For systems with the MFIM1200 there are 126 RTP and RTCP ports defined as shown in and Table 3 5 5 5 2 below 3 88 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Table 3 5 5 5 1 MULTI CAST RTP RTCP iPECS Micro ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT BGM Internal RTP and RTCP ports for internal BGM 0000 9999 8100 BGM External 1 RTP and RTCP ports for external BGM 1 0000 9999 ae BGM External 2 RTP and RTCP ports for external BGM 2 0000 9999 ee Internal Page 1 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 1 0000 9999 ae Internal Page 2 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 2 0000 9999 ae Internal Page 3 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 3 0000 9999 aie Internal Page 4 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 4 0000 9999 z E Internal Page 5 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 5 0000 9999 7A Internal Page 6 RTP and R
406. eset Forward Attributes data Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit Yiew Favorites Tools Help http 150 150 131 21 1 a_index htm IPECS DS6M E0Ap APRIOS Boot Version 1 0Ah JANIOT Enter CO Range e save CO Range From 1 to 1 Uncheckall Attribute Vae he v PRESET FWD TIMER fo K tsec 00 20 M PRESET ICLID RING TBL INDEX MAX 3 Digits 001 250 M PRESET VMID DIGIT Mailbox ID Max digit COMP Attributes P140 142 COMP Ring Assignment P144 DID Service Attributes P 145 DISA Service Attributes P146 NA ISDN Line Attnbutes P150 ISDN CO Line Attr P143 151 T1 CO Lime Attributes P152 DCOB CO Line Attributes P153 Copyright C 2006 by LG Noriel Co Lid All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 4 5 1 CO IP Preset Forward Attributes The CO IP Preset Call Forward feature enables a CO line to initially ring at multiple stations and forward to a pre determined destination The destination can be a station Voice Mailbox ACD group or Hunt group Each CO line has a Preset Forward Timer Each CO line also can be assigned a VMID field to allow sending of specific mailbox id digits when a CO line forwards to an external VM group Table 3 5 4 5 1 CO IP PRESET FORWARD ATTRIBUTES ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Preset FWD Timer An incoming call which remains unanswered for this 00 20 Sec 00 timer is routed as def
407. eset ip the user provides the new MFIM with the IP address of the previous MFIM and issues the Register command The new system will then send a Uni cast Register command to each gateway Module and iPECS terminal registered to the previous system This Register command will include the previous system IP address These commands are repeated several times only As communication is established the new MFIM will update the settings of the gateway Modules and iPECS terminals appropriately When the gateway Modules and terminals respond they are registered to the new system When replacing a gateway Module use PROGRAM CODES 103 and 104 in Web Admin System amp Device IP Address Plan and CO Gateway Sequence Number to delete the existing MAC information and assign the MAC information for the new module Install the new gateway Module When replacing an iPECS terminal using PROGRAM CODES 103 and 105 Web Admin System amp Device IP Address and Flexible Station Numbering Plan delete the MAC information for the previous iPECS terminal and assign the MAC information for the new iPECS terminal Install the new terminal The Basic iPECS 50B has 2 x ISDN2 circuits 4 Channels this can be increased to 4 x ISDN2 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 circuits 8 Channels by the installation of a License BRIU Lock Key If the Lock Key is installed when the system is initialized it will have 8 channels availabl
408. esses must be routable IP addresses for access to an external VoIP network remote access by an iPECS Phone or RSGM and remote Web access When used the VOIM Voice over IP gateway Module must also have a routable IP address for access to from an external VoIP network and a remote iPECS device When Automatic IP Assign is enabled the system will assign IP addresses to each local gateway Module and terminal using the System IP address range defined These addresses are used for communications between the system and other Modules and terminals The MFIM may be installed on a LAN segmented by two separate private IP address schemes With this segmenting technique the MFIM normally treats the segmented gateway Modules or im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Terminals as remote devices using valuable WAN bandwidth By assigning the default gateway of the segmented devices as the Second Sys IP address the MFIM communicates directly to the devices through the default gateway iPECS can be installed behind a NAPT server if the NAPT server provides fixed address translation and port forwarding to the system In this case the system will employ the Firewall IP address as the fixed IP address for communication with remote devices This address must be assigned as the MFIM address in the remote device In some situations specifically when multiple iPECS systems are installed on the same LAN it may be advantageous to r
409. eue 1 Announcement 000 180 045 1 second increments Repeat Timer 24 11 Call In Queue 2 Threshold 00 99 20 24 12 Call In Queue 2 Announcement 00 70 Location 24 13 Call In Queue 2 Page zone 00 15 00 MFIM amp 100 00 15 00 40 Other MFIM 00 40 24 14 Call In Queue 2 Announcement Delay 000 180 015 1 second increments Timer 24 15 Call In Queue 2 Announcement 000 180 025 1 second increments Repeat Timer 24 16 Call In Queue 3 Threshold 00 99 30 24 17 Call In Queue 3 Announcement 00 70 Location 24 18 Call In Queue 3 Page zone 00 15 00 MFIM amp 100 00 15 00 40 Other MFIM 00 40 24 19 Call In Queue 3 Announcement Delay 000 180 015 1 second increments Timer 24 20 Call In Queue 3 Announcement 000 180 005 1 second increments Repeat Timer 24 21 Callin Queue Mention 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 24 22 ACD No answer Timer 000 180 000 1 second increments 24 23 Member Forward 1 ON 0 OFF ON RING GROUP 1 VSF Announce 1 Timer 000 999 015 1 second increments 2 VSF Announce 2 Timer 000 999 00 1 second increments 3 VSF Announce 1 Location 00 70 00 4 VSF Announce 2 Location 00 70 00 5 VSF Announce 2 Repeat Timer 000 999 000 1 second increments 6 VSF Announce 2 Repeat 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 7 Overflow Destination Station Group VSF Speed 8 Overflow Timer 000 600 180 1 second increments 9 Wrap Up Timer 002 999 002 1 second increments 10 Music Source 0 3 1 11 Maximum Queued Call Counter 00 99 99 12 Member Forward 1 ON 0 OFF ON Mailbox Message Wait Statio
410. everal attributes of these channels can be assigned The H 323 call set up mode and tunneling H 245 Encapsulation can be established Also for H 323 support a RAS Registration Admissions and Status channel can be defined The RAS channel IP addresses uni cast and multi cast as well as the IP port Numbering Plan and other H 323 set up characteristics are defined This PGM CODE also allows setting the IP TOS bit for Diffserv a commonly recognized packet prioritization protocol Higher priority packets are given priority in the Router or Layer 3 Switch queue However they are the first to be discarded in the event of long queue delays which may cause excess packet loss and poor voice quality Refer to Table 2 3 4 1 1 for a description of the features and the input required PROCEDURE H323 VOIP ATTRIBUTE 1 Press the PGM button and dial 130 ENTER SEQ NO 001 143 2 44 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance 001 H323 VOIP BASE ATTRA PRESS FLEX KEY 1 14 Refer to Table 2 3 4 1 1 DISPLAY Table 2 3 4 1 1 H 323 VOIP ATTRIBUTES PGM 130 Issue 5 0 TCP connection Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 H323 SETUP MODE H 323 IP calls can be set up using the H 323 1 Norm Norm 1 FAST 0 NORM NORM normal or Fast Start mode 0
411. ew Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 167 a_index htm DECT Attnbutes P491 Value ji Park Code 31100013403248 Save AC Code 234 DECT Desubscribe Desired Station DECT Subscribe All Data Erase Password Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 15 1 2 End Subscription Pull down 3 225 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address a http 150 150 131 167 a_index htm Park Code AC Code DECT Mobility Desired Station DECT Mobility ON OFF OFF v DECT Subscribe All Data Erase Password DECT Registered Station Order Figure 3 5 15 1 3 DECT Mobility pull down Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address a http 150 150 131 167 a_index htm Issue 5 0 E Attribute j Value Button Park Code 31100013403248 Save AC Code 1234 Save All Registered Station DECT Subscribe All Data Erase Password e DECT Registered Station Order DECT Attribute Copyright C 2006 by LC Nortel Co Ltd AN Rights Reserved Figure 3 5 15 1 4 All Registered Station pull down
412. ex button 1 11 for the desired setting refer to Table 2 3 10 4 1 DISPLAY Use the dial pad to enter the required data refer to Table 2 3 10 4 1 Press the SAVE button to store the new data 2 132 im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Table 2 3 10 4 1 NETWORK NUMBERING PLAN PGM 324 Button DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 00 SYSTEM USAGE Select system usage O NET NET O NET 1 PSTN NET 1 PSTN 2 00 NUM PLAN CODE means any digits can be inserted between 0 9 16 digits The digits followed by are an internal station number 3 00 NUM PLAN CO GRP 00 means an internal net station number 00 24 00 24 4 00 CPN INFORMATION Flex 1 ISDN CPN INFORMATION PRESS FLEX 1 4 Flex 2 Flex btn 1 4 16 digits 1 00 CPN INFORMATION 01 2 00 CPN INFORMATION 02 3 00 CPN INFORMATION 03 4 00 CPN INFORMATION 04 5 00 ALT SPD BIN Alternative Dial Number System SPD Bin 0200 0999 0200 0999 when the networking path has a fatal or problem 2000 4999 6 DEST MFIM IP ADDR IP Address of destination MFIM system only 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 when iPECS systems are configured for Voice Networking 7 DEST MFIM PORT NO Port Number of destination system for 0000 9999 5588 0000 9999 Networking 8
413. exible Numbering Plan 106 MAC 44 00405a142e11 000000000000 000000000000 000000000000 000000000000 LCR Control Attribute 220 LCR LDT 221 LCR DMT LCR Table Initia cy Code Table 226 Code Table 22 System Speed Zone 232 Auto Ring Mode Table 233 Voice Mail Dialing Table 234 Mobile Extension Table 236 Copyright C 2008 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Figure 3 5 8 14 1 MAC Registration Table When multiple iPECS systems are located on the same LAN it may be desirable to register add on devices employing the Registration Table By entering the devices MAC address the system will allow the device to register regardless of the system Registration switch position MFIM 3rd DIP switch In addition the number of channels ports available to the device can be limited to support functions such as Fractional T1 Lines where only a portion of the channels are needed Table 3 5 8 14 1 MAC REGISTRATION amp FRACTIONAL MODULE ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT MAC Address Enter MAC address of a device to register MAX Port Enter maximum number of ports channels for the device 00 99 00 DEV TYPE Device type for internal gateway 0 6 0 3 181 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 236 Selecting Mobile Extension Table will display the Mobile Extensio
414. f the Off net forwarding transferring station T200 The terminal must support one T200 timer for each 1 5 1 data link supported seconds T201 The minimum time between TEI ID check messages 1 5 1 seconds T202 When the terminal transmits a TEI Identify Request 1 5 2 message it must provide one T202 timer for each seconds logical link it supports T203 If the terminal initiates the link monitoring function it 5 15 10 must provide one T203 timer for each logical link it seconds supports T203 defines the maximum time between message exchanges 3 75 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT T204 The T204 timer defines the minimum time between 5 15 10 transmissions of XID messages seconds T302 In the Overlap dial mode when the system receives 10 30 15 incomplete dialing information from the ISDN the seconds system will wait the T302 timer duration for the additional digits At time out of this timer the call will be disconnected T303 T303 establishes the time Interval for a response 1 10 4 after sending a call setup message seconds T305 T305 establishes the Interval for a Released signal 10 60 30 after receiving a Disconnect message seconds T308 T308 establishes the Interval for a Released Ack 1 10 4 signal after sending a release message seconds T309 Optional state timer 1 100 90 seconds T310 Tim
415. fault Language when accessing the VSF or VMIM for assigned prompt VSF or VMIM Remark Descriptive information to help installer programmer in 21 characters 3 209 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Selecting Access amp Page Relay returns the Access amp Page RTP packet relay data input page Table 3 5 12 3 1 Enter the Sequence Range refer to section 3 5 1 3 System amp Device IP Address Plan and click Load to define packet relay characteristics for Paging between Zones Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer SEE File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 150 150 131 21 1 a_index htm EnterDeviceiGW Slot Seq _ _ Sequence Slot From 1 Tol Uncheck All Page RTP Relay To Zone Paged By RTP Relay From Zone Zone 1 SABLED SABLED N Zone 2 SABLED SABLED Zone 3 SABLED SABLED Zone 4 SABLED SABLED Zone 5 SABLED SABLED SABLED SABLED Device Zone Number P436 Zone 6 D D D D D D SABLED DISABLED DISABLED D D D D D D D v v v v Device Zone Att P437 M Zone v v SABLED v v v v v v v D D D D D D D N Zone 8 DISABLED D D D D D D Zone Attnbute P439 IV Zone 9 Zone RTP Relay Group P440 Inter Zone Attribute P441 SABLED SABLED SABLED SABLED SABLED M Zone 10 Zone 11 Zone 12 Zone 13 Zone 14 M Zone
416. fer to Table 2 3 7 1 1 for a description of the functions the LCD displays and data entries required PROCEDURE STATION GRP ASSIGN 1 Press the PGM button and dial 190 ENTER GRP NO 620 667 STATION GRP 620 F1 TYPE F2 PKUP F3 MEM DISPLAY Refer to Table 2 3 7 1 1 Press the Flex button for the desired setting refer to Table 2 3 7 1 1 Use the dial pad to enter the desired Station Group number 620 631 for the iPECS Micro 620 659 for the iPECS 50 amp MFIM100 and 620 667 for other MFIMs Use the dial pad to enter the desired Station Group data Note for group members enter a station or station range For an individual station press the desired Flex button for the position of the station in the group and dial the station number For a range enter the first and last station number in the range Press the SAVE button to store the data entry Table 2 3 7 1 1 STATION GROUP ASSIGNMENT PGM 190 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 STATION GRP 620 This entry defines the type of station 00 Not Assign 0 CIRCULAR GROUP 00 10 group 01 Circular 02 Terminal 03 UCD ACD 04 RING 05 Ext VM 06 PICK UP 07 VSF VM 08 FS VM 09 NET VM 10 UCS Server 2 GROUP 620 PICK UP Stations can pick up group calls ringing at 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 OFF OFF other stations in the group This does not 1 ON apply to VSF groups 3 This entry assigns stations as members of
417. fixed o 0 0 0 IP Address provided by the NAPT server must be assigned in this field Also use this IP address for the MFIM address in remote devices 11 FIRST START MAC ADDR 00 00 00 00 A range of MAC addresses can be entered to register devices 000000000000 00 00 regardless of the 3rd DIP switch This entry is the start address of the first range 12 FIRST END MAC ADDR 00 00 00 00 A range of MAC addresses can be entered to register devices 000000000000 00 00 regardless of the 3rd DIP switch This entry is the end address of the first range 13 SECOND START MAC ADDR 00 00 00 00 Arange of MAC addresses can be entered to register devices 000000000000 00 00 regardless of the 3rd DIP switch This entry is the start address of the second range 14 SECOND END MAC ADDR 00 00 00 00 Arange of MAC addresses can be entered to register devices 000000000000 00 00 regardless of the 3 DIP switch This entry is the end address of the second range 15 SysTEM IP ADDRESS PLAN Returns System IP Address Plan to default values SYSTEM RESET 16 MFIM E LAN2 M IP ADDR 0 0 0 0 When redundancy is to be supported for the MFIM the master and slave are connected via the LAN2 port All 8 wires in the cable must be terminated to the RJ45 The master IP address can be assigned here When the direct connection mode is employed for redundancy the field is ignored 17 MFIM E LAN2 S IP ADDR 0 0 0 0 When redundancy is to be supported for the MFI
418. flow Destination If VSF Announce is assigned Auto Drop is available Station or Group Number VSF Announce System SPD Overflow Timer A call to a group will remain queued to the group or be sent to the assigned Overflow Destination after expiration of the Overflow Timer 000 600 seconds 180 Warp Up Timer After terminating any call a Hunt Group member will be maintained in a busy state for the duration of the Wrap Up timer 000 999 seconds 002 ACD No Answer Timer Calls to an agent in the group are directed to the station if unanswered in the NO ANSWER TIMER the call can be routed another agent 000 180 000 3 140 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Wait if the ist Announcement is busy Supervisor Call Count the ACD Supervisor is notified When a call assigned to receive an announcement arrives and all channels are busy the call may wait with Ringback until a channel is available ON or 0 OFF 1 ON Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT REPT No Member If a call is received and no members are on duty an ON OFF ICM call will return re order tone while a CO IP call OFF will be routed to the Attendant Music Source A Music source can be assigned so that calls to the none Int Ext 1 group will receive audio from the assigned source in Int Ext 1 place of ring back tone while in Queue Ext 2 VSF MOH ACD Warning Tone An ACD supervisor
419. for Internal Page 5 0000 9999 8114 8114 8115 8115 9 M CAST RTP I PAGE 6 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 6 0000 9999 8116 8116 8117 8117 10 M CAST RTP RTCP I PAGE 7 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 7 0000 9999 8118 8118 8119 8119 11 M CAST RTP I PAGE 8 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 8 0000 9999 8120 8120 8121 8121 12 M CAST RTP I PAGE 9 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 9 0000 9999 8122 8122 8123 8123 2 70 im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 13 M CAST RTP I PAGE 10 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 10 0000 9999 8124 8124 8125 8125 14 M CAST RTP I PAGE 11 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 11 0000 9999 8126 8126 8127 8127 15 M CAST RTP I PAGE 12 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 12 0000 9999 8128 8128 8129 8129 16 M CAST RTP I PAGE 13 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 13 0000 9999 8130 8130 8131 8131 17 M CAST RTP I PAGE 14 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 14 0000 9999 8132 8132 8133 8133 18 M CAST RTP I PAGE 15 RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 15 0000 9999 8134 8134 8135 8135 19 M CAST RTP I PAGE 16
420. g at a station assigned Ringing Line Preference the order of preference can be assigned based on the type of call CO IP Transfer XFR CO IP Recall REC Incoming call INC or CO IP Queue QUE ICM calls are always assigned the lowest priority PROCEDURE XFR REC INC QUE 1 Press the PGM button and dial 173 1 2 3 4 Select the Flex button for the desired Call Type refer to Table 2 3 6 13 1 Use the dial pad to enter the priority 1 4 Press the SAVE button to store the RLP Priority data entry 2 81 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Table 2 3 6 13 1 RLP PRIORITY PGM 173 Button DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 CO IP Transferred call 1 4 1 2 CO IP Recall 1 4 2 3 COIP Incoming call 1 4 3 4 Queued CO IP recall 1 4 4 The system has RS 232 serial ports located on the MFIM one on the iPECS 50 MFIM100 MFIM300 MFIM600 and MFIM1200 refer to the iPECS Description and Installation Manual Section 4 4 2 Certain characteristics of each port are programmable baud rate RS 232 control and page settings Refer to Table 2 3 6 14 1 for a description of the settings the data entries required and LCD displays RS232 PORT SETTING PRESS FLEX_KEY 1 2 Refer to Table 2 3 6 14 1 DISPLAY Table 2 3 6 14 1 RS 232 PORT SETTINGS PGM 174 Button DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 SERIAL1 BAUD RATE This entry establishes the BAUD rate for 1 NOT US
421. ge 1 ON EEE ON or the full RRQ message OFF o 14 TCP KEEP ALIVE The system will send a polling message 0 OFF ON 1 0N 0 0FF ON every 75 seconds to assure the status of the 1 ON 2 42 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Each T1 PRI module can be assigned for various attributes of the interface The T1 interface framing and line coding can be selected and for the PRI TE or NT operation and CRC check can be selected Refer to Table 2 3 4 2 1 for a description of the features and the input required Note that the Sequence Number can be determined in PGM CODE103 Button 1 T1 E1 PRI ATTRIBUTE ENTER SEQ NO 001 143 T1 PRI ATTRIBUTE PRESS FLEX KEY 1 6 Refer to Table 2 3 4 2 1 DISPLAY Table 2 3 4 2 1 T1 PRI MODE PGM 131 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 T1 SETUP MODE Select T1 Setup mode 1 ESF D4 1 ESF 0 D4 D4 D4 frame Use In Band Control Protocol 0 D4 ESF Use Data link Message 2 T1 LINE MODE Select T1 line mode AMI B8ZS 1 AMI B8ZS 1 AMI 0 B8ZS B8ZS 0 B8ZS 3 PRI LINE MODE Select TE NT mode 1 TE TE 1 TE O NT TE O NT 4 PRI CRC CHECK For PRI lines the CRC Cyclical 0 OFF ON 1 ON 0 OFF ON Redundancy Check can be disabled 1 ON OFF 5 El R2DSP CHECK Used for R2 El Gateway or E1 Gateway 0 OFF ON 1 0N 0 OFF ON 1 ON 6 DCO PX TYPE Reserved for future use
422. ght C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 8 4 1 LCR Table Initialization The LCR Table Initialization allows global values to be assigned to the various Digit Modification Table entries In addition the LCR Leading Digits and LCR Digit Modification Tables can be initialized to the default no entries state 3 167 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 224 Selecting Toll Exception Table will display the Toll Table data entry page Figure 3 5 8 5 1 Select the desired Allow or Deny Table blue text above the table header desired iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DEAR ay File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 150 150 131 21 1 a_index htm iPECS VD96N E 0Ap APRIO8 save Boot Version 1 04h JANIOT Allow A Deny A Allow B Deny B Allow C Deny C Allow D Deny D Allow E Deny E e Allow A Index Value Range ees geal Include E Stop D Don t Care aac a Include E Stop D Don t Care MAX 20 Digits Include E Stop D Don t Care MAX 20 Digits Include E Stop D Don t Care MAX 20 Digits Include E Stop D Don t Care MAX 20 Digits Include E Stop D Don t Care MAX 20 Digits Include E Stop D Don t Care MAX 20 Digits LCR LDT P221 Include E Stop D Don t Care LCR DMT P222 MAX 20 Digits LCR Table Initialization P223 I Ecce MAX 20 Digits Include E Stop D
423. ghts Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 6 3 7 iPECS Feature Server Voice Mail Group Attributes Table 3 5 6 3 7 FEATURE SERVER VOICE MAIL GROUP ATTRIBUTES ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT VSF Announce 1 Timer If all stations in the group are busy when a call is 000 999 015 offered the call may continue to wait queue for an seconds available FS VM channel If the queue period exceeds the VSF Announce 1 Timer the call is sent to a VSF announcement If the timer is set to 000 the call will receive the first announcement in full prior to the hunt process guaranteed announcement Guar Annc Timer 0 Wait If When a call assigned to receive a guaranteed OFF ON Busy announcement arrives and all channels are busy the ON call may wait with Ringback until a channel is available ON or bypass the announcement OFF VSF Announce 2 Timer After the 1st announcement a 2nd Announcement 000 999 000 Timer is activated At expiration if the call remains seconds queued to the group the call is sent to the assigned VSF Announce 2 Location VSF Announce 1 Location Each Station Hunt Group can be assigned an 00 70 00 none announcement which is played if the call remains queued beyond the VSF Announce 1 Timer duration The announcement location is a VSF Announcement number An entry of 00 indicates no announcement VSF Announce 1 Auto If this attribute is selected the call will drop after the Check box Drop 1st VSF announcemen
424. groups 49 to 72 use the VOL UP VOL DOWN buttons Press the desired Flex button to toggle CO IP Group access LED on group access allowed LED off group access not allowed Press the SAVE button to store the data entry 2 3 3 7 Internal Page Zone Access PGM Code 118 Each iPECS Phone is assigned to receive announcements from each Internal Page Zone A station can be assigned to any all or no zones Note a remote station or a station not assigned to any Internal Zone will not receive any page announcements including Internal All Call For the iPECS Micro iPECS 50 and MFIM100 ten Internal Page Zones are available and for other MFIMs there are 35 zones As a default all stations except remote stations are assigned to zone 1 PROCEDURE INTERNAL PAGE ZONE 1 Press the PGM button and dial 118 ENTER STA NUMBER 100 110 I PAGE ZONE Use the dial pad to enter a station range Ex 100 110 For a single station enter the same number twice PRESS FLEX KEY 01 10 The first 10 Flex button LEDs indicate assigned zones for the iPECS Micro iPECS 50 amp MFIM100 For other MFIMs the LEDs indicate the status for Page Zones 1 to 24 Use the VOL UP VOL DOWN button to display Page Zones 25 to 35 under Flex buttons 1 11 Press the desired Flex button to toggle Internal Page Zone assignments LED On station receives announcement LED Off station does not receive announcement Press the SAVE button to
425. he Phontage or UCS Client will include the message count for the station in the Voice message count This field defines the Phontage or UCS Client station number that will be used as the VSF VMIM back up VSF Backup Prompt A Phontage or UCS Client may backup VSF 0 OFF OFF Prompts 1 ON Block Back Call When an SLT extension attempts to transfer a CO 0 OFF OFF call to a CO line it is blocked and the call is released 1 ON BY PASS DTMF When detected DTMF from an SLT may be 0 OFF OFF regenerated by LGCM SLTM port can by pass 1 ON detection so DTMF is not detected Proctor Monitoring Power Fail Enables use of PABX ANI Link device for E 911 0 OFF OFF support Only SLT can be used for this feature 1 ON UMS MSG SMTP Mail Server The VSF and VMIM include notification of new ID messages to the user s voice mail This field defines the e mail address to notify when a new message is received at the VSF or VMIM UMS MSG SMTP Mail Server Unified Mail server password Password Camp on Tone Permits camp on tone to be sent to a station when 0 OFF ON the station receives a camp on request 1 ON Serial DSS Usage Enables an LIP 8000 station to have a Serial DSS ENABLE ENABLE attached DISABLE ICM Dial Tone Source One of four dial tone sources can be selected for Dial Tone Dial Tone each station Int Ext 1 Dial tone Ext 2 MOH 1 VSF MOH MOH 2 VSF MOH ICM Ring Back Tone Source One of four ring back tones can be selected for each Ring Back Ring Ba
426. he User ID to the SIP Proxy to register the ID Otherwise the Authentication Name and password are used ON OFF OFF Ring Route Type Incoming calls from a SIP trunk can be routed based on CO IP Ring assignments PGM CODE 144 routed to the defined Associated station above ID Assigned Station or DID treatment defined below ID Assigned Sta Ring Assign DID Conversion ID assigned Station DID Conversion Type When the Ring Route above is defined as DID the system will send the call to a destination based on the DID conversion selected here The digits may be used as is to identify the desired station modified based on the DID Digit mask below and routed to the resulting station or the modified DID number can be used as an index to the DID routing table PGM CODE 231 to route the call DID Digit Conversion Use as is or Use Flex DID Table Number of Digits 2 4 Expected from DID Circuit When DID Digit Conversion or Flexible DID Conversion Table routing is used the number of digits received is defined in this field 2 4 DID Digit Mask 4digits 0 9 When DID Digit Conversion or Flexible DID Conversion Table routing is used the digit conversion is defined in this field p 3 48 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Selecting Station Name Display will display the Station Name input page Figure 3 5 2 16 1 Selecting the blue colored text
427. he 001 365 365 For future use only system will maintain store the message for the day maximum number of days set in this program 1 to 365 days Not used currently Time Out sec This timer determines the inter digit time for a VSF AA 00 15 15 For future use only or a VM session If this timer expires while the VSF seconds AA or VM is awaiting user input the system will assume the remote party has disconnected and will return the channel to idle 3 147 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ss http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm os Group Number iPECSA D96M E 0Ap APR 08 Boot version 1 0Ah JANIOT Group Number is 620 Group Type UMS M Group Pick up Attribute OFF Attribute Range VSF Announce 1 Timer 000 999 sec 000 999 sec O wn VSF Announce 2 Timer VSF Announce 1 Location VSF Announce 1 Auto Drop VSF Announce 2 Location VSF Announce 2 Auto Drop VSF Announce 2 Repeat er VSF Announce 2 Repeat Station Group Overview Station Group Assignment P190 000 999 sec OFF yy STA NET or Hunt C Station or Group Overflow Destination VSF Announce C 0 Drop SYSSPD C Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Ri
428. he Flex 01 15 GROUP 1 PRESS ACCESS GRP 1 15 selected group 2 40 im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 2 3 3 15 LSS Label Edit PGM Code 129 The LIP 8012LSS 12 button DSS Console incorporates an LCD used to label the function of each button The label which can be up to 12 characters is assigned in this program PROCEDURE LSS LABEL EDIT 1 Press the PGM button and dial 129 ENTER STA NUMBER STA 100 LSS LABEL Use the dial pad to enter the station number associated with the console Ex 100 ENTER LSS IDX 1 4 STA 100 LSS 1 Consoles are indexed allowing multiple consoles to be associated with a station Use the dial pad to enter the index of the LSS console 1 4 ENTER BTN NO 01 12 STA 100 LSS 1 BTN 1 Use the dial pad to enter the desired LSS console button number 1 12 LABEL IS EMPTY Edit the label referring to Table 2 1 2 1 Press the SAVE button to store the data entry 2 3 4 BOARD GATEWAY DATA PGM CODES 130 to 132 2 3 4 1 H323 VoIP Attributes PGM CODE 130 Except for the MFIM600 1200 MFIMs incorporate a 6 channel VoIP gateway The optional VOIM8 provides up to eight 8 VoIP channels and the VOIM24 provides up to 24 VOIP channels These VOIP channels are used for Distributed Networking access to SIP or H 323 networks and for remote iPECS devices When the standard H 323 VoIP protocol is employed for an external VoIP call s
429. he digits up to the first 12 to be compared with the number dialed by the user are entered in the Leading Digit Table bin In addition indices to the Digit Modification Table are defined for each Time Zone of each Day Zone refer to LCR Control Attributes PGM CODE 220 Note the mode used to access LCR must match the LCR Type and must be within the effective LCR Access Mode assigned in PGM CODE 220 to access the Digit Modification Table index The allowed LCR Types are CO Line or Loop access User dials CO Line Access Code 88xx for iPECS Micro iPECS 50 and MFIM100 or 88xxx for other MFIMs CO IP Group Access Code 8xx Any CO Line Access Code 9 or presses a CO Line CO IP Group or Loop button Internal User dials outgoing call while receiving Intercom dial tone with no CO IP access code Both both COL and Internal In addition each Leading Digit Table bin has the option to require an authorization code entry When the user dialed digits match an entry in the LCR Leading Digit Table the system will check the Authorization option for the LDT Table bin If the Authorization option is enabled the user must enter a valid Authorization code to place the call 2 114 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance LDT TABLE ENTER LDT BIN 000 Issue 5 0 Refer to Table 2 3 9 1 2 1 DISPLAY Table 2 3 9 1 2 1 LCR LEADING DIGITS PGM 221
430. he system can output all outgoing call ON OFF records ON or to allow for PSTN call set up OFF times only records for calls that exceed the SMDR Timer OFF For SMDR Timer settings refer to Start Timer below 3 111 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Hidden Dialed Digit Dialed Digit Hide Option number of calls cost and cost for each For security purposes digits dialed for an outgoing call can be hidden and replaced with This field defines the number of digits to hide The Dialed Digit Hide Option below defines whether leading or trailing digits are hidden The station must be assigned for SMDR Hidden digits in Station Attributes section 3 5 2 2 When HIDDEN DIALED DIGIT is enabled above this field determines if leading or trailing digits are hidden Po station a 0 9 Right Left Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Print Enable The system can output SMDR records ON ON automatically as they occur real time or only OFF when requested When this attribute is ON SMDR is sent at call completion Record Type The system can record all outgoing calls or LD LD only long distance calls Long distance calls ALL calls are identified by the LD digit count and LD codes assigned in Long Distance Call Digit Counter and Long Distance Code below Long Distance Call Digit Dialed numbers which exceed the assigned 07 15 07 Counter LD digit count
431. horization codes are entered by the user as ON ON and the code ON or the Auth code index and OFF the code OFF COS 7 when Auth Fail If user fails to enter a valid Authorization code in the ON OFF number of attempts assigned in Auth Retry Count OFF above the station is disconnected or the Station COS is changed to COS 7 In the later case the user must employ COS Restore in Station User PGM CODE 2 to return the station to the normal COS Application Interface System Integration Messages are sent out the defined ON OFF Message serial or TCP channel see AIM manual OFF Conference Room CO Tel ISDN DID number an external party must dial to enter a Max 15 Number Conference room Phontage only digits Record warning tone When call recording is active a tone can be sent to all ON ON connected parties to indicate the conversation is being OFF recorded CPU Redundancy Usage When redundancy is employed this field is used to ON OFF inform the master MFIM that a redundant MFIM is OFF available Change ACT MFIM By When power fails the active MFIM is changed to the ON OFF Power Fail standby mode and the standby MFIM becomes active OFF MFIM DIFF SERVE MFIM Diff Serv pretag value 00 63 04 G W Phone Upgrade Mode Upgrade transfer mode from MFIM to iPECS gateways 1 FTP FTP 0 TFTP CO Transfer Tone When a CO call is transferred to a busy extension Ring MOH Ring Back Back Tone or Music On Hold will be played to the CO Ring Back Tone Line Ton
432. iaie 3 131 3 5 6 Station Group Data cccccccccccccsicissccescccdsccdscessnsssccecvacscesatsocsovesnssccdessserspdcecsscsseatts 3 133 3 5 6 1 Station Group OvervieW 1 ccccccceeccesesseseneeceeenecaaeeseneeceuneessaessensecseneeseanssenaeceeneesenssesaees 3 134 3 5 6 2 Station Group ASSIQNIMCNA 1 cccccccceeeeceseceenceceneeesaeedeneecseneesaaesseneeceeeeeseassseasecseseersaaes 3 135 3 5 6 3 Station Group Attributes 2 cccccsececesncccseceencecssnsesescecnennesnnssansecaeaeesssnseanasecsensessnnsnanaees 3 137 3 5 6 4 Pick Up Group Overview c cccccececeeeceeeneeceeececeueeesaaecseneeceaeecaeesseneecseseetsassteeeseeseetsaees 3 151 3 5 6 5 Pick Up Group Assignment 1 ccccccceecceesseeceeececeneeeesaecseneeceeeeeceaeesseneecseeeetsaseseeeeenseetsates 3 152 3 5 7 ISDN Line amp ICLID Routing Waa ors cesssekensenvnkitacvevasantesanunsbsnsbctiavasienidansorevcands 3 153 3 5 7 1 ISDN Attributes oi vsecissstis cass ovgnevss enpa AE ENN AN A ai 3 154 3 5 7 2 GLIP COLP Tables isaisa a Aaaa iia EASA Ea EEA EEEa ia 3 155 3 5 7 3 MSN Tabl oins eapev easing a satanic baes lag ager lav cnas iui seateear teqat but eqncddud naatadte base 3 156 3 5 7 4 ICEID ROUtG Table sosirii as eain 3 157 3 5 7 5 ICLID Ring Assignment Table u ccscccccccecesececeseceeneeceeececeueeesaaecseaeeceeneetsaaecseneesenseeenaees 3 158 3 5 7 6 ISDN PPP Web Admin AttriDUteS ccccccccscececcceeeseeccceeeceneeesaeceeneecenetessasecseneetenesensaees 3 159
433. ible System Timers P130 182 136 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 5 222 1 Web Access Authorization Three different passwords can be assigned for the access to the iPECS Web administration so that the different levels of access to the program fields can be allowed The User level has access to assigned programming fields and File Upload amp remote Upgrade page which are mainly related to the system installation The Admin level has access to assigned programming fields The Maintenance password has access all the programming fields and the maintenance fields including trace settings gateway log view gain amp cadence control lock key install and device delete feature In addition the Maintenance level user can assign the authorities of the other user levels 3 122 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 250 Selecting Hot Desk Attributes will display the Hot Desk Attributes data entry page Figure 3 5 5 233 1 Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help S amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm Tk RLP Priority P173 RS 232 Port Settings P174 Serial Port Selections P175 Pra Number of Agent 000 300 View Agent Range 398 P299 399 P300 Auto Logout Timer 0 00 24 Break Make Ratio P176 SMDR Attributes
434. ibutes will display the LCR Control Attributes data entry page Figure 3 5 8 1 1 The LCR Tables provide a mechanism to define the database which will route outgoing calls particularly long distance using the most cost effective route User dialed digits are compared to table entries and modified appropriately based on time of day day of week and assigned routes There are four LCR Tables LCR Control Attributes LCR Leading Digit Table LCR Digit Modification Table and LCR Initialization Table Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer BEE File Edit view Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm iPECSA D96M E 0Ap APR 08 Boot version 1 0Ah JAN OF Attribute LCR Access Mode Disable LCR Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Time Of Day Zone 1 Time Zonel Time Of Day Zone 2 Time Of Day Zone 3 Time Of Day Zone 1 Time Zone2 Time Of Day Zone 2 Time Of Day Zone 3 Time Of Day Zone 1 Time Of Day Zone 2 Time Of Day Zone 3 Toll Exception Table Emergency Code Tab Authonzation Code Table P227 CCR Table P228 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 8 1 1 LCR Control Attributes The LCR Control Attributes Table among other items allows assignment of the LCR Access M
435. ice Mailbox ACD group or Hunt group Each CO line has a Preset Forward Timer Each CO line also can be assigned a VMID Voice Mail Id to allow sending specific VM digits when a CO line forwards to an external VM group PROCEDURE CO PRESET FWD ATT 1 Press the PGM button and dial 147 ENTER COL RANGE 01 02 CO PRE FWD Use the dial pad to enter the co Line range For a single DID Line enter the same number twice For the iPECS Micro the acceptable range is 01 05 for PRESS FLEX_KEY 1 3 the IPECS 50 and MFIM100 the acceptable range is 01 42 for the MFIM300 the acceptable range is 001 200 and for the MFIM600 1200 the range is 001 400 600 See Table 2 3 5 6 1 Select the desired Flex button refer to Table 2 3 5 6 1 DISPLAY Use the dial pad to enter the desired value for the selected Attribute refer to Table 2 3 5 6 1 Press the SAVE button to store the data entry Table 2 3 5 6 1 CO LINE PRESET FORWARD ATTRIBUTES PGM 147 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 01 02 PRESET FWD TMR An incoming call which remains unanswered 00 20 Sec 00 00 20 SEC 00 for this timer is routed to the pre determined Ring Table Index PGM CODE 147 btn 2 2 01 02 RING TBL INDEX If an incoming call remains unanswered after 001 250 INDEX NOT ASSIGNED the Preset Fwd time the call is routed as defined in the ICLID Ring Assignment table bin entered here refer to PGM CODE 204
436. icrosoft Internet Explorer File Edit Yiew Favorites Tools Help Address http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm D96M E OAp APRIO8 zz Jersion 1 AR JANIO7 Group Nurber ___ toaa Group Number is 620 Group Type Terminal Pick up Attribute OFF Member f Station Grou Station Group Attributes P191 Ol ol ral aA ul ap w e Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 6 2 1 Station Group Assignments Under Station Group Assignments the type members and Pick Up attribute are assigned to the Station Group Note for the Net VM group the network number must be assigned as the Net VM group member station 3 135 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Table 3 5 6 2 1 STATION GROUP ASSIGNMENT ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Group Type Defines the type of station group N A N A Circular Terminal ACD Ring External VM Pick Up VSF VM FS VM NET VM UCS Pick up Attribute Stations can pick up group calls ringing at other stations in OFF OFF the group This does not apply to VSF or FS VM groups ON Member Assigns stations as members of a station group or for the Net VM group type defines the Net Number of the group 3 136 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 191 Selecting Station Gr
437. igital line should the WAN connection to the CM fail A CO gateway Module must be registered to the LM for local control and access CO services Users may call others in the normal manner and the call is routed over CO facilities to the remote CM When calls are directed to a DID line at the receiving system the system will select a line from the assigned CO Group and dial the Tel Number with the station number dialed as the trailing digits FoPSTN ATTRIBUTES PRESS FLEX KEY 1 3 Refer to Table 2 3 11 4 1 DISPLAY Table 2 3 11 4 1 FAIL OVER ATTRIBUTES PGM 333 Button DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 ENABLE FoPSTN This field is used to enable or disable Fail 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 O0FF ON over operation from the CM or LM 1 ON 2 INIT FoPSTN TABLE This field is used to initialize the FO table PRESS SAVE KEY 3 FoPSTN ATTRIBUTES iPECS Micro amp ENTER BIN NO 000 199 iPECS 50 amp MFIM100 0 99 MFIM300 0 199 MFIM600 0 299 MFIM1200 0 599 3 1 FoPSTN 001 NUM PLAN Station numbers associated with the Max 8 digits XXXXXXXX remote system A range can be indicated by using to indicate the range 3 2 FoPSTN 001 CO GROUP This field defines the CO Group of the local system that will be used to place calls to the stations entered in the FO Numbering Plan should WAN failure occur 3 3 FoPSTN 001 TEL NUMBER This field defines the telephone number Max 20 digits XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX the system should dial
438. in the Table header will sort the table based on the selected column The name can be up to 12 characters Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DAR File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm IFECSA D96M E 0Ap APRIOS Boot Version 1 04h JAN 07 Station Number Station Name 100 101 102 Station Type P110 Station A ttributes P111 113 103 Station ISDN Attributes P114 104 Flex Buttons P115 129 105 Station COS P116 106 COMP Group Internal Page Zi Ptt Group Preset Call Fora 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 2 16 1 Station Name Display 3 49 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Selecting Station Data Copy will display the Station Data Copy data input page Figure 3 5 2 17 1 Enter a valid Source Station Destination Station Range and click Copy to copy the station data Note that this function is not available for an Attendant station Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DEAR File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm Station Type P110 Source Station Number Destination Station Range Station Attributes P111 113 a wal Station ISDN Attributes F114 Flex Bu
439. ine by default 3 37 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 118 Selecting Internal Page Zone Access will display the Internal Page Zone data input page Figure 3 5 2 7 1 Enter a valid station range and click Load to enter the Internal Page Zone Access data Check the appropriate boxes to allow or delete access to each Internal Page Zone Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DAR File Edit Yiew Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm IPECSNVD96M E 0Ap APRIOS l Boot Version 1 0Ah JAN OT Enter Station Range JL Load Station Range From 100 to 100 Internal page Internal Page Zone 1 Internal Page Zone 2 Internal Page Zone 3 Internal Page Zone 4 Internal Page Zone 5 Internal Page Zone 6 Internal Page Zone 7 Internal Page Zone 3 Internal Page Zone 9 Internal Page Zone 10 Internal Page Zone 11 Intemal Page Zone 12 Internal Page Zone 13 Internal Page Zone 14 Internal Page Zone 15 a xI Station Type P110 Station Attributes P111 113 Station ISDN Attrbutes P114 Flex Buttons P115 129 Station COS P116 COMP Group Access P117 a x XI xI x x Ptt Group Access P119 Preset Call Forward P120 Idle Line Selection P121 IP Call Access P122 Preset FWD Timer P123 Linked Station P 124 Station ICM Group P125 Station SIP Attributes P 126 Gating Nama Piinalaee XI xI x
440. ined in the Ring Table Index of section 3 5 7 5 Preset ICLID Ring Table If an incoming call remains unanswered after the Preset 001 250 Index Fwd time above the call is routed as defined in the ICLID Ring Table index defined here see section 3 5 7 5 Preset VMID Digit Each CO IP line can be assigned a VMID Voice Mail Id Mailbox ID that is sent to the VM group to identify the desired Mailbox Max 4 digits for the call 3 70 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 150 Selecting NA North America ISDN Line Attributes will display the NA ISDN Line Attributes data input page Figure 3 5 4 6 1 Enter a valid CO range and click Load to enter the NA ISDN Line Attributes data Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DAR File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay http 150 150 131 21 1 a_index htm Ta IPECSND96M E DAp APR 08 mueCoRee teen Boot Version 1 0Ah JAN OF CO Range From 1 to 1 Attribute Range Local Exchange Type SPID Number 0 O Max 20 eigit s Directory Number OS MaD digits EKTS Mode NONE x xI x xI COMP Attributes P140 142 COMP Ring Assigrunent P144 DID Service Attrnbutes P145 DISA Service Attnibutes P 144 COMP Preset Fwd Attr P147 x Type for 73 Unknown v x Type for 10 11 Unknown ISDN CO Line Attr P143 151 T1 CO
441. ing Time Use the dial pad to enter a value for the selected destination type For Dial 1 Enter a station range enter the same station number twice to assign a single station and the ring delay if any in ring cycles 0 9 Dial 2 Enter a hunt group number Dial 3 Enter the VSF announcement number and if desired to drop the call after the announcement Dial 4 For AA Ring Time enter the desired delay from 00 to 30 seconds Press the SAVE button to store the data entry 2 3 5 4 DID Service Attributes PGM Code 145 PSTN DID lines can be assigned the type of Start signaling and treatment of any received digits Digits can be used as is to route the call within the system digits can be converted and used to route the call or digits can be converted to a Table index to determine the call routing based on the assigned conversion method see Table 2 3 9 7 2 PGM CODE 231 PROCEDURE DID ATTRIBUTES 1 Press the PGM button and dial 145 ENTER COL RANGE 01 02 DID ATTRIBUTES Use the dial pad to enter the DID Line range For a single DID Line enter the same number twice For the iPECS Micro the acceptable range is 01 05 for PRESS FLEX_KEY 1 4 the iPECS 50 and MFIM100 the acceptable range is 01 42 for the MFIM300 the acceptable range is 001 200 and for the MFIM600 1200 the range is 001 400 600 See Table 2 3 5 4 1 Select the desired Flex button refer to Table 2 3 5 4 1 DISPLAY Use the di
442. ing for Networking call 00 24 00 Net CO Line Type Select network CO Line Type 1 NET PSTN 0 PSTN 3 188 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 324 Selecting Network Numbering Plan Table will display the Network Numbering Plan Table data entry page Figure 3 5 9 4 1 File Edit Yiew Favorites Tools Help a Address http 150 150 131 21 1 a_index htm T gt E ES SR ne a SEES Select Index 0 251 Load Sete tee eer cree eres XE CoE ey We ga Eee ee ise Se Bi Si Attribute meee Value Range System Usage NET i CEE TT Taak aA TEREE AA eE_ E a ra AEN MnA MRNA AAAA A AR ANNAN AN AANANANAANNKANAN AREAS Networking CO Group 0 24 E Max 16 digits oat aes iz CPN ISDN INFORMATION CPN INFORMATION 1 CPN INFORMATION 2 ALT SPEED NUMBER 2000 4999 m t pemen lt MFIM E IP Address amp Internet Figure 3 5 9 4 1 Network Numbering Plan Table Table 3 5 9 4 1 NETWORK NUMBERING PLAN TABLE ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT System Usage Select system usage O NET NET 1 P
443. ing this time after send call setup then it will release the CO line and try the call setup again via one of FailOver CO Group CO line FailOver CO Group Number 1 Max Number none of CO Group 3 60 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Selecting the CO Line Data program group returns the sub menu displayed in Figure 3 5 4 1 Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer BAE File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm iIPECS VD96M E 0Ap APR 08 Boot Yersion 1 0Ah JAN O7 Web Administration LIK300 Version iPECS VD96M E 0Ap APR O8 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 4 1 CO Line Data 3 61 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODES 140 142 Selecting CO IP Attributes will display the CO IP Attributes data input page Figure 3 5 4 1 1 Enter a valid CO range and click Load to enter the CO IP Attributes data Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DER File Edit Yiew Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm IPECSND96M E DAp APRIOB Boot Version 1 04h JANIOT EnterCORange _____ _Load CO Range From 1 to 1 Uncheck All Atiribute CO Type Normal w COMP GROUP CO Line COS CO Start Signal CO Line Type CO Line Signal Flash Type x x x x
444. inition of Zone desired station number country code Language and a remark For UCS client the password is controlled by the UCS server and it is disabled in MFIM A link paired station can be assigned or pre assigned by assign the same Desired Number as a Master station 3 219 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Table 3 5 13 2 1 STATION USER LOGIN ATTRIBUTE REMARK RANGE DEFAULT Registered Number Station number registered to the station displayed only Station number after registration Linked Indicates Linked pair status and station number Station number ID User Login ID 12 Characters Password User Login password 12 digits Zone The Zone to be assigned to the device 1 32 1 Desired Number Station number desired for the device Station number Nation Nation or country location of the device See Table Assigned in 2 3 1 2 System ID Language Devices default language The language selection type Language Code Nation is this default language or English dependent 3 220 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 450 Selecting Initialization will return the sub menu in Figure 3 5 14 1 Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DAR File Edit view Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm Web Administration LIK300 Version iPECS VD96M E 0Ap APR 08 Initialization P450 Copyright C 2006 by LG
445. intenance Issue 5 0 1 Multicast RTP Port Int BGM 4 digits 8136 Multicast RTP Port Ext 1 4 digits 8138 2 Multicast RTCP Port Int BGM 4 digits 8137 Multicast RTCP Port Ext 1 4 digits 8139 PGM Code 432 RSGM External Contact 1 First Contact 1 1 1 Door 2 Second Contact 1 1 PGM Code 433 RSGM Alarm Signal 1 Alarm Enable 1 ON 0 OFF 0 OFF 2 Alarm Contact Type 1 Close 0 Open 1 Close 3 Alarm Door Bell Mode 1 Alarm 0 Door Bell 1 Alarm 4 Alarm Signal Mode 1 Repeat 0 Once 1 Repeat PGM Code 434 RSGM MOH Source 1 MOH Type 0 1 1 0 None Tone Generate 1 MOH MUSIC Play 2 Int Ext1 Music 0 1 0 0 Internal MOH 1 External MOH PGM Code 435 Remote Service Attributes 1 RTP Relay GW Slot Seq 3 digits 2 Diff Serve Code 00 63 4 3 First CO Access Option RSGM 0 SYSTEM 1 RSGM 0 4 Firewall Protected 1 ON 0 OFF 1 ON TABLE D 13 TNET DATA Button SUB MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Web Only TNET Basic Attributes TNET Enable ON OFF OFF Web Only TNET CM Attributes Register Enable ON OFF OFF IP Address IP address iPECS Protocol port number 4 digits 5588 Total number of ports 3 digits Station ports 3 digits CO IP ports 3 digits VMIM VSF ports 3 digits MCIM ports 3 digits Web Only TNET LM Attributes MAC Address Mac address IP Address IP address iPECS Protocol port number 4 digits 5588 Total number of ports 3 digits Station ports 3 digits CO IP ports 3 digits VMIM VSF ports 3 digits MCIM ports 3 digits Web Onl
446. ion number is used to identify the Mailbox for the ACD group messages Mail Box Password The password associated with an ACD group Mailbox 12 digits is defined here The password is used in conjunction with the ACD group Mailbox as with a normal station CIQ Display To Agent When an ACD call is in queue the Call in queue ON OFF Mode information is displayed in the LCD of agent and OFF supervisor phones CIQ Display To Agent If CIQ information is displayed the information is 008 300 030 Timer updated at intervals based on this timer CIQ 1 Page Alert If the queued call count exceeds the threshold the 00 99 10 the CIQ 1 Announcement Repeat Timer Time CIQ 1 Page Alert VSF announcement number for the CIQ 1 00 70 Message Number Announcement CIQ 1 Page Alert Page Page Zone to receive CIQ 1 Announcement 00 15 or 00 Zone 00 40 CIQ 1 Page Alert Delay Delay timer for CIQ 1 Announcement 000 180 015 Time CIQ 1 Page Alert Repeat Interval for repeating the CIQ 1 Announcement 000 180 045 Time CIQ 2 Page Alert If queued call count exceeds the threshold the 00 99 20 Threshold system plays the CIQ 2 Announcement to the CIQ 2 Page Zone after the CIQ 2 Announcement Delay Timer Announcements are repeated at intervals of the CIQ 2 Announcement Repeat Timer CIQ 2 Page Alert VSF announcement number for the CIQ 2 00 70 Message Number Announcement CIQ 2 Page Alert Page
447. ion number is used to identify the Mailbox for the group messages Mail Box Password The password associated with a group Mailbox is Max 12 digits defined here The password is used in conjunction with the group as with a normal station Forced Forward Calls to a hunt group may forward directly to a defined Sta NET Destination destination bypassing the hunt process Forced Hunt grp Forward below must be enabled VSF Annc Sys Speed Forced Forward Calls to a hunt group may forward directly to a defined OFF OFF destination see above Forced Forward Destination ON Forced Forward must be enabled for the group Wait if the 1st When a call assigned to receive a guaranteed ON ON Announcement is busy announcement arrives and all channels are busy the OFF call may wait with Ringback until a channel is available ON or bypass the announcement OFF Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ess http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm TT et iPECS D96M E 0Ap APR 08 Boot Version 1_0Ah JANIO Station Group Overview Station Group Assignment P190 Group Number Group Number is 620 Group Type ACD Group Pick up Attribute OFF Attribute Range VSF Announce 1 Timer 000 999 sec Guar Anne Timer 0 Wait If Busy VSF Announce 2 Timer 000 999 sec VSF Announce 1 Location 00 70
448. ion v Notification v Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 5 277 1 SNMP Attribute SNMP Attributes as shown on the screen are divided into three categories SNMP Agent SNMP Security and SNMP Trap The SNMP Service field enables the SNMP agent running in the iPECS call server The SNMP port field defines the udp port used for communications from the iPECS system for SNMP messages This port should not be changed In SNMP Security are the Read Only and Read Write SNMP Community fields 4 to 16 characters The SNMP community designates an SNMP communication group to which an SNMP message belongs and is a logical relationship between the SNMP agent iPECS system and SNMP manager iIPECS NMS The SNMP community settings must be the same for the iPECS system and the iPECS NMS server e Read Only Community default Public Defines a community string used when the iPECS NMS reads data from the iPECS system Read Write Community default Private Defines the community string used when iPECS NMS reads or writes data to the iPECS system 3 128 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Although the iPECS system can accept packets from any SNMP manger iPECS NMS for improved security the IP address of specific servers can be defined and allowed Read only or Read Write access It is recommended that the system be assigned with
449. ion will return to inactive if the 00 24 Hrs 00 logged in user takes no action for the Auto Logout timer 3 124 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Selecting System Speed Dial will display the System Speed Dial entry page Figure 3 5 5 244 1 Select the Speed Dial range desired blue text in the table header iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DAR File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm 2000 2050 2100 2150 2200 2250 2300 2350 2400 2450 2500 2550 2600 2700 2750 2800 2850 2900 2950 3000 3050 3100 3150 3200 3250 3300 3350 3400 3450 3500 3550 3600 3650 3700 3750 3800 3850 3900 3950 4000 4050 4100 4150 4200 4250 4300 4350 4400 4450 4500 4550 4600 4650 4700 4750 4800 4850 4900 4950 Index CO Type CO Value Dial Digit Name 2000 NIA isis 2001 NIA 2002 NIA 2003 NIA 2004 NIA 2005 NIA 2006 MA 2007 NIA 2008 MA 2009 NA 2010 NA 2011 NIA 2012 MA Copyright C 2006 by LC Nortel Co Lid All Rights Reserved RN l E ER eS a lt Internet Figure 3 5 5 244 1 System S
450. ired for various attributes in PGM CODES 200 202 to match the ISDN circuit and services from the PSTN ISDN attributes define several characteristics of the ISDN interface ISDN call cost services Advice of Charge CLI modification voice encoding and other characteristics of the interface are defined SYSTEM ISDN ATT PRESS FLEX_KEY 1 2 Refer to Table 2 3 8 1 1 DISPLAY Table 2 3 8 1 1 ISDN LINE ATTRIBUTES PGM 200 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 CO ATD CODE 2DGT When the system is set to send the station 1 2 digits ee number with ISDN CLIP or COLP either the station number or this ATD code will be sent based on PGM CODE 114 button 11 2 CLI PRINT TO SERIAL The ISDN Calling Line Id may be included in 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 OFF OFF call records output over the serial port 1 ON assigned for Call Information PGM CODE 175 btn 5 Normally the system will send the primary Directory Number of the ISDN Line in the ISDN call SETUP and CONNECT messages to identify the caller CLIP or the answering COLP party respectively Under certain circumstances it may be desirable to provide a secondary or DID number for the ISDN Line In these cases the CLIP COLP Table may be used to define the digits sent The number sent is selected based on the index assigned for the ISDN Line under CO IP Attributes III PGM CODE 143 For the CLIP COLP Table entry
451. is entry assigns stations as members 3 121 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Selecting Web Access Authorization will display the Web Access Authorization data entry page Figure 3 5 5 222 1 This page is only displayed when a password is defined Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DOR ay File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address J http 150 150 131 21 1 a_index htm Tk i RLP Priority P173 a UWeb ecese Authorization Serial Port Selections P175 l Break ake Ratio P176 PGM User Level User Admin SMDR Attnbutes P177 Syster Date amp Time P178 System ID P100 Visible I Visible System Multi Language P179 System amp Device IP P102 103 Visible I Visible CO GW Sequence Number P104 IV Visible I Visible Flexible Station Number P105 M Visible Visible NTP Attributes P195 Flexible Numbering Plan P106 I Visible I Visible SRE A NEAN Station Type P110 I Visible I Visible Hot Desk Attributes P250 Station Attributes P111 113 T Visible Visible System Speed Dial Station ISDN Attributes P114 I Visible Visible Flex Buttons P 115 129 I Visible I Visible Station COS P116 I Visible Visible COMP Group Access P117 I Visible Visible Internal Page Zone P118 I Visible I Visible Ptt Group Access P119 I Visible IV Visible Preset Call Forward P120 l Visible I Visible Idle Line Selection P121 I Visible IV Visible IP Call Access P122 I Visible I Vis
452. isesssssivccvsssasvovancssnnacenceneosanten tonne 3 228 30 1 File Uplo d a eani a EO EA EA ENEN ENA 3 229 3 0 2 Upgrade PLOCSSSe6 cis ceoteaee vn vse iesvguscs EEE EEE A EE E ia aE 3 230 3 6 3 Upgrade Process VieW arrnie lior aer a AE E EEEE E EER 3 232 3 6 4 VSF Prompt Upgrade VieW ssssssessssrssrrssrseresrerrtrerrsrresresresresrrserseresreerreere 3 233 3 6 5 VSF System Greeting Up amp Download View e sssssssessessessessrssrssresresrrserserr 3 234 3 6 6 iPECS System Upgrade Process sssssssssrsssssesssresreersesersrrserrsresresresersereersee 3 236 3 6 6 1 iPECS Software Full Upgrade SCQUCICE cccccccccssecceeneeseseeteneeceeeeeceeeteeesesentessnnetenes 3 236 3 6 6 2 MFIM Upgrade ix aie Biases eee de A 3 239 3 6 6 3 Upgrade HIME FOS rissin aiseria ananiona iaaiaee gated aaa aa shape a aaan aia 3 239 3 6 6 4 Appliances Upgrade gateway Module and iPECS Phone sscccccessseecessseeesesteeeees 3 239 3 6 6 5 Direct Appliances UP Grae 1 cccccccceccecscececececeeeseensecceneeceeeesaaecaeneeeseanesesaecceneesennsesnaees 3 239 Ont MAINTENANCE ccsra cnicsscssnnancihad abd ania daakanaateldervonsianasiiesiaialease betseniiheniodcans 3 241 gll Database eniran a a eve a R bende a oe aa a Ae Sees 3 242 3 7 1 1 Database Downlod soicisccscccccscssisscscssvessccvssessacesaeccacesssscacvssecciescatsescdeacscdeoeasecstavabacieasioues 3 243 3 7 1 2 Database Upload pisss sosoran iarsan iaiaaeaia iaaa A aaa AE RAE E T
453. its Station Table is selected this entry is added to the number sent in number the ISDN call SETUP or CONNECT message in place of the station number 3 1 KHz Audio When an analog device SLT or FAX uses an ISDN Line ON OFF in the system the Information Element of the ISDN OFF SETUP message must indicate the device only has 3 1 KHz audio capabilities If an SLT or analog FAX will be allowed access to the ISDN Lines this parameter must be ON CLI Name Display When the CLI data from the ISDN in the call SETUP ON OFF message matches a number in Speed Dial the system OFF can display the name associated with the Speed Dial bin if set to ON CLI Redirect Display When an incoming ISDN call is Redirected by the ISDN Redirect Original CLI the call SETUP message will contain an original and CLI redirected CLI This selection determines if the iPECS Original Phone will display the original or redirected number CLI CLI IP Message Wait A log of caller identification can be maintained for the ON OFF user permitting the user to call back the identified party OFF Up to 1000 entries can be maintained in the log system wide EXT or ATD When the system sends a station number with CLIP or ATD ATD COLP the number can be either the Attendant number or EXT the number of the station MSN Wait When a station has an MSN button the station can ON OFF receive ring for a call to the MSN number associated with OFF the MSN button 3 33
454. j fi J ul Administration amp Maintenance Manual im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Revision History lisse Date Description of Changes 16 Aug 02 Initial release 2 0 29 Aug 03 Final update for iPECS Software release 2 4 0d2 13 Aug 06 Update for iPECS S W Phase 4 as of 7 02 06 General edits throughout Section 1 5 VLAN support added Added section 1 6 Menu Structure Keyset Admin PGM 102 btn 8 updated description of Second System address PGM 102 btn 16 amp 17 added LAN2 port IP address for redundancy PGM 103 btn 3 updated for MISC only PGM 103 btn 4 and 5 modified for VSF and MCIM respectively PGM 109 btn 10 and 11 added for TNET and Join Conf Room respectively PGM 111 btn 18 and 19 added for VM Gateway and SIP User ID respectively PGM 112 btn 20 24 added for Call Recording and back up VM station PGM 113 btn 18 amp 19 added for VMIM VSF notification to e mail PGM 124 modified for registered station as linked pair PGM 132 btn 5 added for TNET PGM 141 btn 11 added for IP protocol PGM 160 btn 17 added for Conf Room PGM 161 btn 18 added for unified message print for serial interface PGM 161 btn 19 added for message wait and two way record warning tone PGM 161 btn 20 added for CPU redundancy PGM 165 btn 29 and 54 added for VMIM VSF BGM MOH RTP amp RTCP ports PGM 171 Added VMIM VSF Music source PGM 177 btn 8 amp 24 modified for left right deletion PGM 179 ad
455. l O1 internal 01 internal 01 internal 01 internal 01 internal 03 all 02 external O2 external 02 external 02 external 02 external 03 all 03 all 03 all 03 all 03 all 12 Route to voice mail station 620 631 620 659 620 659 620 667 620 667 401 500 group station number 100 125 100 149 100 169 100 399 1000 1599 1000 2199 Stations can be paired as Executive Secretary pairs so that when the Executive enters DND intercom and transferred calls are automatically routed to the Secretary Up to 10 Executive Secretary pairs can be defined for the iPECS with an iPECS Micro iPECS 50 or MFIM100 and up to 36 for the iPECS with other MFIM models except 100 for MFIM1200 An Executive may have only one Secretary however a Secretary can be assigned to multiple Executives A Secretary of one pair may be the Executive of another however assignments that form a loop back are not allowed In addition when active the Secretary can be assigned to receive the Executive s voice messages refer to Station Attributes II PGM CODE 113 button 10 EXEC SEC PAIRS ENTER BIN NO 01 10 EXEC SEC PAIR 01 PRESS FLEX KEY 1 5 Refer to Table 2 3 9 6 1 DISPLAY 2 121 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Table 2 3 9 6 1 EXECUTIVE SECRETARY PAIRS PGM 229 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 EXEC SEC PAIR 01 Assigns Executive Secretary pair stations PAIR 1 101 102
456. l SETUP message matches a number in Speed Dial the system can display the name associated with the Speed Dial bin if set to ON 0 OFF 1 ON 0 OFF 1 ON OFF OFF 100 110 CLI REDIRECT 1 RED O CLI CLI When an incoming ISDN call is Redirected by the ISDN the call SETUP message will contain an original and redirected CLI This selection determines if the iPECS Phone will display the original or redirected number 1 Redirect 0 CLI CLI 10 100 110 CLI MSG WAIT 1 ON 0 OFF OFF A log of caller identification can be maintained for the user permitting the user to call back the identified party System wide up to 1000 entries can be maintained in the log 0 OFF 1 ON OFF 2 27 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 11 100 110 EXT OR ATD When the system sends a station number with 1 ATD ATD 1 ATD O EXT ATD CLIP or COLP the number can be either the 0 EXT Attendant number or the number of the station 12 100 110 MSN WAIT When a station has an MSN button the station 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 0FF OFF can receive ring for a call to the MSN number 1 ON associated with the MSN button 19 If a CO IP incoming Caller dials 0 when 100 110 OGM DEST NOT ASSIGNED listening to a station s VSF mailbox greeting the call is r
457. l turn the feature ON enable or OFF disable Refer to Table 2 3 3 2 1 to Table 2 3 3 2 3 for a description of the features and the input required PROCEDURE STATION ATT 1 1 Press the PGM button and dial IRETE 111 for Station Attributes 112 for Station Attributes II 113 for Station Attributes III 100 110 STATION ATT 1 Use the dial pad to enter a station range Ex 100 110 For a single station enter the same number twice PRESS FLEX_KEY 1 19 Refer to Table 2 3 3 2 1 to 3 Press the desired Flex button refer to Table 2 3 3 2 1 to Table 2 3 3 2 3 DISPLAY Use the dial pad to enter desired data for the attribute setting refer to Table 2 3 3 2 1 to Table 2 3 3 2 3 Press the SAVE button to store the data entry Table 2 3 3 2 1 STATION ATTRIBUTES PGM 111 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 100 110 AUTO SPKR Enables SPEAKER activation when a 0 OFF ON 1 ON 0 OFF ON CO IP DSS or other feature button is 1 ON pressed no need to lift handset 2 100 110 CALL FWD Enables Call Forward activation by the 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 OFF OFF station 1 ON 3 100 110 DND Enables DND activation by the station 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 4 100 110 DATA SECURITY Disables override and camp on tones to the 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 OFF OFF station when busy 1 ON 2 20 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenan
458. l Call Page RTP amp RTCP ports RTP and RTCP ports for All Call Page 0000 9999 8184 8185 PTT 1 RTP amp RTCP ports RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 1 0000 9999 8146 8147 PTT 2 RTP amp RTOP ports RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 2 0000 9999 8148 8149 PTT 3 RTP amp RTOP ports RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 3 0000 9999 8150 8151 PTT 4 RTP amp RTCP ports RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 4 0000 9999 8152 8153 PTT 5 RTP amp RTCP ports RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 5 0000 9999 8154 8155 PTT 6 RTP amp RTCP ports RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 6 0000 9999 8156 8157 PTT 7 RTP amp RTCP ports RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 7 0000 9999 8158 8159 PTT 8 RTP amp RTCP ports RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 8 0000 9999 8160 8161 PTT 9 RTP amp RTCP ports RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 9 0000 9999 8162 8163 PTT All RTP amp RTCP ports RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group ALL 0000 9999 8164 8165 BGM Internal VSF RTP and RTCP ports for VSF VMIM BGM 0000 9999 8206 8207 SLT MOH 1 RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH1 0000 9999 8208 8209 SLT MOH 2 RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH2 0000 9999 8210 8211 SLT MOH 3 RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH3 0000 9999 8212 8213 SLT MOH 4 RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH4 0000 9999 8214 8215 SLT MOH 5 RTP and RTOP ports for SLT MOH5 0000 9999 8216 8217 3 95 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 166 Selecting DISA COS will display the
459. lan Table PGM Code 324 0 cscscccssceceeneceeneeceeeeceneeessaseseeeeecsneeeensees 2 132 2 3 10 5 Network Feature Code Table PGM Code 325 ccccccccscscscscscececececececeseceeeceeanenenenanenes 2 134 2 3 11 TNET Centralized Networking PGM CODES 330 336 7 enes 2 134 2 3 11 1 TNET Basic Attributes PGM Code 330 wicicccccccccccccsessccecssscececsessesecssesesecenseseseersnseeeennes 2 134 2 3 11 2 TNET CM Attributes PGM Code 331 viceecccccccscccccccsssseceessecececsssseseessesessensnsseseersnseesennes 2 135 2 3 11 3 TNET LM ATTRIBUTES PGM Code 332 iccccccccessenscncecceeesessentcseeeeeeteeeentestnesevereesnenes 2 136 2 3 11 4 FOPSTN Attributes PGM Code 333 ccccccccccsecscccccsssseceesssseceeneeseseensssesssesseseseersnseseernes 2 137 2 3 11 5 TNETLM External Contact Attributes PGM Code 334 cccccccccccscscscstcececeeeeeeseeeeeaees 2 138 2 3 11 6 TNETLM Music Attributes PGM Code 335 iccccccccccccccsssccessseeceseesseeesecnesseseenssseseeeenes 2 138 2 3 11 7 TNET LM Alarm Attributes PGM Code 336 uit cccccccccccccsecccccssescececssssesecnssseseenerseeeersenes 2 139 2 3 12 RSGM amp Remote Device Data PGM CODES 430 435 eee eeeeeeee 2 140 2 3 12 1 RSGM amp Remote Device Table PGM Code 430 wuticccccccctccccccsescccccssseseenseeeseesseseeeseesnes 2 140 2 3 12 2 RSGM Multi Cast RTP RTCP Ports PGM Code 431 cccccccccccecccccssscceceesesseseesseeesseeenes 2 141 2 3 12 3 RSGM External Control Contact PGM
460. le provide additional VoIP channels which are intended for use in unmanaged network environments VOIM channels support IPSec and adjustable DiffServ pretag The IP channels are assigned to a CO IP line group refer to section 3 5 4 1 CO IP Attributes The MFIM and VOIM VoIP channels should be assigned to different CO IP line groups This entry then determines which CO IP Line group will be used for communication with the RSGM To assure that IPSec support is provided the RSGM should be assigned to use a group with IP channels from a VOIM The IP header TOS byte is employed to define a Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP which is used by routers to prioritize packets Most routers will prioritize packets with higher DiffServ Code Points However should delays through the router become significant such high priority packets are the first discarded Under high packet loss decreasing a high DSCP may improve performance The RSGM local PSTN line if equipped is assigned as the user s Private Line The user may access this Line automatically when dialing 9 or may access a CO IP channel from the first CO IP Group as defined in section 3 5 4 1 CO IP Attributes Table 3 5 10 4 1 RSGM SERVICE ATTRIBUTES ATTRIBUTE REMARK RANGE DEFAULT Alarm Enable Enables disables the contact monitoring circuitry 1 ON OFF 0 OFF Alarm Contact Type This parameter establishes the contact state that will 1
461. le ON OFF extension feature OFF Not assigned both manual and Preset Call Forward and overrides the System No answer forward timer section 3 5 5 20 Wake up Time The user can register a wake up time Headset or Speaker Selects Speakerphone mode or Headset mode Speaker ON Mode Headset Headset Spkr Ring Selects device to receive incoming ring signals Speaker SPEAKER Mode Speaker Headset or Both Headset Both User Name Registration Enables user name entry The name is displayed on Max 12 the LCD of iPECS Phones Chars BGM Enables background music The BGM is played while 0 3 0 the iPECS phone is idle Or 0 2 UMS MSG SMTP Mail The VSF and VMIM include notification of new IP v4 address Server Address messages to the user s voice mail This field defines Or the user s e mail mail server for the notification Mail server name UMS MSG User Mail The VSF and VMIM include notification of new e mail Address messages to the user s voice mail This field defines address the e mail address to notify when a new message is received at the VSF or VMIM Station Forward No This timer determines the duration the station will ring 000 600 000 Answer Timer prior to Ring No Answer Forward This setting affects seconds 3 249 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Selecting Call Forward will display the input entry page Figure 3 8 2 1 On this page the user can set Station or Preset Call Fo
462. lexble Numbering Plan P106 sol oof mi am uw pe wl w e amp http 150 150 131 211 admmenu htm Internet Figure 3 5 1 55 1 Flexible Station Number As with gateway Modules each iPECS Phone and SLT is assigned a logical sequence number shown as the Order number on the Web page during the registration process The station order number is incremented from 1 as each terminal device is registered At registration station numbers increment sequentially with the Order number and are assigned starting at station 100 The Station Numbering Plan allows the station numbers to be two 2 to four 4 digits in length 3 20 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODES 106 109 Selecting Flexible Numbering Plan will display the input entry page Figure 3 5 1 66 1 Selecting the blue colored text in the Table header will sort the table based on the selected column F iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DER File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm Tam iPECS V D96M E 0Ap APRIOS Boot Version 1 04h JAN OF ke 3 Attribute Internal Page Zones Internal All Call Page Meet Me Page Extemal Page Zone 1 Extemal Page Zone 2 External All Call Page All Call Page SMDR Account Code Enter Flash Command T
463. liance is already in the process of an upgrade Figure 3 6 2 2 Upgrade Process Working is displayed to indicate the upgrade in process A iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm iIPECSIVD96N E 0Ap APRIOS Upgrade I Select All Select Number IP Address Current Version G 121 10 211 131 36 A DAo Boot Version 1 0Ah JAN O Copyright C 2006 by LG Noriel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 6 2 1 Upgrade Process 3 230 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Issue 5 0 DoR Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm Upgrade Process State Working Number IP Address 121 10 211 131 36 Copyright C 2006 by LG Noriel Co Lid All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 6 2 2 Upgrade Process Working 3 231 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 The Upgrade Process View provides a status window refer to Figure 3 6 3 1 Upgrade Process View for Module and terminal upgrade activity in process Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DER Fie Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm Upgrade Process State Finished Number IP Address 130 10 211 131 38 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Lid All Rights
464. lies CO COS 2 Exception Table A governs CO COS 3 Exception Table B governs CO COS 4 Restricts LD calls and Exception Table C CO COS 5 Overrides Station COS 2 6 with no restrictions CO Start Signal The system can recognize a loop closure or a ground as GND LOOP the connect start signal on an analogue CO Line LOOP CO Line Type Each CO Line can be assigned as connected to a CO PBX co Line or a PBX CTX Line CO CO Line Signal Each analogue CO Line can be assigned to send either DTMF DTMF DTMF or Pulses for dialed digits to the PSTN Pulse Flash Type Analogue CO Lines can generate either an Open Loop or GRD LOOP a momentary ground connection as the FLASH signal LOOP Universal Night Answer Universal Night Answer UNA allows any station user to ON OFF answer a call on the CO IP line by dialing the UNA code OFF CO IP Group Each CO IP Group can be assigned to require the user ON OFF Authorization enter an Authorization Code OFF Data Fax Station Each CO IP line can be assigned to recognize a FAX call Station Number when a specified station answers Number CO Tenancy Group Only stations in the assigned Tenancy group are 00 15 0 permitted access to the defined CO Line CO IP Name Display The IP Phone display can indicate the CO line IP channel ON OFF number or the twelve 12 character name if assigned OFF CO Name Assign Each CO Line and IP group can be assigned a twelve 12 characters 12 character name for display purposes SMDR Met
465. linking is used the linked station does not reduce the system s capacity However in this case the linked station must be an iPECS Phone Phontage UCS Client or an SLT connected to an SLTM2 Unregistered linking of stations connected to other modules is not allowed When a pre registered station is to be linked to the primary station it maintains its database except that the station number is the same as the primary station In this case the linked station will reduce the system capacity by one 3 44 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 When a station is linked characteristics of the connection to the MFIM can be defined such as local device connection and codec type Table 3 5 2 13 1 LINKED STATION TABLE ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT MAC Address Set MAC address of a new linked station IP Address IP Address can be defined or modified for a linked station Router IP Address Set Router IP address for a linked station Station Type Select Linked station Type Not Defined Not Defined IPKTS SLT WKT Virtual Phone NET Displays the TNET assignment Direct Send If enabled system will directly send packets using the ON OFF ON MAC address Local Device Local device On or Remote device Off ON OFF ON Codec Type CODEC type 0 3 3 0 G 711 1 G 723 1 2 G 729 3 Follow system codec section 3 5 5 1 Slave Station Num When a Linked station is pre registered with the system
466. ll This timer sets seconds the time before and between the tones Note Call Time Tone must be enabled in PGM CODE 112 btn 1 20 WEB PWD GUARD TMR min If no data packets are received during a Web 001 999 5 001 999 005 Admin connection for the Guard time a minutes password check will be initiated by the system Table 2 3 6 20 2 SYSTEM TIMERS II PGM 181 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 FWD NO ANS TMR sec When a user activates No Answer Forward 000 600 015 000 600 015 calls will ring for this duration before the calls seconds are forward The Station No Answer Forward timer PGM CODE 123 will take precedence 2 DID DISA NO ANS sec A DID DISA call to a station will forward to the 00 99 00 000 255 20 DID DISA Destination assigned in PGM CODE seconds 167 should this timer expire before the call is answered 3 VSF USR RECORD sec This timer sets the maximum duration allowed 000 999 60 000 999 060 for the User Greeting in the system s basic seconds Voice Mail 4 VSF VALID USER MSG sec This timer sets the minimum duration allowed 0 9 4 0 9 4 for a voice mail message in the system s seconds basic VSF Voice Mail Messages shorter than this period are not stored 5 DOOR OPEN TMR 100ms This timer sets the minimum contact closure 05 99 20 05 99 20 time required to activate the contact assigned 100 msec as a door open contact 6 ICM DIAL TONE TMR sec If a user goes off hook on
467. ll Digit Counter 07 15 07 5 Print Incoming Call 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 6 Print Lost Call 1 ON 0 OFF ON id Records in Detail 1 ON 0 OFF ON 8 SMDR Dial Digit Hidden 0 9 0 9 SMDR Currency 3 Characters 10 SMDR Cost Per Unit Pulse 6 digits 000000 11 SMDR Decimal Location 0 5 0 12 SMDR Start Timer 000 250 000 1 sec increments 13 SMTP Mail Server Address 12 digits 14 User Mail Address e mail address 40 character modify via Web only SMDR System Domain Name 18 characters Web only 15 Mail Send Weekly Set 0 7 0 16 Mail Send Daily Set 00 23 00 17 Auto Send Mode 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 18 Auto Delete Mode 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 19 SMDR Long Distance Codes Flex 1 Flex 5 0 Maximum 5 LD codes 2 digits each 20 SMDR Ring CLI CPN SVC_1 0 Ring 1 CLI RING For incoming call 0 Ring Service 2 CPN 3 None Time 1 CLI 2 CPN 3 None Dialed number for out going call 21 MSN Print on SMDR 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 22 SMDR Ring CLI CPN SVC_2 0 Ring 1 CLI NONE For incoming call 0 Ring Service 2 CPN 3 None Time 1 CLI 2 CPN 3 None 23 Print Serial No 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 24 1 Hidden digit location 1 Right 0 Left Left 24 2 SMDR Interface Service 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 24 3 SMDR ICM Save 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 24 4 SMDR ICM Print 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 24 5 SMDR Disconnect Cause 1 ON 0 OFF OFF PGM Code 178 System Date amp Time 1 System Time 4 digits Hour Minute sequence 2 System Date 6 digits Month Day Year sequence 3 DST Enable Mode 1 ON 0 OFF Activate deactivate DST
468. ll Park 1 Button 5 Camp On Button 7 Call Park 2 Button 9 Release Button 11 Call Park 3 MFIM100 amp iPECS 50 Button 2 All Call Page Button 4 Station Group 1 Button 6 Internal All Call Page Button 8 Station Group 2 Button 10 Ext All Call Page Button 12 Station Group 3 Buttons 13 48 Station Ports 100 135 MAP 2 MFIM100 Buttons 1 34 Station Ports 136 169 Buttons 35 48 unassigned IPECS 50 Buttons 1 14 Station Ports 136 149 Buttons 15 48 unassigned iPECS Micro Buttons 1 48 unassigned MAP 3 MFIM100 amp iPECS 50 Buttons 1 42 CO Line 01 42 Buttons 43 48 unassigned iPECS Micro Buttons 1 5 CO Line 01 05 Buttons 6 48 unassigned Table 2 3 3 4 6 iPECS DSS CONSOLE DEFAULT CONFIGURATION PGM 115 MFIM300 amp MFIM600 amp MFIM1200 MAP DEFAULT CONSOLE BUTTON CONFIGURATION MAP 1 MAP 2 Button 1 Intrusion Button 3 Call Park 1 Button 5 Camp On Button 7 Call Park 2 Button 9 Release Button 11 Call Park 3 Button 2 All Call Page Button 4 Station Group 1 Button 6 Internal All Call Page Button 8 Station Group 2 Button 10 Ext All Call Page Button 12 Station Group 3 Buttons 13 48 Station Ports 100 135 Station Ports 136 183 MAP 3 Station Ports 184 231 MAP 4 Station Ports 232 279 MAP 5 Station Ports 280 327 MAP 6 CO Line 001 048 MAP 7 CO Line 049 096 MAP 8 CO Line 097 1
469. ll To Sec Call Exec If Sec DND Disable Disable v F N LCR Control Attnbute P220 LCR LDT P221 LCR DMT P222 LCR Table Initialization P223 Toll Exception Table P224 Emergency Code Table P226 Authorization Code Table P227 CCR Table P223 Disable Disable nN Disable Disable nN vv v Disable Disable v v v v nN Disable Disable N Disable Disable N Disable Disable N nN Disable Disable Olol ral aA Uli Al wi ry Flexible DID Conversion P231 System Speed Zone P232 Auto Ring Mode Table P233 Voice Mail Dialing Table P234 Registration Table P235 CE Disable Disable Mobile Exte able P236 Disable Disable Disable Disable nN Disable Disable nN l Disable Disable N N N l Disable Disable N Disable Disable nN Nicahlo Nicahla Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 8 9 1 Executive Secretary Table Stations can be paired as Executive Secretary pairs so that when the Executive enters DND intercom and transferred calls are automatically routed to the Secretary
470. ls Help Address http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm _ od iPECS VD96M E 0Ap APRIOS Boot Version 1 0Ah JANIOF Transfer CO IP Call v CO IP Recall Incoming COsIP Call Queued CO IP Call ystem Password P162 Alam Attnbutes P163 Attendant Assignment P164 LTPIRTCP P165 DID DISA Destination P167 External Control Contacts P163 PBX Access Codes P172 Port Settings P174 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 5 13 1 Ringing Line Preference Priority When multiple calls are ringing at a station assigned Ringing Line Preference the order of preference is based on the type of call CO IP Transfer CO IP Recall Incoming call CO IP Queue ICM calls are always assigned the lowest priority 3 106 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 174 Selecting RS 232 Port Settings will display the RS 232 Port Settings data entry page Figure 3 5 5 14 1 A iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help 3 http 150 150 131 211fa_index htm To H Log Out IPECS VD96M E 0Ap APR 08 Boot Version 1 0Ah JAN OF Baudrate 115200 BAUD CTSRTS OFF Serial 1 Port Setting Page Break OFF Line Per Page 66 001 199 XON XOFF XOFF System Attnbutes P160 161
471. ly handle encrypted passwords The Sun JVM is downloaded from the Java home page www java com Once downloaded execute the downloaded file To enable the Explorer JRE option From the Explorer menu select Internet Options Advanced From the Advanced Internet Options check the Use JRE Option Internet Options General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced Settings Use Passive FTP for firewall and DSL modem compatibility A Use smooth scrolling HTTP 1 1 settings Use HTTP 1 1 Use HTTP 1 1 through proxy connections Use JRE 1 5 0_04 for lt applet gt requires restart ake z ats Enable Automatic Image Resizing Enable Image Toolbar requires restart Play animations in web pages Play sounds in web pages Play videos in web pages Show image download placeholders Show pictures Smart image dithering Restore Defaults After Restarting the computer access the iPECS Web password page Applet iPECSPwd started will display in the bottom left corner to indicate password encryption is active Z iPECS Web Administration Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit Yiew Favorites Tools Help Address EEs http 150 150 131 211 systempwd htm ee r Applet iPECSPwd started im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 In the Web Admin initial screen see section 3 3 3 enter the password and click the Login bu
472. may be used to modify the assigned IP address for each gateway Module and iPECS Phone Each local gateway Module and terminal can be assigned for Direct Send With Direct Send enabled the system will employ the Ethernet MAC address layer 2 switching to eliminate the need for IP traffic overhead reducing overall LAN traffic The system normally employs IP multi cast protocol to respond to a registration request from a gateway Module or terminal When the device is separated from the system by a router the system must use the IP uni cast protocol This is established by the Local Device assignment When disabled Off the system will send an IP uni cast message to the device in response to a registration request PROCEDURE DEVICE IP ADDRESS PLAN 1 Press the PGM button and dial 103 PRESS FLEX KEY 1 6 See Table 2 3 2 2 1 Select the desired Flex button DISPLAY Button 1 CO amp VOIP gateway Modules Button 2 Stations Button 3 MISC Button 4 VSF amp VMIM Button 5 MCIM Button 6 SYSTEM RESET Button 7 WTIM Use the VOL UP and VOL DOWN buttons to see next previous IP Address Refer to Table 2 3 2 2 1 for display information Press Flex 1 6 to select the Sub menu item desired See Table 2 3 2 2 1 Button 1 IP address Button 2 MAC address Button 3 Direct Send Button 4 Local Device Button 5 CPU Type Button 6 Device Board ID Use the dial pad to enter desired data For IP and MAC addresses an
473. mber Plan User Program code Station Speed Dial System Speed Dial Net Station Number MSN Number If the station has an associated LIP 8012LSS Console the DSS Label field can be used to assign a label that is displayed for the console buttons 3 34 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 116 Selecting Station COS will display the Station COS data input page Figure 3 5 2 5 1 Enter a valid station range and click Load to enter the Station COS data Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DER A File Edit View Favorites Tools Help S http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm TT ed IPECS VD96M E 0Ap APR O8 Boot Version 1 0Ah JAN OT Enter Station Range Station Range From 100 to 100 Uncheck All Attribute Vv Day COS 1 Station Type P110 M Night COS 1 Station Attributes P111 113 v Timed Ring COS 1 v Station ISDN Attributes P114 Flex Buttons P115 129 COMP Group ccess P117 Intemal Page Zone P113 Ptt Group Access P119 Preset Call Forvrard P120 Idle Line Selection P121 IP Call Access P122 Preset FWD Timer P123 Linked Station P 124 Station ICM Group P125 Station SIP Attributes P 126 PERSEA ANAU tis ok Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 2 5 1 Station COS All stations are assigned a Class of Service COS which de
474. mp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 27 0000 9999 8158 ports 8159 Internal Page 28 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 28 0000 9999 8160 ports 8161 Internal Page 29 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 29 0000 9999 8162 ports 8163 Internal Page 30 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 30 0000 9999 8164 ports 8165 Internal Page 31 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 31 0000 9999 8166 ports 8167 Internal Page 32 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 32 0000 9999 8168 ports 8169 Internal Page 33 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 33 0000 9999 8170 ports 8171 Internal Page 34 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 34 0000 9999 8172 ports 8173 Internal Page 35 RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal Page 35 0000 9999 8174 ports 8175 Internal All Page RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for Internal All Call Page 0000 9999 8176 ports 8177 External Page 1 RTP amp RTCP ports RTP and RTCP ports for External Page 1 0000 9999 8178 8179 External Page 2 RTP amp RTCP ports RTP and RTCP ports for External Page 2 0000 9999 8180 8181 External All Page RTP amp RTCP RTP and RTCP ports for External All Call 0000 9999 8182 ports Page 8183 3 92 im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 ATTRIB
475. ms The iPECS Series is available with several versions of the call server configuration including the 31 channel iPECS Micro the 50 channel iPECS 50 the 100 channel MFIM100 the 300 channel MFIM300 the 600 channel MFIM600 and the 1200 channel MFIM1200 Several other variations exist between systems based on the model employed as shown in Table 1 1 1 System Capacity Chart Table 1 1 1 System Capacity Chart CAPACITY DESCRIPTION iPECS Micro iPECS 50 MFIM100 MFIM300 MFIM600 MFIM1200 Main Cabinet n a n a 10 slots 10 slots 10 slots 10 slots 31 ports 50 ports 600 ports 1200 ports 26 50 70 300 600 1200 Basic 2 SLT Basic 2 SLT PSTN circuits 5 max 42 basic 42 200 400 600 Basic 5 VOIP iPECS 50A Basic 6 VOIP Basic 6 VOIP channels Std 4 PSTN VoIP channels channels iPECS 50B std 4 BRI VoIP 13 a o 300 600 4 a 4 5 5 5 Serial Port RS n a 1 fe 4 1 1 USB Host port 1 1 a ee 1 1 Alarm Door bell n a 1 EAR 2 2 External Control n a 1 Ps 4 4 Relays Music Source Inputs n a 1 2 __2__ 2 2 Power Fail Circuit n a 1 as 4 Ext PFTU 4 Ext PFTU 6 optional 6 6 optional External Page n a 1 EARTE 2 Internal Page Zones 10 10 EE 35 100 System Speed Dial 800 48 digits 800 48 digits a 48 digits 12000 48 digits System Speed Dial 10 10 zamaz 50 ones Groups 20 48 digits 20 48 digits 100 48 digits 100 48 digits 10 48 digits 10 48 digits 10 48 digits 10 4
476. muted normal ring 1 MUTE 2 PAGE WARN TONE A warning tone can be sent prior to a page 0 OFF ON 1 ON 0 OFF ON announcement 1 ON 3 AUTOMATIC PRIVACY Automatic Privacy can be disabled allowing 0 OFF ON 1 ON 0 OFF ON stations to join an active CO IP call A 1 ON warning tone can be provided see button 4 below 4 PRIVACY WARN TONE If desired warning tone can be provided 0 OFF ON 1 ON 0 OFF ON when privacy is overridden 1 ON 5 ACD PRINT ENABLE ACD statistics can be periodically sent to the 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 OFF OFF assigned serial port To provide periodic 1 ON reports this entry must be ON 6 ACD PRINT TIMER 10sec This entry defines the time in 10 second 001 255 010 001 255 001 increments between the periodic ACD 10 sec reports 7 CLEAR ACD DATABASE When a periodic report is sent the ACD 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 OFF OFF database can be cleared automatically if 1 ON ON 8 OVERRIDE 1ST CO GRP When a user dials 9 the system can search 1 ON ON 1 ON O OFF ON all CO IP Groups for the first available CO IP 0 OFF line 9 BASE CODEC TYPE The default codec can be defined as G 711 or 0 G711 G711 0 2 G711 0 G 723 1 for decreased bandwidth needs 1 G723 1 The selected codec will be used on all internal communications as well as for remote iPECS devices 10 G711 PACKETIZATION 1ms The G 711 voice frame packetization time 0 250 020 000 255 020 determines the interval at which v
477. n 2 3 1 2 System ID 3 218 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Selecting the Station User Login returns the User Login Registration data input page Figure 3 5 13 2 1 iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address 2 http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm TT ed Boot Version 1 04h JAN OF Save Index 1 50 51 100 101 150 151 MEE Password Zone Desired Number F EE az TEE ai pel es a a Olol al Al Ula wl rn l Remote device Registe P442 UL Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 13 2 1 Station User Login Station User Login is primarily intended for Phontage amp UCS Client registration A station must register with the system each time it is connected to the system A user may register the Phone employing a Login code User ID and password Once registered the station number is assigned The login is regardless of the DIP switch 3 setting on the controlling MFIM If DIP switch 3 is set to allow registration the system will allow any User ID and password for registration Once registered this User ID must match the password for future registrations The ID and password can be pre assigned along with def
478. n COS 8 governs the dialing governs the dialing code counter and Table C STA Exception Table E Exception Table E No Restriction Only Local Call LD No Restriction COS 9 governs the dialing governs the dialing code counter and Table C STA Exception Table Exception Table No Restriction Only Local Call LD No Restriction COS 10 D amp E governs the D amp E governs the code counter and dialing dialing Table C STA Exception Table A Exception Table A No Restriction Only Local Call LD No Restriction COS 11 amp B amp D amp E amp B amp D amp E code counter and governs the dialing governs the dialing Table C Table 3 5 4 1 3 CALL METERING ENTRY CALL METERING TYPE 00 None 01 50 Hz 02 12 KHz 03 16 KHz 04 Singular Polarity Reverse SPR 05 Plural Polarity Reverse PPR 06 No Polarity Reverse NPR 07 Advice of Charge S 08 Advice of Charge 1 09 Advice of Charge 2 10 Advice of Charge 3 11 Advice of Charge 4 3 65 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 144 Selecting CO Ring Assignment will display the CO Ring Assignment data input page Figure 3 5 4 2 1 Enter a valid CO range and click Load to enter the CO Ring Assignment data Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DAR File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm IPECSAD96M E DAp APRIOS Boot Versi
479. n Or Mail server name UMS MSG User Mail Address The VSF and VMIM include notification of new e mail messages to the user s voice mail This field defines address the e mail address to notify when a new message is received at the VSF or VMIM SIP USER TABLE INDEX Index to SIP User ID table Pam CODE 126 for the 0 150 0 station Note PGM CODE 126 is accessible by Web only VSF VMIM GW Slot Seq Assigns the VSF or VMIM where messages for the Seq No station are stored Auto Talk Recording Option This field enables unconditional recording of all calls 0 OFF OFF placed received by the station Recordings in wav 1 ON format are stored at the Phontage UCS Client defined as the Call Recording Station below Auto Talk Recording Dest When Auto Call recording is defined for a station the station recording Phontage or UCS Client station number is defined here 3 30 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT VSF Backup Delete Option A Phontage or UCS Client may monitor voice 0 OFF OFF messages for another station as a back up The 1 ON Phontage or UCS Client will include the message count for the station in the Voice message count When enabled here the Phontage UCS Client may delete messages for the station VSF Backup Station A Phontage or UCS Client may monitor voice station messages for another station as a back up T
480. n amp 70 Off Music inputs are provided for use as the Background Music and or Music On Hold source inputs iPECS Micro provides one virtual input iPECS 50 provides a single input other MFIMs provide for two 2 music inputs The first input can be either the internal source or the external BGM1 except iPECS Micro iPECS Micro does not has an external BGM source Note that the BGM1 input on the front panel of the MFIM and the BGM1 input on the rear panel of the MFIM are electrically connected and only one 1 should be used refer to the iPECS Description and Installation Manual section 4 4 2 Refer to Table 2 3 6 11 1 for a description of the sources the data entries required and LCD displays In addition a VSF or VMIM announcement may be recorded and played as MOH to a holding caller And SLTM port is used as MOH to a holiding caller MUSIC ASSIGN PRESS FLEX_KEY 1 4 Refer to Table 2 3 6 11 1 DISPLAY Table 2 3 6 11 1 MUSIC SOURCES FOR MOH amp BGM PGM 171 Button DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 BGM TYPE 00 10 MUSIC 1 01 Assigns the source for BGM iPECS Micro and iPECS 50 does not support selection 2 Music 2 00 Hold tone 01 Music 1 02 Music 2 03 VSF MOH 04 SLTMOH1 05 SLTMOH2 06 SLTMOH3 07 SLTMOH4 08 SLTMOHS 09 VSFMOh2 10 VSFMOH3 1 2 80 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0
481. n Admin Station are used to guide and indicate status of the feature The dial pad is most often used to enter data after selecting a data item using the Flex buttons In some cases pressing a Flex button will toggle the entry with the Flex button LED indicating the status ON OFF For PROGRAM CODES with multiple Flex button selections the volume controls voL uP and voL Down buttons may be used to select the next or previous item The SPEED button is generally employed as a delete button to erase existing entries however where noted it may be used to confirm a range input Pressing the conf button returns to the 1 step of the data entry procedure for the PROGRAM CODE without storing unsaved entries The save button is used to store data after entry If there are no conflicts in the entered data confirmation tone will be received and the data stored If a conflict exists error tone is provided and newly entered data are not saved Generally corrected data may be entered and stored without restarting the entry procedure from the 1 step In some cases an alphanumeric entry is required Two 2 dial pad digits represent each character of an alphanumeric entry as shown in Table 2 1 2 1 below Use the Table to determine the two digits that must be entered from the dial pad for each character Table 2 1 2 1 ALPHANUMERIC DIAL PAD ENTRIES im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 2 1 3 Required Data Entri
482. n No Restriction Only Local Call LD No Restriction COS 1 code counter and Table C STA Exception Table A Exception Table A No Restriction Only Local Call LD No Restriction COS 2 governs the dialing governs the dialing code counter and Table C STA Exception Table B No Restriction Exception Table B Only Local Call LD No Restriction COS 3 governs the dialing governs the dialing code counter and Table C STA Exception Table Exception Table A Exception Table B Only Local Call LD No Restriction COS 4 A amp B governs the governs the dialing governs the dialing code counter and dialing Table C STA Local Call only LD Local Call only LD Local Call only LD Only Local Call LD No Restriction cos 5 Code 1 or O Code 1 or O and Code 1 or 0 and code counter and OS and Table C Table C Table C Table C 3 64 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 CO COS 1 CO COS 2 CO COS 3 CO COS 4 CO COS 5 STA Only Local Call LD Only Local Call LD Only Local Call LD Only Local Call LD No Restriction COS 6 code counter and code counter and code counter and code counter and Table C Table C Table C Table C STA In house dialing In house dialing In house dialing In house dialing In house dialing COS7 only only only only only STA Exception Table D Exception Table D No Restriction Only Local Call LD No Restrictio
483. n Station Number None Mailbox Password 12 digits None 17 WAIT IF 1ST ANNC BUSY 1 ON 0 OFF ON External VM GROUP 1 Wrap Up Timer 002 999 002 1 second increments 2 Put Mail Index 1 4 1 3 Get Mail Index 1 4 2 4 VM Group Hunt Type 1 Circular Terminal 0 Terminal D 20 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button SUB MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 5 Overflow Timer 000 600 180 1 second increments 6 Overflow Destination Station Group or System Speed PICK UP GROUP 1 Auto Pick Up 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 2 All Group Member Ringing 1 ON 0 OFF OFF VSF VM GROUP 1 Timer Set 1d 001 365 365 1 Day increments 2 Time Out 1s 00 15 15 1 second increments FS VM GROUP 1 VSF Announce 1 Timer 000 999 15 1 second increments 2 VSF Announce 2 Timer 000 999 000 1 second increments 3 VSF Announce 1 Location 00 70 00 4 VSF Announce 2 Location 00 70 00 5 VSF Announce 2 Repeat Timer 000 999 00 1 second increments 6 VSF Announce 2 Repeat 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 7 Overflow Destination Station Group VSF Speed 8 Overflow Timer 000 600 180 1 second increments 9 No Answer Timer 00 99 15 1 second increments 10 Pilot Hunt 1 ON 0 OFF ON 11 Alternate Destination Station Group 12 Hunt Type 1 Circular Terminal 13 Wrap Up Timer 002 999 002 1 second increments UCS GROUP Select UCS Flex 1 1 UCS Server 00 16 1 Only selection 1 is supported TABLE D 8 ISDN LINE amp ICLID ROUTING DATA Button SUB MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK PGM Code 200 ISDN At
484. n data entry page Figure 3 5 8 15 1 Select the Station Order range desired blue text above the table header Selecting the blue colored text in the Table header will sort the table based on the selected column Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm Station Order 1 50 51 100 101 150 151 200 201 250 Notify Retry Retry Interval VSFIVMIM Notify 9 TES 3 LCR Control ttribute P220 LCR LDT P221 Hunt Enable LCR DMT P222 LCR Table Inutialization P223 Toll Exception Table P224 Emergency Code Table P226 Authorization Code Table P227 CCR Table P223 Executive Secretary P229 Flexible DID Corrversion P231 System Speed Zone P232 Auto Ring Mode Table P233 Voice Mail Dialing Table P234 Registration Table P235 Disable Not Use Disable Not Use Disable Not Use Disable Not Use Disable Not Use Disable Not Use Disable Not Use Disable Not Use ojo ojajoajulajwvjn Disable Not Use Disable Not Use Disable Not Use HSS SS SESS SHS SES Disable Not Use KES ES ES ES ES ES SSS KES ES ES EES E ES ES E E Es HESS ES ES SS Salts w w ow w w w w w w w Q wo w w w w ow w w w w w w w w Disable NotUse
485. n the number of calls queued to the group match 00 99 99 Counter this parameter new calls will receive error tone and be disconnected after the VSF AA announcement if assigned is played Allow Forward Member A member activating Call Forward may be placed in OFF no FWD ON an unavailable state for hunt group calls ON When ON FWD OFF group calls are sent to the member as normal VSF Wait Station When a call overflows or routes to the VM group a Station station number is used to identify the Mailbox for the group messages Mail Box Password The password associated with the group Mailbox is 12 digits defined here The password is used in conjunction with the group Mailbox as with a normal station 3 144 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Forced Forward Calls to a hunt group may forward directly to a defined Sta NET Destination destination bypassing the hunt process Forced Hunt grp Forward below must be enabled VSF Annc Sys Speed Forced Forward Calls to a hunt group may forward directly to a defined OFF OFF destination see above Forced Forward Destination ON Forced Forward must be enabled for the group Wait if the 1st When a call assigned to receive an ann
486. naeeseneeceeneecsanessnaseseeneesennenees 2 45 2 3 5 2 CO IP Attributes IIl PGM Codes 141 143 ciicccccsssccccsesssceesessecessesseeeessenseeseseaeeeeeeas 2 45 2 3 5 3 CO IP Ring Assignment PGM Codes 144 0 escccssscccesceceeeeesenseceeeeeceeneesaesteneeceeeteeteaeetes 2 51 2 3 5 4 DID Service Attributes PGM Code 145 ccscccccssssecsessececsesnesecsessesecseneeecsssteseeeseneeees 2 52 2 3 5 5 DISA Service Attributes PGM Code 146 ccccccccssscecsessceceessesecsesseeecseaeeecsenesesssenneees 2 53 2 3 5 6 CO Line Preset Forward Attributes PGM Code 147 00 ccesesccccsessssceceesseceseenseseeesseeeenenea 2 54 2 3 5 7 NA ISDN Line Attributes PGM Code 150 cccccssccccesssceceessececsessnesecsssseeecsenieeeesesteneess 2 55 2 3 5 8 ISDN CO Line Attributes PGM Code 151 ccccccccsssscccssssceceessececsesnsesecsesseseesenseseesentneeens 2 56 2 3 5 9 T1 Line Timers PGM Code 152 ccccccsccccsscceesseccssscsesseccuscecessecssecseseecsnsecssseeessecesnnsessaees 2 58 2 3 5 10 DCOB CO Attribute PGM Code 153 ccccccccssscccessscecsessececsessesecssesesecsesaeeessesieseesenteaeess 2 59 2 3 6 SYSTEM DATA PGM CODES 160 to 82 ptsasesvasecetesiensiseietatereetawcsavint 2 60 2 3 6 1 System Attributes amp Il PGM Codes 160 to 161 00 ecescesceseeeeeeeneeeneeeeessereseneseeeeenees 2 60 2 3 6 2 System Password PGM Code 162 0 ssccccsececeeeceeseceenceceneeesaeseeneeceeeeeseasetseseeseeetessaeeees 2 64 2 3 6 3 Alarm A
487. nce 1 Timer the call is sent to a VSF announcement If the timer is set to 000 the call will receive the first announcement in full prior to the hunt process guaranteed announcement 000 999 seconds 015 Guar Annc Timer 0 Wait If Busy When a call assigned to receive a guaranteed announcement arrives and all channels are busy the call may wait with Ringback until a channel is available ON or bypass the announcement OFF OFF ON ON 3 143 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT VSF Announce 2 Timer After the 1st announcement a 2nd announcement 000 999 000 Timer is activated At expiration if the call remains seconds queued to the group the call is sent to the assigned 2nd VSF announcement VSF Announce 1 Location Each Ring Group can be assigned an announcement 00 70 00 none which is played if the call remains queued beyond the VSF Announce 1 Timer duration The announcement location is a VSF Announcement number An entry of 00 indicates no announcement VSF Announce 1 Auto If this attribute is selected the call will drop after the Check box Drop 1 VSF announcement VSF Announce 2 Location The Ring Group can be assigned a 2nd 00 70 00 none announcement which is played if the call remains queued beyond the VSF Announce 2 Timer duration The announcement location is a VSF Announ
488. nce room 12 ENTER INTO CONF GROUP Code to open a conference group 68 68 68 68 13 STATION ICR Code to activate Station ICR 587 587 587 587 14 PICK UP GROUP PICK UP Pick Up Group Call Pick up dial code 588 588 588 588 15 EMERGENCY PAGE Code for emergency page 589 589 589 589 ENTER NEW 589 16 REMOTE MEX CONTROL Code to control the mobile extension 580 580 580 580 ENTER NEW 580 settings remotely 17 ALL GR AGENT ON OFF DUTY Code to change the state of the Agent 58 58 58 58 ENTER NEW 58 ON Off duty in all hunt group Each station is assigned a type which is used by the system to recognize the station s capabilities and default Flex button configuration In addition for the iPECS DSS BLF Consoles the associated station number is identified here Note that the maximum of four 4 LIP 8012LSS DSS Consoles can be associated and connected to a station STATION TYPE ASSIGN ENTER STA RANGE 100 110 F1 TY F2 ASC IPKTU im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 100 110 F1 TY F2 ASC IPKTU 111 111 F1 TYPE F2 ASC DSS MAP2 STA Table 2 3 3 1 1 STATION TYPE ASSIGNMENT PGM 110 iPECS Micro TYPE DESCRIPTION IP KEYSET DSS MAP 1 SLT DTMF SLT with MSG Wait Lamp for DTMF a l lnv ja Table 2 3 3 1 2 STATION TYPE ASSIGNMENT PGM 110
489. nd 0 OFF ACD event messages 14 CALL LOG LIST NUM The Call Log that saves the Outgoing call 15 50 15 15 50 15 Received call or Lost call information can be displayed by pressing Call Log Display Button The maximum size of the Call Log per station is defined here 15 REPEAT DTMF TONE When enabled the system will provide DTMF 0 OFF ON 1 ON 0 OFF OFF repeat tone to the caller s station 1 ON 16 FAC RETRY COUNT If a CO s have CO IP group Authorization set 1 9 3 1 9 3 to ON in PGM141 8th or the Stations have Station Account set to ON in PGM112 19th then a valid authorization code must be entered to make an external CO call When user fails to enter a valid Authorization code in the number of attempts assigned in this field the station is disconnected or the Station COS is changed to COS 7 If the COS 7 WHEN AUTH FAIL PGM 161 17 is on then the station COS is changed to COS 7 otherwise the station is disconnected When the station COS is changed COS 7 the user must employ COS Restore in Station User PGM CODE 2 to return the station to the normal COS 17 CONFROOM CO TEL NUMBER ISDN DID number an external party must dial 8 digits CO TEL to enter a Conference room Phontage or UCS Client must pre establish the Conf Room 18 MFIM DIFFSERV MFIM Diff Serv pretag value 00 63 04 TAG 00 63 04 19 UPGRADE MODE Upgrade transfer mode from MFIM to iPECS 1 FTP FTP 1 FTP O TFTP FTP gateways 0 TFTP 20 TRANSFER TONE
490. nd Weekly Set Sets day of week to send SMDR data weekly 0 for no weekly data 1 7 for Monday through Sunday N A day N A 3 112 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT SMDR Mail Send Daily Set Sets time of day for SMDR data sent ona 00 23 00 daily basis 00 for no daily records 01 23 for hour of the day SMDR Mail Auto Send Set If the SMDR buffer is full the system will ON OFF automatically send a notification e mail OFF SMDR Mail Auto Delete Set Delete SMDR records after sending e mail ON OFF OFF Long Distance Code For SMDR and COS purposes five 5 Long 5 two digit LD Distance codes of up to two 2 digits each codes use as wild can be assigned If dialed as the 1st digits card any digit the call is considered an LD call SMDR CLI or Ring Service For incoming calls the system will send the CLI RING defined data item for Field The data item RING may be CLI CPN or Ring Service Time Note the User dialed number is always provided for an outgoing call SMDR Ring CLI CPN Service For incoming calls the system will send the CLI RING Il defined data item for Field Il The data item RING may be CLI CPN or Ring Service Time MSN PRINT ON SMDR Print MSN number Information in SMDR ON OFF Record OFF Print Serial No Print record number as part of SMDR output ON ON will reset to 1 when SMDR capacity i
491. ndex htm Send Internal SMS Station Range Message Max 100 char Save Copyright C 2006 by LC Nortel Co Lid All Rights Reserved amp http 150 150 131 21 1 ANCHOR2027 internet Figure 3 8 7 1 Internal SMS 3 255 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Selecting Send External SMS displays the input entry page Figure 3 8 8 1 E hitp 150 150 150 2 stn_index him a lt BO IV EAIA TID TSUWH amp irecs us zeae T if h SHOE GEO Destination No Return No Message Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Figure 3 8 8 1 External SMS 3 256 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Selecting Station List Management will display the input entry page Figure 3 8 9 1 F iPECS Station Program Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 stn_index htm Station Number Station Password INSERT Station List Uncheck All Station Number Station List Management Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved http 150 150 131 21 1 ANCHORZ026 Internet Figure
492. net Explorer T E EAE AY BAIA GAT Seah O O RADA ken O22 a Duas F A O http 192 168 150 120 a_index htm S 8 A Find PGM Time amp Datel Attribute a DST Mode OFF Month DST Start Time Weekday Hour Month DST End Time Weekday Hour click here LED Flashing Rate Jure Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Figure 3 5 5 18 2 Daylight Saving Time DST related parameters are established by the Daylight Saving Time menu If DST is enabled the system time will be adjust one hour forward and back at the DST start and end times respectively 3 115 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 179 Selecting System Multi Language will display the System Multi Language data entry page Figure 3 5 5 19 1 F iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DEAR File Edit Yiew Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm D TEETETTIIN Poal So Tad i System Management Log Out RLP Pniority P173 n PONPES ENEE ENE E ENEE RS 232 Port Settings P174 Serial Port Selections P175 eee Enter Sequence Number Load Break Make Ratio P176 SMDR Attnbutes P177 Sequence Number 3 Index Attnbute Value KOREA Prompt Usage OFF System Date amp Time P178 System Time 120
493. nference Timer Extend LOFF isa Discovery Manager Print OFF CALL LOG Num Offnet Dtmf tone Off Hook Ring Type Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Figure 3 5 5 1 1 System Attributes Internet System Attributes define settings that affect system wide features and functions Generally the entry will turn the feature On enable or Off disable Refer to Table 3 5 5 1 1 for a description of the Attributes and the data entries required Table 3 5 5 1 1 SYSTEM ATTRIBUTES ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Attd Call Queued RBT When calling a busy attendant the system will provide MOH MOH either ring back tone or MOH If MOH is selected the Ring Back source must be defined in section 3 5 5 11 Tone Camp On MOH Ring Back When Camp On is used the calling station will receive RB tone MOH Tone either ring back tone or MOH If MOH is selected a MOH source must be defined in section 3 5 5 11 3 81 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT CO Dial Tone Detect The system can use dial tone detection or a timed ON OFF pause for speed dial numbers that contain a Pause OFF CO Line Choice CO Lines are selected by the system from groups using LAST LAST either the LAST used FIRST or ROUND robin method
494. ng Back Tone Source 0 ring backl tone 0 1 Int Ext 1 2 Ext 2 3 VSF PGM Code 143 ISDN Line Attributes 1 COLP Table Index None Entries are index reference to COLP MFIM amp 100 00 10 Table Pam 201 10 in MFIM or PGM Other MFIMs 00 50 201 50 in MFIME will provide station number if enabled in Station Attributes IV ISDN COLP Pam 114 button 12 2 CLIP Table Index None Entries are index reference to COLP MFIM amp 100 00 10 Table Pam 201 10 in MFIM or PGM Other MFIMs 00 50 201 50 in MFIME will provide station number if enabled in Station Attributes IV ISDN CLI Station Pam 114 button 12 3 EN BLOC Sending 1 ON 0 OFF OFF ON En bloc Sending Mode OFF Overlap as dialed Sending Mode 4 Type Of Number 0 4 2 0 Unknown 1 International 2 National 3 Not used 4 Subscriber 5 DID Remove digit count 00 99 00 Received digits deleted from left 6 TEI Type 1 Auto 0 Fixed Auto 7 ISDN SS CD ORFS Disable 0 Disable 1 Deflect 3 Reroute Except USA version 8 ISDN One Digit Remove 1 ON 0 OFF OFF For Italy 9 Advice of Charge 0 6 0 0 None 1 Italy Spain 2 Finland 3 Australia 4 Belgium 5 ETSI Standard 10 ISDN Line Type 1 u Law 0 A Law u Law 11 Calling Sub address 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 12 Incoming Prefix Code Insertion 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 13 Outgoing Prefix Code Insertion 1 ON 0 OFF ON 14 International Access Code Max 4 digit D 10 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button SUB MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK
495. ng mode start 0000 2359 DAY 9 00 times and TIMED mode end times NITE 18 00 TDS TDE 3 Wednesday DAY NIGHT TIMED ring mode 0000 2359 DAY 9 00 start times and TIMED mode end times NITE 18 00 TDS TDE 4 Thursday DAY NIGHT TIMED ring mode start 0000 2359 DAY 9 00 times and TIMED mode end times NITE 18 00 TDS TDE 5 Friday DAY NIGHT TIMED ring mode start 0000 2359 DAY 9 00 times and TIMED mode end times NITE 18 00 TDS TDE 6 Saturday DAY NIGHT TIMED ring mode start 0000 2359 DAY 9 00 times and TIMED mode end times NITE 18 00 TDS TDE 7 Sunday DAY NIGHT TIMED ring mode start 0000 2359 DAY 9 00 times and TIMED mode end times NITE 18 00 TDS TDE 2 125 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance When an external Voice Mail system is used that employs in band signaling a digit sequence must be defined for the system to signal various call characteristics to the Voice Mail system The voice mail uses the sequences to determine appropriate announcements or further call routing The Table permits the definition of digits as either a prefix or suffix to other digits station number for mailbox identification Sequences are defined for such call characteristics as Put Mail Get Mail No Answer call etc VOICE MAIL DIALING TBL DIAL DIGIT 1 9 Refer to Table 2 3 9 10 1 DISPLAY Table 2 3 9 10 1 VOICE MAIL DIAL P
496. nload Warning The download process will reset the unit into the download mode This will terminate all network connections and reset your browser connection TFTP Download method Select remote TFTP server IP address and filename TFTP Server IP Filename Start TFTP Download HTTP Download method Select filename on local browser machine Filename Browse Start HTTP Download gt gt gt A e Figure 3 6 6 5 1 iPECS Phone Direct Connect Upgrade 3 240 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 The System Management tab from the main screen permits download of all or portions of the system s database and downloading and viewing of SMDR data see Figure 3 7 1 iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DER File Edit Yiew Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm E Log Out LIK300 Maintenance Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 7 1 Maintenance 3 241 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Selecting the Database menu item will display the Database sub menu items showing the database selections for Download and Upload refer to Figure 3 7 1 1 Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DAR File Edit Yiew Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm LIK300 Maintenance Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Right
497. nternet Explorer Ce File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm eal ee Tad a iPECS VD96M E 0Ap APR OS Boot Version 1 0Ah JANIOF Attribute BGM Internal 0000 9999 BGM Extemal 1 0000 9999 BGM Extemal2 e104 0000 9999 Intemal Page 1 0000 9999 System Attributes P160 161 Intemal Page 2 B108 0000 9999 System Password P162 Internal Page 3 0000 9999 Alam Attributes P 163 Intemal Page 4 0000 9999 Attendant Assignment P164 Internal Page 5 0000 9999 Intemal Page 6 0000 9999 Intemal Page 7 0000 9999 Internal Page 8 0000 9999 Internal Page 9 0000 9999 DISA COS P166 DID DISA Destination P167 Extemal Control Contacts P168 LCD Display Mode P169 LED Flashing Rate P170 Internal Page 10 1 0000 9999 Music Sources P171 Internal Page 11 0000 9999 PBX Access Codes P172 Internal Page 12 0000 9999 RLF Priority P173 Internal Page 13 0000 9999 RS 232 Port Settings P174 Internal Page 14 A S 0000 9999 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 5 5 1 Multi cast RTP RTCP Multi cast is employed by the system to send BGM MOH paging and Push To Talk packets Employing a single multi cast packet reduces the overall LAN traffic In some cas
498. ntrol TNET Transparent Network TNET characteristics are discussed in section TNET Central Control Networking Data The NET column here indicates if a device is enabled for TNET Each gateway Module and terminal can be assigned for Direct Send With Direct Send enabled the system will employ the Ethernet MAC address of the device to send iPECS protocol messages to the device This reduces the overall LAN traffic by eliminating the need for IP address headers in the messages The system normally employs IP multi cast protocol to respond to a registration request from a gateway Module or terminal When the device is separated from the system by a router the system must use the IP uni cast protocol This is established by the Local Device assignment im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 When disabled Off the system will send an IP uni cast message to the device in response to a registration request Table 3 5 1 33 1 SYSTEM IP ADDRESS PLAN ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION DEFAULT MFIM IP Address Public IP Address required for remote user and 10 10 10 2 external VoIP network access IPv4 format MFIM Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Router IP Address IP Address of router for external network WAWN IP 10 10 10 1 access Required for shared voice and data LAN external VoIP and remote Web access System IP Range Range for private IP addresses of Modules Terminals System Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0
499. o CO Line SLT Last Number Redial Do Not Distub DND Call Forward 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 N Ww Speed Dial Program A Activate Message Wait Call Back a Message Wait Call Back Answer a SLT Speed Dial Access Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 1 66 1 Flexible Number Plan Feature dial codes for the system can be assigned using the system s Flexible Number Plan Feature codes should be one 1 to four 4 digits in length and must not conflict For example Feature codes 53 and 536 represent a conflict The system will not update the database until correct data is entered Table 3 5 1 66 1 provides a brief description for each feature and the default codes as they appear in base Numbering Plan 1 The default values for other numbering plans which may be selected under System Id section 3 5 1 1 are provided in Appendix B 3 21 im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Table 3 5 1 66 1 FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN CODES ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION DEFAULT iPECS iPECS 50 MFIM300 MFIM600 MFIM1200 Micro amp MFIM100 Internal Page Zones Internal Page Zone access dial 501 510 501 510 501 535 501 535 301 400 codes Internal All Call Page Internal All Call Page access 543 543 543 543 543 dial
500. o Station Attributes section 3 5 2 2 Also for DID calls only announcements prompts can be sent from the VSF to the caller for various conditions busy error DND No Answer or Attendant Transfer 3 97 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 168 Selecting External Control Contacts will display the External Control Contact data entry page Figure 3 5 5 8 1 Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Addres http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm External Control Contact Value Not Use LBC Door Open D System Attributes 160 161 System Password 162 Alarm Attributes 163 Attendant nment 164 Multicast ATP ATCP 165 Second DISA COS 166 DID DISA Destination 16 External Control Deivce 1 External Control Deivce 2 Not Use wc Door Open S D A 9 External Control Deivce 1 External Control Deivce 2 Not Use Lec __ Door Open 3 2 3 3 LCD Display Mode 169 LED Flashing Rate 170 ic Sources 171 Codes 172 ALP Priority 173 RS 232 Port Settings 174 Serial Port Selections 175 Break Make Ratio 176 minm ane sam External Control Deivce 1 External Control Deivce 2 Not Use Lpc _ Door Open a9 9 9 SH A 5 External Control Deivce 1 Copyright C 2008 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved C
501. o action for this timer the user will receive error seconds tone Inter Digit Timer This timer sets the maximum time allowed between 01 20 05 each user dialed digit At expiration the user will seconds receive error tone MSG Wait Reminder Tone An iPECS Phone user will receive periodic 00 60 00 Timer reminder tones of a message waiting at intervals of minutes this timer Paging Timeout Timer Determines the maximum duration of a page after 000 255 15 which the caller and Page Zone are released seconds Pause Timer A Timed pause of this duration is used in speed 1 9 3 dial and during other automatically dialed digits seconds sent to the PSTN Soft auto RLS Timer When a Soft Key is used on the 6000 or 7000 1 30 10 series iPECS Phone after expiration of this timer the display will return to the previous display VM Pause Timer When the system sends a Pause to Voice Mail 1 90 30 using In band signals this timer defines the Pause duration Not available in the USA SLT Hook Switch Bounce This timer determines the duration the system 01 25 01 Timer considers an actual state change in the hook 100 msec switch and not a spurious contact bounce SLT Maximum Hook Switch This timer sets the maximum time an SLT user can 01 25 10 Flash Timer depress the hook switch for a Flash signal 100 msec SLT Minimum Hook Flash This time sets the minimum time an SLT user must 000 250 030 Timer depress the hook switch for a Flash signal 10 msec
502. o select the RTP 1 PRESS FLEX KEY 1 2 Internal or external music source ports 1 1 MCAST RTP BGM INT Use this entry to set the RTP port for an 4 digits 8186 8136 Internal music source 8187 1 2 MCAST RTP BGM EXT1 Use this entry to set the RTP port for an 4 digits 8188 8138 External music source 8189 MCAST RTCP PORT Press Flex button 1 2 to select the RTCP 2 PRESS FLEX KEY 1 2 Internal or external music source ports 2 1 MCAST RTCP BGM INT Use this entry to set the RTCP port for the 4 digits 8186 8136 Internal music source 8187 2 2 MCAST RTCP BGM EXT1 Use this entry to set the RTCP port for the 4 digits 8188 8138 External music source 8189 2 141 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 2 3 12 3 RSGM External Control Contact PGM Code 432 The RSGM incorporates a relay contact which can be employed to control an external device The contact is assigned to activate under one of several conditions The contact activates as a Door Lock Release contact activating when the Door Unlock code is dialed by the RSGM station Other uses for the external contact are currently unavailable PROCEDURE RSGM EXT CONTACT 1 Press the PGM button and dial 432 ENTER RANGE 001 035 Use the dial pad to enter the RSGM device number 01 13 for the iPECS Micro 01 25 for the iPECS 50 01 35 for the MFIM100 001 150 for the MFIM300 PRESS
503. ocol signaling UDP port is 0000 9999 5588 number defined At present this field is not used do not change this port number Total no of This field defines the total number of ports the LM will request be 000 999 0 port allocated by the CM for devices attached to the LM This value must be equal to or less than the port count in the CM for the LM devices Polling Count This field defines the maximum polling failures an LM considers a WAN 00 99 05 fault Polling This field defines the interval time between LM to CM polling attempts 00 99 02 interval 3 201 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 332 Selecting Tnet LM attributes will display the TNet LM Attributes page Figure 3 5 11 3 1 Mac Address IP Address Connect IPKTS Port 5588 0001 9999 Total no of port 0 000 999 Multicast IP Address 239 20 19 1 Mac Address IP Address Connect IPKTS Port 5588 0001 9999 Total no of port 0 000 999 Tnet Basic Attributes P330 Multicast IP Address 239 20 19 1 Tnet CM attributes P331 Mac Address IP Address Connect Tnet FoPSTN table P333 KTSP asss J ooog Tnet Control Cont Total no of port 0 000 999 Tnet Musici larni 335 336 Multicast IP Address 239 20 19 1 Zone Daa aiii Mac Address IP Address
504. ode counter and Table C STACOS9 Exception Table E Exception Table E No Restriction Only Local Call LD No Restriction governs the dialing governs the dialing code counter and Table C STA COS 10 Exception Table Exception Table No Restriction Only Local Call LD No Restriction D amp E governs the D amp E governs the code counter and dialing dialing Table C STA COS 11 Exception Table Exception Table No Restriction Only Local Call LD No Restriction A amp B and D amp E A amp B and D amp E code counter and governs the dialing governs the dialing Table C Each CO IP line is assigned to signal a station or group for an incoming call Ring Separate ring assignments are made for Day Night and Timed Ring modes When assigned to ring to a VSF announcement the call can be dropped automatically after the assigned announcement by entering after the VSF announcement number When CO Lines are programmed to Ring an external AA VM VSF VMIM or Feature Server Group as an Automated Attendant the Ring signal can be on an immediate or delayed basis allowing other stations groups to be assigned Ring and answer prior to signaling the AA The delay is defined in seconds from 00 to 30 CO RING ASSIGNMENT ENTER COL RANGE 01 02 PRESS KEY DAY NIGHT TIMED R 2 51 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Use the dial pad to select the destination type Dial 1 Station Dial 2 Hunt Group Dial 3 VSF Dial 4 AA R
505. odes The LCR Access Modes defines the user operations that will access the LCR feature The LCR Access Modes are LCR Disabled Loop user dials 9 or CO IP Group code 8xx or presses a Loop button Loop and Internal user dials digits without a CO IP Access Code prefix 3 161 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Loop and Direct CO Line user dials CO Line Access Code 88xx for iPECS Micro iPECS 50 amp MFIM100 88xxx for other MFIMs or pressing a CO line button Loop Direct CO Line and Internal Loop Direct CO Line and Internal and Direct Loop In addition days of the week are grouped into zones Day Zones and the time of day can be set into three groups Time Zones Table 3 5 8 1 1 provides general descriptive information and input ranges Table 3 5 8 1 1 LCR ASSIGNMENT ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT LCR Access Mode This entry defines the effective LCR modes the modes by which the user can access LCR Day Zone Each day of the week is assigned to a Day Zone 1 3 days of the The active Day Zone is the Zone assigned to the current week day of the week Time Zonet This entry defines the hours of the day during which 00 24 00 24 Time Zone 1 is active Note hours not defined in Time Zone 2 and 3 are automatically part of Time Zone 1 Time Zone2 This entry defines the hours of the day during which 00 24 Time Zone 2 is active Time Zone3 This entry defines the hours of the
506. oice samples are packetized and sent when the G 711 codec is used 11 G723 PACKETIZATION 1ms The G 723 1 voice frame packetization time 0 255 030 2 62 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 12 NETWORK TIME DATE The system can use ISDN Network time or 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 OFF OFF NTP to synchronize time with the ISDN or 1 ISDN data network To disable time sync use 2 NTP OFF ISDN sync is not available in USA version 13 INCOMING TOLL CHK The system can invoke COS dialing 0 OFF ON 1 0N 0 OFF OFF restrictions when a user dials while 1 ON connected to incoming call 14 WEB SERVER PORT This field determines the TCP port employed 00001 00080 00001 65535 00080 to access the system WEB server 65535 15 WEB PWD ENCRYPT The Web Admin password can be encrypted 0 OFF OFF 1 0N 0 OFF OFF for security using RC 6 block encryption A 1 ON Java VM must be installed on the user s PC 16 OLD AUTH CODE USAGE System Authorization codes are entered by 0 OFF ON 1 ON 0 0FF ON the user as and the code ON or the 1 ON Auth code index and the code OFF 17 COS 7 WHEN AUTH FAIL If user fails to enter a valid Authorization code
507. oming Address Signaling Type defines the type PULSE DTMF of signaling DTMF or Pulse expected DTMF RING DTC The Ring DTC detect timer defines the minimum 2 9 2 acceptable length of the Ring on time during a ring 100 ms cycle RING STOP The Ring Stop timer defines the maximum Ring off 10 60 60 time during a ring cycle 100 ms COLLECT DGT Collect DGT digits defines the number of digits 1 6 3 expected on a DID line STORE TIME For DID lines this timer defines the maximum delay 1 15 3 between incoming DID digits second 3 78 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 153 Selecting DCOB CO Line Attributes will display the DCOB Line Attributes data input page Figure 3 5 4 9 1 Enter a valid CO range and click Load to enter the DCOB Line Attributes data Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DAR ay File Edit Yiew Favorites Tools Help Address http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm iPECS VD96N E OAp APRIOS f Boot Version 1 DAR JANIOF EnterCORange _ __ I oaa eave CO Range From 1 to 1 Uncheck All Attributes Value Line Status 6 DNIS Service OFF x Number of CLI Digits 10 DCOB Type DID Call Category 1 COMP Attributes P140 142 COMP Ring Assignment P144 DID Service Attributes P145 DISA Service Attributes P146 COMP Preset Fwd Attr P147 NA ISDN Line Attributes P150 ISDN CO Line Attr P143 151 T1 CO Line Attributes
508. on 1_0Ah JANIOT EnterCORange __ _ Load save CO Range From 1 to 1 Uncheck All Attribute Station Delay Value ao Station Delay Range Station 100 he noon Delay COMP Attributes P140 142 a i roup DID Service Attnbutes P145 DISA Service Attnibutes P146 COVJIP Preset Fwd Attr P1 CAA NA ISDN Line Attributes P150 Ring Time ISDN CO Line Attr P1 C Net H Number C WSF Station Range C Hunt Group Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 4 2 1 CO Ring Assignment Each CO line is assigned to signal a station station group or VSF Announcement for an incoming call Ring Separate ring assignments are made for Day Night and Timed Ring mode A delay from 1 to 9 Ring cycles can also be assigned based on this assignment the station Hunt group will receive audible ring after a delay of the number of Ring cycles entered In addition when assigned to ring a VSF Announcement the system can be programmed to disconnect after the announcement Auto Drop When CO Lines are programmed to Ring an external AA VM VSF or Feature Server Group as an Automated Attendant the signal can be on an immediate or delayed basis allowing stations groups to be assigned Ring and answer prior to signaling the AA The delay is defined in seconds from 00 to 30
509. on Group 2 Button 9 Release Button 10 Ext All Call Page Button 11 Call Park 3 Button 12 Station Group 3 MFIM100 amp iPECS 50 Buttons 13 48 Station Ports 100 135 MAP 2 MFIM100 Buttons 1 34 Station Ports 136 169 MFIM amp MFIM100 Buttons 35 48 unassigned IPECS 50 Buttons 1 14 Station Ports 136 149 Buttons 15 48 unassigned MAP 3 MFIM100 amp iPECS 50 Buttons 1 42 CO Line 01 42 Buttons 43 48 unassigned Table 2 3 3 1 4 IP CONSOLE BUTTON CONFIGURATION PGM 110 MFIM300 MFIM600 amp MFIM1200 MAP DEFAULT CONSOLE BUTTON CONFIGURATION MAP 1 Button 1 Intrusion Button 2 All Call Page Button 3 Call Park 1 Button 4 Station Group 1 Button 5 Camp On Button 6 Internal All Call Page Button 7 Call Park 2 Button 8 Station Group 2 Button 9 Release Button 10 Ext All Call Page Button 11 Call Park 3 Button 12 Station Group 3 Buttons 13 48 Station Ports 100 135 MAP 2 Station Ports 136 183 Issue 5 0 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 MAP 3 Station Ports 184 231 MAP 4 Station Ports 232 279 MAP 5 Station Ports 280 327 MAP 6 CO Line 001 048 MAP 7 CO Line 049 096 MAP 8 CO Line 097 144 MAP 9 CO Line 145 192 2 3 3 2 Station Attributes I to III PGM Codes 111 113 Station Attributes define features and functions available to the station Generally the entry wil
510. on Table Index The Table is divided into bins The applicable LCR Access Modes LCR Type and the digits up to the first 12 dialed by the user are compared with the entries in the Leading Digit Table In addition indices to the Digit Modification Table are defined for each Time Zone of each Day Zone Table 3 5 8 2 1 provides a brief description and entries for the Leading Digit Table Table 3 5 8 2 1 LCR LEADING DIGITS ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT LCR Type This entry defines the LCR modes that will apply to this Internal Both LDT index To apply the modification the LCR Type CO Line must be part of the LCR Mode defined section 3 5 8 1 Both 3 163 im CsS Release 5 each Time Zone six 6 digits Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Compared Digits Up to 6 digits that if matched by the user dialed digits 12 digits will access the DMT Indices of the associated Leading Digit Table bin Check Password If enabled ON when the dialed digits match the LDT On off off digits the system will send second dial tone to request the user input a valid Authorization code DMT1 This entry defines the Digit Modification Table index Must be 6 00 99 for each Time Zone for Day Zone 1 The digits appropriate index will be selected for the current Day 3 DMT and Time Zone One entry DMT index is made for indices each Time Zone six 6 digits DMT2
511. one while a CO IP call will be routed to the Attendant 13 CIRC 621 MUSIC SRC A Music source is assigned so that calls to 00 Ring back 0 00 10 00 the group receive audio from the source in 01 Int Ext 1 place of ring back tone Note Ext 2 is not 01 Record available in the iPECS Micro and iPECS Play in iPECS 50 And VSF MOH is not available in the Micro iPECS Micro 02 Ext 2 03 VSF MOH 04 SLT MOH1 05 SLT MOH2 06 SLT MOH3 07 SLT MOH4 08 SLT MOH5 09 VSF MOH2 10 VSF MOH3 14 CIRC 621 MBR FORWARD A member activating Call forward may be 0 OFF ON 1 ON 0 OFF ON placed in an unavailable state for hunt 1 ON group calls ON When OFF group calls are sent to the member as normal 2 97 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 15 MAILBOX MSG WAIT STA When a group call overflows or routes to the VM group a station number is used to identify the Mailbox for the Circular group messages Station 16 MAILBOX PASSWORD The password associated with a group Mailbox is defined here The password is used in conjunction with the Circular group as with a normal station 12 digits 17 CIRC 621 FORCED DEST S H V SPD DIAL 1 4 When a call is delivered to the group the system can redirect the call to the Forced destination if enabled under btn 18 below 1 4
512. one attached to the second port of an SLTM is to be linked in step 3 below press Flex button 4 and select Flex button 2 dial 1 and press SAVE When a pre registered station is to be linked to the primary station it maintains its database except that the station number is the same as the primary station In this case the linked station will reduce the system capacity by one When a station is linked characteristics of the connection to the MFIM can be defined such as local device connection and codec type LINKED STA TABLE ENTER STA NUMBER STA 100 IS LINKED PAIR PRESS FLEX KEY 1 5 Refer to Table 2 3 3 13 1 DISPLAY 2 38 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Table 2 3 3 13 1 LINKED STATION ATTRIBUTES PGM 124 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 SET IP ADDRESS IP Address of the linked station not required IP IP NOT ASSIGNED 2 ROUTER IP ADDRESS Set Router IP address associated with linked IP ROUTER IP NOT ASSIGN station 3 STA 100 SET MAC ADDR Set MAC address of linked un registered MAC NOT ASSIGNED station required data Note the secondary station must not be registered in the system prior to linking If needed delete the device from the system 4 STATION TYPE Sets 2nd port of SLTM for linked station and Flex 1 4 PR
513. or MOH 0 Hold Tone Music MUSIC 1 1 1 Music 2 001 001 INT EXT1 MUSIC Assigns the input for source 1 Internal or 0 Internal Internal O INT 1 EXT1 INT External This is the source for BGM MOH 1 External 1 Music 2 143 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 When connected over an unmanaged network internet an RSGM communicates with the iPECS resources and other users by way of a VoIP channel The system includes VoIP interface channels in most MFIMs refer to Table 1 1 1 which are intended for use over a managed network LAN WAN The VOIM Voice over IP Module provides additional channels that are intended for use over an unmanaged network VOIM channels support IPSec and adjustable DiffServ pretag The IP channels are assigned to a CO IP line group refer to CO IP Attributes in PGM CODE 141 The MFIM and VOIM VoIP channels should be assigned to different CO IP line groups This entry then determines which CO IP Line group will be used for communication with the RSGM To assure that IPSec support is provided the RSGM should be assigned to use a group with IP channels only from a VOIM The IP header TOS byte is employed to define a Differentiated Services Code Point DSCP which is used by routers to prioritize packets Most routers will prioritize packets with higher DiffServ Code Points However should delays through the router become significant high priority DSCP packets are the first disca
514. ord External Control Contacts P163 LCD Display Mode P169 LED Flashing Rate P170 Music Sources P171 PBX Access Codes P172 RLP Priority P173 RS 232 Port Settings P174 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 5 2 1 System Password Entry to the system database and maintenance functions can be protected by a password up to twelve 12 digits Separate Web Admin Service passwords may be assigned for User Admin and Maintenance access When defined the passwords limit access to portions of the Web Admin services The Maintenance password gives access to all of the iPECS Web Admin amp Maintenance services The User and Admin passwords give access to the selections assigned in Web Access Authorization section 3 5 5 22 3 85 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 163 Selecting Alarm Attributes will display the Alarm Attributes data entry page Figure 3 5 5 3 1 iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DEAR File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm eae eae ns iPECS VD96M E 0Ap APRIO8 Boot Version 1_0Ah JAN OF Attribute Value Alarm Enable OFF Alarm Contact Type Close Alarm v Alarm Signal Mode Repeat v System Attributes P160 161 System Password P162 Attendant Assignment P164 Multicast RTP R
515. orts defined in the CM for the LM in order to register properly VoIP channels are needed to support RTP Packet relay or codec translation between other devices The CO port count must include any VoIP channels required TNET LM ATTRIBUTES ENTER BIN NO 01 15 TNET LM 01 ATTRIBUTES PRESS FLEX KEY 1 4 Refer to Table 2 3 11 3 1 DISPLAY Table 2 3 11 3 1 TNET LM ATTRIBUTES PGM 332 Button DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 LM 01 MAC ADDRESS This field defines the MAC address of the LM MAC 0000000000000 that will be part of the TNET environment and address is used by the CM for authorization 2 LM 01 IP ADDRESS This field displays the IP address of the LM IPv4 XXX XKXX XXX XXX address 3 LM 01 IPKTS PORT In the TNET environment the IP KTS 0000 9999 5588 0001 9999 5588 protocol signaling UDP port is defined At present this field is not used do not change this port number 4 LM 01 TOTAL PORT This field defines the total number of ports the 000 999 000 000 999 011 LM will request be allocated by the CM for devices attached to the LM This value must be equal to or more than the available port count in the LM 2 136 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 The Fail over function allows the systems in a Centralized Control network TNET environment to complete calls from system to system over a PSTN analog or d
516. ouncement 0 OFF ON Announcement is busy arrives and all channels are busy the call may wait 1 ON with Ringback until a channel is available ON or bypass the announcement OFF iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ddress http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm a On Nae Group Number is 620 Group Type Voice Mail Group Pick up Attribute OFF Attribute Wrap Up Timer 000 999 sec i Put Mail Index aa Tw i nl a Get Mail Index B i E Station Group Overview Hunt Type es Terminal a Station Group Assignment P190 Overflow Timer 180 000 600 sec STAMNET or Hunt parry w Destination VSF Announce C 0 Overflow Destinat Dep 01 70 i 7 SYS SPD li System Speed Dial or Hun Station or Group Forced Forward eee Number Destination VSF Announce 0 01 70 _SYS SPD C Copyright C 2006 by LC Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 6 3 4 External Voice Mail Group Attributes Table 3 5 6 3 4 EXTERNAL VOICE MAIL GROUP ATTRIBUTES ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Warp Up Timer After terminating any call the VM port will be 002 999 002 maintained in a busy state for the duration of the seconds Wrap Up timer Put Mail Index For external analog Voice Mail groups an index to 1 4 1 the Voice Mail Dial Table that contains the Put Mail dial code Get Mail Index For external analog Voice Mail groups an index to 1 4 2 the Voice Mail Dial Table that contains th
517. oup Attributes will display the Station Group Attributes data entry page Enter the Station Group number and click Load the Web page for the selected group will be displayed as in Figure 3 5 6 3 1 to Figure 3 5 6 3 8 based on the Group type Each type of group has a different set of available attributes relating to announcements timers overflow etc Table 3 5 6 3 1 through Table 3 5 6 3 8 provide descriptions for the attributes and data entries required Note that the attributes for the Circular and Terminal Hunt groups are given in Table 3 5 6 3 1 and the UCD attributes include the ACD functions Table 3 5 6 3 2 iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help s http 150 150 131 21 tfa_index htm TT et IPECS VD96M E 0Ap APRIOS Boot Version 1 04h JAN O7 Group Number Group Number is 620 Group Type Terminal Group Pick up Attribute OFF Attribute Range VSF Announce 1 Timer 000 999 sec Guar Annc Timer 0 Wait If VSF Announce 2 Timer 800 999 see VSF Announce 1 Location 00 70 Station G Ta EANA Station Group Overview VSF Announce 1 Auto Drop VSF Announce 2 Location 00 70 VSF Announce 2 Auto Drop Station Group Assignment P190 000 999 sec VSF Announce 2 Repeat Timer VSF Announce 2 Repeat OFF x Station or Grow C p STA MNET or
518. outed according to this option 2 3 3 4 Flexible button Assignment PGM Code 115 Each Flex button for each iPECS Phone DSS Console can be assigned a function Type and an associated Value as shown in Table 2 3 3 4 1 For assignments to an iPECS DSS Console the voL uP voL Down buttons shift the Flex button appearance on the Admin station to the next or previous group of 24 buttons as they appear on the iPECS DSS Console When multiple DSS Consoles are associated with a station VoL UP VOL DWN are used to access and assign a function to the console buttons Each console contains entries for 48 buttons even though the console may only have 12 buttons buttons 13 to 48 are ignored In this case assignments for Table 2 3 3 4 2 shows the default button assignments for the iPECS Phones and Table 2 3 3 4 and Table 2 3 3 4 provide default assignment for the various DSS Console button maps PROCEDURE FLEX BUTTON ASSIGN 1 Press the PGM button and dial 115 ENTER STA RANGE 100 110 BTN ASSIGN PRESS FLEX_KEY 01 24 Press the desired Flex button 1 24 Use the dial pad to enter a station range Ex 100 110 For a single station enter the same number twice Use the dial pad to enter the desired button TYPE 1 6 and value if required Refer to Table 2 3 3 4 1 for types and value range Defaults for the iPECS Phones are shown in Table 2 3 3 4 2 for DSS Console defaults refer to Table 2 3 3 4 and
519. pad to enter the desired zone 1 3 Press the SAVE button to store the data entry 2 113 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Table 2 3 9 1 1 1 LCR CONTROL ATTRIBUTES PGM 220 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 LCR ACCESS MODE 1 6 This entry defines the effective LCR modes MOO 1 1 M00 DISABLE LCR the modes by which the user can access LCR M01 2 M02 3 M11 4 M12 5 M13 6 2 DAY ZN 1 1234567 2 3 For each day of the week a Day Zone 1 to 3 Flex1 7 Zone 1 all M1 T2 W3 T4 F5 SA6 SU7 is assigned The active Day Zone is the Zone 1 3 days of the assigned to the current day of the week Flex week button 1 7 3 TIME ZONE 1 This entry defines the hours of the day during 00 24 00 24 1 00 24 which Time Zone 1 is active Note hours not defined in Time Zone 2 and 3 are automatically part of Time Zone 1 4 TIME ZONE 2 This entry defines the hours of the day during 00 24 1 00 24 2 which Time Zone 2 is active 5 TIME ZONE 3 This entry defines the hours of the day during 00 24 1 00 24 3 which Time Zone 3 is active 2 3 9 1 2 LCR Leading Digit Table PGM Code 221 The Leading Digit Table is used to analyze the user dialed digits to determine an appropriate Digit Modification Table Index The Table is divided into bins The applicable LCR Access Modes LCR Type and t
520. pecial services In 1 ON cases where the code is not provided in the incoming call SETUP message the system can insert the Local Prefix and Area code in SMDR LNR displays etc 13 01 02 OUT PREFIX INS Regional ISDN providers may use the Local 0 OFF ON 1 0N 0 OFF ON Area Prefix code for special services The 1 ON system can insert the Local Prefix in the outgoing call SETUP message 14 When an incoming call includes the 4 digits 01 02 INT ACCESS CODE international Country code in the ISDN call SETUP message the Country code will be included in the station display To include the Country code Incoming Prefix insertion button 12 above and CLI Display for the station PGM CODE 114 btn 1 must be On 2 49 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 15 01 02 AREA CODE Regional ISDN providers may use the Local MAX 6 as Prefix and Area codes for special services Digits The system will insert this Local Area Code in the call SETUP messages defined under button 13 above 16 01 02 PREFIX CODE Regional ISDN providers may use the Local MAX 4 z PA Prefix and Area codes for special services Digits The system will insert this Local Prefix Code in the call SETUP messages defined under button 13 above i7 0
521. peed Dial List Capacity for System Speed dial numbers is provided in Table 1 1 1 for the various system configurations 3 125 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Selecting Custom Messages will display the Custom Message Table data entry page Figure 3 5 5 255 1 F iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm H Log Out Max 24 Characters Max 24 Characters Max 24 Characters Max 24 Characters Max 24 Characters Max 24 Characters Max 24 Characters Max 24 Characters Max 24 Characters Max 24 Characters Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 5 255 1 Custom Message 3 126 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 195 Selecting NTP Attributes will display the System NTP Attributes entry page Figure 3 5 5 266 1 iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DAR ay File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm NTP Act OFF Primary Server Address Secondary Server Address Standard Time Zone GMT 07 00 Mountain Time US amp Canada SNMP Attribute P196 Cabinet Attribute P1 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved
522. pplementary service message 1 FAC 6 NET CAS ENABLE Not used 0 OFF OFF 1 ON OFF OFF 1 ON 7 NET VPN ENABLE Not used 0 OFF OFF 1 ON OFF OFF 1 ON 8 NET CC RETAIN MODE Not used 0 OFF OFF 1 ON OFF OFF 1 ON 2 130 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance NET SUPPLEMENTARY ATTR PRESS FLEX KEY 1 8 Refer to Table 2 3 10 2 1 DISPLAY Table 2 3 10 2 1 NETWORK SUPPLEMENTARY ATTRIBUTE PGM 321 Issue 5 0 0 0 0 0 iPECS is configured with LDK systems for Button DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 NET TRANSFER MODE Select type for Transfer and Call forward 1 RERT REROUT 1 RERT O JOIN REROUT Rerouting or Join O JOIN 2 TCP PORT FOR BLF TCP port for sending BLF message to BLF 0000 9999 9500 9500 9999 9500 Manager 3 UDP PORT FOR BLF UDP port for sending BLF message to BLF 0000 9999 9501 9500 9999 9501 Manager 4 BLF MANAGER IP IP Address of BLF Server used only when 0 0 0 0 Voice Networking 5 DURATION OF BLF STS Duration of BLF status message sending to 01 99 10 01 99 100 mm sec 10 BLF Server msec 6 MULTI CAST IP IP address of Multicast for BLF service 0 0 0 0 G A A 7 NET TRANS FAULT RCL TMR Network transfer fault recall timer to be used 001 300 10 001 300 sec 010 when no responses from other systems seconds 8 VOIP CALL REROUTE CO
523. programming assure you have an understanding of the PROGRAM and its purpose TABLE D 1 SYSTEM ID Button SUB MENU DEFAULT REMARK PGM Code 100 System ID 1 Country Code 1 Maximum 4 digits 2 Customer Site Name 3 My Area Code 4 Maximum 23 characters Maximum 6 digits Numbering Plan Type 1 Overall default Numbering Plan the 1st station digit should be 1 4 2 The station number can be from 100 799 3 Australia Default 4 New Zealand Default 5 Italy Default 6 Finland Default Max Station Ports is 60 Stations above Max ports will be displayed 7 Max Station Ports 70 Stations above Max ports will be displayed 8 The station number can be from 100 999 5 System ID reset System reset TABLE D 2 Numbering Plans Button SUB MENU DEFAULT REMARK PGM Code 102 System IP Address Plan 1 MFIM E Address 10 10 10 2 Public IP Address for H 323 calls 2 MFIM E Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 3 Router IP Address 10 10 10 1 Router IP Address for WAN access 4 System start IP address 10 10 10 10 Private start address for system to module amp terminal communications 5 System end IP address 10 10 10 254 Private end address for system to module amp terminal communications 6 System Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 7 Automatic IP Address Assignment ON 8 Second System IP Address 0 0 0 0 Second Private IP Address for modules 9 Second System Net Mask 255 255 255 0 Second Private Sub net Mask for modules 10 Firewall IP Address 0 0 0 0 IP Address
524. protocol Issue 5 0 Higher priority packets are given priority in the Router or Layer 3 Switch queue However they are the first to be discarded in the event of long queue delays which may cause excess packet loss and poor voice quality Refer to Table 3 5 3 1 1 for a description of the features and the input required Table 3 5 3 1 1 H 323 VOIP ATTRIBUTES ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT H323 VOIP Setup Mode IP calls can be set up using the H 323 normal or Fast Normal Fast Normal Start mode H323 Tunneling Mode IP calls can be set up using the H 245 encapsulation On Off Off Tunneling H323 DTMF Path During a call DTMF can be send in band or out of 1 Outband Out for Voip band H 245 0 Inband In for VOIM 0 63 DIFFSERV DiffServ pre tagging for Voice packet Note high 0 63 4 values may cause high packet discard levels RAS Usage Determine whether VOIM VOIP Gateway will be 1 On Off used as a GateKeeper 0 Off RAS Multi cast IP Address Multi cast IP address for RAS Information of IP Address 224 0 1 41 Gatekeeper RAS Multicast IP Port Multi cast IP Port for RAS Information of GateKeeper IP Port 1718 RAS Unicast IP Address Uni cast IP address for RAS Information of IP Address 82 134 80 2 GateKeeper RAS Unicast IP Port Uni cast IP Port for RAS Information of GateKeeper IP Port 1719 RAS Keep Alive Time The time between exchange of RAS Information 001 999 120 be
525. ps to be assigned Ring and answer prior to signaling the AA The delay is defined in seconds from 00 to 30 PROCEDURE ICLID RING ASN TBL ATT 1 Press the PGM button and dial 204 ENTER BIN NO 001 250 PRESS KEY Use the dial pad to enter the Index or Bin number 001 250 DAY NIGHT TIMED R Press the desired Flex button Button 1 Day Ring Button 2 Night Ring Button 3 Timed Ring Use the dial pad to select the destination type Dial 1 Station Dial 2 Hunt Group Dial 3 VSF VMIM Announcement Dial 4 AA Ring Time Use the dial pad to enter a value for the selected destination type Press the SAVE button to store the data entry 2 111 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance In addition to remote access via an IP network connection the system database may be accessed remotely via an ISDN connection Placing a call over an ISDN Line to the designated PPP Station will provide a connection to the system database The system will request a user id and password which must match one of the User Ids and passwords assigned After matching id and password are entered the iPECS Home page is provided and Web Admin is available as explained in section 3 PPP ATTRIBUTES PRESS FLEX KEY 1 7 Refer to Table 2 3 8 6 1 DISPLAY Table 2 3 8 6 1 PPP ATTRIBUTES PGM 205 Issue 5 0 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY D
526. pts are upgraded by uploading prompt files to the MFIM VMIM prompts are upgraded by direct upload of prompt files to the VMIM 3 228 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 From the File Upload page Figure 3 6 1 1 File Upload select files to upload to the system s memory and click the Upload button The file is sent to the system s memory saved and automatically loaded upon a system reset or restart Html image files are extracted and previous HTML files are deleted at completion of the upload process New VSF prompt files are also available immediately upon successful uploaded Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer BAR File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay Address http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm Tt E amp E iPECS VD96M E 04p APRIOS File Upload Boot Version 1 0Ah JAN OT Select Upload File and Wait for Uploading to endl es A Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Lid All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 6 1 1 File Upload If file upload succeeds a success page will be displayed 3 229 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 If the iPECS Appliance image is uploaded the appliances of the type for which an image was uploaded will be displayed and can be selected to upgrade as shown in Figure 3 6 2 1 Upgrade Process Select the desired appliance and click Upgrade the upgrade process will start and a progress screen will be displayed Note if the App
527. pyright C 2006 by LC Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 6 5 1 VSF Prompt Individual upload View Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm iil Press message for download Check messages and press Delete bution Type 1 Type 2 Type 3 O Lway O 2wa oO 3wa O 2wa O 3wa O Sway O Swav O Lwa O 19 wav O 20 wav O Hwa Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Lid All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 6 5 2 VSF Prompt Individual download View 3 234 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm i Select Type of SystemGreetings to Download First Type of SIG v Don t Use Space Character in File Name Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Lid All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 6 5 3 VSF Prompt System Greeting download View iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm iil Select System Greeting File and Wait for Uploading to End Type of Language First Korean Second Korean Third NA Don t Use Space Character in File Name First 4 Browse Upload Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel
528. r ID NA i Max 23 Digits Start Date End Date YYYY MM DD format Time Condition MONT TUET WEDI THUI FRI SATI SUNI ALLI Holiday Start Time End Time HH MM Must be 4 digits 0000 2359 Destination NA CO Value Dial Digits Max 23 digits Scenario Priority 0 9 Caller ID NIA Max 23 Digits Start Date End Date YY VY MM DD format Time Condition MONT TUET WEDI THUS FRI SAT SUNT ALLI Holiday S Start Time End Time HH MM Must be 4 digits 0000 2359 Destination N A CO Value Dial Digits Max 23 digits Scenario Priority Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Figure 3 8 3 1 Station ICR Scenario destination in highest priority matching scenario 3 251 0 9 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Selecting Station Speed Dial will display the input entry page Figure 3 8 4 1 A iPECS Station Program Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 stn_index htm F Station Speed Dial
529. r TNET operation Table 3 5 3 3 1 BOARD BASE ATTRIBUTES ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Router IP Address Enter the Default Gateway Router IP address IP Address associated with the selected devices Device Codec Type Select CODEC type for each device G 711 G 723 1 SYSTEM G 729 G 722 or CODEC SYSTEM CODEC Firewall IP Address Enter the Firewall IP address of the selected 0 0 0 0 devices RTP Security SRTP implements AES Advanced Encryption ON OFF ON Standard for packets between other devices with RTP Security enabled TNET Enable When a module or station is to be connected in a ON OFF OFF Centralized Control network TNET the device must be enabled for TNET operation UMS Sender Mail VSF VMIM e mail address for sending voice mails Max 40 characters Address as e mail T38 Enable T38 mode ON OFF for FAX data transfer ON OFF OFF between other iPECS gateways 3 56 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Selecting SIP Attributes returns the SIP Gateway Attributes data input page Figure 3 5 3 4 1 Enter the Sequence Range refer to section 3 5 1 3 and click Load to enter attribute values f i Log Out iv P Asserted Identity USE g Vv Remote Party Id USE z ID Individuality A From ld Extension SIP User ID Table v P Asserted Identity Ext
530. raeanaess 3 208 3 5 12 3 Access amp Page Relay 0 esccccsccccencecenecesnaeeseneeeceanensnaeceeeeceeeessaesseneeceeneeseanseseseessensereansees 3 210 B5 AZA Zon Attribute sisscccssssiecesssevervsetsscveseesiorsveseieness0dicdsscdsavasssinisdesesehoses astouesesdiducrenduaneronedoaes 3 211 3 5 12 5 Zone RTP Relay GLOUP 1 ccccccceccceceeeceeneecceececeueeesaaeceeneecsneeseaaeseeneeceueessnaeseeaeeceeneeseneees 3 213 3 5 12 6 Inter Zone AttriD Ute ccc cece cccccccccccececccccececececececececececacacauacacacacaeacaeauanacacacaeaeaeacaeacaeaeananaaas 3 214 3 5 12 7 Zone Holiday ASSIQNIMENA 21 ccccccccecceeeseceeneeceneeeeeaaeceeaeeceeeessaesseneeceeeeessaesecseeseneeessaneees 3 216 39 13 Deyice LOS Meena nnrir ea AEE AE ties A A EE N EE 3 217 3 5 13 1 Remote Phone amp CO Gateway Registration cccccceceeeeeeseeseneeceneeesesaeeesaeeceeneestntees 3 218 8 5 13 2 Station User Logi torsiss cceseeticss cays csada ankan aaa iaaa aE aiT AENEA AiR 3 219 Sel 4 Initialization rE E EEEE peed E O EET E EERS 3 221 35 14 Initi lizatio Table sv wscscicscecssacsecsssssivccssacsccvavesstecesscsensesasccadesadcssevesesedsusssactvnsssacacecsbacseeedoass 3 222 3 5 15 DECT Datars a Er E E E E EEEE aE OET 3 223 3 9 15 1 DECT Re gistratlOM sxiccssisocsssceh svvetsleceieseeie cvsessscvnes ian idaki dese isai aiaei ae aaiae aa eeii a ia 3 224 3 5 15 2 DECT ATTRIBUTES erns ea eaaa R ra EEA NEEN aa iii 3 227 3 6 FILE UPLOAD amp REMOTE UPGRADE v
531. rded Under high packet loss decreasing a high DSCP may in fact improve performance The RSGM local PSTN line if equipped is assigned as the user s Private Line The user may access this Line automatically when dialing 9 or may access a CO IP channel from the first CO IP Group as defined in PGM CODE 141 button 1 REMOTE SERVICE ATTR ENTER RANGE 001 035 001 001 RMT SERVE ATTR PRESS FLEX KEY 1 4 Refer to Table 2 3 12 6 1 DISPLAY Table 2 3 12 6 1 REMOTE SERVICE ATTRIBUTE ASSIGNMENTS PGM 435 Button DISPLAY REMARK RANGE DEFAULT 1 001 001 RTP RLY G W SEQ When connected via an unmanaged network Number of NULL RTP RELAY G W SEQ RTP packets are exchanged over an IP Slots channel from the assigned VOIM gateway 2 001 001 DIFFSERV DiffServ preferred option value 00 63 4 CODE 00 63 04 3 001 001 FIRST CO ACCESS Select RSGM or System CO line for 1t CO 0 RSGM RSGM RSG 0 SYS 1 RSG line access 1 SYS 4 001 001 F W PROTECTED Firewall Protected value is automatically set 0 OFF ON 1 0N 0 OFF OFF by the system 1 ON 2 144 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Zone data is a tool employed to easily manage the characteristics of groups of devices under the control of an MFIM Often devices are installed in groups with common characteristics Such devices can be grouped to a Zone to define common characte
532. red device will attempt to discover and register with a local on the same LAN iPECS system The Module or terminal will send a registration request to the assigned iPECS system MFIM IP address If no response is received the device will generate a Multi cast discovery request for registration Remote iPECS Phone amp Remote Services Module A remote device iPECS Phone or gateway Module registers with the system using the MAC address of the device The MAC address must be assigned in the system database and the IP address of the system must be assigned in the remote device Using this address the remote device will attempt to register with the assigned iPECS system When the system receives the registration request the MAC address is compared with the database to authenticate the remote device With a matching MAC the system will accept the registration request and provide the remote device with the appropriate settings Note that the position of the MFIM Registration switch does not affect remote registration 1 3 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 iPECS system When power is applied an Ethernet link is established and the Registration switch MFIM DIP switch position 3 is in the ON position the MFIM will send a Multi cast request to unregistered gateway Modules and iPECS terminals for registration When the system receives a valid registration or discovery request and the Registration switch MFIM DIP switch
533. red user s Voice Mail Box 3 40 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 121 Selecting Idle Line Selection will display the Idle Line Selection data input page Figure 3 5 2 10 1 Enter a valid station range and click Load to enter the Idle Line Selection data Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit Yiew Favorites Tools Help s amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm irec IPECSND96M E DAp APRIOS Boot version 1 0Ah JANIOT Motiti ana Station Range From 100 to 100 Destination No Selection Ke Flex Button C CO Line Station Type P110 Station Attnbutes P111 113 Station ISDN Attrbutes P114 C CO Group Flex Buttons P115 129 StationNet Station COS P116 COMP Group Access P117 Intemal Page Zone P113 Ptt Group Access P119 Preset Call Forward P120 IP Call Access P122 Preset FWD Timer P123 Linked Station P124 Station ICM Group P125 Station SIP Attributes P126 sa eh DD OE NE Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 2 10 1 Idle Line Selection When a station goes to an off hook condition lifts handset or presses SPEAKER button the system normally provides intercom dial tone In place of dial tone the station can be programmed to access a CO Line CO IP Group or call a Station or Station Group
534. restrictions are 3 168 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 applied If the COS is 5 or 6 no Long Distance dialing is allowed If entries are only made in the Allow Table only those numbers entered can be dialed all other dialed numbers will be restricted If entries are only made in the Deny Table only those numbers entered will be restricted and all other numbers can be dialed When there are entries in both the Allow and Deny Table pair if the number is in the Deny Table the number will be restricted otherwise the number can be dialed without restriction 3 169 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 226 Selecting Emergency Code Table will display the Emergency Code Table data entry page Figure 3 5 8 6 1 Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DEAR File Edit Yiew Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm IPECSA D96M E 0Ap APRIOS Boot ersion 1 04h JANIO MAX 15 Digits PEE EET ETETE include E Stop D Don t Care i 2 MAX 15 Digits Include E Stop D Don t Care gt iat RAR EA ascend bac nuevas MAX 15 Digits Include E Stop D Don t Care a OEROL EE TTEE MAX 15 Digits Include E Stop D Don t Care 5 A MAX 15 Digits eeraa Raa aaa AA tihi de ee ee HAAA y easa Include E Stop D Don t Care aa gt MAX 15 Digits eT i________ Incl
535. riction governs the dialing governs the dialing Code Counter and Table C STA COS 4_ Exception Table Exception Table A Exception Table B Only Local Call LD No Restriction A amp B governs the governs the dialing governs the dialing Code Counter and dialing Table C STACOS 5_ Local Call only LD Local Call only LD Local Call only LD Only Local Call LD No Restriction Code 1st digit O Code 1st digit 0 Code 1st digit O Code Counter and or 1 and Table C or 1 and Table C and Table C Table C STACOS6_ Only Local Call LD Only Local Call LD Only Local Call LD Only Local Call LD No Restriction code counter and code counter and code counter and Code Counter and Table C Table C Table C Table C STACOS7_ In house dialing In house dialing In house dialing In house dialing only In house dialing only only only only 2 50 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Table 2 3 5 2 5 CALL METERING FUNCTION ENTRY CALL METERING TYPE 00 None 01 50 Hz 02 12 KHz 03 16 KHz 04 Singular Polarity Reverse SPR 05 Plural Polarity Reverse PPR 06 No Polarity Reverse NPR Issue 5 0 co COS 1 CO COS 2 CO COS 3 CO COS 4 CO COS 5 STACOS8 Exception Table D Exception Table D No Restriction Only Local Call LD No Restriction governs the dialing governs the dialing c
536. ristics including Country Code DSCP RTP packet handling etc Common attributes are defined at the device Zone and Inter zone level Device settings have priority over Zone settings while Zone settings have priority over system settings Generally transport of RTP packets should be a peer to peer communication over either a LAN or VPN If iPECS devices are separated by a NAPT server or direct peer to peer communications is not available packet relay must be employed to assure communication In packet relay RTP packets are received by a local VoIP channel MFIM or VOIM which is under control of the MFIM and the IP address is translated from a public to the device s private address The VOIM VoIP channels implement a secure channel using IPSec protocol Devices can be assigned as part of an RTP Relay group to use the same VoIP channels to implement relay of RTP packets Packet relay groups also provide for conversion of multi cast packets from the MFIM to uni cast and back again at the group level to multi cast Note packet relay requires an MFIM or VOIM VoIP channel be available locally for each simultaneous call that requires packet relay Programs 436 to 441 define device zone assignments and zone configurations These programs are available only in Web admin Holiday and Vacation assignments for each zone are defined in Program 444 Holidays and vacation day intervals for each zone can be established to define a specified Service mode
537. rity OFF TNET Enable OFF UMS Sender Mail Address Max 40 characters T38 Enable OFF w xI x SIP G W Attnbutes P133 x Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 3 3 1 Board Base Attributes Appliances gateway Modules and IP Phones can be connected to the iPECS over a managed WAN without the need to employ a VoIP channel In this case the system does not implement security IPSec or QoS treatment over the link To implement the managed WAN connectivity the iPECS must be assigned with the IP address of the router for all appliances that may attempt a point to point connection over the managed WAN including devices on the iPECS LAN Note that if the device s Router IP address is not defined the system will use the Router IP address defined in System amp Device IP Address Plan The default codec employed by each device can be specifically defined as G 711 G 729 G 723 G 722 or the system default codec assigned in section 3 5 5 1 3 55 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Modules introduced with iPECS phase 4 include support for SRTP Secure Real Time Protocol which employs Advanced Encryption Standard AES to secure RTP packets When the module sends RTP packets to other phase 4 modules SRTP is implemented if enabled When a device is part of a Central Control TNET it must be enabled fo
538. rough a multi layered Audio Text menu assigning a VSF AA Announcement Customer Call Route CCR Table Index The system can be instructed to disconnect after the announcement or follow the CCR Table routing with a user recorded announcement requesting specific inputs from the user PROCEDURE DISA ATTRIBUTES 1 Press the PGM button and dial 146 ENTER COL RANGE Use the dial pad to enter the CO Line range For a single CO Line enter the same 01 02 DISA ATTRIBUTE F1 DAY F2 NIGHT F3 TIMED 001 002 DISA ATTRIBUTE DAY SERVICE 00 00 71 number twice For the iPECS Micro the acceptable range is 01 05 for the iPECS 50 and MFIM100 the acceptable range is 01 42 for the MFIM300 the acceptable range is 001 200 and for the MFIM600 1200 the range is 001 400 600 Select the desired Flex button Button 1 Day Button 2 Night Button 3 Timed Use the dial pad to enter the desired VSF AA Announcement 00 disabled 01 70 CCR Table index PGM CODE 228 or 71 await user digits Enter after the entry to include a drop after announcement instruction Press the SAVE button to store the data entry 2 53 im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 2 3 5 6 CO Line Preset Forward Attributes PGM Code 147 The CO Line Preset Forward feature enables a CO line to initially ring at multiple stations and forward to a pre determined destination PGM CODE 204 The destination can be a station Vo
539. rst station number to assign in the range The station number is incremented by one over the range of Order numbers Station Range use to change station numbers over a range of stations using the Start Station Number as the first station number of the range The station number is incremented by one for each successive station in the range Selecting a Station Order Range blue text in the table header will display the Station Numbering Plan information for the selected Order Range Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit Yiew Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm IPECS VD96M E 0Ap APRIO8 Boot Version 1 0Ah JAN O7 Not Use Range Input Enter Ordering Range Start Station Number Enter Station Range Start Station Number System ID P100 System amp Device IP P102 103 CO GW Sequence Number P104 Station Order 1 50 51 100 101 150 151 2001 201 250 251 300 Order Station Number IP Address New Station Number 1000 10 211 131 11 1000 1001 10 211 131 12 1001 1002 10 211 131 15 1002 1003 10 211 131 10 1003 1004 10 211 131 16 1004 1005 1021113116 1005 1006 10 211 131 16 1006 1007 10 211 131 16 1007 1008 10 211 131 16 1008 1009 10 211 131 16 1009 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved F
540. rts for All Call Page 0000 9999 8134 8134 8135 8135 19 M CAST RTP PTT 1 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 1 0000 9999 8136 8136 8137 8137 20 M CAST RTP PTT 2 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 2 0000 9999 8138 8138 8139 8139 21 M CAST RTP PTT 3 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 3 0000 9999 8140 8140 8141 8141 22 M CAST RTP PTT 4 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 4 0000 9999 8142 8142 8143 8143 23 M CAST RTP PTT 5 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 5 0000 9999 8144 8144 8145 8145 24 M CAST RTP PTT 6 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 6 0000 9999 8146 8146 8147 8147 25 M CAST RTP PTT 7 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 7 0000 9999 8148 8148 8149 8149 26 M CAST RTP PTT 8 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 8 0000 9999 8150 8150 8151 8151 27 M CAST RTP PTT 9 RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group 9 0000 9999 8152 8152 8153 8153 28 M CAST RTP PTT ALL RTP and RTCP ports for PTT group ALL 0000 9999 8154 8154 8155 8155 2 69 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 29 M CAST RTP BGM VSF 1 RTP and RTCP ports for VSF VMIM BGM 0000 9999 8156 8156 8157 use 8157 30 M CAST RTP SLT MOH 1 RTP and RTCP ports for SLT
541. ructions for entering data from the Admin Station once in the PROGRAM MODE Each section provides descriptive information step by step instructions and Tables for determining appropriate entries 2 39 1 SYSTEM ID PGM CODE 100 Under System ID the country is identified using the international dial codes COUNTRY CODE If the Country code requires changing the system must be initialized to restructure memory and create the country specific defaults gain frequencies and other system characteristics specific to the country and regional regulatory requirements im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 To change the Country Code set the MFIM switch 3 and 4 to the On position follow the procedure below to modify the Country code initialize the MFIM as outlined in the Initialization section After initialization reset switches as needed switch 4 initializes database on reset and switch 3 enables automatic registrations Generally switch 4 is set to Off and switch 3 is left On until after initial installation of all Modules and terminals A twenty three 23 character SITE NAME and the local Area Code are also defined in this program The SITE NAME is primarily useful for the installer programmer as a reference to the customer In addition under this program the system can be programmed to select one of eight 8 Flexible Number Plans refer to Appendix B Individual items from the selected Numbering Plan can be changed under
542. rward Z iPECS Station Program Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ess amp http 150 150 131 211 stn_index htm Call Forward Type Cancel Call Forward Unconditional Call Forward Busy Call Forward No Answer Call Forward Busy No Answer Call Forward Call Forward Call Forward Type Unconditional Intemal Busy Internal No Answer Extemal Busy External No Answer Transfer Mail Box eena Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Lid All Rights Reserved http 150 150 131 21 1 ANCHORZ022 Internet Figure 3 8 2 1 Call Forward Stations can be programmed so that incoming calls are re routed to other stations local or networked station groups the VSF or over a system CO IP line Off Net Call Forward can be separately assigned UNCONDITIONAL BUSY NO ANSWER BUSY NO ANSWER Attendant OFF PREMISE forwarding to any station hunt group or system speed dial bin Off net In the portal users can establish forwarding scenarios under the Station ICR selection Stations can be programmed so that incoming CO and Intercom calls are forwarded to a preset station or station group This allows an external or internal call to initially ring at a station and forward to a pre determined destination
543. s 3 CM IPKTS PORT In the TNET environment the IP KTS 0000 9999 5588 0001 9999 5588 protocol signaling UDP port is defined At present this field is not used do not change this port number 4 CM TOTAL PORT This field defines the total number of ports the 000 999 000 000 999 011 LM will request be allocated by the CM for devices attached to the LM This value must be equal to or less than the port count in the CM for the LM devices 5 POLLING COUNT This field defines the maximum polling 00 99 05 00 99 05 failures an LM considers a WAN fault 6 POLLING INTERVAL This field defines the interval time between 00 99 02 00 99 02 LM to CM polling attempts 2 135 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 2 3 11 3TNET LM ATTRIBUTES PGM Code 33200 The CM Central MFIM must be programmed with the MAC and IP address of each LM Local MFIM in the Centralized Control network as well as the maximum configuration of each LM Up to 2 Local MFIMs LMs for iPECS Micro Up to 50 Local MFIMs LMs for MFIM1200 and Up to 15 Local MFIMs LMs for other MFIMs may be defined and configurations entered The port counts define the ports which are allocated in the CM database for use by devices registered to the LM The number of ports defined in the database of each LM see PGM CODE 331 must be equal to or less than the p
544. s Each CO IP Line including DID Lines and ACD group calls may be assigned to employ ICLID routing The system will compare the received ICLID to entries in the ICLID Route Table and if a match is found will route the call to the destination defined in the ICLID Ring Assignment Table index assigned here Table 3 5 7 4 1 ICLID ROUTE TABLE ATTRIBUTES ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT ICLID Ring Assign Index Index to the ICLID Ring Assignment Table that 001 250 None determines the call routing Caller Telephone Number ICLID Incoming Caller Id to match for the index If the 24 Digits None Caller Id matches the Table entry the index is used to select the route Caller Name ICLID name that is sent by the system to the destination 12 Character None for the ICLID routed call 3 157 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Re PGM CODE 204 Selecting ICLID Ring Assignment Table will display the ICLID Ring Assignment Table data entry page Figure 3 5 7 5 1 F iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help S amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm iPECS VD96M E 0Ap APR O8 Boot Version 1 0Ah JAN OF ICLID Route Table P203 PPP Attnbutes P205 If the Incoming Caller ID matches an entry in the ICLID Route Table the index from the Table is used to determine the call routing from the ICLID Ring Assignment Table assignments are made for Day Night and
545. s codes assigned in Flex button 4 and 19 respectively 4 LD CALL DIGIT COUNT Dialed numbers which exceed the assigned 07 15 07 07 15 07 LD digit count are considered long distance calls for SMDR and COS purposes 5 PRINT INCOMING CALL The system can output records for incoming 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 OFF OFF calls as well as outgoing calls If enabled 1 ON incoming calls are recorded as well as outgoing calls 6 PRINT LOST CALL The system can provide lost call records 0 OFF ON 1 ON 0 OFF ON records for unanswered incoming 1 ON abandoned calls 7 RECORD IN DETAIL The system can output detailed call records 0 OFF ON 1 ON 0 OFF ON ON or summary information total number of 1 ON calls cost and cost for each station 8 HIDDEN DIALED DIGIT For security purposes digits dialed for an 0 9 0 0 9 0 outgoing call can be hidden and replaced with This field defines the number of digits to hide Button 24 below defines whether leading or trailing digits are hidden In addition the station must be assigned for SMDR HIDE PaM CoDE 113 button 5 9 SMDR CURRENCY UNIT The unit of currency used for call cost can be k identified with 3 alpha characters for easy reference refer to Table 2 1 2 1 10 COST PER PULSE When metering is provided by the PSTN the 6 digits 000000 000000 cost per metering pulse can be assigned 11 SMDR DECIMAL LOCATION This value determines the position of the 0 5 0 0 5 0 decimal in
546. s Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 2 1 Station Data 3 25 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 110 Selecting Station Type will display the Station Type data input entry page Figure 3 5 2 1 1 Select the Station Order desired shown above table the header 1 50 51 100 101 150 The range selected displays on screen Selecting the blue colored text in the Table header will sort the table based on the selected column Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm irec IPECS D96M E 0Ap APRIOS Boot Version 1_0Ah JANIOT Station Order 1 50 51 100 101 150 151 200 201 250 251 300 Station Type Associated Station Numb PKTU v i lt Station Attnbutes P111 113 Station ISDN Attributes P114 Flex Buttons P 115 129 Station COMP Group Internal Pag Ptt Group Access P119 TU PKTU PKTU PKTU SES ES ES ES ES Es E Es Station P 124 SLT DTMF Group P1 SLT DTMF SLTOTMF __ Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 2 1 1 Station Type Each station is assigned a type selected from the Station Type drop down menu The type is used by th
547. s Reserved Internet Figure 3 7 1 1 Download amp Upload sub menu 3 242 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Selecting Database Download will display the Database Download page Figure 3 7 1 1 1 Selecting this option will download the entire iPECS system database to the local PC This also allows the database in the PC to be uploaded to an iPECS system using the file upload procedures in section 3 7 1 2 Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm H Log Out ND36M E 0Ap APR 08 sion 1 0Ah JAN OT DB Download Select structure to download All Database Database Upload Click here Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 7 1 1 1 Database Download Clicking on Click Here will present the File Download window Files should be saved to disk Note that this screen will appear for all download processes 3 243 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 File Download Do you want to save this file Name DB_ALL300 adm Type Unknown File Type 3 83 MB From 150 150 131 211 While files from the Internet can be useful some files can potentially harm your computer If you do not trust the source do not save this file What s the tisk Figure 3 7 1 1 2 Database File Save dialog 3 244 im Cs Release
548. s reached OFF or SMDR Mail Auto Delete Set above is enabled SMDR Interface Service When enabled the system stores SMDR data ON OFF to send to applications including NMS upon OFF request SMDR ICM Save When enabled intercom call data is stored as ON OFF part of the SMDR data OFF SMDR ICM Print When enabled intercom call data is printed as ON OFF part of the On line SMDR OFF SMDR Disconnect Cause When enabled the disconnect cause is stored ON OFF in Off line SMDR data and printed as parted of OFF the On line SMDR 3 113 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 178 Selecting System Date amp Time will display the System Date amp Time and DST data entry page Figure 3 5 5 18 1 amp Figure 3 5 5 18 1 Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm Serial Port Selec Break Make Rat click here Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 5 18 1 System Date amp Time The System Date and Time are established by the Time amp Date menu The date and time are employed for several features and functions including LCR LCD displays SMDR outputs Auto Ring mode Selection Wake up Alarm etc 3 114 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 4 iPECS Web Services Microsoft Inter
549. s the database settings Once the Power up routine is complete the system will conduct normal operations If the Initialization switch is in the ON position in place of the Power Up routine the system will perform the full Initialization procedure The initialization procedure will set the system database to default values refer to Appendix D Further during the full initialization procedure the system will establish communications with each gateway Module and iPECS terminal for registration This communication will use the default device IP address and using the MFIM MAC address for system identification The system will assign IP addresses and Sequence Numbers for each gateway Module and iPECS terminal and use these values for subsequent communication and logical assignments of numbering plans respectively In addition the system sends commands to modify all settings to the default values including IP addresses but maintains the existing Sequence Numbers After successfully registering should a device not respond to several attempts by the system the system places the device in an out of service mode but maintains the database Once initialization is complete set the initialization switch to the OFF position to protect the database The system must be restarted to complete the initialization 1 4 REGISTRATION 1 4 1 Normal Registration Process Module amp Terminal When power is applied and an Ethernet link is established an unregiste
550. sS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 2 3 3 14 ICM Tenancy Group PGM Code 125 Stations can be assigned to an ICM Tenancy group under Station Attributes II PGM CODE 111 button 17 Up to 15 Tenant groups can be defined Each group is configured to allow or deny placing intercom calls to stations in other groups and an Attendant station can be defined for each group The Attendant will receive dial 0 calls and controls Day Night mode for the Group PROCEDURE ICM TENANCY GROUP 1 Press the PGM button and dial 125 ENTER GRP NUMBER 01 15 ICM TENANCY GRP 01 Use the dial pad to enter the group number Ex 01 F1 ATD F2 ACCESS Refer to Table 2 3 3 14 1 Press the desired Flex button refer to Table 2 3 3 14 1 DISPLAY For Attendant assignment use the dial pad to enter the station number of the Group Attendant To assign accessible ICM Tenancy groups for the group the Flex button indicates the current Tenant group access Press the Flex Buttons to toggle Group access settings LED ON group access allowed LED OFF group access denied Press the SAVE button to store the data entry Table 2 3 3 14 1 ICM TENANCY GROUP ATTRIBUTES PGM 125 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 ICM TENANCY GRP 01 Attendant station for the ICM tenancy group STA No ATD Atd receives dial 0 calls and controls Day Night mode 2 ICM TENANCY GRP 01 ICM Tenancy groups allowed access to t
551. se is established refer to section 1 3 While the system will function employing the defaults there are several data entries which MUST be completed to assure proper operation of the system The system employs the Country Code to establish tone and gain plans specific to the country In addition the MFIM IP address sub net mask and Router IP address must be assigned for proper external IP call operation Remote services and Remote Admin access In the browser ADDRESS field enter the MFIM IP address and TCP port Select GO the Web server returns the iPECS Web Services Home page Figure 3 2 1 1 On the Home page one of three services may be selected the brief User s Guide Station Program or Admin amp Maintenance s 2 iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay Address E http 150 150 131 21 tfindex htm byt EJ Go Station Program Admin amp Maintenance E Done Internet Figure 3 2 1 1 iPECS Home page 3 3 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Selecting the User s Guide will display a brief user manual The user may select a feature from the left frame as shown in Figure 3 2 2 1 below to select a brief description of the feature which then will be displayed in the right frame Z iPKTS Web User s Guide Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit view Favorites Tools Help Address a http 150 150 131 211 m_index htm i recs User s
552. ses would be moved automatically according to re ordered logical number when you delete or change port number of CO G W Re order logical number Admin DB move according to the re ordered logical number Check Admin DB Move option O 0 Uncheck Admin DB Move option O X There is no change in Admin DB im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 But in case of STA G W or phone you have to program again below admin list even if you checked Admin DB Move option If below admin have station number in their attributes then you have to program again Flex buttons PGM115 Station Call Forward amp Preset Call Forward PGM120 CO IP Ring Assignment PGM144 ICLID Ring Assignment PGM204 Flexible DID table PGM231 Station Group Member Assignment PGM190 and soon L Device Delete Port Num Change 1 Sequence Logical Number Device Type Device ID MAC Address IP Address Device Delete Max Port Current Port New Port Admin DB Move 12 7 36 ISDN PRI GW 44 o0405a13dca9 10 123 47 18 E 30 30 SAVE Vv If you delete device or change port number of device in this page whole logical number of that device type would be re ordered Below table is applied when a user delete or change port number of device Admin DB means Station Attributes CO IP Attributes and so on Re order logical number Admin DB mov
553. sors The LM uses IP Multicast for local BGM and MOH transport Also the Alarm contacts of the LM can be defined for use as a local alarm or doorbell 3 205 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Web Administration Device Zone Number P436 LIK300 Version iPECS VD96M E 0Ap APR 08 Device Zone Attr P437 Access amp Page Relay P433 Zone Attnbute P439 Zone RTP Relay Group P440 Inter Zone Attnbute P441 Zone Holiday Assignment P444 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 12 1 Zone Data Main Page Zone data is a tool employed to easily manage the characteristics of groups of devices under the control of an MFIM Such devices can be grouped to a Zone to define common characteristics including Country Code DSCP RTP packet handling etc Common attributes are defined at the device Zone and Inter zone level Device settings have priority over system and Zone settings while Zone settings have priority over system settings Generally transport of RTP packets should be a peer to peer communication over either a LAN or VPN If iPECS devices are separated by a NAPT server or direct peer to peer communications is not available packet relay must be employed to assure communication In packet relay RTP packets are received by a local VoIP channel MFIM or VOIM which is under control of the MFIM and the IP address is translated from a public to the device s priva
554. ss PTT Page Zone 01 10 0 PGM Code 120 Preset Call Forward Preset Call Forward 1 6 destination 1 Unconditional Forward 2 Internal Busy Forward 3 Internal No Answer Forward 4 External Busy Forward 5 External No Answer Forward 6 Voice Mail box PGM Code 121 Idle Line Selection Type 1 4 1 Flex Button 2 CO Line 3 CO Group 4 Station Number PGM Code 122 IP Call Access 1 Direct IP Call EN DIS ENABLE PGM Code 123 Station Timers 1 Station Fwd No Answer Timer 000 600 000 1 second increments PGM Code 124 Linked Pair Station 1 Set IP Address XXX XXX XXX XXX 2 Router IP Address XXX XXX XXX XXX 3 Set Mac Address XX XX XX XX XX XX 4 Station Type Button1 4 4 1 IPKTU type usage 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 4 2 SLT type usage 1 ON 0 OFF OFF ON First port is a linked pair station OFF Second port is a linked pair station WKT type usage 1 ON 0 OFF OFF Video SoftPhone type 1 ON 0 OFF OFF usage 5 Set Linked Attributes Button1 3 5 1 Direct Send MAC 1 ON 0 OFF OFF Direct send using the device MAC 5 2 Local Device 1 ON 0 OFF ON address 5 3 CODEC type 0 3 3 Local ON Remote Off 3 System Follow the PGM161 button 9 O G 711 1 G 723 1 2 G 729 3 SYSTEM 6 Registered Linked Stations Station No Secondary station number PGM Code 125 ICM Tenant Group 1 Group Attendant Station No 2 Group Access Group 01 15 Group 01 PGM Code 126 SIP Attributes 2 Web access only Register User Name 32 characters Authentication User
555. ss Codes P172 RLP Pnrority P173 Port Settings P174 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 5 1 System Data 3 80 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Re PGM CODES 160 amp 161 Selecting System Attributes will display the System Attributes data entry page Figure 3 5 5 1 1 Selecting the blue colored text in the Table header will sort the table based on the selected column Issue 5 0 Dax Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm e Tad m iPECS VD96M E 0Ap APRIOS Boot Version 1 0Ah JANIOF Attribute Attd Call Queued RET Camp On MOH Ring Back Tone CO Dial Tone Detect CO Line Choice DISA Retry Count 3 External Night Ring OFF System Passyrord P162 Alarm Attnbutes P163 Hold Preference System v Attendant Assignment P164 Multicast RTP RTCP P165 DISA COS P166 DID DISA Destination P167 External Control Contacts P163 LCD Display Mode P169 LED Flashing Rate P170 Music Sources P171 PBX Access Codes P172 RLP Pnority P173 RS 232 Port Settings P174 USER Print LCR Converted digits Attendant Call Queuing ON USE PGM_OIN ALL ATD OFF Offnet Prompt Usage OFF CO to CO Unsupervised Co
556. ssage count for the station in the Voice message count This field defines the Phontage or UCS Client station number that will be used as the VSF VMIM back up 24 100 100 VSF BK PROM Enables a Phontage or UCS Client to backup 0 OFF OFF 1 ON 0 OFF ON VSF Prompts 1 ON Table 2 3 3 2 3 STATION ATTRIBUTES III PGM 113 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 100 110 ADMIN Enables station access to the System Database 0 Disable ENABLE 1 EN 0 DIS ENABLE 1 Enable 2 100 110 VSF ACCESS Permits station access to the built in AA VM 0 Disable ENABLE 1 EN 0 DIS DISABLE 1 Enable 3 100 110 GROUP LISTEN Enables Group Listen feature audio is sent to 0 Disable DISABLE 1 EN 0 DIS DISABLE both the handset and speaker with the handset 1 Enable microphone active and speakerphone microphone OFF 4 100 110 OVERRIDE Enables intrusion to gain access to an active 0 Disable DISABLE 1 EN 0 DIS DISABLE CO IP call 1 Enable 5 100 110 SMDR HIDE Enables hiding dialed digits in SMDR output 0 Disable DISABLE 1 EN 0 DIS DISABLE 1 Enable 6 100 110 VOICE OVER Enables use of Voice Over by station 0 Disable ENABLE 1 EN 0 DIS ENABLE 1 Enable 7 100 110 PRIME LINE Enables Delayed Prime Line Idle Line 1 HOT WARM 1 HOT 0 WARM WARM activation see PGM CODE 121 Idle Line 2 WARM Selection and PGM CODE 182 btn 6 for Prime Line timer 8 100 110 ALARM DOORBEL Assigns station to receive Alarm Doorbell signal 0 Disable DISABLE 1 EN 0 DIS
557. ssececesssseeecsssteseesenneeeens 2 83 2 3 6 16 Break Make Ratio PGM Code 1 76 gt sccccccsssscccessscecsensececseseeeecsesesecseaeeecsesueeeesenteteess 2 85 2 3 6 17 SMDR Attributes PGM Code 177 csssccccccssssceceensececsenececseneeeccseaesecseaeeecsesueseesenieteees 2 85 2 3 6 18 System Date Time and Daylight Saving Time DST PGM Code 178 cccccceeceee 2 88 2 3 6 19 Multi Language PGM Code 179 cccscccccsceceeeeeeeneeceeeeeceeeesaaeceeneeceneeeseaesseaeeeseeeessneetes 2 89 2 3 6 20 System Timers l to Ill PGM Codes 180 182 0 csccccscccceseeceeecesnececeeeecennessaeseeseeeseetesaes 2 89 2 3 6 21 In Room Indication PGM Code 183 ccccccsssscccsessceceensececsensececcsenesecseaeeecsesueeeeseneeeess 2 92 2 3 6 22 DCOB SYS Timers PGM Code 186 gt 1 cccccssccccesssceceessececsessececsensesecsenesecsesiesessesieeeess 2 93 2 3 6 23 NTP Attributes PGM Code 195 ccccessccccessscecsessececsensececseeaeeecseaececseaeeecsesueseesesnneess 2 94 2 3 7 STATION GROUP DATA PGM CODES 190 amp UO 2 iis sutisasssersewninlwslocnacsdins 2 94 2 3 7 1 Station Group Assignment PGM Code 190 ccccsccccesceceeceseseceeneeceneeeseeetsnaeseeeeetsnnestes 2 95 2 3 7 2 Station Group Attributes PGM Code 191 ccccccccesscceseeceeeeeceneeesneeeeeeeeeceanessaeseeeeessenenees 2 96 2 3 7 3 Pick Up Group Assignment PGM Code 192 1 ccscccccscecesssessseceeeeceeetesseesceeeeseneeeenaees 2 107 2 3 8 ISDN LINE amp ICLI
558. ssignment will display the Attendant Assignment data entry page Figure 3 5 5 4 1 iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DAR File Edit Yiew Favorites Tools Help Address http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm m ee Tad i iPECS VD96M E 0Ap APR OS Boot ersion 1 JAn JANIOF Atiendant Type System Attendant Main Attendant Main Attendant Main Attendant Main Attendant Alam Attnbutes P163 Multicast RTP RTCP P165 DISA COS P166 DID DISA Destination P167 Extemal Control Contacts P163 LCD Display Mode P169 LED Flashing Rate P170 Music Sources P171 3X Access Codes P172 RLP Priority P173 RS 232 Port Settings P174 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 5 4 1 Attendant Assignment A maximum of four 4 Attendants can be assigned with the iPECS Micro IPECS 50 and MFIM100 or five 5 with other MFIM models One is the System Attendant and the remaining are Main Attendants The System Attendant has higher priority in call handling and system management functions As a default the System Attendant is assigned Station 100 Main Attendants are not assigned by default 3 87 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 165 Selecting Multi cast RTP RTCP will display the Multi cast RTP RTCP data entry page Figure 3 5 5 5 1 Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft I
559. stination NA 4 Destination WA NAAA 5 Destination l 6 Destination 7 Destination 8 Destination 9 Destination acacia 0 Destination Voice Mail Dialing Tabl Busy Destination Registration Table 235 Error Destination NoAns Destination Copyright C 2008 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Figure 3 5 8 8 1 Customer Call Routing Table The system incorporates IVR Interactive Voice Response capabilities called CCR Customer Call Routing After or during a VSF Announcement the caller may dial digits to select a destination or route for the call The CCR Table defines the destination type and value associated with the digit dialed by the caller in response to the index a VSF Announcement 01 70 Up to 70 single level Audio Text menus may be assigned or multi level menu structures maximum 70 levels can be established using one menu as a destination for the previous level Table 3 5 8 8 1 describes the various destination types and allowable value entries 3 172 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Table 3 5 8 8 1 CUSTOMER CALL ROUTING DESTINATIONS DESTINATION VALUE RANGE TYPE iPECS iPECS 50 MFIM100 MFIM300 MFIM600 MFIM1200 Micro Route to a Station 100 125 100 149 1
560. store the Page Zone data 2 34 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 2 3 3 8 PTT Push To Talk Group Access PGM Code 119 Each iPECS Phone is assigned to receive PTT announcements from any combination of the nine PTT groups Note remote stations and stations not assigned to a group will not receive PTT page announcements including All PTT group page As a default all stations except remote stations are assigned to group 1 PROCEDURE PTT GROUP ACCESS 1 Press the PGM button and dial 119 ENTER STA NUMBER 100 110 PTT GRP ACC Use the dial pad to enter a station range Ex 100 110 For a single station enter the same number twice PRESS FLEX KEY 1 10 The first 10 Flex button LEDs indicate assigned zones Press the desired Flex button to toggle Push To Talk group assignments LED On station receives announcement LED Off station does not receive PTT announcement Flex button 10 assigns group 0 all groups Press the SAVE button to store the PTT group data 2 3 3 9 Preset Call Forward PGM Code 120 This assignment allows an external or internal call to initially ring at a station and forward to a pre determined destination Preset Call Forward can be assigned separately for UNCONDITIONAL INTERNAL BUSY INTERNAL NO ANSWER EXTERNAL BUSY or EXTERNAL NO ANSWER preset forwarding to any Station Hunt group System Speed bin for Off net or Station ICR For the Transfer to
561. stration To register device in virtual click Virtual Registration button in Figure 3 5 1 2 1 Device Port Num Change page Then a user can see 3 13 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 pop up window as Figure 3 5 1 2 3 Virtual Registration Table window In this window a user enters Mac address device type and port number to be registered of device If a user wants to use virtual MAC address instead of real MAC address then please check the check box in front of MAC address input box Maximum port would be displayed when a user select device type But it is a default maximum port number of that device so a user can reduce port number by changing value in Maximum Port input box Virtual Registratio n Table 7 If you want to use virtual MAC address when you register device please check the check box in front of MAC Address input box Index MAC Address Il Device ID Maximum Port 1J FL ____ 1evice Tyre w a b 2 Tr Tipevice Tyne w D 3 DE Device Type fo iz i Device Typel v 0 5 tC ial Device Type v if 0 Least Figure 3 5 1 2 3 Virtual Registration Table window im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 102 amp 103 Selecting System amp Device IP Address Plan will display the input entry page Figure 3 5 1 33 1 Z
562. sy Prompt Button 2 Error Prompt Button 3 DND Prompt Button 4 No Answer Prompt Button 5 Attendant Transfer Prompt Press the SAVE button to store the destination data entry 2 3 6 8 External Control Contacts PGM Code 168 The MFIMs include programmable contacts which can be used to control external devices Refer to Table 1 1 1 System Capacity Chart for number of available contacts Each contact is assigned to activate under one of several conditions As a Loud Bell Contact LBC the contact will activate when the assigned station or group receives an external call Note for LBC when the system is in the Night or Timed Ring mode the contact will activate for incoming UNA calls and will ignore any station assignment The contact may alternatively activate as a Door Lock Release contact when External Page Zone 1 is accessed or when External Page Zone 2 is accessed PROCEDURE EXT CONTROL CONTACT 1 Press the PGM button and dial 168 PRESS FLEX_KEY 1 4 EXT CONTROL CONTACT Select Flex button 1 4 for the desired External Control contact NO1 LBC 150 Use the dial pad to enter desired data 1 LBC station number ex 150 2 Door Lock Release 3 External Page 1 access 4 External Page 2 access Press the SAVE button to store the External Contact data entry 2 76 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 The LCD display mode sets the time 12 24 hr date day month order languag
563. t 3 148 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Answer Timer the call can be routed based on the Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT VSF Announce 2 Location The Station Hunt Group can be assigned a 2nd 00 70 00 none announcement which is played if the call remains queued beyond the VSF Announce 2 Timer duration The announcement location is a VSF Announcement number An entry of 00 indicates no announcement VSF Announce 2 Auto If this attribute is selected the call will drop after the Drop 2 VSF announcement VSF Announce 2 Repeat The 2nd announcement can be repeated to calls that 000 999 000 Timer remain in queue at intervals of the announcement 2 seconds repeat timer Note VSF Announce 2 Repeat below must be ON VSF Announce 2 Repeat After the 2nd announcement if the call remains ON OFF queued to the group the 2nd VSF announcement can OFF be repeated at the VSF Announce Repeat timer interval above Overflow Destination A call to the group will continue to route through the STA NET or Hunt group until answered or all group members have been Number VSF tried The call will remain at the last station or route to Announce the assigned Overflow Destination If assigned VSF System SPD Announce Auto Drop is available Overflow Timer A call to a group will remain at the last station in the 000 600 180 group or route to the assigned Overflow Destination seconds after
564. t Use Not Use Notify has unheard messages Use Notify Retry Defines the number of attempts the system will make to complete 1 9 Times 3 Times a notification when receiving busy no answer Retry Interval Defines the time between notification attempts If a notification 1 3 Minute 3 Minute fails the system will retry after the timer expires CO Group CO group used to call the mobile extension 00 72or 01 00 20 Telephone Telephone number or CLI of the Mobile extension Not assigned Number CLI Number When the mobile Telephone number and CLI do not match the Not assigned CLI entered here is used to authorize incoming calls from the mobile 3 183 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Selecting the Networking Data program group returns the sub menu displayed in Figure 3 5 9 1 i iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm Web Administration LIK300 Version iPECS VD96M E 0Ap APR 08 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 9 1 Networking Data 3 184 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 320 Selecting Network Basic Attributes will display the Network Basic Attributes entry page Figure 3 5 9 1 1 A iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm TT
565. t the ISDN terminating device in this case the iPECS system include various adjustable timers and counters as described below PROCEDURE ENTER CO RANGE 01 02 COL ISDN ATT PRESS FLEX KEY 01 16 Use the dial pad to enter a CO Line range For a single CO Line enter the same number twice For the iPECS Micro the acceptable range is 01 05 for the iPECS 50 and MFIM100 the acceptable range is 01 42 for the MFIM300 the acceptable range is 001 200 and for the MFIM600 1200 the range is 001 400 600 See Table 2 3 5 8 1 Press the desired Flex button refer to Table 2 3 5 8 1 DISPLAY Use the dial pad to enter desired data for the Attribute refer to Table 2 3 5 8 1 Press the SAVE button to store the data entry Table 2 3 5 8 1 ISDN CO LINE ATTRIBUTES PGM 151 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 001 002 T200 1 5 The terminal must support one T200 timer 1 5 1 1 5 1 sec for each data link supported seconds 2 001 002 T201 1 5 The minimum time between TEI ID check 1 5 1 1 5 1 sec messages seconds 3 001 002 T202 1 5 When the terminal transmits a TEI Identify 1 5 2 1 5 2 sec Request message it must provide one seconds T202 timer for each logical link supported 2 56 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance
566. tation number Press the SAVE button to store the new station numbers 2 3 2 5 Flexible Numbering Plan part A to D PGM Codes 106 to 109 Feature dial codes for the system can be assigned using the system s Flexible Numbering Plan Feature codes should be one 1 to four 4 digits in length and must not conflict For example Feature dial codes 53 and 536 represent a conflict The system will generate error tone and will not update the database Table 2 3 2 5 1 to Table 2 3 2 5 4 below show the defaults for the ist base Numbering Plan Appendix B provides the default values for each of the eight base Numbering Plans select the base Numbering Plan in PGM CODE 100 PROCEDURE or par PRESS FLEX KEY 01 24 107 for part B 108 for part C 109 for part D Refer to Table 2 3 2 5 1to 4 Select the desired button 01 24 refer to Table 2 3 2 5 1 to Table 2 3 2 5 4 for DISPLAY PROGRAM CODES 106 to 109 respectively Use the dial pad to enter desired data Where a range is required input the first and last numbers in the range Press the SAVE button to store the new Numbering Plan data Table 2 3 2 5 1 FLEXIBLE NUMBERING PLAN PART A PGM 106 Btn DISPLAY FEATURE DEFAULT iPECS iPECS 50 MFIM MFIM MFIM Micro MFIM100 300 600 1200 1 INT PAGE ZONES Internal Page Zone 501 510 501 510 501 535 501 535 301 400 START amp END 501 510 access dial codes 2 INT ALL CALL Internal All Call Page
567. te 554 554 554 554 554 ENTER NEW 554 Call Forward 13 spp DIAL PEM Speed Dial 555 555 555 555 555 ENTER NEW 555 programming access dial code for SLTs 14 MSG WAIT ENABLE Dial code to activate a 556 556 556 556 556 ENTER NEW 556 Message Wait Call Back 15 MSG WAIT RETURN Dial code to return a 557 557 557 557 557 ENTER NEW 557 Message Wait Call Back 16 spp DIAL access SLT Speed Dial 558 558 558 558 558 ENTER NEW 558 access code 17 DND FWD CANCEL Dial code to cancel 559 559 559 559 559 ENTER NEW 559 DND FWD MSG Wait 18 lco sys HOLD Dial code to place a 560 560 560 560 560 ENTER NEW 560 CO call on System Hold 2 13 im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Btn DISPLAY FEATURE DEFAULT iPECS iPECS 50 MFIM MFIM MFIM Micro MFIM100 300 600 1200 19 SLT PGM MODE ENTER User program mode 561 561 561 561 561 ENTER NEW 561 entry dial code for SLTs 20 ATTD UNAVAILABLE Dial code to place 562 562 562 562 562 ENTER NEW 562 attendant in the unavailable mode attendant only 21 ALARM RESET Dial code to terminate 565 565 565 565 565 ENTER NEW 565 Alarm contact signal 22 IGROUP CALL PICK UP Group Call Pick up 566 566 566 566 566 ENTER NEW 566 dial code 23 UNIVERSAL N
568. te address The VoIP channel implements a secure channel using IPSec protocol Devices can be assigned as part of an RTP Relay group to use the same VoIP channels to implement relay of RTP packets Packet relay groups also provide for conversion of multi cast packets from the MFIM to uni cast and back again at the group level to multi cast Note packet relay requires an MFIM or VOIM VoIP channel be available locally for each simultaneous call that requires packet relay 3 206 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Selecting the Device Zone Number returns the Zone Number data input page Figure 3 5 12 1 1 Enter the Sequence Range refer to section 3 5 1 3 System amp Device IP Address Plan and click Load to assign a Zone number for the device Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm Enter DevicelGW Slot Seq J C Device Gateway Sequence Slot Range From 1 To 1 Attribute Value Range Zone Number 1 32 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Done Internet ti Figure 3 5 12 1 1 Device Zone Number Device Zone Number assigns a device to one of up to 32 specific Zones 3 207 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Selecting the Device Zone Attr returns the Device Zone Attributes data input page Figure 3 5 12 2 1 Enter the Sequence R
569. tem VOIP channels all have a single MAC address and thus a single Sequence Number is assigned The system uses the Sequence Number to assign logical software port numbers This Sequence Number relates the hardware and software port numbers for each gateway Module using the Modules MAC addresses When employing a Main Cabinet it may be desirable to have the logical and physical RJ21X appearances port numbers in agreement This may be accomplished by assigning Ordering Num to match the appropriate cabinet slot number This may also be accomplished by proper installation sequence of the gateway modules Table 3 5 1 4 1 provides the analog CO Line and ISDN Line port numbers based on the physical RJ 21X terminations on the Main Cabinet back plane im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Table 3 5 1 4 1 RJ 21X TERMINATIONS SLOT CO LINE PORT 1 4 5 8 9 12 13 16 17 20 21 24 25 28 COIN Io jo A U N 29 32 Issue 5 0 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 105 Selecting Flexible Station Number will return the data entry page Figure 3 5 1 55 1 This page permits changes in the Station Numbering Plan using one of three methods Not Use Range Input use to change an individual station number Order Range use to change the station numbers associated with a range of Order Numbers using the Start Station Number as the fi
570. termines the ability of the user to dial certain types of calls refer to Table 3 5 2 5 1 Separate COS assignments are made for Day Timed and Night Mode operation As a default all stations are assigned with a Station COS of 1 for all modes no restrictions The station COS interacts with the CO Line COS to establish overall dialing or TOLL restrictions This interaction and the resulting restrictions are given in Table 3 5 2 5 2 Long distance calls are determined by the 1st dialed digit O or 1 and the number of digits dialed If the 1st digit dialed is a LD code default 0 or 1 or if the number of digits dialed exceeds the assigned LD digit counter System Data SMDR Attributes section 3 5 5 17 the call is consider a Long Distance call and appropriate restrictions applied 3 35 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Table 3 5 2 5 1 STATION COS Issue 5 0 STATION COS RESTRICTIONS 1 No restrictions are placed on dialing from the station 2 The assignments in Exception Table A are monitored for allow and deny numbers 3 The assignments in Exception Table B are monitored for allow and deny numbers 4 The assignments in both Exception Tables A amp B are monitored for allow and deny numbers 5 The leading digit dialed cannot be a Long Distance code default O or 1 and further denied allowed based on Exception
571. the IP address of a specific NMS server with Read Write access The SNMP Trap configuration defines the Trap Community and the Trap Destination which includes the IP Address of the SNMP manager iPECS NMS and the message type The Trap Community designates a communication group to which a Trap message belongs and is a logical relationship between the SNMP agent iPECS system and SNMP manager iPECS NMS This 4 to 16 character string should be the same as the Trap community string defined in the iPECS NMS The Trap community should be same for all the iPECS systems registered to an iPECS NMS server whereas the SNMP community may be defined with different strings for each iPECS system The Trap Destination defines the IP address of the iPECS NMS server and the port 162 Enter the IP address of the NMS server but the port should not be changed The pull down menu next to the address is used to define the message type Three values are available e Trap message type is defined in SNMPv1 but because iPECS NMS and the iPECS system use SNMPV2 the Trap type message is not recommended Notification message type sent from the SNMP agent once without checking the reception of the message Inform message type requires a response of receipt from the SNMP manager If the agent does not receive a response the message is resent Inform messages are intended for use in environments with high packet loss however use of the Inform message
572. timer sets the time seconds before and between the tones Note CO Warning Tone must be enabled for the station in Station Attributes section 3 5 2 2 Web Password Guard Timer If no data packet is received during a Web 001 999 005 connection after the guard time a password check minutes will be initiated by the system Call Forward No Answer When a user activates No Answer Forward calls 000 600 015 Timer will ring for this duration before being forward The seconds Station No Answer Forward timer section 3 5 2 12 will take precedence 3 118 im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT DID DISA No Answer Timer A DID DISA call to a busy station will forward to the 000 255 00 DID DISA Destination assigned under section seconds 3 5 5 7 should this timer expires VSF User Maximum Record This timer sets the maximum duration allowed for 000 999 60 Timer the User Greeting in the system s VSF seconds VSF Valid User Message This timer sets the minimum duration allowed for a 0 9 4 Timer voice mail message in the system s VSF seconds Messages shorter than this duration are not stored Door Open Timer This timer sets the minimum time required to 05 99 20 activate the contact assigned as a door open 100 msec contact ICM Dial Tone Timer If a user goes off hook on the Intercom and takes 01 20 10 n
573. tion of the system and registration of the iPECS phones when employed with SIP trunking See also PGM CODE 133 Note PGM CODE 126 and PGM CODE 133 are accessible only via Web Admin 3 47 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Table 3 5 2 15 1 STATION SIP ATTRIBUTES 2 Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Register User Name User ID 40 characters Authentication User Name Authentication name assigned in SIP Proxy when required for registration 40 characters Authentication User Password User password as assigned in SIP Proxy when required for registration 18 digits Contact Number SIP URL or AOR consisting of the user name and the host domain name or IP address me abcco com Asc Station Number This field assigns a station to receive incoming calls for the User ID index when ID Assigned Station is defined as the Ring Route Type below In addition this station will receive messages resulting from the SIP Notify method to the iPECS VoIP channels such as Msg wait Line busy etc Station number User ID Register In some situations such as during provisioning of the SIP Server or Proxy it may be desirable not to attempt registration This field may be used to determine if registration should occur Register Provision Register User ID Usage If registration is enabled User ID Register above the iPECS SIP gateway VoIP channels can send t
574. to assign Zone characteristics A iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DAR a File Edit View Favorites Tools Help s amp http 150 150 131 185 a_index htm Enter Zone Number Zone Number Range From 1 To 1 Uncheck All Attribute M Nation Code Korea Language Code Korean v Codec Type System Codec v RTP Relay Rule IF NEED v 1st RTP Relay GW Slot Seg Max 3 Digits 2nd RTP Relay GW Slot Seq Max 3 Digits YSFVMIM GW Slot Seq 3 Max 3 Digits Remark Max 21 Chars xI xI xI Device Zone Number 436 Device Zone Attr 437 Access amp Page Relay 432 a 4 a 4 Zone RTP Relay Group 440 Inter Zone Attribute 441 Zone Holiday Assigrmnent 444 4 Display Time Zone System Time Max Total Inter Zone Comms 0 0 300 0 No Limit Max Outgoing Co Calls 0 0 200 0 No Limit Save x x Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 12 4 1 Zone Attributes The nation code codec and VSF VMIM assigned for a Zone will be employed by all devices in the Zone unless a different entry is made in Device Zone data If the Device Zone data is default or assigned by the MFIM the Zone data will take precedence The Zone Attributes define when and which VoIP channels to use for RTP packet relay Local
575. to place a call to the stations entered in the FO Numbering Plan should Wan failure occur An may be entered as a wild card to indicate insertion of the dialed station number 2 137 im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 2 3 11 5 TNET LM External Contact Attributes PGM Code 334 Each LM incorporates relay contacts which can be employed as a Door Lock Release The contact activates a 3 party Door Lock Release mechanism activated by dialing the Door Unlock code at a local station Note assigning other functions to the contact may cause unexpected operation PROCEDURE TNET LM EXT CONTACT 1 Press the PGM button and dial 334 ENTER BIN NO 01 15 LM 01 EXT CONTACT 2 Select LM number 1 2 for iPECS Micro 01 50 for MFIM1200 and 01 15 for other MFIMs PRESS FLEX_KEY 1 4 Select Flex button 1 4 for the desired External Control contact EXT CONTROL CONTACT NO1 DLR Use the dial pad to enter desired data 1 LBC station number ex 150 2 Door Lock Release 3 External Page 1 access 4 External Page 2 access Press the SAVE button to store the External Contact data entry 2 3 11 6 TNET LM Music Attributes PGM Code 335 The CM does not provide BGM MOH to an LM The LM employs local BGM and MOH facilities which reduces traffic load on the WAN and IP channel processors The L
576. tributes 1 CO ATD CODE 2 digits 2 CLI Print To Serial 1 ON 0 OFF OFF PGM Code 201 CLIP COLP Table 1 CLIP COLP Table MFIM amp 100 00 09 Max 10 digits see also PGM 143 btn Other MFIM 00 49 1 amp 2 PGM Code 202 MSN Table 1 CO Line number MFIM amp 100 01 42 Other MFIMs 001 200 or 400 2 Index 000 999 Index to PGM 231 Table 3 Telephone number 23 digits PGM Code 203 ICLID Route Table 1 Index 001 250 The bin no of PGM Code 204 2 ICLID Telephone number 24 digits 3 ICLID Name 12 characters PGM Code 204 ICLID RING Assignment Table 1 Day Station Group Flex 1 Station Delay 0 9 ring 2 Night Station Group cycles D 21 irec Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button SUB MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 3 Timed Ring Station Group Flex 2 Hunt Flex 3 VSF announcement 01 70 Flex 4 AA Ring delay Time 00 30 sec PGM Code 205 PPP Atiributes 1 PPP Destination Station number Station Number None 2 PPP User ID 1 12 Characters likppp01 3 PPP Password 1 12 Characters lpkts01 4 PPP User ID 2 12 Characters likppp02 5 PPP Password 2 12 Characters ipkts02 Table D 9 TABLES DATA Button SUB MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK PGM Code 220 LCR Assignment 1 LCR Access Mode 1 6 1 MOO 1 MOO 2 M01 3 M02 4 M11 5 M12 6 M13 2 Set the Day of week zone 1 MON 1 3 1 2 TUE 1 3 1 3 WED 1 3 1 4 THUR 1 3 1 5 FRI 1 3 1 6 SAT ies 1 7 SUN 1 3 1 3 Set the Time Zone of Day zone 1 1 00 24 2 00 24 3 00 24 4 Set the Time Zone of Da
577. trol access to system resources and facilities Walking COS CO IP Group access DISA calls and certain Call Forward types may require input of a valid Authorization code Codes up to 12 digits may be entered into the system database There are two types of Authorization codes station and system The Station entries are associated with individual stations The number of system Authorization codes varies based on the configuration the number of available codes is provided in Table 1 1 1 Each Authorization code may be assigned a separate COS for Day Night and Timed Ring mode operation The system will allow the station associated Authorization codes to be duplicated However the iPECS will not allow duplicate or conflicting system level codes unless the and Authorization table indexing is used to enter codes Conflicting codes occur when a shorter code contains the first digits of a longer code i e 12 conflicts with 1234 3 171 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 228 Selecting CCR Table will display the Customer Call Routing data entry page Figure 3 5 8 8 1 iPECS Web Services Windows Internet Explorer DER A G y http 192 158 123 57 a index htm S7 we e iPECS Web Services Select Index 1 70 Load Customer Call Routing Table Index 1 Attribute Type 1 Destination NIA o 2 Destination NA 3 De
578. tructures maximum 70 levels can be established using one menu as a destination for the previous level CUSTOM CALL ROUTING SELECT CCR TABLE 01 70 CCRTABLE 01 PRESS FLEX KEY 1 10 CCRTABLE 01 INPUT 1 NOT ASSIGNED CCRTABLE 01 INPUT 1 Table 2 3 9 5 1 CCR DESTINATIONS PGM 228 DESTINATION VALUE RANGE TYPE DESCRIPTION iPECS iPECS 50 MFIM100 MFIM300 MFIM600 MFIM1200 Micro 1 Route to a Station 100 125 100 149 100 169 100 399 1000 1599 1000 2199 2 Route to a Station Group 620 631 620 659 620 659 620 667 620 667 401 500 2 120 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 DESTINATION VALUE RANGE TYPE DESCRIPTION iPECS iPECS 50 MFIM100 MFIM300 MFIM600 MFIM1200 Micro 3 Route with System Speed 200 999 200 999 200 999 2000 4999 2000 7999 20000 31 Dial 999 4 Route as PBX Transfer with 200 999 200 999 200 999 2000 4999 2000 7999 20000 31 System Speed Dial Flash 999 then dial speed dial digits 5 Route to VSF 01 70 01 70 01 70 01 70 01 70 01 70 Announcement 6 Route to VSF 01 70 01 70 01 70 01 70 01 70 01 70 Announcement and disconnect 7 Route to Networked Station 100 125 100 149 100 169 100 399 1000 1599 1000 219 9 8 Conference Room 1 9 1 9 1 9 1 9 1 9 1 9 9 Internal Page 01 10 01 10 01 10 01 35 01 35 01 100 10 External page n a 01 02 01 02 01 02 01 02 01 02 11 All Call Page O1 interna
579. try determines the number of digits that will be removed starting at the first received digit TEI Type The TEI Terminal Endpoint Identifier is a unique Fixed Automatic identifier for each device attached to the ISDN line Automatic When the system shares an ISDN connection with other devices the TEI should be automatic to assure no conflict with the other attached devices Otherwise the Fixed identifier option should be employed ISDN SS CD CR CFU Permits a user to access to ISDN Supplementary No Service No Service Call Deflection Service Except USA version Call Deflection Call Rerouting One Digit Remove Select one digit remove mode in ISDN Called Digits Enable disable Disable For Italy 3 74 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Advice of Charge When assigned the system will analyze the Advice No AOC No Service of Charge information in the Facility Message Italy amp according to the ETSI specifications with appropriate Spain regional protocol support Finland Australia Belgium ETSI STD Incoming Prefix Code Regional ISDN providers may use the Local Area ON OFF Insertion Prefix code for special services In cases where the OFF code is not provided in the incoming call SETUP message the system can insert the My Local Prefix and My Area Code below in SMDR LNR displays etc Outgoing Prefix Code Regional ISDN provi
580. tton to access the iPECS Admin amp Maintenance Main Page refer to Figure 3 4 1 Based on the password entered access to database items and maintenance functions may be limited Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address 2 http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm TT et IPECS VD96M E 0Ap APR OS Boot Version 1 0Ah JAN O Web Administration LIK300 Version iPECS VD96M E 0Ap APR 08 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved amp Internet Figure 3 4 1 iPECS Admin amp Maintenance Main Page The Admin amp Maintenance Main Page has three sections Menu bar Upper frame Web site directory amp navigation section Left frame Info and Entry section Central frame Items in the Menu bar are mouse clickable for selections of Administration access to system database File Upload amp Remote Upgrade permits upload of operating files to MFIM system and module memory Maintenance permits databases to be downloaded including all data system speed dial LCR and SMDR 3 8 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 To enter the system database select the iPECS Administration item in the menu bar The Administration Navigation frame will be displayed on the left refer to Figure 3 5 1 Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DER File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 21
581. ttons P115 129 Result Station P116 COMP Group Access P117 Internal Page Zone P113 124 Station ICM Group P125 Station SIP Attnbutes P126 Station Name Display Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Figure 3 5 2 17 1 Station Copy 3 50 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Selecting the Board gateway Module Data program group returns the sub menu displayed in Figure 3 5 3 1 Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DEAR File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm 96M E DAp APRIOS on 1 0Ah JAN OF Web Administration LIK300 Version iPECS VD96M E 0Ap APR 08 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 3 1 Board Data 3 51 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 130 Selecting H 323 VoIP Attributes returns the H 323 VoIP Attributes data input page Figure 3 5 3 1 1 Enter the Gateway Sequence number refer to section 3 5 1 3 and click Load to enter VoIP data F iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm IPECS V D96M E 0Ap APRIOS Boot Version 1 0Ah JAN O7 Enter Sequence Number Sequence Number 1 Atiribute H323 Setup Mode H323 Tunneling Mode H323 DTMF Path N TLELPRI Attributes P131 Diffs 4 Board Base Attribute RAS Usage OFF M
582. ttributes PGM Code 163 ccsccccccssssececsensececeenaececsenaeeecseaaeescsesaeeeseseueseesenaeeseees 2 65 2 3 6 4 Attendant Assignment PGM Code 164 cccccccccsccceneceeeeesnseeseneeecenetesaeseeneeeseeeersnnetee 2 66 2 3 6 5 Multi cast RTP RTCP Ports PGM Code 165 ccssccccsssssececeessececsssnececeeseeeeseeseneeseesnees 2 66 2 3 6 6 DISA COS PGM Cod 106 ci aariaa eria a Ei E nE a i r aa aiai 2 75 2 3 6 7 DID DISA Destination PGM Code 167 ccssccccsessscecsensececssnsececsenneeecsesueeecseneeeeseneeeess 2 75 2 3 6 8 External Control Contacts PGM Code 168 0 sssccccssssscecsessececsesseeeccsessesecseneeeesenteeeess 2 76 2 3 6 9 LCD Display Mode PGM Code 169 scccccsssscccseseececesnsececsennececssseeeeesseeseeeseseeneesesennees 2 77 2 3 6 10 Button LED Flash Rate PGM Code 170 ccccccsssssseccessececsessececseneeecssneeecsesueseesennneees 2 78 2 3 6 11 Music Sources PGM Code 171 ccccccccsssscecsessececsesececeenaececsenaeeecseqeeecseseeecsenueseesensnses 2 80 2 3 6 12 PBX Access Codes PGM Code 172 scccccssssccsesssceceensececeesececsesuetecesenetecsesunseesenieeeess 2 81 2 3 6 13 Ringing Line Preference Priority PGM Code 173 ccsssscccessssceceesseeecsenseeecessteseesenteeeess 2 81 2 3 6 14 RS 232 Port Settings PGM Code 174 sssesssseeessneeennneeennneerrnneeennneeernnneerenneernnneeeenneeeen nee 2 82 2 3 6 15 Serial Port Function Selections PGM Code 175 cccsssccccsssssecess
583. tween GK and VoIP channel seconds RAS Calling Number The numbering plan for Calling Number in RAS Setup Number 24 digits RAS Gateway ID The GateKeeper ID 128 Character RAS Light RRQ Usage The system can be assigned to use the simple RRQ 1 On OFF Registration Request message ON or the full RRQ 0 Off message OFF TCP Keep Alive The system will send a polling message every 75 1 On ON seconds to assure the status of the TCP connection 0 Off 3 53 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 131 Selecting T1 PRI Attributes returns the T1 PRI Attributes data input page Figure 3 5 3 2 1 Enter the Gateway Sequence number refer to section 3 5 1 3 and click Load to enter T1 PRI data iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DER File Edit Yiew Favorites Tools Help dress http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm Tk iPECSIVD96N E 0Ap APR 08 i Boot Version 1 0h JANIOT Enter Sequence Number Sequence Number 6 Attribute Value T1 setup Mode D4 v T1 line Mode Bazs PRI Line Mode TE vl PRIEI CRC Check ON El R2DSP Check OFF v DCO PX Type STANDARD Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 3 2 1 T1 PRI Attributes Each T1 PRI module can be assigned for various attributes of the interface The T1 interface framing and line coding can be selecte
584. ty gt option if the original caller is an extension Fixed Table Get ID from assigned SIP user ID Table ID Transit iduality gt option RG Get ID from i i z ml i i EXT or SYS ATD Get ID from call forward mobile or system attendant extension lt ID Individuality gt option ORG Get ID from original caller number if the original caller is an external calle Get ID from original caller lt ID Individuality gt option if the original caller is an extension Fixed Table Get ID from assigned SIP user ID Table z Fixed Table Get ID from assigned SIP user ID Table lt Mobile Extension Externel Call gt 3 59 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Case 1 Simple Extension Outgoing CO Call all Forward Case 3 Extension or Incoming CO Call is Forwarded to Offnet via Station Case 4 Extension or Incoming CO Call xtensior ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT External CODEC Priority 1st priority none none Configuration 2nd priority g 711 u 3rd_ priority g 711 a 4th priority g 723 1 5th Priority g 729 1 If speficy priority to a specific CODEC then it will g 729 a work for negotiation RTP data 2 If only 1st priority is specified and the others are none then it will work as single CODEC only does SIP Call Setup FailOver Call Setup No Response 0 0 10 sec 0 sec If there is no response received dur
585. ude E Stop D Don t Care MAX 15 Digits Include E Stop D Don t Care MAX 15 Digits Include E Stop D Don t Care MAX 15 Digits Include E Stop D Don t Care MAX 15 Digits Include E Stop D Don t Care Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Figure 3 5 8 6 1 Emergency Code Table The Emergency Code Table is used to identify emergency numbers which when dialed will override all COS dialing restrictions An Emergency Code number may be up to fifteen 15 digits in length 3 170 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 227 Selecting Authorization Code Table will display the Authorization Code Table data entry page Figure 3 5 8 7 1 Select the desired range Station or System choices above the table header iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DEAR File Edit view Favorites Tools Help Address http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm IPECSVD96M E DAp APRIOS Boot Version 1 0Ah JANIOT Station 100 149 150 199 200 249 250 299 300 349 350 399 System 001 050 051 100 101 150 151 200 201 250 251 300 301 350 351 400 401 450 451 500 501 550 551 600 601 650 651 700 Authorization Code cos 4 MAX 12 Digits Include DAY 1 MAX 12 Digits Include DAY 1 MAX 12 Digits Include DAY 1 MAX 12 Digits Include DAY 1 MAX 12 Digits
586. unctions and states can be assigned any one of the system s 15 signals The various functions and states are shown in Table 2 3 6 10 1 The 15 flash signals available in the system are shown in Table 2 3 6 10 2 LED FLASHING RATE PRESS FLEX_KEY 1 24 LED FLASHING RATE PRESS FLEX KEY 01 24 Refer to Table 2 3 6 10 1 amp 2 DISPLAY Table 2 3 6 10 1 BUTTON LED FLASH RATE PGM 170 Issue 5 0 Button ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT 1 COL IN RING CO button Incoming ring flashing rate 00 14 FLASH 30 IPM FLASH 30 IPM 2 2 COL XFER RING CO button transfer ring flashing rate 00 14 FLASH 120 IPM FLASH 120 IPM 10 3 COL QUE RING CO button queue call back ring flashing 00 14 FLASH 240 IPM FLASH 240 IPM FLUTTER rate FLUTTER 6 4 COL RCL RING CO button recall ring flashing rate 00 14 FLASH 480 IPM FLASH 480 IPM FLUTTER FLUTTER 7 5 COL I HOLD RING CO button hold flashing rate 00 14 FLASH 30 IPM FLASH 30 IPM WINK WINK 12 6 COL SYS HOLD RING CO button system hold flashing rate 00 14 FLASH 60 IPM FLASH 60 IPM 3 7 COL EXC HOLD RING CO button exclusive hold flashing rate 00 14 FLASH 120 IPM FLASH 120 IPM 10 8 COL OUT DISABLED CO button out going disabled flashing 00 14 FLASH 240 IPM FLASH 240 IPM FLUTTER rate FLUTTER 6 9 COL IN OFFNET CFW CO button incoming off net call forward
587. upervisor On Off Duty ACD Supervisor Login ACD Supervisor Logout ACD Help Code ACD Calls In Queue Display ACD Supervisor Status Display ACD Supervisor Monitor ACD Reroute Queued Call w answer ACD Reroute Queued Call w o answer Camp On Answer Call Parking Locations MFIM amp MFIM100 MFIME amp MFIM300 MFIM600 Group Pilot Number MFIM amp MFIM100 Other MFIMs Station User VSF Features MFIM amp MFIM100 Other MFIMs Call Coverage Ring Direct Call Pickup CO IP Group Access Individual CO IP Line Access Base Numbering Plan 1 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 565 566 567 568 569 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 600 601 610 601 619 601 699 620 659 620 667 66 66 67 8xx B 2 2 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 565 566 567 568 569 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 600 601 610 601 619 601 699 620 659 620 667 66 66 67 a 8xx 3 552 553 554 555 556 557 558 559 560 561 562 565 567 568 569 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 600 601 610 601 619 601 699 620 659 620 667 66 66 67 sili 8xx 552 553 554 40 66 67 8 559 560 561 562 565 1 568 569 571 572 573 574 575 576 577 578 579 600 601 610 601 619 601 699 620 659 620 667 69 69 67 42 4xx Issue 5 0 Rem
588. use 8337 120 M CAST RTP SLT MOH 1 RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH 1 use 0000 9999 8338 8338 8339 8339 121 M CAST RTP SLT MOH 2 RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH 2 use 0000 9999 8340 8340 8341 8341 122 M CAST RTP SLT MOH 3 RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH 3 use 0000 9999 8342 8342 8343 8343 123 M CAST RTP SLT MOH 4 RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH 4 use 0000 9999 8344 8344 8345 8345 124 M CAST RTP SLT MOH 5 RTP and RTCP ports for SLT MOH 5 use 0000 9999 8346 8346 8347 8347 125 M CAST RTP VSF MOH 2 RTP and RTCP ports for VSF VMIM MOH 0000 9999 8348 8348 8349 2 use 8349 126 M CAST RTP VSF MOH 3 RTP and RTCP ports for VSF VMIM MOH 0000 9999 8350 8350 8351 3 use 8351 2 74 im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 2 3 6 6 DISA COS PGM Code 166 A DISA user is subject to the dialing restrictions assigned in the DISA Class of Service COS The restrictions applied are the same as with the corresponding Station COS levels 1 11 and interact with the CO COS in the same manner Assignments for DISA COS are made for the Day Timed and Night mode of system operation The default for all three DISA COS modes is 1 no restrictions PROCEDURE DISA COS 1 11 1 Press the PGM button and dial 166 DAY 1 NIGHT 1 TIMED 1 Select the desired button Button 1 Day mode COS Button 2 Night mode COS Button 3 Timed mode COS Use the dial pad to enter desired DISA COS 1 11 Press th
589. using an adjunct VM the system can translate 0000 9999 Station the Mailbox number from the user s station number number to the assigned VMID The system sends the station number or VMID to the VM in band or SMDI in order to identify the appropriate Voice Mailbox Retrieve MSG Method Messages stored in the VSF may be retrieved in FIFO LIFO either a FIFO first in first out or LIFO last in first LIFO out order based on this entry Auto ACD DND If an Agent does not answer an ACD call in the ACD 0 None NONE No Answer timer the Agent enters an Unavailable 1 9 state with the Reason code entered here The reason code is sent in the ACD Event message Forward if OOS If a station is Out of Service and has previously 1 ON OFF forwarded calls the system will forward the calls if 0 OFF enabled here Back Light Usage The backlight of the LIP 7000 series phones is Always Off BUSY assigned to stay off light only when the station is Busy Only ONLY busy or light constantly Always On Emergency CO or Group This field defines the CO Line or Group employed by CO or CO Any CO the system to place Emergency Assistance calls Grp Station Account When ON the station user must enter an 0 OFF OFF authorization code to access CO Lines 1 ON UMS MSG SMTP Mail Server The VSF and VMIM include notification of new IP v4 Address messages to the user s voice mail This field defines address the user s e mail mail server for the notificatio
590. utes and Tables to match the ISDN circuit and services 3 153 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 200 Selecting ISDN Attributes will display the ISDN Attributes data entry page Figure 3 5 7 1 1 Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help S amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm iPECS A D96M E 0Ap APR 08 Boot Version 1 04h JAN OT Attribute CO ATD Code MAX 2 Digits CLI Print To Serial CLIP COLP Table P201 MSN Table P202 ICLID Route Table P203 ICLID Ring Assigmment P204 PPP Attnbutes P205 a a Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 7 1 1 ISDN Attributes ISDN attributes define several characteristics of the ISDN interface ISDN call cost services Advice of Charge CLI modification voice encoding and other characteristics of the interface are defined refer to Table 3 5 7 1 1 Table 3 5 7 1 1 ISDN LINE ATTRIBUTES ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT CO ATD Code When the system is set to send the station number Max 2 Digits with ISDN CLIP or COLP either the station number or this ATD code will be sent based on Station Attributes section 3 5 2 2 EXT or ATD assignment CLI Print To Serial The ISDN Calling Line Id may be included in call OFF OFF records refer to SMDR Attributes section 3 5 5 17 ON 3 154 im Cs
591. utgoing CLI Get ID from Station ISDN Outgoing CLI PGM114 PGM143 Authorized Representative ID Get ID from Authorized Representative ID Table Index of SIP User ID Table xxx This is utilized when 1 Single registration and authentication via From ID field and multiple Individual telephone number in P Asserted Identity or Remote Party ID field 2 This is determined by programming of Softswitch on SIP Service Provider side ie one representative ID is input in SIP User ID Table 01 with Registration ON ID Usage ON this is used when registration and From field of every call setup multiple ID are input in SIP User ID Table 02 to xx with Registration OFF ID Usage ON this is used for PAI or RPID field of every call setup al a DAN A aa Fa afa llai Taat Fata ii i fo jal 4 Contact ID lt ID Individuality gt Extension SIP User ID Table Get ID from Station SIP User ID Tbale Index PGM111 PGM126 Db th Om IT A aaFal Mafai laii 7a jon If ff ho ti Mafa DA or DIT afal aE ATA a i Extension Outgoing CLI Get ID from Station ISDN Outgoing CLI PGM114 PGM143 lt From Contact PAI RPID gt Utilization Option lt CO to Offnet Direct Call Route gt EXT or SYS ATD Get ID from call forward mobile or system attendant extension lt ID Individuality gt option O original caller number if the original caller is an external caller lt O Get ID from original caller lt ID Individuali
592. w Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm Initialize All Table Data Delete All Table Data LCR Control Attnbute P220 LCR LDT P221 Index 0 49 50 99 100 149 150 199 200 249 2 LOR DMT P222 500 49 550 599 600 649 650 699 700 749175 LCR Table Initialization P223 Toll Exception Table P224 Day Ring Mode Destination Night Ring Mode Destination Ti Emergency Code Table P226 Authorization Code Table P227 STA STA CCR Table P223 STA STA Executive Secretary P229 STA STA STA STA System Speed Zone P232 Auto Ring Mode Table P233 STA STA Voice Mail Dialing Table P234 STA STA STA STA sTa STA STA STA STA STA Copyright C 2006 by LC Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 8 10 1 Flexible DID Conversion Table When the received DID digits are converted the resulting three digit number may be used as an index to the Flexible DID Conversion Table The Flexible DID Table index is used when the DID Line is assigned a Conversion type 2 refer to the DID Service attributes section 3 5 4 3 Using the index from the digit conversion a destination for the DID call is determined
593. ways on 18 UMS Mail Server IP address 0 0 0 0 19 UMS Mail Address Web Admin 132 to modify PGM Code 114 Station Attributes IV 1 CLIP Display 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 2 COLP Display 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 3 Progress Indication 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 4 CLIR Service 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 5 COLR Service 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 6 CLI Station Number Max 12 digits Station 7 3 1 kHz Audio 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 8 CLI Name Display 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 9 CLI IP Redirect Display 1 Red 0 CLI CLI 10 CLI Message Wait 1 ON 0 OFF OFF 11 EXT OR ATD 1 ATD 0 EXT EXT 12 MSN Wait 1 ON 0 OFF OFF PGM Code 115 Flexible Buttons 01 24 Flexible Buttons Assignment 1 Empty Button 2 Station PGM Button 00 19 200 999 MFIM amp 100 000 099 2000 4999 Other MFIMs 3 Speed Dial xx Button 4 Numbering Plan Button Feature Numbering Plan Code 5 Network DSS Number Network number in PGM 324 6 MSN Number PGM Code 116 Station COS D 6 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button SUB MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 1 Station COS Day Ring 1 9 1 2 Station COS Night Ring 1 9 1 3 Station COS Timed Ring 1 9 1 PGM Code 117 CO Line IP Channel Group Access CO IP Group 1 MFIM amp 100 01 20 Other MFIMs 01 72 PGM Code 118 Internal Page Zone Access Internal Page Zone Access Group 01 MFIM amp 100 01 10 Other MFIMs 01 35 PGM Code 119 PTT Group Acce
594. wer calls at other stations OFF Call Cover Delay Ring When a covered station rings the CALL COVERAGE 0 9 0 button LED will flash at the covering station and the station will receive ring immediate or delayed 0 to 9 ring cycles E amp Mic Headset Select E amp Mic or Headset mode for New IP Phone 1 ON OFF 0 OFF 3 248 im CS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Mobile Extension CLI When the mobile Telephone number and CLI do not match the CLI entered here is used to authorize incoming calls from the mobile Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Authorization Code Authorization codes are employed to control access to N A the system resources and facilities Walking COS CO IP Group access DISA callers and certain Call Forward types may require the input of a valid Authorization code Codes up to 12 digits may be entered into the system database DID Call Wait When a busy station receives a DID call the call may ON ON queue to the station instead of receiving busy tone OFF With DID Call Wait the caller hears Ring back and the user sees the CO line button LED flash Choice Exec Sec When a call is forward to the Secretary of an 1 ON ON Message Executive Secretary pair messages can be left for the 0 OFF Executive ON or Secretary OFF Mobile Extension Tel Telephone number or CLI of the Mobile extension Not assigned number Mobile Extension Use The user may be allowed to activate the mobi
595. word 5 digits Announcement 00 70 Absent Supervisor Timer sec 000 255 NO Answer Timer Retry Count sec 000 255 OTe i e i CO Line ai tf wo e Transit out i a SN N A SS E vm a ooN Figure 3 8 10 3 3 260 Station Conference Group Jf System Conference Group im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Selecting Logout will terminate the Station Program session and return the Station Program entry page shown in section 3 2 3 iPECS Station Program Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Address 2 http 150 150 131 211 stn_index htm Station 100 Program LIK300 Version iPECS VD96M E 0Ap APR 08 Log Out Copyright C 2006 by LC Nortel Co Lid All Rights Reserved 2 http 150 150 131 211 stn_main_menu htm Figure 3 8 11 1 Station Logout 3 261 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 APPENDIX A DATABASE INDEX The Database index refer to Table A 1 is divided into groups of PROGRAMS based on specific characteristics associated with the data such as Numbering Plans Station oriented database entries or CO Line oriented values These groupings are identified as the Program Group in the Web access mode The individual PROGRAMS are identified in the Table with the ADMIN STATION PROGRAM CODE PGM Code and a corresponding Web sub menu and description
596. xible Numbering Plan CO IP Group Access Internal Page Zone Access Ptt Group Access Preset Call Forward Idle Line Selection System Attributes Preset FWD Timer System Password Linked Station Alarm Attributes Station ICM Group Attendant Assignment Station SIP Attibutes Multicast RTP RTCP Station Name Display Station Data Copy DID DISA Destination External Control Contacts LCD Display Mode H 323 Yo IP Attributes T1 E1 PRI Attributes Board Base Atbibutes LED Flashing Rate PBX Access Codes SIP G W Attributes Ringing Line Preference Priority RS 232 Port Settings Serial Port Selections COIP Attributes COIP Ring Assignment Esaki Hane Rate SMDR Attibutes DID Service Attibutes System Date amp Time DISA Service Attibutes System Multi L CO IP Preset Fwd Attibutes SS NA ISDN Line Attributes Sd tobe Loe J Web Access Authorization ISDN CO Line Attributes Hot Desk Attributes Ti CO Line Attributes System Speed Dial DCOB CO Line Attibutes Custom Messages Hot Desk Attributes System Speed Dial Custom Messages im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Station Group Data RSGM Data Tnet Data Initialization Station Group Overview Station Group Assignment Station Group Atbibutes ISDN Attributes CLIP COLP Table MSN Table ICLID Route Table ICLID Ring Assignment Table PPP Atbibutes Network Basic Attributes Network Supplementary Attibutes
597. y TNET FoPSTN Table Numbering Plan Station numbers D 27 i SCS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 TABLE D 14 ZONE DATA Web Only Device Gateway Zone Number Web Only Device Zone Attributes Web Only Access amp Page Rela D 28 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 TABLE D 15 DEVICE LOGIN DATA Button SUB MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK Web Only Remote Phone amp CO Gateway Registration MAC Address Mac Address Password 12 digits Zone 01 32 01 Nation Code Web Only Station User Login Registered Number Station number User ID Password 12 digits Zone 01 32 01 Desired Number Station Number Nation Code Language TABLE D 16 INITIALIZATION ITEM DESCRIPTION REMARKS PGM Code 450 Initialization 1 Flexible Numbering Plan St ation Data CO Line Data 2 3 4 System Data 5 Station Group Data ISDN Data Toll Table Data 6 7 System Timer Data 8 9 LCR Table Data 10 Tables 11 Flexible Button Data 12 Network 13 All Data 14 System Reset ITEM TABLE D 17 DATABASE DESCRIPTION PRINT OUT PGM Code 451 Database Print out Flexible Numbering Plan IP Setting Plan Station Data Enter station range CO Line Data Enter CO range System Data Station Group Data ISDN Data OND OJA OJIN System Timer Data D 29 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 ITEM DESCRIPTION 9 Toll Table Data 10
598. y zone 2 il 00 24 2 00 24 3 00 24 5 Set the Time Zone of Day zone 3 il 00 24 2 00 24 3 00 24 PGM Code 221 LCR LDT Table 1 LCR Type 1 3 3 1 Internal 2 CO Line 3 Both 2 Code leading digit Max 12 digits 3 Day Zone 1 DMT 6 digits Time Zone 1 3 2 digits each 4 Day Zone 2 DMT 6 digits Time Zone 1 3 2 digits each 5 Day Zone 3 DMT 6 digits Time Zone 1 3 2 digits each 6 Check Password 1 ON 0 OFF OFF LCR code authorization PGM Code 222 LCR DMT Table 1 Added Digit Max 25 digits 2 Removal Position 01 12 01 3 Number of Remove digits 01 12 00 D 22 im CsS Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Button SUB MENU RANGE DEFAULT REMARK 4 Add Position 01 13 01 5 CO Group 01 MFIM amp 100 01 20 Other 01 72 MFIMs 6 Alt Index 0 99 PGM Code 223 LCR Table Initialization 1 DMT Of Day zone 1 6 digits Time Zone 1 3 2 digits each 2 DMT Of Day zone 2 6 digits Time Zone 1 3 2 digits each 3 DMT Of Day zone 3 6 digits Time Zone 1 3 2 digits each 4 CO Group Init MFIM amp 100 01 20 Other 01 72 MFIMs 5 Alt Index Init 0 99 6 Init All LCR PGM Code 224 TOLL Table 1 Allow Table A 01 50 Max 20 digits 2 Deny Table A 01 50 Max 20 digits 3 Allow Table B 01 50 Max 20 digits 4 Deny Table B 01 50 Max 20 digits 5 Allow Table C 01 50 Max 20 digits 6 Deny Table C 01 50 Max 20 digits 7 Allow Table D 01 50 Max 20 digits 8 Deny Table D 01 50 Max 20 digits 9 Allow Table E 01 50 Max 20 digits 10 Deny Table E
599. ype Pick Up Group Pick up Attribute ON Station Group Overview Station Group Assignment P190 Copyright C 2006 by LC Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 6 3 5 Pick Up Group Attributes Table 3 5 6 3 5 PICK UP GROUP ATTRIBUTES ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Auto Pick Up If a group member is ringing another member of the ON OFF Group can Pick Up the ringing call by simply going OFF Off hook 3 146 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT All Ring When a call is offered to a member of the Pick Up ON OFF Group in the Tone Ring mode all members will ring OFF Note Auto Pickup above must be ON Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help S http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm T Bont Version DAA JANIDT Group Number Group Number is 622 Group Type VSF VM Group Pick up Attribute OFF Attribute Range Time Set day For future use only 001 365 Time Out sec For future use only 00 15 Station Group Overview Group Assignment P190 Copyright C 2006 by LC Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved C Internet Figure 3 5 6 3 6 VSF Group Attributes Table 3 5 6 3 6 VSF GROUP ATTRIBUTES ATTRIBUTE DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT Time Set day When voice messages are stored in the VSF t
600. ze PPP ID 1 12 Character Ipkts01 User ID 2 System accepts this PPP ID 2 12 Character likppp02 User Password 2 The password entered is used to authorize PPP ID 2 12 Character Ipkts02 3 159 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 ATTRIBUTE DISPLAY DESCRIPTION RANGE DEFAULT PPP IP Addr Operator can configure PPP IP Address with this IP Address option To apply this option system must be restarted PPP PtoP IP Addr Operator can configure PPP Point to Point IP Address IP Address with this option To apply this option system must be restarted Selecting the Tables Data program group returns the sub menu displayed in Figure 3 5 8 1 Z iPECS Web Services Microsoft Internet Explorer DAR File Edit view Favorites Tools Help Address amp http 150 150 131 211 a_index htm LCR Control Attribute P220 LCR LDT P221 LCR DMT P222 LCR Table Initialization P223 Toll Exception Table P224 Emergency Code Table P226 Web Administration Authorization Code Table P227 CCR Table P228 LIK300 Version iPECS VD96M E 0Ap APR 08 Executive Secretary P229 Flexible DID Conve System Speed Zone P232 Auto Ring Mode Table P233 Voice Mail Dialing Tak Registration Table P235 Copyright C 2006 by LG Nortel Co Ltd All Rights Reserved Internet Figure 3 5 8 1 Tables Data 3 160 im Cs Release 5 Admin amp Maintenance Issue 5 0 Re PGM CODE 220 Selecting LCR Control Attr

IPECS Release 5 Admin & Maintenance

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

IPECS Release 5 Admin &amp; Maintenance

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

IPECS Release 5 Admin & Maintenance